i 
 
 ■If 
 
 i 
 
LIBRIS^O 
 
 
 THE LIBRARY 
 
 OF 
 
 THE UNIVERSITY 
 
 OF CALIFORNIA 
 
 GIFT OF 
 
 Francina de Witte 
 
THE ULEMEJVTS OF THE DEVAWAGARI CHARACTEH 
 
 Xv^X^^ 
 
 
 6 ^^^ ^ t ^^ 
 
 i -i J ^ .5 ^> 7 
 
 ird^ 'jo =i-> Boo 
 
 Szr C. Wzl7d72s scrip f 
 
ELEMENTARY GRAMMAR 
 
 SANSCRIT LANGUAGE, 
 
 TARTLY IX THE ROMAN CHARACTER, 
 
 ARHANGKD ACCORDING TO A NEW THEORY, 
 
 IN REFERENCE ESPECIALLY TO THE CLASSICAL LANGUAGES; 
 
 2Siit5 sl)ott icxtracts in casii ^rosc. 
 
 TO WHICH IS ADDED, 
 
 A SELECTION FROM 
 
 THE INSTITUTES OF MANU, 
 
 WITH COPIOUS REFERENCES TO THE GRAMMAR, 
 AVn AK SNGXiXSB TR AIT SI. ATZOV. 
 
 BY MONIER WILLIAMS, M.A. 
 
 MEMBER OF THE ROYAI. ASIATIC SOCIETY, 
 
 )NE OK THE PKOFESSORS OF SANSCRIT IN THE EAST-INDIA COLLEGE, 
 
 LATE BODEN SANSCRIT SCHOLAK IN THE UNIVERSITY OF OXFOHD. 
 
 LONDON: 
 W^'. H. ALLEN & CO., 7, LP:ADENHALL STREET. 
 
 MDCCCXLVI. 
 
LONDON : 
 PUINTEl) BY WILLIAM WATTS, CROWN COURT, TEMPLE BAR. 
 
^: 
 
 PREFACE. 
 
 Sir William Jones has said of the Sutras of Panini that they 
 are " dark as the darkest oracle ;" and Colebrookk, in one of 
 his Essays, has given a list of about one hundred and forty 
 Indian grammarians and commentators who have followed in 
 the footsteps of the great Patriarch of Sanscrit Grammar, 
 and endeavoured to throw light upon the obscurity of his 
 aphorisms. In this endeavour they have succeeded rather 
 in shewing the depth of their own knowledge, than in making 
 the subject more accessible to the generality of European 
 students ; and the explanations which they offer are some- 
 times more unintelligible than the original itself. 
 
 Happily, however, a writer has arisen in our own country 
 competent to elucidate most thoroughly the difficulties of 
 this subject. Professor Wilson, the greatest Sanscrit scholar 
 of the present day, whose name the University of Oxford is 
 proud to associate with its own, in the excellent Grammar 
 which he has given to the ])ublic has added to his high repu- 
 tation by his graceful adaptaticn of the English language to 
 the exposition of the native system of grammatical teaching. 
 It may be said of all this author's numerous works, tliat, as 
 they abound in indications of surpassing genius, so they ofTer 
 to the student of Oriental Literature the most valuable in- 
 formation on every topic of inquiry. 
 
 But notwithstanding the advantages thus afforded for the 
 study of a language so interesting in its affinities, so rich in 
 its literature, and so important in its bearing upon our inter- 
 ests in the East, it is remarkable that the greater })art of the 
 
11 PREFACE. 
 
 English public are not merely indifferent to its acquisition, 
 but ignorant of its character, and even of its very name. It 
 must be confessed that this indifference on the part of the 
 generality to a language which recommends itself to their 
 attention by no considerations of immediate practical utility, 
 ought not to excite surprise. It is even, perhaps, too much 
 to expect that the study should flourish in the University of 
 Oxford. Its neglect in this ancient seat of learning only 
 points to a fact which has escaped the observation of those 
 would-be reformers of the present system of education at 
 Haileybury, who are not for wholly abolishing the study of 
 so important a language, but would leave its cultivation to 
 the will of the student : and this fact is, that to make any 
 course of study voluntary in a place of public education is 
 tantamount to its total abolition ; and that no temptation of 
 honour, or reward, or present or prospective benefit, and no 
 amount of facilities or opportunities, and no degree of intrin- 
 sic excellence or interest in the subject itself, will ever attract 
 any number of votaries to a study which is not made compul- 
 sory upon all. 
 
 But how does it come to pass, that in the East-India Col- 
 lege, where this study is still, with true wisdom, made incum- 
 bent upon every one ; where it is only reasonable to expect 
 that the classical languages of the Hindus should be culti- 
 vated with as much ardour as the classical languages of 
 Europe in the European Universities ; and where to educate 
 the minds of the future governors of India with any reference 
 to the duties they are to fulfil, or at least to imbue them 
 with any sympathy for the people they are to govern, is 
 surely to give them some knowledge of the language which 
 is the vehicle of that people's literature, the key to their 
 opinions, the repository of all that they hold sacred, and the 
 source of nearly all their spoken dialects ; — how does it come 
 to pass, that in this College the study of Sanscrit is not ^jro- 
 secuted with greater zest ? 
 
rKEKACK, 111 
 
 Many causes are assigned tor this indifference. It might, 
 indeed, be anticipated tliat ignorance and idleness would 
 league themselves in a common crusade against any course 
 of reading which entails a more than usual degree of mental 
 effort and perseverance. But ignorance and idleness would 
 not prevail, were it not in their power to make use of argu- 
 ments that have a considerable shew of reason. To those 
 w ho would excuse their indifference by alleging that a know- 
 ledge of this language is useless to the Civil servants of India, 
 no reply need be given. Such an argument is unworthy of 
 refutation, as proceeding from an utter ignorance of facts, and 
 a stupid contempt for the authority of those eminent scholars, 
 who have long since determined otherwise. To those who 
 do not deny its utility, but alTirm that many great men in 
 India have succeeded very well without it, there is but one 
 answer to return. No one disputes that such men have suc- 
 ceeded very well without a knowledge of this language, but 
 no one can tell how much better they might have succeeded, 
 or in how much less time they might have attained the same 
 position, or how^ much more consideration they might have 
 shewn for the feelings and prejudices of the natives in the 
 course of their career, had the study of Sanscrit formed a 
 part of their education. Our forefathers doubtless prospered 
 very well without a knowledge of Latin and Greek ; but now 
 that so many beneficial effects are found to result from an 
 acquaintance with these languages, and now that so many 
 facilities exist for their acquisition, no one would think of 
 making such an argument an excuse for the neglect of a 
 branch of education which, as civilization and learning ad- 
 vance, becomes every day more essential. 
 
 But there are some who rest their objection to the study of 
 Sanscrit on the ground of its difficulty. These adopt a very 
 specious line of argument, and one which, it must be con- 
 fessed, has every appearance of reason on its side. They 
 maintain that the grammar alone is of itself too intricate to 
 
PREFACE. 
 
 be mastered by men of ordinary abilities in their short 
 course of two years at Haileybury ; that too many other sub- 
 jects are forced upon their attention to admit of their gaining 
 any satisfactory insight into the literature of the language ; 
 that they pass their examinations by a mere forced effort of 
 memory ; and that the little they learn is as rapidly forgotten 
 as it was rapidly acquired, and only serves to disgust, without 
 leaving behind any solid or permanent advantage. 
 
 It is with the especial view of answering this latter class of 
 objectors that the following short work has been composed. 
 It was thought that any system of grammar, however excel- 
 lent in itself, founded upon the esoteric method of teaching 
 adopted by the Pandits of India, was certainly amenable to 
 these objections. An elementary work has, therefore, been 
 written, which rests its claim of adaptation to the wants of 
 beginners on its opposition to the Indian scheme of gram- 
 matical tuition. For it should be borne in mind that in India 
 we have presented to us the curious phenomenon of a litera- 
 ture elucidating grammar, rather than a grammar elucidating 
 literature. The better to understand this, it may here be 
 observed that the literature of the Hindus is referrible to 
 three distinct phases, the natural, the philological, and the 
 artificial. As the first and last of these are diametrically 
 opposed to each other, so it may be shewn that the cause of 
 this sudden transition from the one extreme to the other was 
 the intervention of a rage for philological inquiry. 
 
 Nothing can exceed the simplicity and beauty of the writ- 
 ings which fall under the early period of Hindu literature. 
 Witness some of the episodes of the two epic poems of the 
 Ramayana and Mahabharata ; witness some of the Puranas ; 
 witness the short specimens of the fables of the Hitopadesha 
 and of the Laws of Manu, given at the end of this volume. 
 The style in all of these is plain, unaffected, and in perfect 
 good taste ; and the amount of grammatical knowledge re- 
 quired for their perusal might have been compressed into 
 
rUKKACE. V 
 
 iiuu'h less space than the two hundred pages wliich I'ollow 
 tliese prefatory remarks. 
 
 Hut at some period or other not very far anterior to the 
 Christian era, a passion for philological disquisition seems 
 to have taken possession of the Hindu mind. The appear- 
 ance of the Paniniya Sutras created an appetite for abstract 
 speculation into the nature and capabilities of language, and 
 caused a total revulsion in the character of literary composi- 
 tion. Numerous grammarians arose, whose laboured trea- 
 tises were not intended to elucidate the national literature of 
 the age, but rather had in view the formation of a distinct 
 grammatical literature, existing solely for its own sake. 
 Then succeeded the era of artificial composition, when 
 poems were written, either with the avowed object of illus- 
 trating grammar, or with the ill-concealed motive of pom- 
 pously exhibiting the depth of the author's philological 
 research. 
 
 It cannot be wondered if, under these circumstances, when 
 all the subtlety of Indian intellect wasted itself upon a sub- 
 ject such as this, the science of grammar should have been 
 refined and elaborated to a degree wholly unknown in the 
 other languages of the world. 
 
 The highly artificial literature, therefore, of later times, 
 which resulted from such an elaboration, and was closely 
 interwoven with it, cannot certainly be cultivated by the ad- 
 vanced scholar without the aid of a grammar, moulded in strict 
 conformity with the native model. But, on the other hand, 
 it may be suspected that a treatise of this character will 
 always be unpalatable, and may even prove a stumbling- 
 block rather than an aid, to the common class of students, 
 who, with no extraordinary powers of mind, and with neither 
 the time nor the inclination for mere abstract research into 
 the capabilities of language, will certainly be content with 
 such an amount of grammatical knowledge as may enable them 
 to comprehend the earlier and purer specimens of Sanscrit 
 
VI TREFACE. 
 
 composition. Indeed, it would almost appear as if the Pan- 
 dits of the East had designed to shut out the knowledge of 
 their language from the minds of the uninitiated vulgar. 
 They require that the young student shall devote ten years 
 to the grammar alone, and they have certainly contrived to 
 provide him with ample occupation during this tedious pe- 
 riod of his novitiate. The arrangement adopted in the best 
 of their grammatical treatises would seem to have been made 
 with the express purpose of exaggerating difficulties. Doubt- 
 less there are many real difficulties, but there are also many 
 obvious parts of the subject the simplicity of which has been 
 carefully concealed behind a tissue of mysticism. A com- 
 plicated machinery of technical schemes and symbolical letters 
 is constructed, which may be well calculated to aid the me- 
 mory of the initiated natives themselves, or those who have 
 become familiar with the native system by a long course of 
 reading in the country, but only serves to bewilder the Eu- 
 ropean tyro. The young English student has enough to do 
 in conquering the difficulties of a strange character, and mas- 
 tering the rules of combination, without puzzling himself in 
 a labyrinth of servile, substituted, and rejected letters, and 
 perplexing himself in his effi^rts to gain, by this indirect pro- 
 cess, knowledge which is attainable more easily by the usual 
 direct means. 
 
 It is enough to say of the present volume that it is the 
 first really elementary Sanscrit Grammar ever published. Its 
 defects will, therefore, it is hoped, not be too critically judged 
 by those who propose to themselves a higher aim than the 
 mere assistance of beginners. To administer to the wants of 
 the earliest students has been the one object kept steadily in 
 view ; and subordinately an attempt has been made to ex- 
 hibit the peculiarities which distinguish the study of this lan- 
 guage from that of Latin and Greek. The plan adopted will 
 sufficiently explain itself. It has been deemed desirable not 
 to embarrass the student with too much at once. Types of 
 
TRKKACK. Vll 
 
 two different sizes have therefore been employed ; the larger 
 attracts his eye to that which is of first importance : the 
 smaller generally contains such matter as possesses no press- 
 ing claim to his immediate consideration. The Roman clia- 
 racter has been applied to the expression of the Devaniigarl 
 throughout the greater part of the Grammar, especiciily in 
 treating of the rules which regulate the combination and 
 ])ermutation of vowels and consonants. There can be no 
 doubt that the false opinion which prevails of the difTiculty 
 of Sanscrit may be traced to the labour imposed of thoroughly 
 mastering these rules at the first entrance upon the study of 
 the language. They form, as it were, a mountain of difficulty 
 to be passed at the very commencement of the journey, and 
 the learner cannot be convinced that, when once surmounted, 
 the ground beyond may be more smooth than in other lan- 
 guages, the ingress to which is comparatively easy. 
 
 To simplify, as much as possible, this division of the sub- 
 ject has been the main object ; and as an accurate acquaint- 
 ance with the Devanagari letters is not here indispensable, 
 they have not been introduced, except in cases where any 
 doubt is likely to arise in the learner's mind. As he ad- 
 vances, he will find a more sparing use of the Roman cha- 
 racter, and towards the end of the volume it has been 
 entirely abandoned. For let it not be supposed that, by the 
 mixed method of printing here adopted, any loose or inaccu- 
 rate knowledge of the Sanscrit character is tacitly encouraged. 
 Such inaccuracy is a too common obstacle to ihe sound 
 acquisition of this language. The student satisfies himself 
 at first with an imperfect knowledge of the Devanagari 
 alphabet, and, having never conquered this difficulty at the 
 outset, is ever after hampered by its perpetual recurrence. 
 
 The tabular views which have been given throughout this 
 work, especially in the chapter on Verbs, will, it is hoped, 
 conduce to the ready comprehension of the more complex 
 parts of the subject. They contain some novelties, which 
 
viii PREFACE. 
 
 might require an apology, had they not been suggested by a 
 strong belief in the falsity of the native method of proposing, 
 as the general scheme, a system of terminations which applies 
 rather to the exceptions, and then, by a needless process of 
 derivation and substitution, forcing it into universal appli- 
 cation. 
 
 In the chapter on Syntax, the laws which determine 
 the coalition of vowels have not been observed, as being out 
 of place in a portion of the subject which aims only at the 
 clear exhibition of inflectioiial cl.anges. 
 
 The Selections which have been appended to the gram- 
 matical part of this book offer the greatest facilities to the 
 early student in his first effort at translation. Those in prose 
 are of the simplest character, and every word is explained 
 either by notes or by references to the preceding pages of 
 the grammar. Those in verse contain some few difficulties, 
 but the style is plain, and an English translation has been 
 subjoined, which may aid the text, as well as tend to shew- 
 that the matter contained in Sanscrit literature may not be 
 so unprofitable as some have ignorantly assumed. The sepa- 
 ration of each word from the next, and the use of a mark to 
 indicate the division when the blending of vowels makes 
 such separation impossible, will offend the eye of the ad- 
 vanced Oriental scholar ; but the beginner can scarcely be 
 expected to know which is the final or which the initial letter 
 of a word which he never saw before. VVhy, therefore, 
 refuse to give the only clue which is to guide him in his 
 search for the word in the Dictionary ; and why, by uniting 
 those parts of the sentence which admit of separation, super- 
 add this unnecessary source of perplexity to the necessary 
 difficulty, unknown in other languages, resulting from the 
 blending of vowels and the composition of words? The 
 natives of the East ought, in this particular, to conform to a 
 custom which the art of printing has made universally preva- 
 lent amongst civihzed nations, if, at least, they desire their 
 
FHEFACE. IX 
 
 languages to be generally cultivated by the people of Europe. 
 Nor does there seem any reason in the theory which would 
 make such a conformity incompatible with the laws of 
 euphony. 
 
 It only remains to add, that in a work, small and unpre- 
 tending though it be, in which so many minute points and 
 marks have been employed to represent the Sanscrit character 
 by the Roman, the correction of the press has been a task 
 of no small labour. In this labour Professor Johnson, an 
 Oriental scholar of whose varied attainments the East-India 
 College has reason to be proud, has cheerfully co-operated, 
 and in other matters also has freely given the benefit of his 
 valuable advice and great experience. But whilst to him 
 much of the merit is due that may belong to this book on 
 the score of accuracy, it must be distinctly understood that 
 he is entirely free from the responsibility of its novel struc- 
 ture and arrangement. It is also fair to state that some of 
 the detail of the following pages has been suggested by a 
 careful perusal of Professor Bopp's Sanscrit Grammar, printed 
 at Berlin. 
 
 East-I.\dia College, 
 JnJij 1840. 
 
CONTENTS. 
 
 i'A(ii: 
 
 Chap. I. — Letters - 1 
 
 Pronunciation -- 4 
 
 Chap. II. — Combination and Permutation of Letter>< - - (} 
 
 Sect. I. Combination of Vowels - - - - . . 7 
 Sect. II. Combination of Consonants - - - -10 
 
 Chap. III. — Sanscrit Roots, and the Crude Form of Nouns - - 18 
 Formation of the Crude by Affixes to Roots and Nouns - 21 
 
 Chap. IV. — Declension of Crude Nouns, Substantive and Adjective, 28 
 Sect. I. Declension of Crudes ending in Vowels - - - 29 
 Sect. II. Declension of Crudes ending in Consonant^ - - 38 
 Sect. III. Adjectives. Degrees of Comparison - . . 46 
 Sect. IV. Numeial Adjectives - . - . - _ 47 
 
 Chap, V. — Pronouns - - - - - - - - - 50 
 
 Chap. VI. — Verbs. General Observations - - - . 55 
 Formation of the Base in the Conjugational Tenses : 
 
 Of Regular Primitive Verbs, 1st, 4th, and 6th Conjugations, 63 
 Of Irregular Primitive A'erbs, 2d, 3d, 5tli, 7lh, 8th, and 
 9th Conjugations - - - - . . - 66 
 
 Formation of the Base in the Non-conjugational Tenses of 
 Regular and Irregular Primitive Verbs of all nine Con- 
 jugations --------.73 
 
 Formation of the Base of Causal Verbs, lOtli Conjugation - 86 
 Formation of the Base of Passive Verbs - - - - 89 
 
 Inflection of the Base of Regular and Irregular Primitives - 93 
 Inflection of the Base of Causals - . . . - 98 
 
 Inflection of the Base of Passives - - - - - - 99 
 
 Auxiliai'v Vei-bs conjugated at full - - . . . 101 
 Examples of Pi-imitive, Causal, and Passive Verbs coiijngafcd 
 
 at full - - - - 104 
 
 Fonnatioii of Desiderative Verbs - . . . . 129 
 
 Formation of Intensive or Frequeiifalive Verbs - - . 131 
 Formation of Nominal Verbs --.... ]33 
 
CONTENTS. 
 
 Chap. VII.— Participles - ' - - - - - - - 135 
 
 Participial Nouns of Agency ..---- 148 
 
 Chap, VIII. — Indeclinable words. Adverbs - - - - 150 
 Prepositions in government with Nouns - . - - 155 
 
 Chap. IX. — Compound Words .-----. 157 
 Sect. I. Simply Compounded Nouns ----- 159 
 Complexly Compounded Nouns - - - - - 170 
 Sect. II. Compound Verbs formed with Prepositions and 
 
 Adverbs .-..--.- - 173 
 Sect. III. Compound Adverbs - - - - - - 177 
 
 Chap. X.— Syntax - - 178 
 
 Exercises in Translation and Parsing - - - - - 206 
 
 Selections in Prose and Verse --...- <^ 
 
 Story of Vedagarbha and his Pupils - - - . - ^ 
 Selections from the Institutes of Manu - - - - ''^ 
 
 Eno^lish Translation of the Selections from Manu - . . 35 
 
SANSCRIT GRAMMAR. 
 
VOWELS. 
 
 C^n \i ^ u "^n ^ In IT e ^ 
 
 Initial < _ ^ _ __ _ _ _ "^ •'^ 
 
 t ^TT « ?,^ ^^< "^P '^{''^ Vi"^ WJ 
 
 ( \i u ri In e j o 
 
 ) ^ c- '^ ' ^ j^ 
 
 ) 1 ci J ? u rl In ai f au 
 
 Not initial 
 
 SIMPLE CONSONANTS. 
 Gutturals, cR A; '^ kh T{ g ^ gh ^T n- ^ h 
 
 Palatals, ^ ch ^ chh If j ^j/i "^f it IJT ^/< If y 
 
 Cerebrals, ^ ( ^ ^/f ^ d Ig c^A "^ n ^ sh \ r 
 
 Dentals, (f t '^ th ^d \f dh x{ n ^s ^ / 
 
 Labials, JJ^ p T^ph '^ b '^bh T{ m cf «? 
 
 THE MOST COMMON OF THE COMPOUND CONSONANTS. 
 ^ ksh, g dy, '^ ir, p^ tw, '^ tt, ^ nn, ^ dd, ^ A:A i^ M", 
 ^ A/i, "^ A//y, ^>, ^ z-y, ^ 5j/, "^ shy, >lf 6A3/, 'Sf </%, 
 XZf i»y, "^ ^ry, r€f ty. ^ wy, "^[Jf *%, "^ Miy, ^ c%, ^ ly, 
 •^ A:*.^^, Tlf ^(//<, 3q" bdh, % ddh, ^ dbh, "f <//y, yj r/^, ^ (/^r, 
 
 "R z'^' ^ P"'^ IT /"*' ^ *'^^' ^ *^'^^*' ""^ ^''*^' ^ *^''*' ^ ^^' 
 
 ^ ^''' "SR '^■'■' ^ ^^' ^ chhr, ^ r^, I^^ nw?;?, ^ rev, 7S( ryy, '^ nk, 
 ^ w^A, "^ ??'^, "^ dg, ^ «cA, >^ nchh, "^ wy, ^q^ //(, ^ nth, 
 ^ /<(/, cff nU fvf ^w» XRf »J/. ^ nu, "^ s//Y, "^ shth, "g s/</r, 
 "^ sA/w, "^ sA(y, "^ s/<(%, "^If sAw, 1^ s)v, "^ St, ^ str, ^^ av//, 
 'l^ sA;, ^5f sth, "?^ «w, r(^ ntiv, «^ ?;^y, ^5f w/j/, r^Ef w^yy, 
 ^ c/ic^ ^'^ckchh, '^jj, ^ tth, "^ ttw, ^ hy, ^ hm, '^hij, 
 F Aw, F Ay, '^t?//^ fj X:w7, ^ A-Z, T^ gi, '^ ^Xr, "5^^, "^ dbhy, 
 ^ r^%, 'Ufgry, 52f c/A?2\ ^ 6y, ^J 66A, |f dhn, w^ ndh, "^(Jf kshn, 
 ^ kshm, -^ ktr, ^ kiy.^ ^ >^A■y, ^ tsij, r«f />>'y- U ^/wy, 
 3[ ^^^y- ip? {'T^'/^ W f'''/'//. ^ %- ij ^fl('/.- "^ hi, -^ .^A-A. 
 
SANSCRIT GKAMMAR. 
 
 CHAPTER L 
 
 LETTERS. 
 
 XHE Sanscrit language is written in the character called Deva- 
 niigarl. The following are the Devanagari letters, with their 
 equivalents in the Roman character. 
 
 VOWELS, DIPHTHONGS, AND SEMI-VOWELS. 
 
 SHORT 
 VOWELS. 
 
 
 Wr T a 
 "3! _ « 
 
 [MPROPER DIPHTHONGS 
 CALLED GUNA. 
 
 
 PROPER DIPHTHONGS 
 CALLED VRIDDUI. 
 
 T? en 
 
 ^ "t au 
 'SIR tir 
 
 SEMI- 
 VOWELS. 
 
 '^ V or fv 
 ^ r 
 
 CONSONANTS. 
 
 
 HARD 
 CONSONANTS. 
 
 CORRESPOND- 
 ING SOFT. 
 
 CORRE- 
 SPONDING 
 NASALS. 
 
 CORRE- 
 SPONDING 
 SIBILANTS. 
 
 ASPIRATE AND 
 SEMI-VOWELS. 
 
 Initial Final 
 
 or called 
 
 Medial. Visargah. 
 
 NASAL SYM- 
 BOL CAI LED 
 ANUSWARA. 
 
 Gutturals, 
 
 ^ A- ^ kh 
 
 ^g 
 
 -^gh 
 
 T n- 
 
 
 f h : h 
 
 * « or m 
 
 Palatals, |^c/i -^chh 
 
 ^J 
 
 "^jh 
 
 ^ n 
 
 ^ sh 
 
 ^// 
 
 
 Cerebrals, z t z th 
 
 ^d 
 
 ^ dh 
 
 m n 
 
 ^ sh 
 
 x: r 
 
 
 Dentals, k t "Zl th 
 
 ^d 
 
 V dh 
 
 ^ n 
 
 '^ a 
 
 ^i 
 
 
 Labials, xj j^ i^ph 
 
 ^b 
 
 M bh 
 
 ^ m. 
 
 
 "^VOVJV 
 
 
2 LETTERS. 
 
 Observe that ar and ar are not distinct letters, but have been 
 inserted amongst the diphthongs for reasons that vrill be after- 
 wards apparent. That the semi-vowels have been placed in both 
 Tables, as falling under the first, in their relation to i, u, ri, Iri ; 
 under the second, in their relation to j, d, d, b. That h at the end 
 of a word stands for Visargah (:). That when n is found before 
 the semi-vowels y, v, r, I, the sibilants sh, sh, s, and the aspirate //. 
 in the middle of a word, it represents the symbol Anuswara ; 
 and that m at the end of a word always represents the same 
 symbol. That the vowels '^ and ^ will be represented by ri 
 and n, as distinguished from ft. ri and ^ rl, which represent the 
 consonant r combined with the vowels i and 1. Lastly, that 
 the palatal sibilant ^ will be represented by sh, as distinguished 
 from sh, which represents the cerebral sibilant "q. 
 
 ON THE METHOD OF WRITING THE VOWELS. 
 
 The vowels assume two forms, according as they are initial or 
 not initial. Thus, ik is written ^, but ki is written f^; short 
 i, when not initial, being always written before the consonant 
 after which it is pronounced. Short a is never written, unless it 
 begin a word, because it is supposed to be inherent in every 
 consonant. Thus, ak is written w^ , but ka is written oR ; the 
 mark under the final k being used to shew that it has no a 
 inherent in it. The vowels u, u, and ri, ri, not initial, are written 
 under the consonants after which they are pronounced ; as ^, '^, 
 ku, ku ; ^, oii, kri, kn. 
 
 J Tlie Sanscrit is said to possess another vowel, viz. "^ Iri, which has not been 
 given, as it only occurs in one word in the language. The only use of introducing 
 it in a Table like the above, is to shew the perfection of the Devanagari alphabet ; 
 for without it, we have no corresponding vowels or diphthongs to the semi- vowel 
 qJ /; but, with it, the last line of the Table may be filled up thus, 
 
 SHORT. LONG. GUNA. VRIPDHI. SEMI-VOWEL. 
 
 •^ hi I "^ In I ^T^ al \ ^TTc5 al \ ^ I 
 
 * When, however, u follows x it is written thus, ^ ru ; and when u follows X, , 
 thus, T^ m. 
 
LETTERS. 3 
 
 ON line COJMI'OUND CONSONANTS. 
 
 Every consonant is supposed to have short a inherent in it, so 
 that it is never necessary to write short a exc(?pt at the be<^inning 
 of a word. Hence, when any of the above simple consonants 
 are seen standing alone in any word, short a must always be 
 pronounced after them ; but when they arc written in conjunction 
 with any other vowel, this vowel of course takes the place of 
 sliort a. Thus, such a word as eiiQ&Hrim would be pronounced 
 kalanatayu. The question then arises, how are we to know when 
 consonants have to be pronounced together, without the inter- 
 vention of any vowel ; as, for instance, kl and ntij in the word 
 klUntya ? This occasions the necessity for compound consonants : 
 kl and nfy must then be combined together thus, "pi, ng, and the 
 word is written ^(•Hli. And here we have illustrated the two 
 methods of compounding consonants, viz. 1st, by writing them one 
 above the other ; 2dly, by placing them side by side, omitting in 
 all, except the last, the perpendicular line which lies to the right. 
 
 Almost all compound letters are in this way resolvable into 
 their component parts. There are two, however, which are not 
 so, viz. -E^ ksha and ■^Jna. The last is commonly pronounced gya, 
 and may therefore be represented by these letters. The following 
 compound letters, being of very frequent occurrence, and not 
 always obviously resolvable into their parts, are given with a 
 view to attract the Jirst attention of the student. He may after- 
 wards study the list in Prof. Wilson's Grammar. 
 
 ^ kto, as in the word T35 nktani ; ^ rma, as in the word |R^ 
 kurma. And here remark, that when ^ r is the frst letter of a 
 compound consonant, it is written above in the form of a semi- 
 circle ; when it is the last letter, it is written below in the form 
 of a small stroke, as ja kra in the word ^(Q kramena. Again, 
 ^ shcha, as in FfHS tatashcha. Here remark, that ^^r sometimes 
 changes its form to v^, when combined with another consonant. 
 ^ tra, as in rHT tatra ; ^ chcha, as in '^rara" anyachcka ; "2 shia, as 
 in a^ krialita ; g" dya, as in ^T?r adya ; ^ dd/ia, as in ^fir budrlhi; 
 wi hhya, as in ^w^; tebhyah ; ^ tta, as in ^i^rlHi: suhrittauiuh ; ^ vya, 
 as in ^ir^ vyad/ta ; "S diva, as in ITR dwiira ; "m -V/a, as in iTW 
 tanya ; "^ sta ; T^ mya ; g dbJia ; "^ khya ; "^ nka ; ^ tvga ; 
 ^ iicha ; JR nda ; nT uta. 
 
4 LETTER.S. 
 
 PRONUNCIATION OF THE VOWELS. 
 
 The following English words, written in the Sanscrit character, 
 will furnish the best clue to the pronunciation of the vowels. 
 
 A as in ^v^, "Roman"; a as in ^rer, "last"; % and I as in 
 the first and last syllables of ^^^^, "invalid"; u as in "^^j 
 " push "; u as in ^, " rude "; ri as in ^^w, " rill "; fi as in ^ipr , 
 "chagrin"; e as in ^, "ere"; o as in ^, "so"; ai as in ^^ , 
 " aisle "; au as ou in WT. , " our "; ar and ar as in the words " in- 
 ward," " regard." 
 
 Since short a is inherent in every consonant, the student 
 should be careful to acquire the correct pronunciation of this 
 letter. There are a few words in English which will afford ex- 
 amples of its sound, such as Boman, temperance, husbandman, 
 tolerable. But in English this sound is often represented by u, 
 as in fim, sun ; or by o, as in done, son ; or even by the other 
 vowels ; as by e in her, vernal ; by i in bird, sir. The per- 
 fection of the Devanagari alphabet, as compared with the Roman, 
 is at once apparent. Every vowel in Sanscrit has one invariable 
 sound, and the beginner can never be in doubt what pronuncia- 
 tion to give it, as in English, or whether to pronounce it long 
 or short, as in Latin. 
 
 PRONUNCIATION OF THE CONSONANTS. 
 
 The consonants are in general pronounced as in English. But 
 g is always pronounced hard, as in give : th is not pronounced as 
 in English, but is only t aspirated, and, when rapidly enunciated, 
 hardly distinguishable from /. The same remark applies to the 
 other aspirated letters. The true sound of th is exemplified by 
 the word anthill; so also ph, by uphill, which might be written 
 ■jfiH^ . The cerebral class of consonants only differs from the 
 dental in being pronounced with a duller and deeper sound. Each 
 class of consonants has its ow^n nasal ; thus the sound ink would 
 be written in Sanscrit 3[^; the sound inch, ^=f ; the word under 
 ^l{^\ ; the dental n would be written in the word country, pro- 
 nounced as in Ireland ; the sound imp would be written ^j^ . So, 
 also, three of the classes have sibilants peculiar to them. Thus 
 the final sibilant of the word TnnT tatas, when combined with the 
 word 'q cha, must be written ffrnj tatashcha ; when combined with 
 
LETTERS. 5 
 
 Zt^ f/ka, must be written ririi/l<*| (atashr/ka ; when combiiictl 
 with -k tain, must be retjiiued cTireT tatastam. So also each of the 
 letters, //, y, r, I, v, is plainly referrible to its particular class. 
 The ^ h is pronounced from the throat, and therefore allied to 
 tlie i^uttural class. Tlie ^ y belongs to the i)alatal class, and in 
 Bengali is always corrupted into / The ^ is allied to the cerebral 
 letters T and ^, and in Bengali these letters are often hardly 
 distinguishable from r in sound. The ^ I is evidently a dental. 
 The ^, although partly dental, belongs to the labial class ; and is 
 so allied to ^ b, that, in Bengali, it is always pronounced like b, 
 and, in Sanscrit, is often interchanged with it.* 
 
 t It may here be remarked, that although the column of nasals in the Table of 
 Consonants (p. 1 ) has reference to the sibilants, aspirate, and semi-vowels, as well 
 as to the other consonants; yet tlie mark Anuswara (*) is the proper nasal of these 
 letters, and must always take the place of any other nasal that may be combined 
 with them in the same word. Thus the preposition TH?? and the ])articiple WfT> 
 when united in one word, are written ^f^TT; ^HH and '^K., fl^R; W{ and xpj, 
 ^TPT Y and so on. But in every one of these cases the AnuswiTra takes the sound 
 of the nasal of the class to which the following letter belongs. Thus ^WiT is 
 sounded as if written ^p^ ^rT; ^^R as if ^vritten ^ ^tr; ^TqSHT as if ^vTitten 
 ^T^ '^T^^ For the sake of brevity, however, the Anuswara is, in many books, 
 written as the representative of the nasal of any letter, and not merely of the 
 aspirate, semi-vowels, and sibilants. 
 
 * In Sanscrit, however, the letter ^ is always pronounced either like v or w ; 
 like V when it stands by itself, or as the first member of a compound consonant, 
 as in '^ ro, cinv vyddha ; like w, when it forms the last member of a compound 
 consonant, as in "gjl^'lu-dra. 
 
 t ^T^TiTj "an universal monarch," and '^^cd, "properly," are the only 
 words wliich violate tlxis rule. 
 
CHAPTER 11. 
 
 Sect. I.— COMBINATION and PERMUTATION OF LETTERS. 
 
 We are accustomed in Greek and Latin to certain euphonic 
 changes of letters. Thus in, combined with rogo, becomes irrogo ; 
 rego makes, in the perfect, not regsi but reksi, contracted into rezi ; 
 veho becomes veksi orvexi; aw with yv(j>iJ.r] becomes crvyyvidixt] ; ev 
 with Aa^TTO), eWafjLTroi. These laws for the combination of letters 
 are applied very extensively throughout the Sanscrit language ; 
 and that, too, not only in combining two parts of one word, but 
 in combining all the words in the same sentence. Thus the 
 sentence " Bara avis in ferris "" would require, by the laws of 
 combination (called, in Sanscrit, Sandhi) to be written thus, 
 Baravir ins terrih ; and would, moreover, be written without 
 separating the words, Baramrinsterrih. The learner must not 
 be discouraged if he is not able thoroughly to understand all the 
 numerous laws of combination at first. He is recommended, after 
 reading them over with attention, to pass at once to the declension 
 of nouns and conjugation of verbs : for to oblige him to learn by 
 heart a number of rules, the use of wliich is not fully seen till he 
 comes to read and construct sentences, must only lead to a waste 
 of time and labour. 
 
 CHANGES OF VOWELS. 
 
 1. Nevertheless, there are some changes of letters which come 
 into immediate application in the formation and declension of 
 nouns, and the conjugation of verbs ; and amongst these, the 
 changes of vowels called Guna and Vriddiii should be impressed 
 on the memory of the student, before he takes a single step in 
 the study of the Grammar. When the vowels i and t are changed 
 to e, this is called the Guna change, or a change in quality ; when 
 i and I are changed to ai, this is called the Vriddhi change, or an 
 increase. Similarly, u and u are often changed to their Guna o, 
 and Vriddhi au ; ri and ri to their Guna ar, and Vriddhi nr : and 
 
COMHINATION AND rERMl]TATU)N OF LETTERS. 7 
 
 (t, though it have' no corrosponding Guna change, has a Vrichlhi 
 substitute in a. 
 
 2. Let the Student, therefore, never forget the following rule, 
 or he will be confused at every step. There is no Guua sub- 
 stitute for a, but a is the Vriddhi substitute for a ; e is the Guna, 
 and ai the Vriddhi substitute for i and i ; o is the Guna, and aii 
 tlie Vriddhi substitute for u and U ; or is the Guna, and Ur the 
 Vriddhi substitute for ri and rl. 
 
 Again, let him never forget that y is the semi-vowel of i and I; 
 V is the semi-vowel of u and u ; r is the semi-vowel of ri and rl. 
 
 3. Lastly let him bear in mind that the Guna dipthong e is 
 supposed to be made up of « and i, and the Guna o, of a and u ;* 
 so that a and / may often coalesce into e, and a and u into o. 
 
 He will now understand the reason for the arrangement of 
 vowels and semi-vowels given in the first Table. This Table is 
 here repeated in the Roman character. 
 
 SHORT. 
 
 LONG. 
 
 GrNA. 
 
 VRIDDHI. 
 
 SEMI-VOWELS. 
 
 a 
 
 a 
 
 
 a 
 
 
 i 
 
 I 
 
 e 
 
 ai 
 
 y 
 
 u 
 
 u 
 
 
 
 au 
 
 V 
 
 ri 
 
 rl 
 
 ar 
 
 ur 
 
 r 
 
 RULES FOR THE COMBINATION OF VOWELS. 
 
 4. If a word end with a or U, when the next begins with a or 
 a, the two vowels are contracted into one long similar vowel. 
 Thus na asti become nasti. 
 
 A similar rule applies to the other vowels i, «, ri, short or 
 long. Thus, adhi ishrvara, adhlshwara ; kintic upayn, kintupaya ; 
 pitri riddhih (ftl^ '^f^:), pitfiddhih (fqrifid*.)- 
 
 5. If a word end with a or «, when the next begins with /, n, 
 ri, short or long, then a and i coalesce into e; a and u into o ; 
 
 * In the same way the Vriddhi diplitliong ai is supposed to be made up of a or a 
 and e, and tb.e Vriddhi au of « or a and o. 
 
 9f 
 
 
8 COMBINATION AND PERMUTATION OF LETTERS. 
 
 a and ri into ar. Thus, parama ?shivara become parameshwara ; 
 hita upadesha, hitopadesha ; ganga udakam, gangodakam ; tava 
 riddhih (tt^ "^i^:). tavarddhih ((Rff :). 
 
 6. If a word end with o or a, when the next begins with the 
 Guna letters e, o, or the Vriddhi ai, au, then a or a with e or ai, 
 coalesce into the Vriddhi ai ; a or a with o or au, into au : as, 
 deva aishwaryam become devaishmaryam ; vidya eva become vidyai- 
 va ; alpa ojas, alpaiijas ; tatha aushadham, tathaushadham. 
 
 7. If a word end with /, u, ri, short or long, when the next 
 begins with any other dissimilar vowel, i and 1, are changed to the 
 corresponding semi-vowel y ; u or u to v ; ri or rt to r : as, jjvati 
 umcha l^ecome j)ratyiimcha ; in idarum, ttvidanlm ; matri ananda 
 (iTTT ^JHtO become matrananda (hNH<). 
 
 8. If a word end with the diphthongs ai or au, when the next 
 begins with any vowel, ai is changed to ay, and au to av. Thus, 
 tasmai uktah becomes tasmayuktah ; dadau annam, dadavannam. 
 
 9. If a word end in e or o, when the next begins with a short, 
 then e and o remain unchanged, and the initial a is cut oflF. 
 Thus, te api are written te 'pi (^^fr) ; so api are written so ""pi (^^fxr). 
 
 10. If a word end in e, when the next begins with any other 
 vowel except a short, then e is supposed to be first changed to ay ; 
 but the y is usually dropped, leaving the a uninfluenced by the 
 following vowel. Thus, te agatak becomes ta agatah, (w ^mn:). 
 
 T It so happens that o, as the final of a complete word, is never likely to come 
 in coalition with any initial vowel but short o. But in the case of e or o, as the 
 finals of roots or cnide forms, when the termination to be annexed begins with 
 any vowel, whether o, a, i, or any other, then e is changed to ay, and o to av. 
 Thus, je ati become jayati, bho ati become hhavati. 
 
 The followinor Table exhibits all the combinations of vowels at 
 one view. Supposing a word to end in u, and the next word to 
 begin with au, the student must carry his eye down the first 
 column (headed " final vowels "") till he comes to u, and then along 
 the top horizontal line of " initial vowels," till he comes to au. At 
 the junction of the perpendicular column under au and the hori- 
 zontal line beginning u, will be the required combination, viz. v au. 
 
COMIHNATION OT VOWELS. 
 
 :^^ ;*s ?i 
 
 o o o o 
 
 ;s^ 5>i s> s 
 
 !2 !; t c 
 
 i^j ^ ^ Hj 
 
 5>i 5^ S> » 
 
 5^ S> S 
 
 E Z 
 
 
 
 
 
 K. 
 
 **. 
 
 *«. 
 
 »». 
 
 
 
 ■?^. 
 
 "s. 
 
 *>. 
 
 ^.. 
 
 •5« 
 
 
 V 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 I«c 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 «: 
 
 c 
 
 
 
 
 
 *>•. 
 
 
 
 2Jv 
 
 & 
 
 ?s 
 
 
 
 
 
 *i 
 
 S>i 
 
 S> 
 
 » 
 
 
 
 «s 
 
 IS' 
 
 s 
 
 IS 
 
 
 
 
 IS 
 
 'S 
 
 
 
 IS 
 
 IS 
 
 IS 
 
 IS 
 
 IS 
 
 IS 
 
 'S 
 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 IS 
 
 IS 
 
 
 
 
 s> 
 
 s> 
 
 S) 
 
 
 
 
 
 *^ 
 
 
 
 
 V. 
 
 V 
 
 e 
 
 IS' 
 
 c 
 
 ic 
 
 
 
 
 S 
 
 s 
 
 
 
 s 
 
 s 
 
 s 
 
 s 
 
 s 
 
 s 
 
 s 
 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 IS 
 
 'S 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ?Si 
 
 ^. 
 
 
 
 V. 
 
 V 
 
 e 
 
 IS^ 
 
 s 
 
 1.; 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 '~ 
 
 '~ 
 
 I«> 
 
 l!^ 
 
 1^ 
 
 I'M 
 
 1~ 
 
 1« 
 
 In. 
 
 
 <;j 
 
 ^) 
 
 ,. 
 
 ,. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Sv 
 
 » 
 
 s> 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ¥> 
 
 » 
 
 •^ 
 
 K 
 
 <s 
 
 IS- 
 
 s 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 •~ 
 
 •^ 
 
 •~ 
 
 •« 
 
 •^ 
 
 •~ 
 
 •^ 
 
 •~ 
 
 •^ 
 
 
 <;: 
 
 115 
 
 •- 
 
 Isi. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 s^ 
 
 s 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ?J 
 
 
 ?N 
 
 c 
 
 is' 
 
 s 
 
 IS 
 
 
 
 
 IS 
 
 IS 
 
 IS 
 
 IS 
 
 IS 
 
 IS 
 
 IS 
 
 IS 
 
 IS 
 
 IS 
 
 'S 
 
 
 iw 
 
 IS 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 5^ 
 
 5s 
 
 » 
 
 » 
 
 ?^ 
 
 •~ 
 
 e 
 
 IS^ 
 
 s 
 
 IS 
 
 
 
 
 S 
 
 s 
 
 s 
 
 s 
 
 s 
 
 s 
 
 •■ 
 
 c 
 
 ' 
 
 c 
 
 c 
 
 
 i:r 
 
 IS 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ai 
 
 
 
 
 5>i 
 
 5^ 
 
 » 
 
 p 
 
 »* 
 
 ;« 
 
 <to 
 
 1^ 
 
 o 
 
 
 « 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 s: 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 § 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 > 
 
 5; 
 
 •s 
 
 •~ 
 
 '- 
 
 s 
 
 IS 
 
 ;:. 
 
 ^. 
 
 ^ 
 
 t 
 
 o 
 
 § 
 
 < 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 t- 
 
 z. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 z 
 
 lb 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 " 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 * s ^ 
 
 
10 COMBINATION AND PERMUTATION OF LETTERS. 
 
 Sect. II.— COMBINATION OF CONSONANTS. 
 
 II. Before proceeding to the rules for the combination of con- 
 sonants, let the alphabet be regarded attentively as divided into 
 two grand classes, as exhibited in the following Table. 
 
 HARD OR SURD. 
 
 SOFT OR SONANT. 
 
 k kh 
 
 ch chh 
 
 t th 
 p ph 
 
 sh 
 sh 
 s 
 
 g gh 
 J Jh 
 d dh 
 d dh 
 b bh 
 
 n- 
 ii 
 n 
 n 
 m 
 
 h 
 
 y 
 
 r 
 I 
 
 V 
 
 all the vowels. 
 
 12. If any surd letter end a word when any sonant begins the 
 next, the hard is changed to its own unaspirated soft ; thus, 
 karmaknt bhavati becomes karmakrid bhavati ; vcik asH, mg asti ; 
 chifralikh asti, chitralig asti. 
 
 y It may be proper here to remark, that in writing a Sanscrit sentence, when 
 the words have undergone those changes which the laws of combination demand, 
 they may either be written separately, as in the examples just given, or often more 
 correctly without any separation ; as, karmnkridbhavati ( ofiH <*i^"«l fff) ; vagasti 
 (■^Prftcr). The student is therefore to observe, that although in the following 
 examples, each word will, for greater clearness, be printed separately from the 
 next, it would accord more with the practice of the natives of India to 
 print them without any separation. There are two cases, however, in which 
 there remains no option, but in which words must always be written together 
 without separation. 1st, when a final and initial vowel blend together into one 
 sound (see examples, r. 4—8) ; 2dly, when either crude forms or adverbs are joined 
 with other words to form compounds (see Chap. IX. on Compound Words;. 
 
 13. If any sonant letter end a word when any surd begins the 
 next, the soft is changed to its own unaspirated hard.* Thus, 
 
 *■ If the final be an aspirated sonant letter, and belong to a root whose initial 
 is g^ d, or h, the aspirate, which is suppressed in the final, is transferred back to 
 the initial letter of the root. Thus, vedahudh asti becomes vrdnhhud ay-ti. 
 
COMHINATION OV CONSONANTS. U 
 
 fa(i karoti becomos tat kiiro'J ; vug pati/i, vuk patili ; k.^/i/nl/i j)i- 
 pdsa, kshiit pipusa. But as very few words iii Sanscrit end 
 in any otlier consonants than t and d, the nasals, Visargah, the 
 dental sibilant s, and r, it will be siiilicient for all practical 
 purposes that the attention be confined to the changes of these 
 consonants. To begin, therefore, with / and </. 
 
 CHANGES OF FINAL t AND d. 
 
 General rule. 
 
 14. T becomes d before g, gh, d, dh, b, bh, h, y, r, v, and all 
 vowels.* See example, rule 12. 
 
 D becomes t before k, kli, f, (h, p, p/i, s. See example, 
 rule 13. 
 
 Before the nasals, palatals, and the letter A final t and d 
 undergo a change in form as well as (quality, as in the following 
 special rules. 
 
 Change of t or d to n, before n or m. 
 
 15. \i t Q)V d end a word when the next begins with a nasal, 
 the / or d is usually changed to its own nasal. Thus, tasmut na 
 becomes tastnun na ; tasmut murkha, tasmUn murkha. 
 
 \ A fiiml k is subject to a similar rnle. Thus, vak mama ('^Tofi Jfri) would 
 become van-mama (c(|s*jv|). 
 
 Assimilation of t or d with ch, J, I. 
 
 16. If t or (/ end a word when the next begins with c/t, J, or I, 
 the t or d assimilates with these letters. Thus, bhayut lobhat cha 
 becomes bhayul lobhuch cha; tad jivanam, taj fvanam. 
 
 Combination of t or d rvith sh. 
 
 17. \i t or d end a word when the next begins with ^ sh, thcji 
 
 * Before the vowels of ^cr/nmaiion* M-emiiins unchungcd ; tluis, tlic uccusativf 
 case of Ilarit is Iluritam., not Haridam ; and the third person singular of the verb 
 yat is yutute, not yadutf. 
 
12 COMBINATION AND PERMUTATION OF LETTERS. 
 
 i or d are changed to ch, and the initial ^ sh to "sr chh. Thus, 
 lat shrutva (rJlT ''JT?^) becomes tach chhrutva (ri'sdWl). 
 Combination of t or d with h. 
 18. If a word end in t or d when the next begins with ^ h, 
 the final ^ is changed to d (by rule 12), and the initial ^ to tt d/i. 
 Thus, tad harati {n^ ^fk) is w^ritten tad dharati { a4^A) . 
 
 T By a similar rule, and on the same principle, are written words ending in k 
 followed by initial ^; as vak harati (^TS^ ^fff), vag gharati (^TTTRfff). 
 
 CHANGES OF THE NASALS. 
 
 Changes of final "J^ n before vowels and before t, ch sh, I. 
 
 19. If the letter ci n, preceded by a short vowel, end a word 
 when the next begins with any vowel, the n is doubled. Thus, 
 asan atra becomes asann atra ; tasmin eva, tasminn eva. 
 
 20. If n end a word when the next begins with t, ch, or their 
 aspirates, a sibilant is inserted between the tw^o words, according 
 to the class of these last initial letters ; and the '^ n is then 
 expressed by Anuswara, according to rule (p. 5, f). Thus, asmin 
 tu becomes asminstu (wfWcT); kasmin chit becomes kasminshchit 
 
 T If IT n end a word when the next begins with ^ sh^ they may either remain 
 unchanged, or they may be combined in either one of the two following ways. 
 1 st, the final "^ may be changed to >I h ; as, >r<4M 'ffl^ is written H'^T>-'51TJ . 
 2dly, the ^ may also be changed to "Sf ; as, VT^T»2Rt . 
 
 If •» end a word when the next begins with /, the n assimilates with the /, and 
 the mark ^ is placed over the preceding vowel. As, pakshdn lundti is written 
 "^[^■JTlfff. 
 
 If the crude form of a word end in n, this n is rejected in fonning a com- 
 pound word, or before any affix. Thus, rdjan purusha is compounded into rdja- 
 purmha ; and ^Tt^TT ^T^ into 4<J|U44; and dhanin, with the affix twa, becomes 
 dhanitwa. 
 
 Change of ^ n, not final, to ^ n, after ri, r, sh, preceding in the same 
 
 word. 
 
 21. The letters ^ ;•, "R sh, are cerebrals, and the vowel ri is allied 
 to the cerebral /•. Hence, if the letter n {not final) should follow 
 
COMBINATION OF CONSONANTS. 13 
 
 ri, r, or sh, in (he same icord, the nasal must be writton in the 
 cerebral form u^ //, even thouo^li k, g, p, b (or their aspirates), Ii, y, 
 V, or m, should intervene. Tlius, the English word carbonic would 
 be written in the Sanscrit character thus, oRTijfTTiro^ ; and the accu- 
 sative case of y^^rj^ is "^^i^; and the nominative ])lural of "^^ 
 is ^^ijr; and the imperative mood of f^^, fiSjmfijT.* But the 
 intervention of a dental, palatal, or cerebral, or of any letter 
 whatever, if compounded with the nasal, prevents the operation of 
 this rule, and requires the dental n to follow. Thus, the instru- 
 mental case of ^mic? is ^m^»T; the nominative plural of^T^i^, 
 ^wifvT ; and in further illustration of the same law, may be taken 
 the words ^^h, "^hf't, HIMlfri , TI^. 
 
 Changes of final m. 
 
 2± If the letter J^ m end a word when the next begins with 
 anj^ consonant, it may be represented by Anuswara (*); or it may, 
 optionally, before those consonants which have a corresponding 
 nasal, be changed to this corresponding nasal. Thus, grihant 
 gachchhati is written either tt^ Trsfir or Tr^-^ffT. 
 
 2'o. When the next word beijins with a vowel, the letter H is 
 always written. Thus, griham apnoti, 'l^JTlJilfrT. 
 
 CHANGES OF VISARGAH OR FINAL h. 
 
 Almost every nominative case, arid nearly half the remaining 
 cases of nouns in Sanscrit, besides many persons of the verb, end 
 in Visargah ( ;), or the symbol used to denote the aspirate when 
 final. And this final h is liable to remain unchanged, to be 
 changed to s, to sh, to o, to r, or to be dropped altogether, accord- 
 ing to the nature of the initial letter following. At every step, 
 therefore, these changes will meet the student's eye. Therefore 
 let him master the following five rules before he allenipfs to read a 
 single sentence of Sanscrit, or he can never hope to make any real 
 progress in the acquirement of this language. 
 
 * The letter T!| is, properly, a comi)oiin(l of cf /.-and -q .v// ; altiiougl), iii this 
 Grammar, it is considered as a simple letter, and represented liy k.sli. 
 
14 COMBINATION AND PERMUTATION OF LETTERS. 
 
 RULE A.— WHEN IS VISARGAH OR FINAL h UNCHANGED? 
 
 24. a. Before k, p (and tlieir aspirate^), and before the sibilants 
 
 ^ 5, ^ sh. 
 b. Before a pause, i.e. at the end of a sentence, or when a 
 word stands by itself. 
 
 RULE B.— WHEN IS VISARGAH CHANGED TO ^ S AND ^^ sh? 
 
 25. a. Before t (and its aspirate) it is changed to the dental sibi- 
 
 lant ^ s ; before ch (and its aspirate), to the palatal sibi- 
 lant ^ sh. 
 h. Also in some books, before the sibilants lEI, ^, Visargah 
 is allowed to assimilate with these letters. 
 
 RULE C. — WHEN IS VISARGAH CHANGED TO 0? 
 
 26. a. Final ah is changed to o before all sonant consonants. 
 b. Also before short a (this a being, then cut off). 
 
 RULE D. — WHEN IS VISARGAH CHANGED TO r? 
 
 27. a. Ik, Ih, uh, uh, eh, aih, oh, auh, before any sonant (consonant 
 
 or vowel), change the final h to r ; 
 b. Unless r itself be the sonant following, in which case, to 
 avoid the coalition of two rs, final h is dropped, and 
 the vowel preceding it (if short) is lengthened. 
 
 RULE E. — WHEN IS VISARGAH DROPPED ALTOGETHER? 
 
 28. a. Final ah, before any other vowel except short a, drops the 
 
 Visargah, and leaves the remaining a opening on the 
 initial vowel of the next word without coalition.^ 
 b. Final ah, before any sonant (consonant or vowel), drops 
 the Visargah ; and, if the initial letter of the next word 
 be a vowel, the remaining a is allowed to open upon it 
 without coalition. 
 
 * So, also, before Z, Z, Visargah is changed to the cerebral sibilant '51^; as, 
 
 t By a special rule ^:, "he," and ^ij:, "this," the nominative cases of the 
 pronouns IT^ and ijtT^, drop their Visargah before amj comonant. 
 
COMBINATION OF CONSONANTS. 
 
 15 
 
 In the following Table the nominative cases Narah, " a man" 
 Narah, " men," and Ilarih, " Vishnu," joined witli verbs, illusti-ate 
 these rules at one view. 
 
 VISARGAH BEFORE SURD LETTERS. 
 
 VISARGAH HEFORE SONANT LETTERS. 
 
 ^ hard consonants. 
 
 Before sibilants. 
 
 Before soft consonants 
 
 Before vowels. 
 
 » karoti "j 
 
 Xarah sarati 
 
 I- 
 
 Naro gachchhati c. a. 
 
 Naro 'Iti c. b. 
 
 kiirvanii \ A. a. 
 
 N'arah saranti 
 
 Nard gachchhanti e b. 
 
 Nard adanti v.. b. 
 
 karoti -' 
 
 flarih sarati 
 
 Ilarir gachchhati d. a. 
 
 Ilarir atti n. a. 
 
 ( pachaii \ 
 I pachanti \ A. a. 
 pachati ) 
 
 N'arah shaknoti 
 
 ) 
 
 Naro jaija/i c. a. 
 
 Nara dpnoti e a. 
 
 Narah shaknuvanti 
 
 A.«. 
 
 Nardjayanti e. b. 
 
 Nard dpnnvanti E. b. 
 
 Harih shaknoti 
 
 i 
 
 Ilarir jayati d. a. 
 
 Ilarir dpnoti D. a. 
 
 tarati \ 
 taranti \ B. a. 
 tarati ) 
 
 or 
 
 Naras sarati 
 
 }... 
 
 Naro daddli c. a. 
 
 Naralkshate E. a. 
 
 Nards saranti 
 
 Nard dadati E. b- 
 
 Nard Ikshante E. b. 
 
 liar is sarati 
 
 Ilarir dadati D. a. 
 
 Ilarir'iksliate i). a. 
 
 h charati \ 
 
 h charanti r B. a. 
 
 h charati ) 
 
 Narash shaknoti 
 
 i| B 6. 
 
 Naro brai'iti c. a. 
 
 Nara edhate e. a. 
 
 Nara^h shaknuvani 
 Harish shaknoti 
 
 Nard bruvanti E. b. 
 Ilarir braviti n. a. 
 
 Nard edhante e. b. 
 Ilarir edhate i). a- 
 
 ilarly before kh, 
 
 
 
 Naro ydchali c a. 
 
 Similarly before the 
 
 chh. 
 
 
 
 Nard yachanti E. b. 
 Ilarir ydchati n. a. 
 
 Similarly before the 
 nasals, and before h, I, 
 
 other vowels and dij)h- 
 thong^ 
 
 
 Visargah before 
 a pause. 
 
 
 
 
 v. and before r, except 
 in the last cn?c ; a.<, 
 
 
 
 Atti narah \ 
 Adanti nardh \ A. b. 
 AUi Ilurih J 
 
 
 
 
 Naro rakshati c. «. 
 
 
 
 
 Nard rakshanti E. b. 
 
 
 
 
 Hafi rakshati d. b. 
 
 
 CHANGES OF FINAL ^ S. 
 
 29. The rules for the changes of Visargah apply equally to 
 final sibiliints. Thus, tnanas hara becomes manohara (as in C. a.); 
 and chakshiis vishai/a, chakshur vishaya (as in D. a^ * and chetas, 
 standing alone, is written chetah (a. /;.) 
 
 * In a fow coMipoiind words a final sibilant takes the cerebral form before A-, 
 AS prddus kritu hcconic prddushkrila. Similarly, a iini;] r before Ic or;*; as, nir 
 with kranin, ni hhrflnti ; with piitnt, uixhpnira. See also r. 42, 43, and ] .'il . 1 . 
 
16 COMBINATION AND PERMUTATION OF LETTERS. 
 
 30. ^ 5 is changed to i^ s/i when any other vowel except a or 
 a immediately precedes in the same word. Thus, bhavasi, " thou 
 art"; but karoshi, not karosi, "thou doest."* 
 
 CHANGES OF FINAL T. 
 
 31. Again, rules A, B, D, apply equally to final r. Thus, pratar 
 kola becomes pratah kala ; pi'citar cha, pratash cha ; and the pre- 
 position nir before ukta remains unchanged, and before rasa is 
 changed to nl ; thus, nimkta, n'lrasa. 
 
 32. But final ar, unlike ah, remains unchanged before any 
 sonant ( consonant or vowel) ; as, pratar usha : and before the 
 sonant r itself, drops the r and lengthens the preceding a ; as, 
 punar rakshati becomes puna rakshati. 
 
 33. It is to be observed further of /•, that it may optionally double 
 any consonant (except ^ that immediately follows it. Thus, Itix ^ 
 may be written fr^. 
 
 Hence it appears that the symbol Visargah (:) may be considered 
 as much a representative of final s and r, when these letters are 
 imperceptible, as of final h. Indeed, all those inflections of nouns 
 and persons of verbs which are said to end in Visargah, might 
 be said to end in s ; only that, in such cases, the s is silent, or 
 pronounced with an imperceptible breathing, as in the French les, 
 or the English, island, viscount. So again, in many French words, 
 such as parler, the final r is silent ; and in some English, such as 
 card, the sound of r is very indistinct ; and in all these cases, s and 
 r would be represented in Sanscrit by Visargah (^: "qi^: &c.). 
 
 The following Table exhibits the more common combinations 
 of consonants at one view. Observe, that in the top line of initial 
 letters the aspirated consonants have been omitted, because it is 
 an universal rule, that whatever change takes place before any 
 consonant, the same holds good before its aspirate. Final s has 
 also been omitted, as undergoing precisely the same changes with 
 final h. 
 
 * Also wlien A- precedes : as, vid with su is vitsu ; but h.'iuk\ hhukshn. Cf. r. 112. c. 
 
COMBINATION OF CONSONANTS. 
 
 
 1 
 
 s 
 
 rfi 
 
 
 -S 
 
 < 
 
 -« 
 
 rfS 
 
 
 
 •«; 
 
 
 ■a 
 
 S 
 
 
 
 la 
 
 _>. 
 
 a 
 
 
 K 
 
 
 w 
 
 >o 
 
 
 ;, 
 
 « 
 
 g. 
 
 15 
 
 
 •n 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 - 
 
 s 
 
 
 t 
 
 ;§ 
 
 ^ 
 
 t 
 
 
 -B 
 
 
 -s 
 
 -5 -« 
 
 ■« 
 
 ■« 
 
 •« 
 
 <; 
 
 •« 
 
 
 -c! 
 
 
 
 
 
 ■« 
 
 * 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ■§ 
 
 8 -8 
 
 •8 
 
 
 f§ 
 
 :S 
 
 -B 
 B 
 
 
 -= 
 
 
 a 
 
 ;) 
 
 
 » 
 
 ;i 
 
 » 
 
 » 
 
 
 a 
 
 s 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ■8 
 
 8 
 
 
 « 
 
 la 
 
 ■ 3 
 
 B 
 
 
 i« 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 -^ 
 
 
 ■~ 
 
 ■v> 
 
 -^ 
 
 ■^ 
 
 
 -^ 
 
 — 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 
 !» 
 
 j^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 ■~» 
 
 
 
 <= 
 
 'C 
 
 a 
 
 
 !. 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 V. 
 
 
 t. 
 
 }> 
 
 •„ 
 
 f- 
 
 
 J, 
 
 *. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ■a 
 
 S 
 
 
 o 
 
 la 
 
 l~ 
 
 IB 
 
 
 
 
 Si 
 
 s» 
 
 
 »» 
 
 Si 
 
 Si 
 
 s» 
 
 
 s> 
 
 d> 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 S 
 
 
 ■^ 
 
 fi 
 
 
 o 
 
 !« 
 
 •Is 
 
 B 
 
 
 ». 
 
 
 S 
 
 S 
 
 
 S 
 
 S 
 
 S 
 
 s 
 
 
 S 
 
 
 s 
 
 s 
 
 
 o 
 
 IB 
 
 .- 
 
 B 
 
 
 >» 
 
 
 ■c 
 
 <5 
 
 
 ■C) 
 
 o 
 
 -o 
 
 -O 
 
 
 •o 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ■« 
 
 8 
 
 
 o 
 
 IS 
 
 •S 
 
 s 
 
 
 «. 
 
 
 a. 
 
 a. 
 
 
 a, 
 
 a. 
 
 a. 
 
 a. 
 
 
 a. 
 
 !S. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 -s 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 •>^ 
 
 
 
 e 
 
 |« 
 
 :S 
 
 B 
 
 
 -8 
 
 
 s 
 
 8 
 
 
 a 
 
 8 
 
 8 
 
 8 
 
 
 
 S 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 e 
 
 8 
 
 
 o 
 
 IB 
 
 •s 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 s» 
 
 
 •e 
 
 ■« 
 
 
 13 
 
 ■B 
 
 ■B 
 
 •B 
 
 
 ■B 
 
 •W 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ■X3 
 
 
 
 => 
 
 IB 
 
 ■ 2 
 
 B 
 
 
 V 
 
 
 •s^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 ■^ 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 ~ 
 
 
 
 C 
 
 IB 
 
 ■2 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 •^ 
 
 •-^i 
 
 
 •^ 
 
 •--, 
 
 .-, 
 
 ■^ 
 
 
 ■'-i 
 
 ■'-J 
 
 
 
 -¥■ 
 
 
 
 
 
 . 
 
 
 
 
 
 — -> 
 
 
 
 = 
 
 "B 
 
 
 » 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 -« 
 
 ■« 
 
 
 ■« 
 
 .:2 
 
 •< 
 
 -5: 
 
 
 <: 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 <: 
 
 
 -5 
 
 -* 
 
 
 ■« 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 § 
 
 IB 
 
 .2 
 
 s 
 
 
 •^ 
 
 
 i>. 
 
 5; 
 
 
 =-, 
 
 B-, 
 
 Bi 
 
 Bi 
 
 
 Bl 
 
 «% 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 . 
 
 
 
 
 
 ts 
 
 8 
 
 
 <= 
 
 'B 
 
 •= 
 
 B 
 
 
 !- 
 
 
 •4 
 
 -4! 
 
 
 >^ 
 
 -Si 
 
 -S; 
 
 Je 
 
 
 ■i: 
 
 •Je 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 8 
 
 
 1 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 t 
 
 
 -8 
 
 
 '« 6 
 
 IC u 
 
 
 IB o 
 
 IB C 
 
 IB 
 
 IB 
 
 ,j 
 
 IB o 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 l.-^ 
 
 
 -^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 • b 
 
 
 ■^ 
 
 <^ 
 
 
 
 "s 
 
 
 
 e 
 
 IB 
 
 
 -y 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 s 
 
 - 
 
 
 
 B 
 
 B 
 
 B 
 
 
 B 
 
 2 ^ 
 
 
 
 * 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ■^ 
 
 s 
 
 
 o 
 
 IB 
 
 •h 
 
 3 
 
 ^ 
 
 ;. 
 
 « 
 
 
 .^ , 
 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 
 V. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^ . 
 
 < o 
 
 z 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 -C l* 
 
 ? 
 
 "S 
 
 1^ 
 
 
 5 
 
 IB 
 
 :- - 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 B 
 
 1! 
 
 H^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 -B 
 
 -C 
 
 
 ~ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 - B 
 
 2 S 
 
 Y. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 »» 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^ .2 
 
 1 1 
 
 .2 ^ 
 
 a < 
 
 * -t- 
 
CHAPTER III. 
 
 ON SANSCRIT ROOTS, AND THE CRUDE FORM OF NOUNS. 
 
 35. Before treating of Sanscrit nouns, it will be advisable to 
 point out in what respect the peculiar system adopted in their 
 formation requires an arrangement of the subject different from 
 that to w^liich w^e are accustomed in other languages. 
 
 In Sanscrit nouns, then, there is this great peculiarity, that 
 every one of them has two distinct states prior to the formation 
 of the nominative case : viz. 1st, a root ; 2dly, a crude form, 
 coming from this root. 
 
 In the first place, therefore, let us inquire, what is the root. 
 There are, in Sanscrit, a number of monosyllabic sounds, which 
 are called roots. These are mere artificial inventions, having 
 only an ideal existence ; mere blocks, so to speak, of themselves 
 quite useless ;* from which, however, are carved out and fashioned 
 all the varieties of nouns and verbs which exist in the language. 
 Every one of these roots conveys some simple idea, which appears 
 under different modifications in the derivatives from it. Thus, 
 to mention a few of the most common : the root kship conveys 
 the idea of " thi'owing "; kri of "doing," "making"; hri oft 
 " seizing "; yuj, " joining "; as, vrit, " being "; bku, " becoming "; 
 jlv, " living "; m, '* leading "; ji, " conquering "; gam, ya, char, 
 kram, i, sri, " going "; vad, vach, bru, " speaking "; budh, gya (in), 
 " knowing "; drish (s^), " seeing "; ish, kam, " wishing "; mri, 
 " dying "; da, " giving ""; jan, " producing "; dha, " placing "; ad, 
 bhaksh, bhuj, " eating '"; pa, " drinking "; pack, " cooking "; han, 
 "killing"; joaA " falling"; ijr?5, " dwelling "; t;?,?A (f%^), " entering "; 
 sfha, " standing "; shric {^, " hearing "; sprish (w^), " touching "; 
 sidh, sadh, "accomplishing"; krl{'^, "buying"; kup, krudli, "being 
 
 * Except ill a few cases, where they are used by themselves as nouns. 
 
SANSCRIT ROOTS, AND THE CRUDH FORM ()F NOUNS. JO 
 
 an<;rv"; c/ii, " colloctinjy"; glirU, " smclliiii;"; k/n/a, " vAwiux^'"; 
 vash (^). "perishing'"; fi/aj, rait, "(luitting''; dtvish (%ti\ 
 'Minting"; ninth "blaming"; dru, "running"; di/ut, dip, blid, shubh, 
 "shining"; pU, "purifying"; prachchh (l^Br), "asking"; Up, lah/i, 
 "obtaining"; stu, s/ians, "praising"; yat, "striving"; f/rnn, "re- 
 straining"; «AffA- (^n^), "being able"; tap, "heating"; rfrt/<, " burn- 
 ing"; muc/i, "liberating"; niuli, "being foolish"; i/nd/i, "fighting"; 
 ru/i, "growing"; has, laughing"; stvap, "sleeping"; /irish (^tl), 
 tiand, /dad, "being glad"; sua, "bathing"; rab/t, "beginning"; 
 sfvar, "sounding"; sah, vah, "bearing"; sf/tri, "remembering." 
 
 The student is recommended to commit to memory the com- 
 monest of these roots or elementary sounds, as here given. For 
 it will appear in the sequel, that from each of them may be drawn 
 out, with great regularity, 1st, a set of simple substantives ; 2d]v, of 
 simple adjectives ; 3dly, of simple verbs. To take, for example, 
 the root budh, " to know."* From this root are formed, on fixed 
 principles, the following substantives and adjectives ; bod/ia or 
 bodhana, " know^ledge "; buddhi, "intellect"; bodhaka, "an informer"; 
 bauddha, " a Buddhist "; budha, " wise "; huddhimat, " intellectual "; 
 and the verbs, bodhati, " he knows "; hodhayati, " he informs "; 
 budhyate, " it is known "; bubhutsate, or bubodhishati, " he wishes 
 to know"; bobudhyate, "he knows well." And the simple idea 
 contained in the root may be endlessly extended by the prefix- 
 ing of prepositions; as, prabodha, "vigilance"; prahudhyate, "he 
 awakes." 
 
 36. In the second place, it has been said that the Sanscrit noun, 
 substantive and adjective, makes its first appearance in a state 
 called the crude form^ The same may be said of the pronouns. 
 
 * Tt will be convenient, in the following pages, to express the idea contained in 
 the root by prefixing to it the infinitive sign to. But the Student must not suppose 
 that the sound hmlh denotes any thing more than the mere idea of " knowing"; nor 
 must he imagine that in deriving nouns from it, we are deriving them from the 
 infinitive, or from any part of the verb, but rather from a simple original sound, 
 a mere imaginary word, which is the common source of both nouns and verbs. 
 
 t This state of the noun will, in the following pages, be called the crude. 
 
20 SANSCRIT ROOTS, AND THE CRUDE FORM OF NOUNS. 
 
 numerals, and participles. Thus, hodha, bodhana, tad, pahchan, 
 bhavat, are the crudes of the nominative cases bodhah, bodhanam, 
 sah, jjancha, bhavan, respectively. The student should endeavour 
 to understand, at the outset, the meaning and use of this crude 
 form. It is an intermediate state between the root and nomi- 
 native case, the naked form of the noun, which serves as the 
 basis on which to construct its eight cases, beginning with the 
 nominative. In a Greek or Latin dictionary we look for the noun 
 under the nominative case, but in Sanscrit we look for it under 
 its crude state ; as, for example, sah, " he," is found under lad. 
 And here let it be distinctly understood, that the crude form of a 
 noun is very far from having a mere ideal existence, like the root. 
 It is of the utmost practical utility. It is that form of the noun 
 which is always used in the formation of compound words ; and 
 as every Sanscrit sentence contains, perhaps, more compound 
 words than simple ones, it may with truth be said, that the crude 
 state of the noun is not only that form under which it appears in 
 the dictionary, but is also the most usual form under which it 
 appears in books. 
 
 We may conceive it quite possible that Greek and Latin gram- 
 marians might have proceeded on a similar plan, and that they 
 might have supposed a root Aey, from which was drawn out the 
 nouns Ae^/f, Ke^iKog, Aexrof, KaraAoyrj, e?0\.oyo£, and the verbs \eyui, 
 KaraXeyui, eTO^oyeo) : so also, a root ag, from which was derived the 
 nouns agmen, actio, actus ; and the verbs ago, perago : or a root nau, 
 from which would come naiita, navis, nauticus, navalis, navigo. Again, 
 they might have supposed a crude form to each of these nouns, as 
 well as a root ; as, for instance, Ke^iKo of Ae^zKoj-, and navi of navis ; 
 and they might have required the student to look for the noun navis 
 under navi, and the verb navigo under nau. Further than this, 
 they might have shewn that this crude form was the form used in 
 the formation of compound words, as in Xe^iKoypdfpog, naviger. But 
 Greek and Latin are too uncertain in their construction to admit 
 of such a method of arrangement being extensively applied : such, 
 however, is the artificial character of the Sanscrit language, that 
 here it has been done throughout with great regularity and pre- 
 cision. 
 
SANSCRIT ROOTS, AND THE CRUDE FORM OF NOUNS. 21 
 FORMATION OF THE CRUDES OF SIMPLE NOUNS. 
 
 37. Nouns substantive and adjective are of two kinds, simple 
 and compound. Simple nouns are those which stand alone, and 
 uncompounded with any other. Cofnpound, are those made up 
 of two or more nouns, the last only receiviiif^ inflection. 
 
 It may be easily understood, from the preceding remarks, that 
 the consideration of simple nomis divides itself into two heads : 
 1st, The formation of their crudes ; 2dly, The formation of their 
 cases ; or, in other words, the enumeration of the different systems 
 of declension which l)elong to each variety of crude form. 
 
 Observe, that it is not intended that the student should dwell 
 long, at first, on the following pages, printed in small type. It 
 will be essential for him, however, to read them over with atten- 
 tion, as a necessary introduction to the subject of declension in 
 Chapter IV. Their importance will not be fully appreciated till 
 he arrives at a more advanced period of his studies. 
 
 The crudes of nouns are formed in two ways, either by adding certain affixes 
 to the ROOT, the vowel of ^yhich is liable, at the same time, to be changed to its 
 Guna or Vriddhi substitute, or by adding certain affixes to orcdes of nouns 
 already formed. It must be remembered, however, that, although every single 
 word in the Sanscrit language is derived from some root, there are many in whiclx 
 the connection between the noun and its source, either in sense or form, is by no 
 means obvious.t With the derivation of all such we shall not concern ourselves ; 
 and the following rules have only reference to those classes of nouns whose 
 formation proceeds on clear and intelligible principles. 
 
 38. First Class.— Cruf/es in a. Masculine and Neuter; in a and i, 
 Feminine. 
 
 Formed by adding to roots— 
 I. a, forming, 1st (nom. -«/t), after the Vriddhi of medial « of a root, and the 
 Guna of any other vowel, a large class of substantives masculine : as, from the 
 root (Hr, " to sport," rleva, " a deity." If a root end in ch or j\ these letters 
 
 * Compound nouns are treated of in Chapter IX. on Compound ^V^ords. 
 t Thus, ''T^iT , " a man," is said to come from pur, " to precede "; shriyala, 
 "a jackal," from .srj/, "to create"; sliiva, "the god Shiva," from i/t?, " to sleep." 
 
22 SANSCRIT ROOTS, AND THE CRUDE FORM OF NOUNS, 
 
 are changed to A; and g respectively : as, from pach^ " to cook," puka, " cooking "; 
 from^ty, "to join," j^o^ra, "joining." 
 
 Forming, 2dly (nom. raasc. -ah, fem. -u, neut. -a??i*), after Guna of a final, and 
 sometimes Guna of a medial vowel, nouns of agency : as, from plu, " to swim," plava, 
 "what swims "; from srip, "to creep," sarpa, "what creeps" (see r. 131. 1.). 
 
 Forming, 3dly (nom. -ah -a -am), adjectives : as, from shitbh, " to shine," shubha, 
 "beautiful." Sometimes there is great change of the root: as in shiva, "pro- 
 pitious," Mf/irfar«, " beautiful ; and sometimes the feminine may be formed in l: 
 as, sundari. There are very few adjectives formed with this affix. 
 
 II. aka (nom. -akah, -aka or -ika, -akatn), after Vriddhi of a final vowel or medial 
 a, and Guna of any other vowel. Still more common than a to form adjectives 
 and nouns of agency : as, from tap, "to bum," tapaka, "inflammatory "; from kri, 
 "to do," karaka, "a doer" (r. 131.3. h.); Obs. -aka is the feminine of the adjec- 
 tives, and -ika of the agents : as, tapaka, karika. 
 
 III. ana (nom. -anam), after Guna of the root, forming, 1st, a large class of neuter 
 substantives : as, from nl, " to guide," nayana, " guidance "; from da, " to give," 
 dana, " a gift." 
 
 Forming, 2dly (nom. -anah, -ana, -anam), nouns of agency and adjectives : as, 
 from nrit, "to dance," nartana, "a dancer" (r. 131. 3. c.) ; from shiibh, "to shine," 
 shobhana, "bright." The feminine of the agents may be in anl. 
 
 IV. tra {nom. -tram), after Guna of the root: as, from pu, "to drink," ^ja^ra, 
 "a vessel"; from shru, "to hear," shrotra, "the organ of hearing." This affix is 
 used to form neuter nouns denoting some instrument or organ, and coiTesponds 
 to the Latin trum in aratrum, plectrum, &c. 
 
 v. There are other uncommon affixes to roots to form adjectives in a (nom. 
 -ah, -a, -am) : as, ala, vara, ra, nra, ira, uka, tra, ma, fika. The following are 
 examples of adjectives formed with these affixes; chapala,jitwara, namra, bhidura, 
 ruchira, varshuka, chitra, bhtma, jagaruka. 
 
 Formed by adding to nouns, 
 
 VI. twa (nom. -twam), fonuing neuter abstract substantives from any noun in 
 the language : as, from purusha, " a man," purushatwa, " manlmess." In adding 
 tliis affix to crudes ending in nasals, the nasal is rejected : as, from dhanin, " rich," 
 dhanitwa, " the state of being rich." 
 
 * Obs. When there are three genders, it will be sufficient, in future, to place 
 the hyphen between them. 
 
SANSCRIT ROOTS, AND THE CRUDE FORM OF NOUNS. 23 
 
 VII. yn, forming, 1st (nom. -i/njn), neuter abstract substantives ami a few col- 
 lectives, the fii-st syllable of the noun taking Vriddhi : as, from suhrid, " a friend," 
 Mn//jrtrfj/«, "friendship." When the crude ends in a vowel, this vowel is rejected 
 before ya is affixed : as, from vichitra, " various," vakhitrya, " variety." 
 
 Forming, 2dly (nom. -ya, -ya, -yam), adjectives expressing some relationship to the 
 noun: as, from r/Aa?ja, "wealth," dhanya, '''"wealthy." Sometimes Vriddhi takes 
 place : as, from soma, "the moon," saumya, "lunar." In this case the fem. is -yl. 
 
 viii. a (nom. -ah, -i, -am), after Vriddhi of the first syllable of the noun, forming 
 innumerable adjectives expressing some relationship to the noun. ^Vllen the 
 crude ends in a, no further affix is required, and the only change is the Vriddhi 
 of the first sj'llable : as, from purusha, " a man," paurusha, " manly." AVhen in 
 a or i, this a or i must be rejected : as, from sikata, "sand," saikuta, "sandy." 
 A\'hen in u, this ii is changed to av before this and the three following affixes : 
 as, from Vishnu, "the god Vishnu," Vaishnavu, "a worsliipper of Vishnu. ' 
 
 Sometimes the neuter form of this adjective is taken as an abstract substantive ; 
 as, nominative case, pauruskam, " manliness "; or, as a collective : as, kshaitram, 
 "fields," collectively, from kshetru. This applies to the two next affixes. 
 
 IX. ika (nom. -ikah, -iki, -ikatyi), after Vriddlii of the first syllable of the noun, 
 forming numerous adjectives. Before tliis affix is added, the final vowel of the 
 crude must be rejected : as, from dharma, " religion," dharmika, " religious." 
 
 x.eya (nom. -eyah, -eyt, -eyam), after Vriddhi of the first syllable of the noun, 
 forming many adjectives. The final vowel of the crude must be rejected : as, from 
 purusha, "a man," paurusheya, "manly "; from agni, "fire," ugneya, "fiery." 
 
 XI. lya (nom. -lyah, -lya, -lyam), without any change of the noun, except the 
 rejection of final a: as, from parvuta, "a mountain," parvatiya, "mountainous." 
 Sometimes there is Vriddhi : as, from sukha, " pleasure," sankhtya, " pleasurable." 
 ^Vhen the final of the crude remains, k is prefixed to the last two affixes. 
 
 XII. There are other uncommon affixes to nouns foniiing adjectives in a (nom. 
 -ah, -a, -am): as, Tna, vala, tana; forming, from grama, "a village," grumina, 
 "rustic"; from *A«Mfl, " a crest," *A«Mat;fl/ff, " crested "; from sAtt-a*, " to-morrow," 
 A7m-a*/an«, " future." This last corresponds to the Latin tinxis, and has reference 
 to time. Ka is sometimes added to words to form adjectives and collective nouns, 
 and is often redundant. Maya (nom. -mayuh, -may't, -rnayam) is a common affix 
 added to any word to denote made of: as, from hha, "iron," lohamaya, "made of 
 iron"; from trjas, "light," tejomaya, "consisting of light," "full of light." 
 
 B^adding to uooxs, 
 
 XIII. a (nom. -«), with no change of the root, forming feminine substantives: as, 
 
24 SANSCRIT ROOTS, AND THE CRUDE FORM OF NOUNS. 
 
 homjiv, "to live," jiva, "life." This affix is frequently added to the desiderative 
 form of a root : as, from plpas, " to desire to drink," pipasa, " thirst "; and rarely 
 to the intensive: as, from May, " to cut much," loluya, "cutting much." 
 By adding to nouns, 
 
 XIV. ta (nom. -to), forming feminine abstract substantives : as, from purusha, 
 " a man," purushata, " manliness." Tills affix may be added to any noun in the 
 language, and corresponds to the Latin tas in celeritas, &c. 
 
 XV. t (nom. -i), forming a large class of feminine substantives, usually derived 
 from masculines in o, by changing a to l : as, from nrtrfu, "a river," fern. na^Zy 
 from putra, " a son," fem. ptdrl ; from nartaka, " a dancer," fem. nartakl. 
 
 39. Second Class. — Crudes in i, Masculine, Feminine, and Neuter. 
 Formed by adding to roots, 
 
 I. i, forming, 1st (nom. -ih), a few masculine substantives, often not connected 
 \?ith their roots either in form or sense : as, from an-k, " to mark ", agni, " fire." 
 When this affix is added to the root dhu, a is dropped, and various prepo- 
 sitions are prefixed ; as ^andhi, vidhi, nidhi. 
 
 Forming, 2dly (nom. -i), one or two neuter substantives : as, from vri, " to sur- 
 round"; vari, "water." 
 
 Forming, 3dly (nom. Jh,-ih,-i), a few adjectives : as, from shuch, "to be pure"; 
 shuchi, "pure." 
 
 II. ti (nom. Mh), forming an useful class of abstract substantives feminine. 
 This affix bears a great analogy to the passive participle (r. 125.). The same 
 changes of the root are required before it as before this participle ; and, in fact, 
 provided the passive participle does not insert i, this substantive may always be 
 formed from it, by changing ta into ti. But if i is inserted before to, no such 
 substantive can be formed. Thus, from vach, " to speak," ukta, " spoken," ukti, 
 " speech "; from man, " to imagine," mata, " imagined," mati, " the mind." And 
 where na is substituted for to of the passive participle, ni is substituted for ti ; 
 as, from ylai, "to be weary," gldna, "wearied," ^/am, " weariness." This affix 
 corresponds to the tio of the Latin, added, in the same way, to passive participles : 
 as actus, actio. 
 
 40. Third Class. — Cn/c/e.v in u, Masculine, Feminine, and Neuter. 
 
 Formed by adding to roots, 
 I. w, forming, 1st (nom. -7i/«), often with considerable change of the root, a few 
 
SANSCRIT ROOTS, AND THE CRUDE EORM OF NOUNS. 2:) 
 
 substantives of the masculino, and one or two of the foniiuine Render : as, from 
 hha, '"to shine," hhanu, m. " the sun"; from (the, "to drink," dficnu, f. "a cow." 
 Forming, 2dly (nom. -m), one or two neuter substantives : as, nuuihu, " honey." 
 Forming, 3dly (nom. -uh-uh or -vi-u), a few adjectives : as, from tav, " to stretch," 
 /«n«/, "thin" (fern, taniih or tuuwi). This affix is often added to dcsidcrative 
 roots to form adjectives : as, {rom pipas, " to desire to drink," pipasu, " thirsty." 
 
 II. ishnu (nom. -ishnuh, -i-slnwh, -ishim), with Guna of the root, forming adjec- 
 tives : as, from A-sAi, "to perish," kshayhhnu, "perishing." 
 
 III. There are many other affixes to roots, forming nouns in u (nom. -uh, -nh, -u) : 
 as, rii, «»/, 5/w, snu, am, itnu, tu. The following adjectives afford examples of 
 these affixes: hhlru, trasnu, shayTilu, sthTmw, shurTtrii, gadaijitnu ; and the sub- 
 stantive gantu. 
 
 41. Fourth Class. — Crudes in tri (it), Masculine, Feminine, and 
 Neuter. 
 
 Formed by adding to roots, 
 Jrj, forming 1st (nom. -tu, -tri, -tri), nouns of agency of three genders, the same 
 change of the root being required which takes place in the first future (r. 131. 2.). 
 Thus, from kship, " to throw," ksheptri, " a thrower ; from do, " tolgive,'\dfitri, 
 '• a giver." This corresponds to the Latin affix tor. 
 
 Forming 2dly (nom. -ta), a few nouns of relationship, masculine and feminine : 
 as, pitri, " a father," matri, " a mother." 
 
 42. Fifth Class. — Crudes in t and d, Masculine, Feminine, and Neuter. 
 Formed by adding to roots, 
 t (nom. -t, in all genders), if tlie root end in a short vowel: fonning nouns of 
 agency of three genders: as, from kri, "to do," krit, "a doer"; from ^7, "to 
 conquer,".///, " a conqueror." This class of nouns are never used, except as the 
 last member of a compound : thus, karmakrit, " a doer of work." Roots already 
 ending in t or rf, taken to form nouns of agency, fall under this class : as, from 
 vid, " to know," dJuirmavid, " one who knows his duty." There are also a few nouns 
 falling under this class, formed by prefixing prepositions to roots ending in t or d : 
 as, from dyut, " to shine," vidyut, " lightning "; from pad, " to go," sampad, " success. 
 
 E 
 
26 SANSCRIT ROOTS, AND THE CRUDE FORM OF NOUNS. 
 
 By adding to nouns, 
 
 I. vat (nom. -van, -vati, -vat), if the crude end in a or a,* forming innumerable 
 adjectives: as, from t/Aana, " wealth," c?/ia?iau«/, *•' possessed of wealth." This and 
 the next affix are universally applicable, and are of the utmost utility to form 
 adjectives of possession. Sometimes vat is added to crudes in s and t : as in tejaswat, 
 vidyutwat (violatmg r. 26. 29. and 14.). 
 
 II. mat {nom. -man, -mat!, -mat), if the crude end in i, I, or u, to form adjectives 
 like the preceding : as, from dhi, " wisdom," dhlmat, " wise "; from ansliu, " a ray," 
 anshumat, " radiant." 
 
 43. Sixth Class. — Crudes in an and in, Masculine, Feminine, and 
 Neuter. 
 
 Formed by adding to roots, 
 
 I. man (nom. -ma), after Guna of the root, forming substantives of the neuter 
 gender: as, from kri, "to do"; karman, "a deed." This affix corresponds to the 
 Latin men, in regimen, stamen, &c. One or two nouns in man are masculine : as, 
 atman, " soul " (nom. -ma) ; and a few masculine nouns are formed with an instead 
 of man : as, rajan, " a king " (nom. -ja), from rtlj, " to shine." A few adjectives are 
 formed with van : as, drishwun, " seeing" (nom. -va, -va, -va). 
 
 By adding to nouns, 
 
 II. imaji (nom. -ima), forming masculine abstract substantives. If the noun 
 ends in a or u, these vowels are rejected : as, from killa, "black," kuliman, "black- 
 ness"; from laghu, "light," laghiman, "lightness"; from mridu, "soft," mradiman.^ 
 If it end in a consonant, this consonant, with its preceding vowel, is rejected : as, 
 from mahat, " great," mahiman, " greatness." 
 
 By adding to roots, 
 
 III. in (nom. -1, -inl, -i), after Vriddhi of a final vowel and medial a, and Guna of 
 
 * Vat is not often found added to femmine crude forms. It occurs, however, 
 occasionally; as, cjnTJTRf^ , "having a wife," f^fyi^Jil, "crested." 
 
 t A medial ri before a simple consonant is changed to ra, but not before a double 
 consonant: as, from oH'GiIt, "l)lack," efifni|HVf , "blackness." Tliis affix, iman, is 
 generally added to adjectives, and the same changes take place before it, that take 
 place before the affixes iyas and ishtha (seer. 71. t)- Thus, yuriman, preman, 
 draghiman, himman, &c. 
 
SANSCRIT ROOTS, AND THE CRUDE FOHM OF NOUNS. 27 
 
 any other medial vowel, forming nouns of agency of three genders (r. 1.11. .'].) : as, 
 from At/, "to do," karhi, "a doer." 
 
 By adding to nouns, 
 
 IV. in (nom. -f, -jh7, -/), forming innumerable adjectives of possession. Tlie final 
 of a crude is rejected before this affix : as, from dhana, " wealth," dhanin, " wealthy " ; 
 from imllu, "a garland," md/in, "garlanded"; from vrlhi, "rice," vrlhin, "having 
 rice." 
 
 v. vin (nom. -vl, -vbil, -vi), if the crude end in a or as, forming a few adjectives : 
 as, from mcdha, "intellect," incdhavin, "intellectual"; from tejas, "splendour," teja^- 
 u'in, " splendid." This last example violates r. 26. and 29. 
 
 44. Seventh Class. — Crudes in as, Masculine, Feminine, and Neuter. 
 Formed by adding to roots, 
 as (nom. -ah), after Guna, forming neuter substantives : as, from man, " to tliink," 
 manas, " the mind "; from sri, " to go," saras, " water." But in vedkas, " Brahma," 
 and chandramas, "the moon," masc, and apsaras, "a nymph," fern., the nominative 
 is -ah. In place of as, the neuter affixes is or us are occasionally added : as, from 
 hii, "to offer," havis, "ghee"; from chaksh, "to speak," chakshus, "the eye." 
 
 45. Eighth Class. — Crudes in any Consonant, except t, d, n, s, 
 Masculine, Feminine, and N eider. 
 
 Formed by using roots as nouns of agency. 
 Any root may be used to form a noun of agency, provided it be compounded 
 with another word. Thus, from shak, "to be able," sarvashak, "omnipotent." 
 Those roots which end in ^ or rf, or in a short vowel, having t affixed, have been 
 already noticed as falling under the fifth class. This eighth class is intended to 
 comprise all other roots, ending in any consonant: as, hhnj (nom. hhuk); raj (nom. 
 TXZ) ; prdchchh (nom. T(TZ); i>udh (nom. bhut) ; pur (nom. puh) ; gir (nom. gJh) ; 
 div (nom. dyanh); sprish (nom. sprik) ; visli (nom. n^) ; twish {nom. fj^) ; lih 
 (nom. f^z ) ; duh (nom. dhuk) ; pipaksh (nom. pipuk). There are also one or 
 two other nouns derived from roots falling under this class : as, TTW3^5 " thirsty " 
 (nom. ITWofi ) ; ^jfr!*!^, " a priest " (nom. •^fFafofi); '^T^. f- "speech" (nom. 
 ^oB); ^^n^, n. blood" (nom. ^^Tcfi). 
 
CHAPTER IV. 
 DECLENSION. 
 
 THE ARTICLE. 
 
 46. There is no indefinite article in Sanscrit.* Thus, " a 
 man " can only be expressed by the simple noun ^;^: pumshah. 
 The definite article is usually expressed by the pronoun sa, 
 as ^ ^^I sa puriishah, " the man." The indefinite pronoun ^BftjrT 
 kashchit may be used like the English expression " a certain "; 
 thus, v+fvari "T^^: " a certain man." 
 
 General Observations. 
 
 As, in the last chapter, nouns substantive and adjective were 
 arranged under eight classes, according to the final of their crudes 
 (the first four classes comprising those ending in vowels, the last 
 four those ending in consonants), so it will be the object of the 
 present chapter to give the eight systems of declension arising 
 out of this arrangement. Moreover, as eveiy class of crudes 
 comprised adjectives as well as substantives, so it is intended 
 that the examples of a masculine, feminine, and neuter substan- 
 tive, exhibited under each system of declension, shall serve as the 
 model for the masculine, feminine, and neuter of adjectives 
 coming under the same class. 
 
 The learner will have already gathered that the uoun has three 
 genders, and that the gender is, in many cases, determinable 
 from the termination of the crude. Tlius, all crudes in a, t, and 
 those formed with the affix ti (r. 39.), are feminine : nearly all 
 nouns whose crudes end in ana, twa, ya. tra, as, is, us, and man, 
 are neuter ; all in iinan are masculine ; but those in a, i, u, and 
 ri, are not reducible to rule. The nominative case is, however, 
 in the first of these instances a guide to the gender : as, devah, 
 
 * In modem Sanscrit cka is very commonly used as an indefinite article, as 
 rkah purushah, " a man." 
 
DECLENSION OF CRUDES ENDING IN VOWELS. 20 
 
 " a deity/' is nuxsculino ; but danof/i, " a gift," nouter. And in 
 other cases the meaning of the word : as, pi/ri, " a father," is 
 masculine ; and matri, " a mother,"" feminine. 
 
 In Sanscrit, all the relations between the words in a sentence 
 are expressed by inflections. A great many prepositions exist 
 in the language, but these are very rarely used alone in govern- 
 ment with any case, their chief use being as prefixes to verbs 
 and nouns. This absence of syntactical auxiliaries leads to the 
 necessity for eight cases. These are called, 1. nominative ; 2. ac- 
 cusative ; 3. instrumental ; 4. dative ; 5. ablative ; 6. genitive ; 
 7. locative ; 8. vocative.* Of these, the third and seventh are 
 new to the classical student. The instrumental denotes generally 
 the instrument by which a thing is done ; as, fena kritam, " done 
 by him." The locative generally refers to the place or time in 
 which any thing is done ; ixs, Ayodhyayam '' in Ayodhya'' ; purvakale, 
 " in former time "; bhumau, " on the ground."^ Hence it follows 
 that the ablative is restricted to the sense frotn, and cannot be 
 used, as in Latin and Greek, to express by, with, in, at, on, &c. 
 
 The noun has three numbers, singular, dual, and plural. 
 
 Sect. I.-DECLENSION OF CRUDES ENDING IN VOWELS, 
 OR OF THE FIRST FOUR CLASSES OF NOUNS. 
 
 FIRST CLASS. — CRUDES IN a, MASCULINE AND NEUTER; IN d AND 'l, 
 FEMININE. 
 
 Declined like ^ deva, mas. "a deity ^\ "^ft^Tjwd, fern, "life^''; 
 ff^ nadz, fem. " a river^\' and ^HT ddna, neuter, " a gift^ 
 
 47. By far the greatest number of masculine and neuter nouns, 
 in Sanscrit, end in a in the crude form ; and by far the greatest 
 number of feminine nouns end in either d or t. These we have 
 arranged under the first class, and the examples we are about to 
 give will serve as the model, not only for substantives, but also 
 
 * Obs. That these cases will sometimes be denoted by their initial letters. 
 Thus, N. will denote uomimitivc, I. instrumental. 
 
 t Both these cases are used to denote various other relations. See the Cliapter 
 on Syntax. 
 
30 
 
 DECLENSION OF CRUDES ENDING IN VOWELS, 
 
 for all the adjectives given at r. 3S. as falling under this class. 
 For all adjectives which make a in the crude form of the mas- 
 culine and neuter make a or t in the feminine. Thus, taking the 
 adjective sundara, " beautiful." The masculine is declined like 
 deva (nom. sundarah) ; the feminine like jwa or nadi (nom. 
 sundara or sundari) ; the neuter like dana (nom. sundarani). 
 
 So great is the importance of this first class of nouns, that, to 
 make its declension clearer, it will be advisable to give, in the 
 first place, the following general scheme of its terminations. 
 
 MASCULINE. 
 
 
 THE TWO FEMININE FORMS. 
 
 /- 1 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 \ 
 
 SING. DUAL. 
 
 TLUK. 
 
 SING. 
 
 DUAL. 
 
 ^ FLU 11. 
 
 Nom. ah au 
 
 ah 
 
 -a I 
 
 e yau 
 
 ah yah 
 
 Ace. am 
 
 an 
 
 an 
 
 am wi 
 
 e yau 
 
 ah Ih 
 
 Ins. ena 
 
 abhyam 
 
 aih 
 
 aya ya 
 
 abhyam tbhyam 
 
 abhih Ibhih 
 
 Dat. aya 
 
 — 
 
 ebhyah 
 
 ayai yai 
 
 — — 
 
 abhyah ibhyah 
 
 Abl. at 
 
 — 
 
 — 
 
 ayah yah 
 
 
 
 — — 
 
 Gen. asya 
 
 ayoh 
 
 anam 
 
 — _ 
 
 ayoh yoh 
 
 anam mam 
 
 Loc. e 
 
 — 
 
 eshu 
 
 ayatii yam 
 
 — — 
 
 asu Ishu 
 
 Voc. a 
 
 au 
 
 ah 
 
 e I 
 
 e yau 
 
 ah yah 
 
 NEUTER. 
 
 
 
 / 
 
 
 ^\ 
 
 SING. 
 
 DUAL. 
 
 PLCR. 
 
 
 
 Nom.; 
 
 
 
 The rest of the neuter te 
 
 rminations are 
 
 Ace. r' 
 
 e 
 
 ani 
 
 like the masculine. 
 
 
 Voc. a 
 
 e 
 
 ani 
 
 
 
 The classical student will recognise in this scheme many 
 resemblances to the terminations of nouns in Latin and Greek, 
 when it is remembered that the Sanscrit a corresponds to the 
 Latin u and the Greek o ; the Sanscrit m to the Latin m and the 
 Greek v ; the Sanscirt a or e to the Latin a and the Geek r], or 
 £La, or a, or in the gen. plur. w ; the Sanscrit bh or bhy to the 
 Latin b ; and that the Sanscrit Visargah, or final h, is equivalent to s. 
 
OR OF THE FlKSr FOUR CLASSES OF NOUNS. 
 
 31 
 
 In tlio application of tlio above tiM-niinations. tin* finals of tiio 
 crudes must first be rejected. Tims, taking (leva, and rejecting 
 the final, ^ve have dev ; and adding the terminations, we have the 
 nom. devah, &c. The four examples are now declined in full. 
 
 48. Masculine Crudes in a, like ^, 
 
 N. ^; devah, ^^ devau, 
 
 Ac. ^% devam, — devau, 
 
 -^ I. ^%«T devena, ^^Twit demhhyum, 
 
 D. ^qTHT devaya, — devahhymn, 
 
 Ab. ^"fT devut, — devubhyam, 
 
 G. ^^r?tl devasya, ^^^ft: devayoh, 
 
 L. ^ deve, — devayoh, 
 
 V. ^^ deva, ^ devau, 
 
 In accordance with r. 21, such words as "STt, "a man," '5^, "a 
 man," jttt. " a deer," are written in the ins. sing, ^rt^jr, ^^^, ^^hm, 
 and in the gen. plur. tTOTSTT, M^MHEti » J^IRIT , the cerebral nasal 
 taking the place of the dental. 
 
 49. Feminine Crudes in a and i, like «fNrT, " life,'''' and t^^, " a river^ 
 
 a deity " {deus). 
 
 ^^TK devah. 
 
 ^^rn^ devan. Vn 
 
 ^%: devaih. — - 
 
 ^%«i: devebhyah. 
 ^- — devebhyah. / 
 
 \\\^\ devunam.''^ 
 
 ^^ deveshu. 
 
 ^^; devah. 
 
 'Cm 
 
 ift^>i;a, 
 
 sf^jMje, 
 
 5TT^: >w//i. 
 
 ^AXpvam, 
 
 — ^'f-ye, 
 
 — jwah. x^ 
 
 -C^' 
 
 "^t^x^ jivaya. 
 
 arfl c< l«n jtvabhyam. 
 
 TTkrfW: jivabhih. - 
 
 - D. 
 
 ^'A\i\ jtvayai, 
 
 _a .- _ — , 
 
 — jlvabhyam, 
 
 WNt«t: jivabhyah. 
 
 Ab. 
 . G. 
 - L. 
 
 afmrm. Jivayah, 
 
 — jivahhyam, 
 ifrsnA: jivayoh, 
 
 — jtvabhyah. 
 ^ » .- _ _ 
 
 — jivayah, 
 >\ ♦ .- _ _ 
 
 ifl'^MI^/mwf/w/. 
 
 W^J^^ Jivaya)n, 
 
 — jivayoh, 
 
 TfhlTO^iWW. 
 
 ^ V V. 
 
 ift^jwe, 
 
 ^jive, 
 
 TfNr; jiviih. 
 
 / ^N- 
 
 •l^ nadJ, 
 
 tT^ nadyau, 
 
 Hill nadyah. 
 
 Ac. 
 
 . "rj^' nad'tm, 
 
 — nadyau. 
 
 IT?^: nadih. ^ 
 
 I. 
 
 «raT nadya, 
 
 A^^ nad/bhyum, 
 
 V|(f f»T: nadibhih.. 
 
 D. 
 
 «Ta nadyai. 
 
 — nadibhyuvi. 
 
 •T^«T: nadibhyah. 
 
 Ab 
 
 . •raiJ nadyuh. 
 
 — nadibhyUni, 
 
 — nadibhyah. 
 
 G. 
 
 — nadyuh. 
 
 TRTt: nadyoh, 
 
 tT^Hrt nadinam. 
 
 L. 
 
 *T^T nadyUm, 
 
 — nadyoh, 
 
 IT^J nad/shu. 
 
 ^ V. 
 
 «Tf^ «rt^//, 
 
 »T?fi nadyau. 
 
 ^S: nadyah. 
 
32 DECLENSION OF CRUDES ENDING IN VOWELS, 
 
 50. Neuter Crudes in a, like ^R, "a gift' (donum, ^lopov). 
 
 \'^r^ danam, ^[^ dane, r^[7jTf^ danani. 
 
 Voc. ^r«T da?ta, ^T^ dane, ^RtP^ danani. 
 
 The rest like the masculine deva. 
 
 Observe, that since the voc, dual and plural of the Sanscrit 
 noun coincides with the nom., it will, in future, he omitted. 
 
 y When a feminine noun, like jiva^ is taken to form the last member of a com- 
 pound adjective, it is declined like deva for the masculine, and dnna for the neuter. 
 Thus, taking the feminine noun vidya, "learning;" from this is formed the 
 compound alpavidya, "little learning-." and when this is used as a compound adjec- 
 tive it becomes, in the nom. masc. fern, and neut., alpavidyah, alpavidya, alpavidyam, 
 "possessed of little learning." On the same principle, a masculine noun takes the 
 feminine and neuter terminations when forming the last member of a compound 
 adjective ; and a neuter noun, the masculine and feminine. 
 
 To convince the student of the absolute necessity of studying 
 attentively the declension of this first class of nouns, he is recom- 
 mended to turn back to r. 38. He will there find given, under 
 fifteen heads, the various forms of nouns, substantive and adjec- 
 tive, which follow this declension. All the masculine substantives 
 in this list are declined like deva ; all the feminine either like jiva 
 or nadi ; all the neuter like dana. Again, all the adjectives in this 
 list follow the same three examples for their three genders. 
 Again, according to deva masculine, jJm feminine, and c?owrt neuter, 
 are declined all regular comparative and superlative degrees of 
 the form punyatara, punyatama (r. 71.) ; all irregular superlatives 
 of the form balishtjia (r. 71.) ; all present participles of the forms 
 kurvana, kriyamZma (r. 124.) ; all passive past participles of the 
 form krita, &c., which are the most common and useful of all 
 verbal derivatives (r. 125. 1. 2. 3. 4.) ; all indefinite future participles, 
 which are of constant occurrence, of the forms karya, karamya, 
 kartavya (r. 129.) ; all participles of the second future, of the form 
 karishyamana (r. 130.) ; many ordinals, like prathama (r. 74.). 
 Lastly, according to nadi feminine, are also declined ih& feminities of 
 adjectives like tanu (r. 40.) ; the feminines of innumerable adjectives 
 
OR OF THE FIRST FOUR CLASSKS OF NOUNS. 
 
 33 
 
 like (i/ianai'df, dhlniat (r. 42.), dhaniu, Miicl niedliarhi (r. 1:^.) ; tlio 
 femiuines of nouns of afjency like kUriu (r. 131. 3.); the fc mi /n'/irs 
 of nouns of agency like kartri (r. \3\. 2.); the femin in es of irre- 
 gular eoniparative dc^grees like boTiyas (r. 72. 69.'f') ; the fnni- 
 7ii?ies of present participles like kurvat (r. 123. and 63.) ; th(^ 
 feminities of active participles of the third preterite like kritorat 
 (r. 127. and 62.); ihe feminizes of active participles of the second 
 preterite like rividims (r. 127. and 69.'jO ; the feminines of many 
 ordinals like paiichaina (r. 74.). 
 
 Hence it is evident, that although we have arranged Sanscrit 
 nouns under eight classes, the last seven classes contain but a 
 small proportion of nouns and participles compared with the 
 almost innumerable number embraced by the first. The student, 
 therefore, ought not to advance a step further in the Grammar 
 till he has made himself thoroughly master of this declension. 
 
 There arc a few useful words (o/7^i««% feminine, and not derived from masculines 
 like nadi and pidri,"\D. r. 38. xv.), such as •^, "prosperity," Ht, "fear," •^, 
 "shame," which vary from the declension of -jf^ nadi ; thus, sing. nom. '^:, 
 ace. f^TJ, ins. f^RT, dat. f^ or f^§, abl. and gen. i^T^', or f^Tni. loc. f^f^ 
 or f^lTT. ?o again, ^, "a woman," nom. sing, dual and plur. ^t, f^"^, 
 f^:, ace. f^ or ^•, %-J^, f^(m or ^:, ins. -fi^pPH, Tr^«n. ^f*?:- 
 dat. f^^TT, &c., abl. and gen. f^^TTT: «-^c-, loc. f^l^j &c , voc. f^ &c. qT^I, " for- 
 tune," agrees with •^ &c. in makinij its nom. r^wfl ; . 
 
 SECOND CLASS. — CRUDES IN /, .AIASCUI.INE, FEMININE, AND NEUTER. 
 
 Declined like ofif^ kavi, raasc. '■'■a poet" ; jrfff inati, fern. " the mind" ; 
 
 ■^rft-Wlri, neut. "it-a^er." 
 
 51. Masculine Crudes in i, like grf^ 
 
 N. cfifV. kavih, 
 Ac. e(if^ kavim, 
 I- odfci^l kavma, 
 D. oJT^^ kuvayr, 
 -^Ab.cR^: Aat-eA, 
 
 »; G. — kavefi, 
 
 .^-L. "ag^;} kavnii, 
 V. -g^kavf, 
 
 — kav'/, 
 odfclMlf kavibhydm, 
 
 — kdvcbhydm, 
 
 — knvibhydm^ 
 afi^; kavyoh, 
 
 — karijoh^ 
 
 a poet. 
 oR^Tn karayrih. — 
 
 efi'ftrftT: kavibhUi. - 
 olif^>3i; knvibhyah. 
 — kavibhyah. 
 oR'^rn kavhiiim. 
 adfcm kavishu. 
 
34 
 
 DECLENSION OF CRUDES ENDING IN VOWELS, 
 
 So also, agni, 
 ' union." 
 
 'fire" (ignis) ; and nouns formed from dha, "to hold" ; as, sandhi, 
 
 52. Feminine Crudes in i, like jrfrT, " the mind. 
 
 N. J^ffTt matih, '/--c ~x-Jlift mati, 
 — math 
 JrfiT«n matibhyam 
 
 ^..- . .„. Ac. J^flT matim 
 
 ^^_^^^j9 D- 'nrq mataye, i'^^untr matibhyam, 
 _ 7y Ab. JTff: mafeh* --s^.yv^m^i^^ matibhyam, 
 
 t'^ /^ G. — mateh,*) nr^'. matyoh, 
 
 tf./ ,, L. JT^ matau,*': — matyoh. 
 
 JTrHTt matayah. 
 JTffh matih. 
 J^ffTfir: matibhih. 
 JrfirwK matibhyah. 
 — matibhyah. 
 Jfrfhrt matinam. 
 jrfff^ matishu. 
 
 b-Vt^'-M.-- V. JTff ?/irt/'e, 
 
 
 
 53. iV^ew^er Crwt/es m i, /«A;e ^rft., 
 
 " water " (mare). 
 
 N. ■^ft.twH, 
 
 
 "^n^fJSJ varini. 
 
 Ac. — ?;«r2, 
 
 — varini, 
 
 — vdrini. — 
 
 I. ^ftiin J^arina, 
 
 ^rftwit vdribhyam. 
 
 
 ] D. ■^ft,:^ w"-»ne, 
 
 — vdribhydm, 
 
 ^Xftvq: varibhyah. 
 
 Ab. mfljtg: vdrinak. 
 
 — vdribhydm, 
 
 — vdribhyah. 
 
 G . — vnrinah, 
 
 ^jfmt varinoh, 
 
 <4li)lLlf vdrindm. 
 
 L. ^ir^PliI fflrtrtt, 
 
 — varinoh, 
 
 -^jftS vdrishu. 
 
 \3 
 
 V. ■^rfl.rrtrior'^wre, 
 
 
 
 Although there are few substantives declined like kavi and vari, 
 yet adjectives like shuchi (r. 39.), and compound adjectives ending 
 in i, are declined like kavi in the masc. ; like mati in the fem. ; 
 and like vdri in the neuter. 
 
 y AV^hen a feminine noun ending in i is taken to form the last member of a com- 
 pound adjective, it must be declined like kavi in the masc, and vdri in the neut. 
 Thus the compound adjective alpamati in the ace. plur. masc. would be alpamatin ; 
 
 * The dat. may also be matyai ; the ab. and gen. matyahj the loc. matyam. 
 
OR OF THE FIRST FOUR CLASSES OF xNOUNS. 
 
 35 
 
 fem. alpamafih ; neut. af/wmat/ni. The same holds good if a masc. or neut. noun 
 be taken to form the last member of a eompound. 
 
 The declension of the neuter of this class follows the analogy 
 of nouns in in. Hence, vuri serves also as the model for the 
 neuters of adjectives and nouns of agency in in, like dhanin and 
 kurin (r. 66.) ; and the neuters of nouns of agency in tri, like 
 kartri (r. 57.). 
 
 T There arc two useful irregular masculine nouns in i; viz. ^^ sakhi, "a friend," 
 nom. sing, dual and plur. sakhn, sakhdyau, sakhdyah ; ace. sakhdyum, sakhdyaii, 
 sakhin; ins. sakkyd, sakhibhynm, sakhibhih; dat. sakhye, S^c; abl. and gen. 
 sakhyuh, S^c. ; loc. sakhyau, S^x. ; voc. sakhe, S)C. And Trfrf pati, " a master," which, 
 when not used in a compound word, follows sakhi in the five last cases sing, (thus, 
 ins. patyd, S^x.): in the other cases, kavi. But this word is almost always found as 
 the last member of a compound, and is then regularly declined like kavi; thus, 
 ins. bhupatim, " by the king." The noun ^ft^ asthi, neut. " a bone," drops the 
 tinal vowel in some of its cases ; as, ins. sing, asthnd ; dat. asthne ; abl. unthnah, ^c. 
 
 THIRD CLASS. CRUDES IN U, MASCULINE, FEMININE, AND NEUTER. 
 
 Declined like VTT^ bhdmi, masc. " the sun "; ^^ dhenu, fem. " a mikh cow "; 
 jra »»«<//*«, neut. ^^ honey." 
 
 b\. Masculine Crudes in u, like HT»T bhanu, "the swu'' 
 
 N. ^TT^: bfianuh, >^X^ bhanu, HT^T^: bhmiavah. 
 
 Ac. >Tr^ bhUnuni, — bhanu, *TI^^ bhUnun. 
 
 I. HI»J»fl bhununU, >Tr"5«tt bhUnubhyum, ^TT^ft?: bhunubhih. 
 
 D. >TR^ bhanave, — bhanubhyam, >TT^wi: bhnnubhyah. 
 
 Ab. iTpft: bhanoh, — bhanubhyam, — bhnnubhyah. 
 
 G. — bhanoh, vrrN^: bhavwoh, HT^PTt bhunuHam. 
 
 L. iTT^ bhanau, — bhanwoh, ^T^ bhfniushu. 
 V. >?T»fl bhano. 
 
36 
 
 DECLENSION OF CRUDES ENDING IN VOVvELS, 
 
 55. Feminine Crudes in u, like V^ dhenu, " a milch com. 
 
 Ac. ys^ dhemim, 
 I. V^^ dheiivm, 
 D. >t»T^ dhenave,* 
 Ab. ^: dhenoh* 
 G. — dhenoh,* 
 L. ^ dhemni* 
 
 — dhenu, 
 ^l^vqf dhenubhydm, 
 
 — dhenubhydm, 
 
 — dhenubhydm, 
 V[^l dhenvwh, 
 
 — dhenwoh, 
 
 VtT^; dhenavah. 
 X[^', dhem'th. 
 ■arffi?; dhenubhih. 
 'q^vq: dhenubhyah. 
 — dhenubhyah. 
 \fr{r|| dhenundm. 
 yij^ dhenushu. 
 
 56. Neuter Crudes in u, ///te ^rv madhu, " honey," " ?2?/7/e " (^tSu). 
 
 N. J^n mcidhn, 
 
 Ac. — madhu, 
 
 I, JT>nn madhund, 
 
 D. ?IV% madhune, 
 
 Ab. ?TTir«lt madhunah, 
 
 G. — madhunah, 
 
 L. HVf*T madhuni, - 
 
 V. JT'^ madhu or JTVt madho. 
 
 jf^Tlft madhuni. 
 
 — madhuni, 
 TTiliJiJ madhubhydm, 
 
 \3 
 
 — madhubhydm, 
 
 — madhubhydm, 
 TVcflt madhunah, 
 
 — madhunah, 
 
 ^X[f^ madhuni. 
 
 — madhuni. 
 JflffW; madhubhih. 
 Tfyvq: madhubhyah. 
 
 — madhubhyah. 
 X\y(Tl([ madhundm. 
 7TU? madhushu. 
 
 Although there are but few substantives declined like c?^ewM 
 and madhu, yet it is important to study their declension, as well 
 as that of the masc. noun 6Aow2< ,- for all simple adjectives like 
 mwM, and all like pipasu (r. 40.), and all other simple adjectives in u, 
 and all compound adjectives ending in u, are declined like bhatui 
 in the masc. ; dhenu in the fem. ; and madhu in the neut. Many 
 adjectives in ii, however, optionally follow the declension of nadt, 
 in the fem. ; as, tanu makes its nom. fem. either tanuh or tanml. 
 
 ■f There are one or two feminine nouns in u long, whose declension must be 
 noticed here: as, '^^, "a wife," declined analogously to nadi. Nom. sing. dual, 
 and plur. vadhTth, vadhwau, vudhwah; ace. vadhum, vadhwau, vadhuh ; ins. vadhwd, 
 vadhubhydm, vadhubhih ; dat. iiadhwai, vadhubhydm, vadhubhyah; abl. vadhwdh, S^c. j 
 
 The dat. inav also be dhenwai ; the ab. and gen. dhcnwah ; the loc. dhcnwam. 
 
OR 0¥ THE FIRST FOUR CLASSES OF NOUNS. 
 
 37 
 
 gen. vadhwdli, radhwoh, radhuntlm ; loc. radhwdni, radhtvoh, radlinshu ; voc. I'adliu. 
 So again, »T, "the earth," declined analogously to ^5^. Norn. sing. dual, and plur. 
 bhu/i, bliiirau, hhiivah ; ace. hhuram, bhiiraii^ hhiinth ; ins. hhiird, bhubhydm^ blJi'ihih ; 
 i\at. bhitre or bliiirai,.Sc. ; abl. and gen. Iihnrah ov bhitnlh^ ^c. ; loc. bhnvi or hhu- 
 
 FOURTH CLASS. — CRUDES IN fri TJ, MASCULINE, FEMININE, AND NEUTER. 
 
 Declined like ^TrT drdri, m. f. n. "a girer, fm^pitri, m. '■^ a father." 
 
 57. Masculine form of Crudes in fri, like ^ {dator, ^oTrjp), and fqn^ 
 
 {pater). 
 
 ^ j ^nn data, 
 
 t^frnrr pitu, 
 
 {"^Tl^dUtUram, 
 fiTfTi pitara)!!, 
 ^T^ datra, 
 ^T% dafre, 
 ^: datuh, 
 — datuh, 
 ^^Trrft. datari, 
 STfR datar. 
 
 Ac. 
 
 I. 
 
 D. 
 
 Ab 
 
 G. 
 
 L. 
 
 V. 
 
 ^TflTO datarau, 
 PMritl pitarau, 
 
 — datarau, 
 
 — pitarau, 
 ^TTTWlt datribhyam, 
 
 — datribhyam, 
 
 — datribhyam, 
 ^T^ dutroh, 
 
 — datroh, 
 
 ^TfTR,; datarah. 
 ftHRI pi tar ah. 
 ^M»i datrln. 
 ftTfTJ^ pitrtn, &c. 
 ^Tirf*?: datribhih. 
 i^Tffwj; datribhyah. 
 — datribhyah. 
 ^TtTOT datrmam. 
 ^^3 d^fp^.hu. 
 
 Obs. Nouns of relationship like joeV/i only differ from nouns 
 of agency like f/o/[;'2 in the nom. dual and plural, and the 
 acc. sing, and dual, where the former has the penultimate short, 
 the latter, long. Feminine nouns of relationship like matri, " a 
 mother," are declined like pitri, except in the acc. plural vmr,. 
 
 ■f" '«T nri, "a man," is declined like jiitri {nom. ml, J^c), but usually makes 
 »TTnT in the gen. plural. 
 
 The feminine form of nouns of agency in tri is declined like 
 nadi ; as, nom. ^r#, &c. (see r. 49.). 
 
 The neuter form follows the declension of vari ; as, nom. acc. 
 ^, ^T^, ^■rrftrr (see r. :)3.). 
 
38 
 
 DECLENSION OF CRUDES ENDING IN CONSONANTS, 
 
 Sect. II.— DECLENSION OF CRUDES ENDING IN CONSO- 
 NANTS, OR OF THE LAST FOUR CLASSES OF NOUNS. 
 
 General Observations. 
 58. The first four classes of nouns, whose declension has just 
 been considered, comprise nearly all the substantives in the lan- 
 guage. If we except substantives ending in man and as, the 
 last four classes of nouns consist almost entirely of adjectives, 
 participles, and roots, taken to form the last member of compound 
 words. There is one general scheme of terminations applicable 
 to all nouns endins in consonants. It is as follows : — 
 
 
 SING. 
 
 DUAL. 
 
 PIXRAL. 
 
 Norn. 
 
 
 au 
 
 ah 
 
 Ace. 
 
 am 
 
 — 
 
 — 
 
 Inst. 
 
 a 
 
 bki/am 
 
 bhih 
 
 Dat. 
 
 e 
 
 — 
 
 bhyah 
 
 Abl. 
 
 ah 
 
 
 — 
 
 Gen. 
 
 — 
 
 oh 
 
 am 
 
 Loc. 
 
 i 
 
 
 
 su 
 
 Voc. 
 
 
 au 
 
 ah 
 
 This scheme applies without exception to the few substantives, 
 and to the masculine of the many adjectives and participles, 
 whose crudes end in consonants. It also applies, with the excep- 
 tion of the nom. and ace. cases, to the neuter of these same adjec- 
 tives and participles ; but their feminine generally follows the 
 declension of nadt (r. 49.). The nominative singular admits of 
 so much variation, that no one" termination is general enough 
 to be inserted in the scheme. 
 
 Many of the terminations will be already familiar to the 
 learner, especially those of the dual and plural. Indeed, certain 
 terminations prevail, with various modifications, in all Sanscrit 
 nouns : and this prevalence of certain sounds, as characteristic 
 of certain cases, has led native grammarians into the error of 
 constructing a technical scheme of terminations, which they apply 
 universally in the declension of every noun in the language. 
 This technical scheme does, in point of fact, correspond with the 
 
OR OF THE LAST FOUR CLASSES OF NOUNS. 39 
 
 sc-heme we liave ;i;iven aboviN as applicable to tlie last four classes ; 
 but when, on comparing this witli the scheme belonging to tlie 
 first chiss (r. 47.), it is seen how very great is the dissimilarity 
 between the two ; and when it is remembered that the first class 
 embi-aces a much larger number of nouns than all the other seven 
 classes combined, there seems but little reason for any such 
 jirocess of generalization. For surely if any general scheme is 
 given at all, it should be that which is most universally applicable: 
 and if any system of adaptation is to be adopted, it should consist 
 in an adaptation of the smaller number to the larger, rather than 
 the larger to the smaller ; or we are led into endless alteration 
 and substitution, and very unnecessary perplexity and confusion. 
 
 1 inhere arc two or tlu-ee useful words in the language ending in ai, o, and aw, 
 which conform to the scheme of nouns ending in consonants. Thus, raf, m. 
 "■wealth." N . rah, rdyau, rdyah; A. rdyam, rayau, rdyah; I. rCiyd, nibhydvi, 
 riihhih, ..Sc {cf. rebu^). Go, m. f. "an ox or cow." N . gauh, gdvau, gdi^ah ; ac.gdm, 
 gavati, gdh ; ins. gavd, gohhydm, gobliih, S;c. And nmi, f. "a ship." N. nauh, 
 ndi'aii, ndvah ; ace. ndvam, ndran, ndi^an ; ins. ndvd^ &;c. (Cf. vaC?, navis). 
 
 FIFTH CLASS. — CRUDES IN t AND (/, MASCULINE, FEMININE, AND NEUTER. 
 DecKned like ehiHcfiri karmmakrit, m. f. n. "a doer of work"; yr^f^ dharinrmrid, 
 m. f. n. '■'■0716 who knows his duty"; ^*\4J( dhanarat, m. f. n. "wealthy." 
 59. Masculine and Feminine form of Crudes in t and d, declined 
 like efjT^oRrT and vrlrf^^f . 
 N. -afi^^ knrmnkrit* chi^cfiif^ knrniakritmt, dk**{dktr, karmakritah. 
 
 Ac. cfiUl^ri kannakritam, — — — — 
 
 I. oR»l<+f(| karmakritd, cRT^ofrgn karmakridbhydtu, ch^odf^; karmakridbhih. 
 U- ah^eh^ karmakrite, — — ofi^raiWI karmiikridbhyuh. 
 
 Ab. cd^diKt karmakritah, — — — — 
 
 G. — — eST^'efifft: karmakrltoli, ofiT^oRTft karniakritdm. 
 
 L. o|i*Aa|ifrI karmakriti, — knrmakritoh, cfci^^r^ karmukritsu. 
 
 V. Like the nominative. 
 
 * Although r has the effect of doubling the letter immediately under it in the 
 Sanscrit character (r. .38.), it is unnecessary always to double the letter in tlic 
 Roman type. Strictly, however, this word should be written karmmakrit. 
 
40 DECLENSION OF CRUDES ENDING IN CONSONANTS, 
 
 N. \|4^r<4f^ dharmavid, V^^f^^ dharmavidau, V^f^l dhurmavidah. 
 
 Ac VJ^f^ dharmavidam, S;c. 
 
 Loc. plur. \IT^'f^r^ dharmavitsu, by r. 14. 
 
 The neuter form of nouns like karmakrit and dharmnvid is, 
 in the nom. and ace. ^bj^^, '^ff^Tft, ^^^f^, v»^f%^, \F^^, 
 ^»^f^T^. In the other cases it resembles the masc. and fem. 
 
 60. All substantives like jt^TT marut, m. " wind," ^I«rf sampad, f. 
 " success," and ofiiT? kuniud, n. " a lotus," follow the declension of 
 karmakrit and dharmavid : thus, nom. marut, marutau, marutah ; 
 sampad, sampadau, sampadah ; kumud, kumudl, kumundi, &c. 
 
 61. The masculine form of crudes formed with the affixes vat 
 and mat, is declined like \nTTfr. 
 
 N. V«T^T^ dhanavan, tHM»di dhanavantau, V^R^J dhanavantah. 
 Ac. ^iHcj-fi dhanavantam, — dhanavantau, V*niT: dlianavatah. 
 Voc. ii'^'^TT dhanavan, 
 
 The other cases are like karmakrit •■, as, ins. X(r{^nn dhanavatd, &c. 
 
 The feminine form of nouns like dhanavat is declined like nadt : 
 thus, nom. dhanavati, dhanavatyau, dhanavafyah, &c. (see r. 49.). 
 
 The neuter form is, in the nom. and ac, dhanavat, dhanavati, 
 dhanavanti; and in the other cases like the masculine. 
 
 62. So, also, all adjectives like '^^'^ dhlmat, " wise," and all 
 active past participles like "^fJTff kritavat, " he did " (r. 127,) : thus, 
 Jiom. masc. dhiman, &c., kritavan, &,c. ; ace. dhlmantani, &c., krita- 
 vantam, &c. ; voc. dhiman, &c. So, also, the nom. fem. dhtmatl, &c., 
 kritavatt, &c. ; and nom. neut. dhlmat, &c., kritavat, &c. 
 
 63. After dhanavat may also be declined present participles like 
 TT^ pachat, " cooking " (r. 123.), except in the nom. sing., which 
 is pachan instead of pachan. Many of these participles also differ 
 from dhanavat, by inserting a nasal throughout all the cases of 
 the feminine. Thus, nom. pachantl, pachantyau, pachantyah ; ace. 
 pachantzm, pachantyau, pachantlh ; ins. pachantya, &c. 
 
 The adjective JTfW mahat, " great," is declined like dhanavat, 
 but makes the penultimate long before the nasal ; thus, nom. 
 mahan, viahantau, mahantah ; ace. mahTtntam, malnmtau, mahatah : 
 nom. fem. mahatt, 8:c. : nom. neut. nwhat, mahatl, mahanti. 
 
OR OF THE LAST FOUR CLASSES OF NOUNS. 
 
 41 
 
 SIXTH CLASS. 
 
 -CRUDES IN an AND IIU MASCULINE, FEMININE, AND 
 NKUTEll. 
 
 Declined like ^3rn*TH I'tnum, m. "soul"; TTSHT ritjuu, m. "a kiiiy"; ef^i'^TI kurmaji, 
 n. "a deed"; ^\Hfi lulmau, n. "a naiue"; o«rf vfVpT dhdtiin, m. f. n. "•nV/t." 
 
 64. Masculine a)i<l Fc»iinitiofor77i of Crudes iti an, ilccUued like 
 T «/?^/ tir»r^- (Cf. re.r, regis). 
 
 N. 
 
 Ac. 
 
 I. 
 
 D. 
 
 Ab. 
 
 G. 
 
 r 
 
 In 
 
 at/iiu, 
 
 raja, 
 ->MlrHH (itmUiiatfi, 
 
 rajauam, 
 j^lr«Hl atmana, 
 Xxx^ rajuu, 
 ( '311W^ af/uane, 
 (jj% raj lie, 
 j *lrWr|: iUmanah, 
 ItT^ rujnah, 
 ( — atmanah, 
 
 ^rrf»TT^ atnianau, 
 TT^rn^ rajanau, 
 
 — atmanau, 
 
 — rajanau, 
 ^HTiTWlt atniabhi/am, 
 TT5TW»t rujabhyam, 
 
 — utmahhyum, 
 
 — rajabJii/ain, 
 
 — atmabhyam, 
 
 — rajabhyum, 
 »HI?W«fh atmanoh, 
 X^'. rujnoh, 
 
 — atmanoh, 
 
 — rajnoh,' 
 
 rnr: atmanah. 
 
 TJirnTt rajanah. 
 ^Ttf^\ Zitmanah. 
 TJ^: rTijnah.* 
 'J)lr«(*T: atmabhih. 
 TJirfiT: rajabJiih. 
 ■^T7»T«i: at)iiabliyah. 
 ^JlT^'Tt rajabhyah. 
 
 — atmabhyah. 
 
 — rajabhyah. 
 ^TTFRT atmanam. 
 xy^ rajnam. 
 ^TTPRTT atmasu. 
 
 o 
 
 TJilH rajasu. 
 
 — rajnah, 
 y ( ^TWfJT atmani, 
 
 'tJ% rajni, 
 -y j »HIWd atman, 
 
 ' U»l»^ rajan, 
 
 65. Observe, that it is necessary to give two examples of nouns 
 in ffw, because if rtw be preceded by m or v, and this ;w or t? be 
 conjunct with a preceding consonant, the noun is then declined 
 like atman. Hence, ^ig^^ adhman, m. "a road," and l^g^ r/r/i/i- 
 waw, m. " a looker," make in the ins. adhrvana, drishwanU. But 
 if this w or v be not conjunct, then the noun follows r«/V?w ; as, 
 laghiman, m. "lightness"; ins. laghimna. And if aw be preceded 
 by any other consonant than m or r, even although it be conjunct. 
 
 * As remarked in p. 3., this word is usually pronounced ragyah ; hut, for the 
 better illustration of the present subject, 5I is represented by jn throughout the 
 declension of tlm noun. 
 
 t Or rdjani. 
 
 G 
 
42 DECLENSION OF CRUDES ENDING IN CONSONANTS, 
 
 the noun then also follows rajan ; as, ^rivr murddhan, m. " the 
 head'"'; ins. ^5T murddJma. 
 
 There are no simple feminine nouns in an ; but when masculine 
 nouns are taken to form the last member of a compound adjective 
 they take a feminine and neuter form ; as in mahatman, " magna- 
 nimous/*'* The feminine form, however, is declined precisely 
 like the masculine, and the neuter follows the declension of kar- 
 man below, 
 
 66. Neuter Crudes in man, declined like ^iWJT and qiHH {nomen). 
 In the former the m is conjunct, in the latter, not. 
 
 karma, c(,*^# karmanl, op^rfin karmuni. 
 
 \ '^^ nama tH^ namni, rfRTf^ namani. 
 
 Ac. I 
 
 T ( cfiT^TrjT ka rm ana) 
 Ins. ] _ _ • i" 
 
 N.r 
 
 and< 
 
 namnd. ' karmanam, namnam ; loc. karmasu, namasu. 
 
 So also the neuter nouns, janman, veshman, ashman, varman, 
 vartman, charman, chhadman, follow the declension of karman ; 
 but daman, suman, dhmnan, vyoman, roman, ipreman, that of naman. 
 When neuters in an compose the last member of compound adjec- 
 tives, they may take the masc. or fem. form.^ 
 
 'f Anomalies in an : "SEfTT , m. (cf. kvmv), "a dog." Nom. •^, yj 1 r|^[ , "sgT«Tt ; 
 ace. ■ ^H , vjltfi, ^"^j. In all these anomalies the ace. c. plur. is generally the 
 clue to the form assumed by the noun before the terminations beginning with 
 vowels. Thus, instr. is ^^, "'jwrt, &c. So again, ^^^ , m, f. n. (cf. juvenis) 
 " young " ; nom. yum, yuvanau, yuvanah ; ace. yuvanam, yiivanau, yunah ; inst. yuna, 
 yuvabhydm, &^c. 'ss|^^«f , " a Brahmicide " ; nom. -'^, -"^TJft* -'5'Tt ; ace. -'^irj', 
 -^rfl', -TT: ; instr. ■jn&C. ■^^, n. "a day"; nom. and ace. ^If:, W^, ov 
 '^^, ^^fff ; instr. W^-[, '5T^t«n, ^^^: ; dat. ^ &C. 
 
 * "N^Tien rajan is taken to form a compound of tliis kind, it is declined like dei-a 
 (r. 48.); as, nom. maharajah; ace. maliarajcnn^Sfc. 
 
 t As in the sentence, Vedagarhhanama Bi'dhmana asit, " There was a Brahmin 
 named Vedagarbha." 
 
OR OF THE LAST FOUR CLASSES OF NOUNS. 
 
 13 
 
 67. Masculine form of Crudes in in, declined like vf?nT, " rich.'''' 
 
 N. V^ dhanl, 
 Ac. >jf^q' d/ianitiani, 
 I. vfriffl d/ianinu, 
 D. vf^T^ dJionine, 
 Ab. 'yf«T'^: d/ianina/i, 
 G. — dhaninah, 
 L. ^jfHfff d/ianini, 
 V. vf^ dhanin, 
 
 vf^T^T dhaninau, 
 
 — dhaninau, 
 >lfrr«n dhanibhyUm, 
 
 — dhanihhynm, 
 
 — dhanibhyZnn, 
 Vf^rft: dhaninoh, 
 
 — dhaninoh, 
 
 Tjftr^t dha7iinah. 
 
 — dhaninah. 
 X^iw, dhanibhih. 
 vftr^i: dhanibhyah. 
 
 — dhanibhyah. 
 ^.'^'nTT dhaninam. 
 ^iftrn dhanishu. 
 
 So also nouns of agency like Mnn. The fem. form of nouns 
 in /« is declined like wa(;?« ; as, nom. dhanim, ktirinl (see r. 49.). 
 
 The neuter form follows the declension oi vari ; as, nom. vfVf, 
 ^^^, "tRtf^ (see r. 53.). 
 
 i' Pathin, m. "a path," is declined irregiilarly ; thus, sing, panthuh, panthanmn, 
 patlia, paths, pathah, pathi, pathin; dual, panthdnau, pathibhydm, puthoh ; plur. pan- 
 thanah, pathah, pathibhih, pathibhyah, pathTim, pathishu. 
 
 SEVENTH CLASS. CRUDES IN aS, MASCULINE, FEMININE, AND NEUTER. 
 
 Declined like -^v^HH chandramas, m. '•^thevioon" ; and ^7^^ manas, n. "iAe mind." 
 
 68. Masculine and Feminine form of Crudes in as, declined like ■«I»^H^. 
 
 N. xir^HIt chandraiiiah, ^^^JT^ chnndraj/iasau^ "^P^^^l chandramamh. 
 Ac. ^rg^JTO chdndramasam, — thandrainrisau, — vhandramasnh. 
 
 I. •^I'^tmi chfindramasa, '^vp^^j^t^chandramobhyaiii, '^fr^^fij', clunuframohhih. 
 D. '^^^^ eh(mdruniase,S;c. 
 The other cases arc like the neuter below, excepting the voc. dual and plur. (r. .W.). 
 
 69. Neuter Crudes in as, declined like W^^ (fxevog, mem). 
 
 JRtftr manunsi. 
 
 — manunsi. 
 ini^: manobhih. 
 JnfNTt manobhyah. 
 
 — nuinobltyah. 
 ^^^'^\ manasUm. 
 
 jnanassu (or -:tt). 
 
 N. V. wm manah, 
 
 Ac. — manah, 
 
 I. T^nn manasa, 
 
 D. >nr^ manase, 
 
 Ab. iT'^nr: nianasah, 
 G. — inanasah, 
 
 L. JT^F manasi, 
 
 ♦rinft manasi, 
 
 — manasi, 
 Irft^rf manobhyum, 
 
 — manobhyum, 
 
 — manobhyum, 
 JTT^t manasoh, 
 
 — manasoh, 
 
44 DECLENSION OF CRUDES ENDING IN CONSONANTS, 
 
 Observe, that the masculine noun chandramas is also the model 
 for the fem. noun apsaras, " a nymph," and for the fem. form of 
 compound adjectives, and that it only differs from the neuter in 
 the nom. and ace. cases. 
 
 Nearly all simple substantives in as are neuter ; but when these 
 substantives are taken to form a compound adjective, they are 
 declinable also in the masculine and feminine like chandramas. 
 Thus, when manas is taken to form the compound adjective 
 maMmanas, "magnanimous,"' it makes in the nom. (masc. and 
 fem.) mahamanah, mahamanasau, mahamanasah. In the same way 
 is formed durmanas, " evil-minded " (nom. durmanah, &c.), to 
 which a very remarkable analogy is presented by the Greek 
 dva-fxev^g, m. and f , making in the neut. Bvcrixeve^, derived from 
 IJ.evo£. (Prof. Eastvvick's transl. of Bopp's Comp. Gram. §. 146.). 
 
 f There are a few neuter nouns in is and us, which are declmed exactly like 
 manas, suhstituting i and tt for a throughout, and therefore sh for *, and r for o 
 (r. 30. 27.). Thus, Havis, "ghee"; nom. and ace. Havih, Havishi, Havinshi; 
 ins. Havishd, Havirhhyam, Havirbhih, S^c. ; and chakshus, " the eye " ; nom. and 
 ace. chakshuh, chakshushl, chakshunshi ; ins. chakshusha, chakshurbhydm, chakshur- 
 hhih, &;c. Ashis, f. "a blessing," makes in the nom. dshih, ashishau, ashishah; ace. 
 dshisham, ashishau, ashishah, Sjc. Similarly, (Ios,Tn. "the arm"; but this last is 
 in the ins. either dosha or doshna ; dat. doshe or doshne, S^-c. Puns, " a male " ; 
 nom. pumdn, pumansau, puniansah ; ace. piwiTmsam, pumansau, punsah ; ins.punsd 
 pumbhydm, &^c. 
 
 Adjectives in the comparative degree, formed by the affix tyas (r. 71-), follow the 
 declension of manas, except in the nom. and ace. Thus, baliyas, " more power- 
 ful"; nom. hallyan, baliyansau, baliydnsah ; ace. ballyansam, baliyansau, ballyasah ; 
 ins. baliyasa, ballyobhydrn, S^-c. The voc. sing is baliyan. The fem. fonn is declined 
 like nadl (r. 49.). The neut. form is declined like manas throughout. 
 
 Participles of the 2d preterite (r. 127.), like vividwas (from vid, "to know") and 
 jagmivas {from gam, "to go") are declined in some of their cases as if they were 
 written invidus, jagmyus ; and in others as if written vividwat, jagmivat. Thus, 
 nom. vividwan, -wdnsau, -wansah ; ace. vividwdnsam, -wdnsau, vividushah ; ins. vivi- 
 dushd, vividwadbhydm, vividwadbhih. The root virf, " to know," has an irregular pres. 
 part, vidwas, used often as an adjective ("learned"), and declined exactly like 
 vividwas. These participles are declined like nadl in the fem. (r. 49.), and in the 
 
OR OF THE LAST FOUR CLASSES OF NOUNS. 45 
 
 ncut. like the masc., except in the nom. and ace, whicli are viridwah, viridmhi, 
 vindu-uiuii. The advanced student will here observe, that as the 2d preterite of 
 rid, "to know," is used as a present tense, so the participle of the 2d preterite is 
 used as a present participle, the reduplicated sylliible only being rejected. 
 
 Eighth Class. — crudes in ani/ Consonard except t, n, s, masculine, 
 
 FEMININE, AND NEUTER. 
 
 70. This class consists principally of roots taken to form the 
 last member of compound words. Tliey are not of very common 
 occurrence, except as ending in t or d (see karmakrit, r. 59.). The 
 only difficulty in their declension arises from their combination 
 with those terminations in the scheme at r. 58., which begin with 
 consonants, viz. three cases in the dual, and four in the plural. 
 Whatever change, however, takes place in the nominative, is pre- 
 served before these consonantal terminations. Thus, masc. and 
 fem. bhuj, "an eater": nom. bhuk ; ins. dual hhughhyam; ins. plur. 
 hhughhih ; \oc. bhukshu. So again sprish, nova, sprik * and in 
 the other cases, sprigbhyam, sprigbJiih, sprikshu. So again raj, 
 nom. rat (jj^) ; and the other cases, radbhyam, radbhih, rafsu. 
 And lih, " a licker," nom. lit (f^) ; and the other cases, lidbhyam, 
 Udbhih, Htsu. And duk, nom. dhuk * and the other cases, dhug- 
 b/iya?n, dhugbhih, dhukshii. Before the terminations which begin 
 with vowels, the final consonant of the root, whatever it may 
 be, is always preserved. Thus, ace. bhujam, sprisham, rujam, liham> 
 duham, &c. ; ins. bhuja, sprishu, ruju, liha, duha, &c. The neuter 
 is as follows : nom., ace, voc. (sing., dual, and plur.), bhuk, bhuji, 
 bhunji ; rut, rdjz, rahji; lit, lihi, linhi; dhuk, duhi, dunhi. 
 
 J The few simple nouns which fall under this class are declined on a similar 
 principle. But asrij, n. "blood" (nom. asrik), makes in the ins. asrija or asna ; 
 dat. asrije or asne; ace. pi. asriiiji or asdni: ap, f. "water," is declined in the 
 plural only ; thus, apah, apah, adbhili, adbhyuh, apam, apsu, ttpah : div, f. " the sky," 
 sing. nom. dyauh; ace. divam or dyam; ins. diva, S^c; dual, divau, dyulhyatn, 
 divoh ; plur. nom. ace. dirah ; ins. dyubhih, S;c. 
 
 * ^ sh and ^ h appear to be nearly allied to k, and often pass into k in Greek and 
 Latin words. Thus, from dcnha, " ten," otxa, " decern "; from 7^, KapSia, "cor." 
 
46 
 
 ADJECTIVES. 
 
 Sect. III.— ADJECTIVES. 
 
 The declension of substantives involves that of adjectives ; 
 and, as already seen, the three examples of substantives, given 
 under each class, serve as the model for the three genders of 
 adjectives falling under the same class. Adjectives, in their 
 simplest form, not derived from substantives, are very rarely found 
 in Sanscrit. Such as do occur belong chiefly to the first and 
 third classes of nouns; as, priya, *'dear" (nom. m. f. n. j)riyah, 
 priya, priyam, r. 48. 49. 50.) ; sadhu, " good " (nom. m. f. n. sudhuh, 
 sadhuh or sudhwi, sadhu, r. 54. 55. 49. 56.). 
 
 Adjectives for?ned from substantives are very numerous, as may 
 be seen by a reference to r. 38. 42. and 43. iv. They belong 
 chiefly to the first, fifth, and sixth classes of nouns. The following 
 examples may be added to those already given ; manusha, " human " 
 (nom. m. f. n. manushah, manusM, manusham, r. 48. 49. 50.) ; shrtmat, 
 " prosperous " (nom. m. f. n. shriman, shrimafi, shrtmat, r. 62.) ; halin, 
 " strong "" (nom. m. f. n. hall, balinl, ball, v. 67.). 
 
 Compound adjectives are most abundant. The following are ex- 
 amples : phalopeta, " possessed-of-fruit "; durbuddhi, " evil-minded "; 
 alpatanu, " small-bodied "; sarvajit, " all-conquering "; sujanman, 
 " well-born "; gatachetas, " bereft-of- sense "; which are thus refer- 
 rible to their respective classes. 
 
 
 1st class. 
 
 2d class. 
 
 3d class. 
 
 5th class. 
 
 6th class. 
 
 7th class. 
 
 Nom. m. 
 
 phalopetah 
 
 durbuddhih 
 
 alpatanuh 
 
 sarvajit 
 
 sujanmd 
 
 gatachetdh 
 
 Nom. f. 
 
 phalopeta 
 
 durhuddhih 
 
 alpatanuh 
 
 sarvajit 
 
 sujanmd 
 
 gatachetdh 
 
 Nom. n. 
 
 phalopetani 
 
 durbuddhi 
 
 alpatanu, 
 
 sarvajit 
 
 sujanma 
 
 gatachetah 
 
 71. The degrees of comparison are formed in two ways; 
 1st, by adding to the crude IR tar a (nom. -tar ah, -tara, -taram, 
 cf. Greek repoc) for the comparative ; and im tama (nom. -tamah. 
 
 * When it is remembered that final h often becomes s, and that a is equivalent 
 in pronunciation to ii, the three genders of this adjective might be written jyriyiis 
 priyd, priyum ; thus offering a perfect similarity to Latin adjectives in us. 
 
ADJECTIVES. 47 
 
 -taum, -tamanu cf. Greek Taro?) for the superlative. Thus, puni/a, 
 " holy,'"' ^innR punyatara, " more holy," (^{uidH punyatama, " most 
 holy," declined like nouns of the first class (r. 4S. 49. 50.). So, 
 also, dhanavat, " wealthy," dhanavoUara, " more wealthy," dhana- 
 vattama, "most wealthy"; and dhanin, dhanitara, dhanitama (r- 20.^). 
 2dly, by adding ^xpfr lyas (nom. -lyan, -lyasi, -lyah, cf. Greek /wi/) 
 for the comparative, and ^ ishtha (nom. -ishthah -ishtha, -ishtham, 
 cf. Greek ictto^) for the superlative. In general, the only change 
 that takes place before these affixes is the rejection of a final 
 vowel, or of an affix. Thus, balin, " strong," becomes bal, making 
 ^c;i1.M^^ baUyas, "stronger" (seer. 69.'|'), ^%? halishtJia "strongest" 
 (declined like nouns of the first class) ; laghu, " light," becomes 
 logh, making laghlyas, "lighter," laghishtha, "lightest." Observe, 
 however, that these affixes do not often imply coni})arison, but 
 simply excess : thus, baltyas and balishtha more usually signify 
 " very strong." 
 
 y But besides the rejection of the final, the crude often undergoes considerable 
 change, as in Greek ; and its place is sometimes supplied by a substitute. Thus, 
 mrihi, "soft," becomes virad, making mradiyas, mradishthaj guru, "heavy," 
 gar, making garlyas (cf. Latin gravius), gari.shtha; priya, "dear," pra, making 
 preyas, preshtha ; balm, "many," bM, making bhuyas, bhuyishtha ; dirgha, "long," 
 drdgh ; diira, "{&!'," dav ; antika, " near," ned ; kshudra, "small," kshod; yuvan, 
 " yoimg," yav ; prashasyu, "good," shra ; * alpri, " small," kan ; uru {evpv^), "large," 
 var, making varlyas, varishtha {Fapia-ro^). See Prof. Eastwick's translation of 
 Bopp's Comp. Gram. §. 298. 
 
 Sect. IV.— NUMERAL ADJECTIVES. 
 
 72. Cardinals. 
 
 T»efi eka, 1 ; f^ dwi, 2 ; f? tri, 3 ; -^T. chatur, 4 ; which are thus 
 declined. 
 
 Eka, " one " (singular only), follows the declension of prono- 
 minals : nom. m. ekah ; dat. m. ekasmai ; nom. f. eka ; dat. f. 
 ekasyai; nom. n. ekam (see sarva, r. 87.). 
 
 * Prof. Bopp derives shreyas and shrcuhtha from ihrlmaf, "fortunate," the 
 affix being rejected. 
 
48 
 
 NUMERAL ADJECTIVES. 
 
 Dwi, " two " (dual only), is declined as if the crude were cltva 
 nom., ace, voc, m. dwau, f. n, dwe ; ins., dat., ab. m. f. n. dwahhyam . 
 gen., loc. dwayoh. 
 
 Tri, " three,'" and chatur, " four '^ (plural only), declined — 
 
 N. V. trayah, tisrah, 
 Ac. trin, — 
 
 I. tribhih, tisribhih, 
 
 D. A. tribhyah, tisribhyah, 
 G. trayanam, tisrinam, 
 L. trishu, tisrishu, 
 
 trini, 
 
 chatwarah, chatasrah, 
 chaturah, — 
 
 chaturbh ih, cha tas r ibh ih, 
 chatiirbhyah, chatasribhyah, 
 chaturnam, chatasrinam, 
 chaturshu, chatasrishu, 
 
 chatmari. 
 
 The neuter only differs from the masc. in the nom., voc, and 
 ace. cases. 
 
 tj^T^ panchan, 5 ; ^ti shash, 6 ; ^rsn^ saptan, 7 ; ^F!T ash fan, 8 ; 
 fT^ navan, 9 ; ^jfR dasJian, 10. 
 
 73. Panchan, " five "; shash, " six "; ashtan, " eight " (plural 
 only) ; declined — 
 
 M. F. N. M. F. N. M. F. N. 
 
 N. Ac. V. paiicha, shat, ashta or ashtau. 
 
 Ins. pahchabhih, shadbhih, ashtabhih or ashtabhih. 
 
 D. Ab. panchabhyah, shadbhyah, ashtabhyah or ashtabhyah. 
 
 Gen. panchcinam, shannam, ashtanam. 
 
 Loc. panchasu, shatsu, ashtasu or ashtasu. 
 
 Saptan, navan, and dashan, and all other numerals ending in 
 an, follow the declension oi panchan. 
 
 Ekadashan, 11 ; dwadashan, 12 ; trayodashan, 13 ; chaturdashan, 
 14 ; panchadashan, 13 ; shodashan (^^[^'S^;r\^, 16 ; saptadashan, 17 ; 
 ashtadashan, IS ; navadashan or unavinsJiati, 19 ; mnshati (H^lPri), 20 ; 
 trinshat (ft^m;^), 30 ; chatwarinshat {^RlpT^n^), 40 ; panchashat 
 (^^T^nt,), 30; shashti ("Tfe), 60; saptati (^VJfd), 70; ashJti {'^'^[tfif), 80; 
 wflttja^i (^fnfff). 90 ; ^/iato, n. (^), 100 ; sahasra, n. (¥^), 1000. As 
 from dashan, "ten," are formed ekadashan, dwadashan, trayodashan, 
 &c., so from vinshati, " twenty," are formed ekavinshati, " twenty- 
 one"; dwavinshati, "twenty-two"; ^/-aj/oums/w^/, " twenty- three," &c. 
 But due regard must be paid to the laws of combination; thus, 
 
NUMERAL ADJECTIVES. 49 
 
 shadvinshati (^T^rfir). '26 ; trayastrinshat, 33 ; shatjrinshaf, 36 ; clin- 
 tushehatwurinshat, 44 ; chatuhpanchushot (^TTIHidfl^rrf), 54 ; trai/ah- 
 saptati (T^:^fffiT). 73 ; tri/ashlfi (^JT^ftfa"), 83 ; pahchUshlti, 85 ; shanua- 
 ■va/i (^W^ft{), 96. 
 
 Vinshati (20), and trimhat (30), care declined like fern, nouns of 
 the third and fifth classes, usually in the singular. As, ^TRejiiTr 
 f^^rftr f^^^R. " he infixed twenty arrows." Shata (lOO), anhasra 
 (ICOO), are neut. nouns of the first class, usually declined in the 
 sing-.; as, ^T^ fTTfRt. " a thousand ancestors": or they may govern 
 a genitive case ; as, H^ f^fTOT (cf. the use of the Latin ni'ille). 
 
 74. Ordinals. 
 
 Prathama, " first ""; dwithja, " second "; tritlya, " third "; are de- 
 clined as pronominals (see r. 87.). 
 
 Chaturtha, " fourth '"' (cf. Terapro^) ; panchama, " fifth "; sjiashtha 
 (w?). " sixth "; saptama, " seventh ""', ashtama, " eighth "; navama, 
 " ninth "; dashama, " tenth "; like nouns of the first class (nom. 
 -ah, -J, -a)7i). 
 
 The ordinals from " eleventh " to " twentieth," are formed from 
 the cardinals, by rejecting the final n; thus, ekMasha (nom. -ah, 
 -z, -am). 
 
 "Twentieth" is formed, either by adding the superlative affix 
 tama to the cardinal, as vinshatitama ; or by rejecting the final, 
 and leaving vinsha (nom. -ah, -z, -am). So also trinshaftama or 
 trinsha, " thirtieth." Similarly " fortieth " and " fiftieth," The 
 other decimal cardinals form the ordinals either by adding tat»a, 
 or by changing ti to ta ; as, sapfatitama or saptata, "seventieth." 
 
 Numerical Symbols. 
 I r2 3 1 5 6 7 8 9 10 
 
CHAPTER V. 
 
 PRONOUNS. 
 
 FORMATION OF THE CRUDE. 
 
 Proxouns have no crude state analogous to that of nouns, that 
 is, no state distinct from all inflexion, serving as the basis on 
 which all the cases are constructed. 
 
 The question then arises, what form of the pronoun is used in 
 the formation of compound words. In the pronouns of the first 
 and second persons, the ablative cases, singular and plural, and in 
 the other pronouns, the nominative and accusative cases neuter, 
 are considered as expressive of the most general and comprehen- 
 sive state of the pronoun. These cases, therefore, discharge the 
 office of a crude, and are constantly found at the commencement 
 of compound words. 
 
 DECLENSION OF THE PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 
 
 75. inr mat, " I," is taken for the crude of the sing. ; and ^rWTT 
 asmat, " we," for the crude of the plur. of the first personal 
 pronoun. 
 
 N. wi aham, " I." ^TT^ avam, " we two," •^^ vayam, " we." 
 
 Ac. ?n mam, " me," * — dvdm, " us two," * ^WT^ asmdn, " us." * 
 
 I. lf^] 77iaya, W^^T^avabhyam, ^jr(jfi1l asmdbhih. 
 
 D. IT^ mahyam* — avabhyam* '^rTRWT csmabhyam* 
 
 Ab. ;flf|T niat^ — avabhyam, ^T^TiT asmat. 
 
 G. JTH mama* m\ 'A ' iA\ \ avayoh* W^TSfi asmdkam* 
 
 L. ^f^ mayi, — avayoh, ^TWm asmdsu. 
 
 76. 1^ hvat, 
 •MiH'rf yiishmat, 
 personal pronoun. 
 
 " thou,'' is taken for the crude of the sing, ; and 
 you,'' for the crude of the plural of the second 
 
 *■ The ace. sing, may also be jtT ; the dat., gen. ^ ; the ace., dat., gen. dual rH 
 the ace., dat., gen. plur. tTt (cf- Lat. nos). 
 
PRONOUNS. 
 
 51 
 
 N. f^twam, "thou, 
 Ac, f^ twdtn^* 
 I. rSnrr twaya, 
 D. irvq tulhyam* 
 Ab. J^ twat, 
 G. if^ ^ara,* 
 
 ^^ yuvilm, " you two," X[t| yuyam^ " you." 
 
 — yiivdm, yrr*! yushmtln* 
 
 ^^TWn yuvdbhydm, jj^f l fa ; yushmdbhih. 
 
 — yuvdhhydm* -^^ yushmabhyum* 
 
 — yuvdbhydm, J^"^ ynshmat. 
 ^J^Tlt: yuvayoh* S'^H^ yu.^hmdkam* 
 
 — yuvayoh, "^^^ yushmam. 
 
 77. cTi^ /a^ or w^ toe?, " he," is taken as the crude of tlie sing, 
 
 and plur. of the third personal pronoun. With this pronoun cf. 
 the Greek article. 
 
 N. ';^ sail, " he," 
 Ac. ff tarn, 
 I. •ffcf tena, 
 D. 'jf^ tasmai, 
 Ab. iffHliT tasmdt, 
 G. TTW ^«f*^ff, 
 L- 'dfw«T tasmin, 
 
 MASCULINE. 
 
 1^ tau, " they two," 
 
 — tau, 
 
 iTI^T tdbhydin, 
 
 — tdbhydm, 
 
 — tdbhydm, 
 
 — tayoh, 
 
 Jt te, " they." 
 
 ^^: tebhyah. 
 — tebhyah. 
 jtx^ teshdm. 
 ^^ teshu. 
 
 FEMININE. 
 
 N. 'm sd, " she," *ilr te, 
 
 Ac. "in t^^h — te, 
 
 I. inrr tayd, ^rrvqi tdbhydm, 
 
 D. JT^tasyai, — tdbhydm, 
 
 Ab. f|44(U tasydh, — tdbhydm, 
 
 G. — tasydh, ipftt ^oyoA, 
 
 L. Tf^^a^i^aw, — fa^o/i, 
 
 Neuter, nom. ace. irf^ tat, l( te, 
 masculine. 
 
 This pronoun is sometimes used emphatically witli the other 
 pronouns, like ille and ijjse. Thus, ^»^, " ille ego'"; ^T^y"illi 
 
 nos'"; ^ i^, " ille tu'; ^ ^, " illi vos "",• ^ imx, " ille ipse "; iT^ ^in^, 
 " 26? ipsumS' 
 
 m: tdh. 
 — M/i. 
 
 infiTt tdbhih. 
 
 fTW; tubhyah. 
 
 — tubhyah. 
 
 (frar tdsdm. 
 
 iTRT *«*M. 
 \* 
 
 inf*T ^(/m; the rest like the 
 
 * The ace. sing, may also be j^j ; the dat. gen. ^ ; the ace, dat., gen. dual ^j ; 
 the ace, dat., gen. plur. "m (of. Lat. tm). 
 
52 
 
 PRONOUNS. 
 
 REFLEXIVE PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 
 
 78. The oblique cases of ^m'n^, " soul," " self" (declined p. 41.), 
 are used reflexively in place of the three personal pronouns, like 
 the Latin ipse. Thus, atmanam (me ipsurn) anaharena hanishyami, 
 " I will kill myself by fasting "; atmanam (te ipsiini) mritavad dar- 
 shaya, " show thyself as if dead "; atmanam {se ipsum) nindati, 
 " he blames himself." 
 
 DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS DECLINED. 
 
 79. The third personal pronoun WiT fat, "he," declined above, 
 is constantly used in a demonstrative sense, to signify " that " or 
 " this "; and by prefixing e to it, another common pronomi is 
 formed still more strongly demonstrative ; as, nom. t^: eshah 
 (r. 30.), irm" etau, 5I?W ete''; ace. ^ etam, &c. ; ins. ;j^»T etetia, &c. 
 
 There is another very common demonstrative pronoun, of 
 which l[^ idam, " this," the nom. case neuter, is considered to be 
 the crude, but is never used as such. 
 
 
 
 MASCULINE. 
 
 
 N. 
 
 "^(^ ayam, " this," 
 
 ^ imau, "these two," 
 
 5H ime, " these 
 
 Ac. 
 
 . 3JJ imam,* 
 
 — imau, 
 
 ^JTHT imdn. 
 
 I. 
 
 ^^«T anena, 
 
 ^nwn dbhydm, 
 
 irfn: ehhih.^ 
 
 D. 
 
 ^^ asmai, 
 
 — dbhydm. 
 
 TTvq; ebhyah. 
 
 Ab 
 
 
 — dbhydm, 
 
 — ebhyah. 
 
 G. 
 
 ^^ asya. 
 
 ^ipTh anmjoh. 
 
 ^^ eshdm. 
 
 L. 
 
 ^ftjTr^ asmin, 
 
 — anayoh, 
 
 FEMININE. 
 
 j^eshu. 
 
 N. 
 
 ^ iyam. 
 
 ^ ime, 
 
 ^: imdh. 
 
 Ac 
 
 . TJTT imam,* 
 
 — ime, 
 
 — i7ndh. 
 
 I. 
 
 ^nrm anaya, 
 
 ^nwit dbhydm. 
 
 ^nf>r. dbhih. 
 
 D. 
 
 •^•^ asyai, 
 
 — dbhydm, 
 
 mVim abhyah. 
 
 Ab 
 
 ' '^^tn: nsyolh 
 
 — dbhydm. 
 
 — abhyah. 
 
 G. 
 
 — asydh, 
 
 ^H^h anayoh. 
 
 ^rmt «««?«. 
 
 L. 
 
 ^r^ asydm. 
 
 — anayoh. 
 
 WW asu. 
 
 * The ace. m. may be ^, the ace. f. ^i^. 
 
 t This pronoun affords the only example of the old form for the instr. plur. of 
 
 masculine 
 
PRONOUNS. 53 
 
 Neut., noni. ace. ^ idnni, -^ inie, ^ifJT imUni ; the rest like the 
 masculine. 
 
 There is another demonstrative pronoun rarely used except in the nom., of whicli 
 iidas is taken as the crude : nom. m. asau, "this " or "he," uinn, ami ; ace. ainiim ; 
 ins. amwuty S^-c. 
 
 RELATIVE PRONOUN " ?l'/jO," " wllich." 
 
 SO. The relative may be formed by simply substituting 1/ for 
 s and t, in the pronoun tad. Thus, crude form i/ad : nom. m. Tf, 
 yah, " who," ^ yait, it i/e ; aec. tt ya?n, " whom," &c. 
 
 INTERROGATIVE PRONOUN — " who?'' " ivhaff'' 
 
 81. As tlie relative is formed by substituting y, so the inter- 
 rogative by substituting k for s and t, in the pronoun tad. Thus, 
 nom. m. w, ka/i, " who ?" cf^ kou, ^ ke. In the nom. neut., how- 
 ever, the interrogative is f^ kirn and not kad.* Kim is also the 
 crude, and occurs in a few compounds; as, 'ftfiJi^, "on what 
 account ? " 
 
 POS.SESSIVE PRONOUNS. 
 
 82. These are formed by adding the affix lya (r. 38. XI.) to the 
 crude of the personal pronouns; as, madlya, "mine" (nom. -ah, 
 -a, -am); twad'iya, "thine"; asmadlya, "our." Observ^e, however, 
 that the gen. case of the personal pronouns is more usually taken 
 to express the possessive ; as, n^ xrf:, "his son." 
 
 REFLEXIVE POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. 
 
 83. ^ SToa{ct suus), declined like sarva, r. 87. (nom. ^:, ^, ;^'), 
 is used reflexively, in reference to all three persons, and may 
 stand for "my own," "thy own," "his own,"" "our own," &c. 
 It often occupies the first place in a compound ; thus, W^ n^fti . 
 
 masculine nouns of the first class. This form is still preserved in the Vedas, and in 
 accordance with this, the instr. plur. of deva (r. 48.) would be devebhih. 
 
 *. iTarf, however, was the old form, and is retained in a few words; such as 
 AacAcAi7, "perhaps"; Aarfar^Aa, " useless " ("of what use?"); kadadhwnn., "a bad 
 road " (" what a road ! " ). 
 
 t But the abl. and loc. sing, m., and nom. pi. m. may follow deva, r. 40. 
 
54 PRONOUNS. 
 
 "he goes to his own house."* The gen. case of atman (p. 41.), or 
 often the crude, is used with the same signification ; as, ^nirHfft JJ^ 
 or '3?TWTt ^nafir.^ 
 
 HONORIFIC PRONOUN. 
 
 84. >TTt^ bhavat, " your honour," requiring the 3d person of the 
 verb, is declined like dhanavat (r. 61.). Thus, nom. bhavan, bha- 
 vantau, bhavantah. It is used respectfully in place of the second 
 personal pronoun ; as, bhavan dharmam karotu, " let your honour 
 practise virtue." 
 
 INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 
 
 85. The indeclinable affixes chit, api, and chana, added to the 
 several cases of the interrogative pronoun, give them an indefinite 
 signification. Thus, nom. sing. masc. ■sRftj'iT kashchif, " somebody," 
 " any body "; ace. ofif^fi kahchit ; ins. kenachit ; dat. kasmaichit ; 
 loc. -Bf^iAf^^ kasminshchit (r. 20.); nom. plur. masc. kechit. So also 
 nom. ofit^f^ ka'pl, ofi^^ kashchana, " somebody "; ins. kenapi, &c. 
 By prefixing rf, is formed the negative ?T ofiftariT, "nobody." 
 
 T In the same way interrogative adverbs are made indefinite. Thus, from 
 kati, "how many V katichit, "a few"; from kadd, "when?" kadachit, "at some 
 time"; from katham, "how?" kathanchana, "some how." 
 
 WHOSOEVER, WHATSOEVER. 
 
 86. This is expressed by prefixing the relative pronoun to the 
 interrogative. Thus, tit: "suftarw , "whosoever"; iTiT f%f%(T, "what- 
 soever." Or by repeating the relative; as, ^ ti:, tt^ ti^. 
 
 PRONOMINALS. 
 
 87. There are certain common adjectives which partake of the 
 nature of pronouns, and follow the declension of lad (r. 77.). Thus, 
 
 * In modem Sanscrit nija often takes the place ofswa; as, Ph^JI^ JlQ^fd. 
 
 t Prof. Lassen cites a remarkable example from the Rdmdyana, in which 
 ^TrW"JT refers to the dual number. Putram dtmanah sprishtwd nipetatuh, " they 
 two fell down after touching their son." Anthol. p. 171. 
 
VERBS. — GENERAL OBSERVATIONS. 55 
 
 ■?l|[ sarva, "all": nom. masc. sarvah, sarvau, sarve ; dat. sarrasmni ; 
 noni. fem. sarvu, &c. ; dat. sarvasyai, &c. But the nom. neut. is 
 sarixim, &c., not sarvad. The follovWng are the most useful of 
 these pronominals. Eka, "one"; prothama, "first"; dwit'iya, 
 "second"; tritlya, "third''; aJpa, "few"; uhha, "both"; aiiya, 
 "other"; itara, "other"; katara, "which of the two?" (the three 
 last also follow tad in the nom. and ace. neut. anyat, itarat, katarat). 
 But some of these are optionally declined like nouns of the first 
 class ; thus, alpa, nom. plur. alpah or alpe. 
 
 CHAPTER VI. 
 
 VERBS. 
 
 General Observations. 
 
 Although the Sanscrit verb will be found somewhat intricate 
 by one who follows it through all its windings, yet such a general 
 view of its structure as wull be sufficient to answer the practical 
 wants of the general reader may be easily given, and as easily 
 apprehended. There is no part of the grammar so capable as 
 this of plain exoteric explanation, whilst there is none so obscured 
 by the esoteric and mystical teaching of native grammarians ; 
 none, of which the general principles are so few and so close to 
 the surface, whilst the abstruser truths, the niceties and refine- 
 ments, are multiplied to an extent that tends to discourage, or 
 even disgust the uninitiated learner. Hence it happens that the 
 expounder of Sanscrit Grammar, who wishes to exhaust his subject, 
 is here not only compelled to embarass and perplex an otherwise 
 simple statement, by the diffuse exhibition of various forms, and 
 tenses, and exceptions, which are of little utility to the ordinary 
 student, but is forced, moreover, to bewilder the beginner by a 
 
56 VERBS. — GENERAL OBSERVATIONS. 
 
 complication of technical phrases, conventional abbreviations, and 
 symbolical letters, which are as puzzling at the first stage of liis 
 studies, as they may be useful in assisting his memory at a later 
 period. And thus it is that a very false impression is formed 
 of the difficulty of a language, the broad and useful principles of 
 which lie wholly within the reach of the most moderate capacity. 
 It will be the aim of the following pages to disentangle the 
 subject, as much as possible, from this superabundant weight of 
 mystical symbols and unusual tenses and forms, many of which 
 exist more in the theory of grammarians than in the practice of 
 approved writers; and although no part of the verb will be left 
 unnoticed, the larger print will serve to attract the eye of the 
 student to those points which are of general utility and real 
 importance, whilst the smaller will indicate those portions of the 
 subject which are to be reserved for after-considei'ation. 
 
 Although the Sanscrit verb offers the most striking and inter- 
 esting analogies to the Greek, nevertheless, so peculiar and artificial 
 is the process by which it is formed, that it would be impossible, 
 in treating of it, to adopt an arrangement wiiich would be likely 
 to fall in with the preconceived notions of the classical student. 
 
 There are ten tenses. Seven of them are of common occur- 
 rence ; viz. 1. the present, 2. the first preterite, 3. the potential, 
 4. the imperative, 5. the second preterite, 6. the first future, 7. the 
 second future. Three are of rare occurrence ; ^^z. 8. the third 
 preterite, 9. the benedictive, 10. the conditional. There is also 
 an infinitive mood, and several participles. Of these tenses the 
 present, the three preterites, and the two futures, belong properly 
 to the indicative mood ; and the imperative, potential, benedictive, 
 and conditional, are more properly moods than tenses. Since, 
 however, these moods do not comprehend other tenses under them, 
 but are susceptible of all times, present, past, and future, it can 
 lead to no embarassment to consider them as tenses, and to 
 arrange them indiscriminately wuth the others in the manner 
 proposed above. 
 
 t Although the three preterites are used without much distinction, yet it sliould 
 be observed that they properly express different degrees of past time. The first pre- 
 
VERBS. (JEXERAL OBSERVATIONS. 57 
 
 tcrite corresponds to the imperfect of (Jreek and Latin verbs, and properly has 
 reference to an event doing at some time p;ist, and not ended. The second preterite 
 has reference to an event done and past at some definite period. Tlie third j)re- 
 terite, to an event done and past at some indefinite period, thus con-esponding to the 
 Greek aorist. So, also, the two futures properly express, the first definite, the 
 second indefinite futurity. Tlie potential may generally be rendered in English by 
 some one of the auxiliaries "may," "can," "would," "should," "ought." The 
 conditional is used after the conjunction ynd'i, "if": it occurs, however, but very 
 rarel}', and tlic potential usually supplies its place in conditional sentences. The 
 benedictive is a tense sometimes used in praying and blessing. 
 The infinitive mood generally has an active, but is capable of a passive signification. 
 
 Every tense has three numbers, singular, dual, and plural. 
 
 There are two voices or systems of inflection, the one called 
 Parasmaipada, the other Atmanepada.* The former is supposed 
 to convey a transitive sense, the action passing parasmai, "to 
 another "; the latter, a reflexive sense, corresponding to that con- 
 veyed by the Greek middle voice, the action reverting atmane, 
 " to one's self." ' This distinction, however, is very rarely pre- 
 served ; and we find verbs, transitive or intransitive, conjugated 
 indifferently in the parasmaipada or atmanepada, or both. When, 
 however, the verb is conjugated in both, the atmane may then 
 sometimes yield its appropriate meaning, and give a kind of 
 reflexive sense, or a sense directing the action in some way to 
 the advantage of the agent. 
 
 Passive verbs are invariably conjugated in the atmanepada. 
 
 From every root five kinds of verbs may, in theory, be elicited — 
 a primitive, a causal, a passive, a desiderative, and intensive. 
 
 * If the term voice has reference to the system of inflection, it is obvious that 
 tliere can only be two voices in Sanscrit ; and altliough the atmanepada, in one or 
 two instances, has a middle sense, yet it cannot be said to correspond with the 
 Greek middle voice, the chief characteristic of which is, that it takes a middle 
 inflection, partly active, partly passive. 
 
 t The words juirdsmaipadu and ntntanejKuhi will often l)e contracted into 
 /)«r., dttn. 
 
58 VERBS. GENERAL OBSERVATIONS, 
 
 Of these, the two last forms are very rarely met with, except in 
 the nouns and participles derived from them ; and will therefore 
 he but slightly noticed in these pages. So, also, from every 
 noun, certain nominal verbs may, in theory, be elicited. Very 
 few of these, however, are in frequent use. There are ten conjuga- 
 tions. Primitive verbs may belong to any one of the first nine 
 conjugations, but by far the greatest number belong either to the 
 1st, 4th, or 6th, the other six conjugations comprising so few 
 verbs that they may be regarded rather as exceptions. These 
 nine conjugations apply to the first four tenses only. The 
 other tenses of the primitive are formed according to one 
 rule. Causal verbs form the 10th conjugation. Every root has 
 a passive form, entirely independent of the conjugational form 
 assumed by the root"; and the student will observe, that the 
 passive cannot, in Sanscrit, be considered a voice, according to the 
 usual acceptation of the term. For, in that case, he would expect 
 a verb in the passive voice to correspond in form with a verb in 
 the active, in the way that audior corresponds with audio, and 
 oLKovoixai with aKovo), the terminations or system of inflection only 
 being changed. But, in Sanscrit, the passive often varies entirely 
 in form from the active verb, whilst the terminations may in both 
 cases be the same, viz. those of the atmanepada. It is rather a 
 distinct derivative from the root, formed on one invariable prin- 
 ciple, without the least community with the conjugational structure 
 of the active verb. Thus, the root bhid, " to divide," is of the 
 7th conjugation, and makes hhinatti or hhinte, " he divides ''i dwish, 
 " to hate," is of the 2d conjugation, and makes dweshti or dwishte, 
 "he hates"; but the passive of both is formed according to one 
 invariable rule, by the simple insertion of y, without the least 
 reference to the conjugational form of the active : thus, bhidyate, 
 " he is di\dded "; dmishyate, " he is hated." 
 
 From these observations it is evident that the difficulty of the 
 Sanscrit verb is as nothing when compared with the Greek. The 
 Greek verb has three voices, and about ninety tenses and moods : the 
 Sanscrit has only two voices, and not more than twenty-one tenses 
 and moods. Besides which, a far greater number of verbs are sus- 
 ceptible of the three voices in Greek, than of the two in Sanscrit. 
 
METHOD OF DERIVING VERBS FROM ROOTS. 51) 
 
 Moreover, in Sanscrit, there are no contracted verbs, and no 
 difficulties resulting from difference of dialect ; and although there 
 are ten conjugations, yet these have reference to four tenses oidy, 
 and, under some of these conjugations, only two or three common 
 verbs are contained. 
 
 Verbs primitive, causal, and passive, may, like nouns, be divided 
 into simple and compound. Simple verbs may be regarded as 
 frilling under two heads, either as derived from uncompounded 
 roots, or as derived from novms. Compound verbs are those formed 
 by combining roots with prepositions or other adverbial prefixes. 
 
 SIMPLE VERBS DERIVED FROM ROOTS. 
 
 It has been already shown that there are a large number of 
 monosyllabic sounds in Sanscrit, called roots, which, having a mere 
 ideal existence, are the source of verbs as well as nouns. These 
 roots are in number about two thousand, and the theory of 
 grammarians is, that each of them may serve as tlie basis on 
 v/hich to construct five kinds of verbs ; La primitive, transitive 
 or intransitive ; 2. a causal, having often a causal and often 
 merely a transitive signification ; 3. a passive ; 4. a desiderative, 
 giving a sense of wishing to the root ; and 5. an intensive (or 
 frequentative), heightening the idea contained in the root. It 
 will be found, however, in practice, that the greater number of 
 these two thousand roots never occur at all in the form of verbs, 
 nor, indeed, in any other form but that of the nouns to which 
 they give origin ; and that the roots in real use as the source of 
 verbs are comparatively very few. Of these few, moreover, 
 certain particular roots (such, for example, as kri, " to do ""), as if 
 to compensate for the inactivity of the others, are kept in constant 
 employment, and, by compounding them with prepositions and 
 other prefixes, applied to the expression of the most various and 
 opposite ideas. 
 
 Nevertheless, theoretically, from every root in the language 
 may be elicited five kinds of verbs. The first, or primitive verb, 
 
 * Compound verbs will be treated of in the chapter on comi'ound words. 
 
60 METHOD OF DERIVING VERBS FROM ROOTS. 
 
 is formed from the root, according to the nine diflFerent rules for 
 the changes of the root, required by the first nine conjugations ; 
 the second, or causal, is formed according to the rule for the 
 cliange of the root, required by the 10th conjugation ; viz, the 
 addition of ay to the root, the vowel of which has taken the Guna 
 change. The third, or passive, is formed according to the rule 
 for the change of the root, required by the 4th conjugation, viz. 
 the addition of y in the first four tenses. The fourth, or deside- 
 rative, is formed by the addition of ish or s, the root also 
 undergoing reduplication. The fifth, or intensive, is formed like 
 the passive, according to the rule required by the 4th conjugation, 
 and is, in fact, a reduplicated passive verb. It may also be 
 formed analogously to the rule for the 3d conjugation. Thus, 
 take the root shuhh, conveying the idea of " shining " — from 
 this are elicited, 1. the primitive, shobh, "to shine"; 2. the causal, 
 shobhay, " to cause to shine '*' or " illuminate "; 3. the passive, 
 shuhhy, " to be bright *"; 4. the desiderative, shushobhish, " to desire 
 to shine "; 5. the intensive, shoshiiby, " to shine very brightly." 
 See also p. 19. 
 
 Of these five forms of verbs, the primitive, causal, and passive, 
 are the only three used by the best writers, and to these alone 
 the attention of the reader will now be directed. The subject, 
 therefore, will divide itself into two heads. In the first place, 
 the formation of the base : 1st, of primitive ; 2dly, of causal ; 
 3dly, of passive verbs. In the second place, the inflection of the 
 base of these same forms respectively. But here it may be 
 asked, what is the base ? 
 
 THE BASE OF THE VERB. 
 
 The base of the verb is that changed form of the root to which 
 the terminations are immediately affixed, and holds exactly that 
 intermediate position betw^een the root and the inflected verb 
 itself, which the crude form holds between the root and the 
 inflected noun. This great peculiarity, therefore, cannot be too 
 often or too forcibly impressed upon the attention of the learner, 
 that, in the treatment of Sanscrit verbs, two perfectly distinct 
 subjects offer themselves for consideration : 1st, the formation of 
 
REMARKS ON THE CONJUGATIONS. Gl 
 
 the base, or, in other words, an investigation into the changes 
 which the root undergoes before the terminations are affixed ; 
 'Ally, the inflection of tlie base, or the union of the base with its 
 terminations. 
 
 The first of these two subjects of inquiry will be found to be 
 that in which consists all the difficulty of the subject ; for, as fiir 
 as the terminations are concerned, no dead language conforms 
 more systematically to one general scheme, than the one with 
 which we are concerned. 
 
 There are ten rules or conjugations, according to which the 
 bases .of verbs may be formed. But in these we have already 
 noted a great peculiarity, and one which has much weight in a 
 comparison between the difficulties of a Greek and Sanscrit verb. 
 Of these ten conjugations, the first nine have reference only to 
 the first four tenses ; viz. the present, first preterite, potential, and 
 imperative. Hence these are called the conjugational tenses. 
 After passing these four tenses the conjugational structure of the 
 base is entirely forgotten ; and in the formation of the bases of 
 the six remaining tenses all roots conform to one general inile, 
 and are as if they belonged to one general conjugation. Hence 
 these tenses are called non-conjugational. The tenth alone retains 
 the conjugational structure of the base throughout all the tenses 
 of the verb ; but as this conjugation has no reference to primi- 
 tives, but to causals only, no confusion can arise from this 
 apparent inconsistency. Of the 2000 roots, about one half follow 
 the 1st conjugation, about 130 follow the 4th, and about 140 the 
 6th. Of the remaining roots, not more than 20 in common use 
 follow the 2d ; not more than 5 follow the 3d ; not more than 6 the 
 7tli ; not more than 4 the 5th ; not more than 1 the Sth ; not more 
 than 12 the 9th. 
 
 Primitive verbs, therefore, which constitute the first nine 
 conjugations, will be divided into two grand classes, according as 
 they fall under one or other of these nine conjugations. Regular 
 primitive verbs will be those of the 1st, 4th, and 6tli conjugations. 
 Irregular primitives those of the 2d, 3d, 5th, 7th, Sth, and 9th con- 
 jugations. The first class we call regular, because under it are 
 contained nearly all the common verbs in the language ; the 
 
62 REMARKS ON THE CONJUGATIONS. 
 
 second irregular, as comprehending only fifty or sixty useful 
 verbs in all. 
 
 All causal verbs follow the 10th conjugation, and, in point of 
 fact, constitute this conjugation ; for all those primitive verbs 
 which are said by grammarians to belong to the 10th conjugation, 
 may be regarded as causal verbs. 
 
 All passive verbs are atmanepada verbs of the 4th conjugation. 
 The parasmaipada of the 4th conjugation is constituted of certain 
 primitive verbs, w^hich have a neuter signification. 
 
 1 There seems no necessity for creating a tenth conjugation as distinct from the 
 causal. So that it would greatly simplify the subject, if this conjugation were 
 expunged altogether from the Grammar, and the addition of ay to the root con- 
 sidered, in all cases, as the mark of a causal verb. And it is plain that ay is not 
 the sign of a separate conjugation, in the way that nu is the sign of the 5th con- 
 jugation, or in the way of any other conjugational sign, for it is retained throughout 
 the other tenses of the verb, not only in the first four, just as the desiderative ish is 
 retained throughout. And although there are many verbs given under the 
 10th conjugation, which have rather a transitive than a causal signification, yet 
 there are also many causal verbs which ai"e used only in a transitive sense. It will 
 therefore make the subject less complex to consider that the aifix ay is always the 
 sign of the causal form, merely bearing in mmd that causal forms do not necessarily 
 imply causality. 
 
 It may also be questioned whether there be any necessity for creating a 4th con- 
 jugation as distinct from the passive. For since it is found that either a neuter or 
 passive signification attaches to nearly all the verbs placed under the 4th conju- 
 gation, and that passive verbs are identical with its dtmanepada inflection, it may 
 with reason be suspected that the occasional assumption of a neuter signification 
 and a parasmaipada inflection by a passive verb, was the only cause which gave 
 rise to the creation of this conjugation. And this theory is supported by the fact 
 that many passive verbs (as, for example, Jayafe, " he is bom," from the root jan ; 
 and pTmjate^ " he is filled," from the root prt) are confounded with verbs of this 
 conjugation. So that it seems not unlikely, that, hy making tliis 4th conjugation, 
 Grammarians only meant to say that the passive form of verbs, or tlie addition oiy 
 to the root, is also the fomi that may be used to express a neuter or intransitive 
 signification; the only difference requisite to be made between the two forms 
 being exactly that wliich might be expected to exist between them ; viz. that 
 
REGULAR PRIMITIVE VERHS. 
 
 (•>3 
 
 the one should take tlie dtmanepaihi ; the other, tlie panisnuiifitnfd intloctioii. 
 At aiiy rate this fact is clear that the pur. of the 4th conjugation is the form used 
 in numerous roots to yield a neuter signification ; and that the dtm. is identical with 
 the form used to yield a passive sense. Hence it arises, that many roots appear 
 in the 4th conjugation as neuter verbs, which also appear in some one of the 
 other nine as transitive. For example, i/iij, " to join," when used in an active sense 
 is conjugated cither in the 7th conjugation, or in the causal ; when in a neuter, 
 in the 4th. So also, push, "to nourish"; kslnibh, "to agitate"; MsA, "tovex"; 
 shlh, " to accomplish." 
 
 Sect. I.— REGULAR PRIMITIVES, OR VERBS OF THE 
 1st, 4tli, AND 6th CONJUGATIONS. 
 
 TERMINATIONS OF THE CONJUGATIONAL TENSES. 
 
 
 Present Teme. 
 
 
 PARASMAIPADA. ATMANEPADA. 
 
 Sing. 
 
 Dual 
 
 Plur. 
 
 Sing. 
 
 Dual 
 
 Plur. 
 
 a?/ii 
 
 avah 
 
 , amah 
 
 e 
 
 avahe 
 
 amahe 
 
 asi 
 
 athah 
 
 atha 
 
 ose 
 
 ethe 
 
 adhtve 
 
 ati 
 
 at ah 
 
 anti 
 
 ate 
 
 ete 
 
 ante 
 
 
 First Preterite. 
 
 
 am 
 
 am 
 
 ama 
 
 e 
 
 avahi 
 
 amahl 
 
 ah 
 
 atam 
 
 ata 
 
 athah 
 
 ethdm 
 
 alhwam 
 
 at 1 atam 
 
 an 
 
 ata 
 
 etam 
 
 anta 
 
 
 Potential. 
 
 
 eyam 
 
 eva 
 
 ema 
 
 eya 
 
 evahi 
 
 emahi 
 
 eh 
 
 etam 
 
 eta 
 
 ethah 
 
 eyatham 
 
 edhwam 
 
 et 1 etam 
 
 ei/uh 
 
 eta 
 
 eyatam 
 
 eran 
 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 
 ani 
 
 cva 
 
 ama \ ai 
 
 1 
 
 avahai 
 
 umahai 
 
 a 
 
 atam 
 
 ata aswa 
 
 etiiam 
 
 adhwam 
 
 . atu 
 
 atam 
 
 anlu atam 
 
 etam 
 
 untam 
 
 Obs., the terrr 
 
 linations read clow 
 
 nvvard ; thus, ami 
 
 is the 1st pers, si 
 
 ng. ; asi the 2d sin 
 
 g. ; ati the 3d. 
 
64 REGULAR PRIMITIVE VERBS. 
 
 FORMATION OF THE BASE OF THE CONJUGATIONAL TENSES OF 
 REGULAR PRIMITIVE VERBS. 
 
 88. Obs., that it is an universal rule in every conjugation that 
 the augment a is prefixed to the base of the first pret. ; and that 
 when this is prefixed to bases beginning with the vowels /, it, and 
 ri, short or long, it blends with them into ai, an, ar (instead of 
 e, 0, ar, by r. 5.). Thus the base l^'^ becomes in the first pret. 
 aidichham, and ridhno, ardhnot. 
 
 First Conjugation. 
 
 a. If a root be of the 1st conjugation, the rule for the 
 formation of the base in the conjugational tenses is, that the 
 Gima be substituted for the vowel of the root throughout even/ 
 person of enery tense. Thus, from ^ hudh, " to know," is formed 
 the base ^^ bodk* (^iVlfk, bodhami, &c.). From bhu, "to be,"' 
 bho {bhavami, &c., r. lO.f). From 7n, " to lead,'"' ne {nayami, &c., 
 r. 10. -j-). From srip, sarp ; from klrip, kalp (p. 2.-1-). In the first 
 preterite the only difference in the base will be that a is pre- 
 fixed ; thus, abodh, abho, atie {abodham, &c., abhavam, &c., anayam, 
 &c.). In the potential and imperative the base is exactly the 
 same as in the present (bodheyam, &c., bodhani, &c.). 
 
 b. Since there is no Guna of a, roots like tp^ pack, " to cook," 
 do not change {pachdmi, Sec). Nor does any change take place if 
 the root ends in two consonants ; as, nind, " to blame ": nor if 
 the root contain a long vowel, not final ; as, jlv, " to live." 
 Obs. It will be hereafter seen that this prohibition of Guna 
 extends to the other tenses as well as to the conjugational.^ 
 
 c. Some roots of the 1st conjugation form their hases in the first four tenses by 
 a change peculiar to themselves, which change is of course discarded in the other 
 tenses. Thus, from ^qi stha, " to stand," comes the base fjTff tishth {tishthami^ S;c.); 
 from ITT S'^s'w^j " to go," JT^ gachchh ; from ^ sad, atm. "to sink," sld; from 
 
 * Bopp has shewn that an/ analogous change takes place in Greek. Thus, 
 the root (pvy {ecpv^ov) becomes (pevyo) in the present. 
 
 t Thus, nind is in the 2d pret. nininda ; in the 1st fut. ninditd ; in the 
 3d pret. anindlt ; in the causal, nindayuti. 
 
CONJUGATIONAL TENSES. b.j 
 
 UT ,'//"■''• "to smell," Urujii/fir; from pd," to drink," pir ; and from g^ r/m/i, 
 " to sec," the substituted base TJ^ pasliy ; from. yam, "to restrain," yachchh ; iVoui 
 yup, "to protect "; yopCiy. 
 
 Fourth Conjugation. 
 
 89. If a root be of the 4tli conjugation, no Guna takes place, 
 
 but the base is formed by the simple addition of y to the root. 
 
 Thus, from ftni sidh, " to succeed," is formed the base sidhy 
 
 {suIhyUmi, &c.) ; from ijlT nrit, " to dance," the base nriti/. • . - . ■ 
 
 a. The following are anomalous changes. From it, " to grow old," is formed the 
 hASc, Jlry; from dlv, "to sport," diry; from Arrow, "to go," krdiny ; from bhrum, 
 " to whirl," hhrdmy ; from >j^ bhransh, " to fall," >J^ hhrashy ; from jan, atm. 
 "to be horn" jay ; from i-yadh, par. "to pierce," vidhy. See the remarks, p. 62.T. 
 
 Sixth Conjugation. 
 
 90. If a root be of the 6th conjugation, the general rule is, that 
 
 no change at all takes place, and that the root stands also for 
 
 the base. Thus, the root kship, " to throw," is also the base 
 
 {kshipami, &c.). So also f^ dish, " to point out " {cUshami, &c.).* 
 
 a. Some roots, however, take a change peculiar to themselves : as, from JTI ish, 
 "to wish," the base ^^; from IT^, "to ask," xr^ ; and a final u or u is changed 
 to m\ and ri to riy ; and ri to ir. As, from d}i% " to shake," dhnv ; from x\ inri, atm. 
 "to die," 7nriy (f^M, &C.); from ^ dhri, atm. "to exist," dkriy ; from efi At7, "to 
 scatter," kir {kirami, S^c). 
 
 b. Some insert a nasal ; as, from much, " to let go," the base munch (h^jCh, See.) ; 
 from lip, "to anoint," limp ; from sich, "to sprinkle," tiihch; from aKH', "to cut," 
 
 Having thus explained the formation of the base in the con- 
 jugational tenses of the regular primitive, it will be necessary to 
 exhi1)it the irregularities presented in theso same tenses I)y al)Out 
 
 * Roots ending in consonants in the 6th conj. generally contain either i, n, or 
 ; and these vowels would have taken Guna had the root fallen under the 1st. 
 
66 
 
 IRREGULAR PRIMITIVE VERBS. 
 
 fifty common roots belonging to the 2d, 3cl, 5th, 7th, 8th, and 
 9th conjugations, before we proceed to the remaining six tenses 
 of the verb, the rules for the formation of which are common to all. 
 The student, however, who wishes for a continuous survey 
 of all the tenses of the verb will pass over the next section, and 
 proceed at once to Sect. III. 
 
 Sect. II.— CERTAIN IRREGULAR PRIMITIVES, OR VERBS 
 
 OF THE 2d, 3d, 5th, 7th, 8th, AND 9th CONJUGATIONS. 
 
 TERMINATIONS OF THE CONJUGATIONAL TENSES 
 
 ■X- 
 
 PARASMAIPADA. 
 
 Present Tense. 
 
 ATMANEPADA 
 
 
 mi p 
 
 vah 
 
 mah 
 
 e 
 
 vahe 
 
 mahe 
 
 si or sM V 
 
 thah 
 
 tha 
 
 se or she 
 
 athe 
 
 dhwe 
 
 ti p tah 1 
 
 anti or ati 
 
 te 
 
 ate 
 
 ate 
 
 First Preterite. 
 
 
 
 am p 
 
 va 
 
 ma 
 
 i 
 
 vahi 
 
 mahi 
 
 h P 
 
 tarn 
 
 ta 
 
 thah 
 
 atham 
 
 dhwam 
 
 t ^ 
 
 tarn 
 
 an or uh 
 
 ta 
 
 atam. 
 
 ata 
 
 Potential. 
 
 
 
 yam 
 
 yava 
 
 yama 
 
 rya 
 
 tvahi 
 
 Imahi 
 
 yah 
 
 yatam 
 
 yata 
 
 tthah 
 
 tyatham 
 
 ulhwam 
 
 yat 
 
 yatam 
 
 yuh 
 
 tta 
 
 lyatam 
 
 Iran 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 
 
 uni P 
 
 ava p 
 
 ama p 
 
 ai p 
 
 avahai ^ 
 
 dmahai p 
 
 hi or dhi 
 
 tarn 
 
 ta 
 
 swa or shwa 
 
 atham 
 
 dhwam 
 
 tu P 
 
 tarn 
 
 antu or atu 
 
 tarn 
 
 atam 
 
 atom 
 
 Obs. The terminations read downwards ; thus, mi is the 
 1st pers. sing., si the 2d sing., ti the 3d. The mark p 
 placed after certain terminations indicates that certain pecu- 
 liar changes, to be afterwards explained, take place in the 
 root before these terminations. 
 
 * This irregular scheme of terminations corresponds to the technical scheme 
 given by native Grammarians, as applicable to all verbs. Let the reader compare 
 
 this 
 
IRREGULAR PRIMITIVE VEU15S. 67 
 
 FOR.^IATION OF THE BASE OV THE CON.) UGATIONAL TENSES. 
 
 These irreoiilar primitives cause the chief difficulty of Sanscrit 
 conjugation ; for they not only present an ever-varying form of 
 base throughout the dillerent persons of each tense, but also 
 require a scheme of terminations wliich differs, in many impor- 
 tant points from the regular scheme, and more especially in this, 
 that the terminations begin generally with consonants instead of 
 vowels. 
 
 In this last respect the above scheme resembles that of the 
 first and second future, p. 73, and all the other non-coujugational 
 tenses, p. SI. Hence the combination of the final consonants of a 
 base with the initial s or t of these terminations, and of those 
 of the non-conjugational tenses, requires an acquaintance with 
 the following rules. 
 
 Combination affinal ch and }, with t, th, and s. 
 
 91. Final ch and J, before t, th, and s, are changed to k, the k 
 blending with s into "^ ksh (r. 30. note) : thus, vach with ti, vakti ; 
 with thah, vakthah ; with si, vakshi : moch with si/ami, moksht/umi ; 
 much with ta, mukta : ti/aj with ta, tyakta ; with syUmi, tyakshyami. 
 But a final palatal is, in a few cases, changed to -q^ sh before t, th ; 
 and t, th then become Z, j: thus, 7)iarj with ti, Jirff ; »n^ with 
 thah, vs: ; Wr[^ with ta, WS; TI^ with ta, TfWl- 
 
 Combination of final dh and bh, /vith t, th, and s. 
 
 a. Final >^ dh and >^ bh, before t and th, are changed, tlie one 
 to d, the other to b, and both t and th then become dh. Thus, 
 
 this with the reyular scheme at p. G-3, and observe how essentially they differ. Let 
 him also bear in mind that the total number of verbs, primitive and derivative 
 (exclusive of Intensives and innumerable Nominals), that follow the regular sclieme, 
 would amount to about eight thousand, whilst the total number that follow this 
 irregular scheme would hardly exceed two hundred ; he will then understand that 
 if any general scheme is to be propounded at all, it should rather be that at p. 63. 
 Tliis is another proof that native Grammarians are altogether wanting in clear 
 logical arrangement of their subject. 
 
68 RULES FOR THE COMBINATION OF CONSONANTS. 
 
 rundh with tah or thah becomes equally runddhah (^^:) ; labh with 
 take, labdhahe (^3n%). 
 
 b. Final dh and bh, before s, are changed (by r. 13.), the one 
 to t the other to p. Thus, runadh with 5/ becomes riinatsi ; sedh 
 with syami, setsyami ; labh with 5_ye, lapsye. And if the initial of 
 the root be d or b, the aspirate, which has been rejected in the 
 final, is thrown back on the initial ; as, bodh w^ith sye, bhotsye* 
 
 Combination of final -^ sh, -^ sh, ^ s, with t, th, s, dh. 
 
 c. Final ^^ sh, before t and tli, is changed to -q sh ; and the 
 t, th, take the cerebral form \,\- thus, |^^ with te, ^\ and $^^ 
 with thah, ^^:. 
 
 d. Similarly, final "^ sh, before t and th, requires the change 
 of t, th, to 7 ^. Thus, Ir^ wdth ti, |rf^; and %^ w^ith thah, fw^',. 
 
 e. Final ^ sh or ^ sh, before s, are changed to k, the s then 
 becoming sh (r. 30. note) : thus, ^^ with si, ^f^ ; i"^ with si, 
 
 /. Final ^ or -^ , before the termination dhi of the imperat., are 
 changed to "5 d, the dhi becoming f^ dhi. Thus, f^-^ with dhi, 
 %Tfe. Similarly with dhmam, ffsd . 
 
 ^r. Final ^ 5, before the termination dhi of the imperat., is 
 either dropped, or changed to d. Thus, chahas with dhi, either 
 chakadhi or chakaddhi ; ^^TFET with f//</, ^nfv; f^W^ w'ith dhi, ft%- 
 
 Combination of final ^ h yy/ZA t, th, and s. 
 
 A. Final ^ h, before t and th, is changed to ^, and both t and 
 M then become V dh. Thus, duh (^) with ?«A or thah becomes 
 equally dugdhah; dah (^) with tasini, dagdhasmi. But if the 
 root be^in with any other letter but d or n, then its final ^ 
 coalesces with the t or th of the termination into ^ rM ; and the 
 radical vowel, if short, is lengthened : as, 5^ with /«, ^ ; ^ with 
 ta, ^^; leh (%^) ^^ith ti, leclhi (^f^); and ^ with tasnii, ^dlfw. 
 Similarly the final of ^, before the termination dhi of the imperat., 
 
 * There is a very remarkable parallel to tin's in the Greek rpccpco, making m the 
 futvu-e epe^lsoo, noticed by Prof. Bopp. 
 
CONJUGATIONAL TENSES. 69 
 
 becomes dKgdhi (^frv) ; and the final of f^si^ blends with the same 
 termination into dh (^fe). 
 
 /. Final ^ h before s, follows the analoo^y of final ui and ji , 
 and is changed to A% which blends with s into t?" ksli. Thus, leh 
 with si becomes lek^hi ; ^"^ with si/ami, tji^uf^. And if the 
 initial of the root be d or g, the aspirate which has been changed 
 to A- is throw^l back on the initial. Thus, doh (^) with si, 
 dliokshi ; ^ with si/umi, v^nftr; ^J^ with sam, W^l^. 
 
 Second Conjugation. 
 
 92. If the root be of the :2d conjugation, the base is formed 
 by substituting the Guna vowel for the vowel of the root, before 
 those terminations only that are marked with p : before all the 
 other terminations the original vowel of the root is retained.* 
 Thus, from ind, " to know," is formed the base of the singular 
 present, ved {vedmi, &c.), the base of the dual and plur. vid 
 {vidmah, &c.) : from divish, " to hate," the bases dwesh and drvis/t^ : 
 from i, " to go," the bases e and i (1st sing, etui, cf. eifxi ; 1st pi. 
 imcili, cf. 'ifiev): from ITT^, "to awake," J«^ar and jagri (3d sing, 
 du. ^\. jugarti, jugritah, jagrafi,X r. 7.). 
 
 a. Those roots of this and the 3d and 7th conj. whose bases 
 end in consonants reject the terminations of the 2d and 3d pers. 
 sing. 1st pret. (excepting ad, " to eat," which inserts a before h 
 and t). But the final of the base is changed analogously to 
 crudes of the 8th class in the nom. case (see p. 27. r. 45.). Thus, 
 sing, avedam, avet, avet. Adwesham, admet i^^:z), &c. They also 
 take dhi for hi in the imperatives 
 
 * Bopp has noticed a coiTesponding lengthening of the vowel of the root before 
 certain terminations in Greek. Cf. SiSufjtt, Sioo/jLcv, el^i, 'i^cv. 
 
 t The other forms of the base of dvaish are seen in r. 91 . e. f. 
 
 + Roots of more than one syllable, andjaksh, "to eat," and shds^ " to rule," and 
 all roots of the 3d conjugation, necessarily reject the nasal of the 3d ])lur., of the 
 pres., and imp. paras., and take uh for an in the 3d plur. 1st pret. Some other roots 
 in the 2d conj. optionally take ith for an; as, rid, dwish, pa, ya. 
 
 ^ Dhi was originally the o)i/f/ form. Hence in the Vedas ^rf^ (kXvOi). 
 
70 IRREGULAR PRIMITIVE VERBS. 
 
 h. Roots like ad, "to eat"; pa, "to protect"; ?/«, "to go," having no Guna 
 substitute, do not change at all {admi, Sjc. ; pdmi, S^c. ; ydmi, &;c.). But daridrd, 
 par. "to be poor," makes its base daridri before the consonantal terminations not 
 marked with p, and daridr before ati, uk, atu (3d pers. sing, dual, plur. daridrdti, 
 daridritah, daridrati), see note nferked X, p. 69. 
 
 c. The root stu, " to praise," and some others in u, take Vriddhi before the conso- 
 nantal P terminations,* changing u to uv before the vowel terminations. Hence, the 
 three bases, stau, stu, stuv (stauti, stutah, stuvanti). Similarly, su, atm, "to bring 
 forth," makes suv before the vowel terminations (sute, suvdte, suvate) ; "3 ir?7, " to 
 speak," makes bravi before the consonantal V terminations, and brtiv before the vowel 
 terminations. Hence, in the par., the three bases, bravi, bru, bruv {braviti, brutah, 
 bruvanti) ; and in the atm. the two bases bru, bruv {brute, bruvdte, bruvate). 
 
 d. Rud, " to weep," besides the usual Guna change, adds i to the root before all 
 the consonantal terminations except y. Hence the three bases rodi, nidi, rud 
 {roditi, ruditah, rudanti). Similarly, but without Guna, the roots swap, " to sleep," 
 shwus and an, "to breathe," Jafe/i, "to eat." Han, "to kill," makes its base /ia 
 before t or th ; ghn before anti, an, antu ; and/a before hi {hanti, hatah, ghnanti; 
 2d pers. \mp.Jahi). 
 
 e. '^n^ , " to rule," makes its base f^t? before t, th (which then become t, th) 
 and y, and changes its final to t in the 2d and 3d sing. 1st pret. {ashdt). 
 
 f. ^Was, " to be," rejects its initial a, except in the 1st pret., and except before 
 the P terminations of the other tenses. 
 
 ^ , " to milk," and f^rf , " to lick," form their bases as seen at r. 91. h, i. 
 
 Third Conjugation. 
 93. If a root be of the 3d conjugation, the base is formed by 
 the reduplication of the initial consonant and vowel of the root, 
 a being the reduplicated vowel for a, i for l or n, and u for u ; 
 and in the reduplication of the consonant, an unaspirated letter 
 being substituted for an aspirated, and j for h. Besides the 
 reduplication of the root, the radical syllable is subjected to the 
 Guna change, but only before the p terminations, as in the 2d conj. 
 
 * By "the consonantal P terminations" is meant those terminations marked 
 with P which begin with consonants. 
 
CONJUGATIONAL TENSES. 71 
 
 Thus, from « bhri, " to bear," are formed the two bases bibhar 
 and bibhri (3d sing. dii. pi. bibhartU bibhritah, b'lbhrati, r. 7.) ; from 
 hn, *' to sacrifice/'' the two bases juho and jithu {juhoti, jnhutah, 
 juhn-ati, r. 7.) ; from bhl, " to fear," bibhe and bib/il {bibheti, bibhltah, 
 bibhi/ati). The 3d conj. is the only one which invariably drops 
 the nasal in the 3d pi. of the pres. and imp. par., and takes uh for 
 an in the 3d pi. of the 1st pret. Before this uh Guna is required. 
 
 «• c[T, "to give," in the par. drops the a before all except the P terminations, 
 making its base dad^ changeable to dat {daddti, dnttah, dadaW), and de before the hi 
 of the iraperat. Similarly, \[\, "to place," makes its base dadh before v, «i, y, or 
 a vowel, and dhe before hi; but dhat before/, th, or s {dadhdti, dhattah, dadhati). 
 
 Fifth Conjugation. 
 
 94. If a root be of the 5th conjugation, the base is formed by 
 adding nii to the root, which is converted to the Guna no before 
 the p terminations. Tims, from chi, " to gather," are formed the 
 two bases china and chinu* (chinoti, chinutah, chinwanti, r. 7.) In 
 roots ending in vowels, the u of nu may be dropped before v 
 and m. The roots ap, "to obtain"; ^^, "to be able"; i^, "to 
 satisfy"; and^\(^, "to increase"; ending in consonants, add iinv 
 instead of nu before the vowel terminations {shaknoti, shaknutah, 
 shaknuvanti). "^ shru, " to hear " (sometimes placed under tlie 
 1st conj.), substitutes ^ shri for the root (^Rftfir, r. 21., ^J^m ^Ij^f^)- 
 
 Roots ending in vowels reject the termination hi of tlie impe- 
 rative : as, shrinu, " do thou hear "; but apnuhi, " do thou obtain." 
 
 Seventh Conjugation. 
 
 95. If a root be of the 7th conjugation, the base is formed by in- 
 serting na between the vowel and final consonant^ of the root, before 
 
 * This change of nu to no is supplied in the corresponding Greek affix w, by 
 lengthening the v, as in l^ev-/vvfjii, leC^wixev ; deiKwfjii, SeiKWfjiev. Bopp. 
 t AU the roots m this conjugation end in consonants. 
 
72 IRREGULAR PRIMITIVE VERBS. 
 
 the p terminations, and n before all the other terminations.* Thus, 
 from bhid, "to divide," are formed the two bases bhinad and 
 bhind, changeable to bhint {bhinatti, bhinttah^ bhindanti); from 
 mdh, " to restrain," runadh and rundh, changeable to rund {runaddhi, 
 runddhah, r. 91. a., rundhanti) \ from hins, "to injure," Unas and 
 hins ; from bhuj, " to eat," bhunaj, changeable to bhunak, and bhunj, 
 changeable to bhtink (r. 91.). Similarly yuj, " to join." 
 
 Bhahj, " to break," rejects its nasal before tia is inserted. Hence the bases bhanaj 
 and bhai'ij (bhanakti, bhun-ktaJi, bhahjanti). 
 
 Eighth Conjugation. 
 
 96. The base in this conjugation is formed by the addition of u 
 to the root, converted to the Guna o before the p terminations. 
 There are only ten roots in this conjugation, nine of w^hich are 
 not in common use. Moreover, these nine all end in n, and 
 therefore the addition of a and u w^ill have the same effect as the 
 addition of no and nu in the 5th conjugation. Thus, tano and 
 tanu, from tan,,'' to extend " (ist sing. pi. tanomi, taniimah, cf. ravvfxt, 
 Tavvi^eg). But the tenth root in this class is ofi kri, " to do," by 
 far the most common and useful root in the language. This 
 root not only converts the conjugational affix u to the Guna o 
 before the p terminations, but also changes the radical vowel ri 
 to the Guna ar before these same terminations, and before the 
 other terminations to ur {karoti, kurutah, kurvanti), and rejects the 
 conjugational u before v, m, y (ist plur. kurmah). 
 
 Ninth Conjugation. 
 97. If a root be of the 9th conjugation, the base is formed by 
 
 * Similarly, n is inserted in certain Greek and Latin roots ; as, naG, fjavdavco ; A.a/3, 
 XaftjSavco; Oty, Oiyyavco ; scid, scindo ; fid,findo ; tag, tango; tiq, linquo, &;c. 
 
 t The final t of the base may be dropped, bhintah ; so, also, rundhah for 
 runddhah. 
 
NON-CONJUGATION AL TENSES. 
 
 adding no, to the root before the p terminations, and ni before all 
 the others, excepting those beginning with vowels, where only n 
 is added. Thus, from pU, " to purify," are formed the three bases 
 puna, punt, and pun {punati, punltah, punanti). This root, with 
 some others ending in long vowels (as, dhu, " to shake "; lU, " to 
 cut "; ^, " to spread "), shortens its vowel in forming the base. 
 IT?, "to take," makes its bases Jl^l, 'T^, 3J^ (r. 21. ); and ^, 
 "to know"; »rRT. sTl^O, WR {janrui, janltah, jananti). 
 
 Roots ending in consonants substitute ana for 7ilhi, the proper 
 termination of the 2d pers. of the imperat. As, iI^JUT, "take 
 thou "; and ^a^TR. " t^'^t thou," from ^^ , " to eat.'' 
 
 Sect. III.— PRIMITIVE VERBS OF ALL CONJUGATIONS 
 IN THE NON-CONJUGATIONAL TENSES. 
 
 1 
 
 TERMINATIONS OF THE NON-CON.JUG ATIONAL TENSES. 
 
 rARASMAIPATA. ATMANEl'ADA. 
 
 Second Preterite. 
 
 a 
 
 ' iva ima e ivahe j iniahe 
 
 itha or tha 
 
 athuh a '''ishe 
 
 athe *idhwe 
 
 a 
 
 atuh uh e 
 
 ate ire 
 
 * Tlie roots tji, T^,"^ , '^, ^,W, W, ^ reject the initial i from 
 these terminations. 
 
 First Future. 
 
 fasrni taswah tusi/iah j take 
 
 fuswahe 
 
 lasmahe 
 
 tasi ' fast hah fas tha tase 
 
 tasuthe 
 
 tadhwe 
 
 fa farau tar ah fa 
 
 farau 
 
 tarah 
 
 Second Future. 
 
 syami syavoh 
 
 syumah \ sye 
 
 syavahe \ syaviahe \ 
 
 syasi syafhah 
 
 syatha syase 
 syanti \ syate 
 
 syefhe syadhwe 
 
 syafi syatah 
 
 syete syante 
 
 Observe, that by reason of r. 30. (with note), the 
 
 most frequent form of the terminations of the second 
 
 future is shyami, &c. 
 
 The letter ^ although compounded with the nasal dot-s not prt-vcnl tlie opera- 
 tion 
 
74 SECOND PRETERITE. 
 
 FORMATION OF THE BASE OF THE NON-CONJUGATIONAL TENSES. 
 
 Second Preterite. 
 
 98. The first step in the formation of the base of this tense 
 is the reduplication of the initial consonant of the root with its 
 vowel, or of the initial vowel : thus, from budh, " to know," btihudh ; 
 and if the root end in a consonant, the radical vowel takes Guna 
 before the terminations of the sing, par., but before all the other 
 terminations reverts to its original form ; hence, the two bases 
 bubodh, bubudh {bubodha, bubodhitha, bubodha, dual bubudhiva, 
 bubudhathuh, &c., atm. bubudhe, &c.) : if in a vowel, this vowel 
 takes Vriddhi in the 1st* and 3d sing, par., and Guna in the 2d, 
 and before all the other terminations, both par. and atm., reverts 
 to its original form : thus, from m, " to lead," the bases ninai, nine, 
 nim [ninai/a, r. 8., ninayitha r. 10. or ninetha, ninaya, ninyiva^ 
 ninyatJmh, ike, atm. ninye, &c.) ; so also from kri, the basQS 
 chakar, chakar, chakri, (chakara, chakartha, dual chakriva) ; and from 
 dhu, the bases dudhaii, dudho, but in dual, plur. &c. dudhuv^ (dudhava, 
 r. 8., dudhavitha r. 10. or dudhotha, dudhmia, dudhiiviva, &c., atm. 
 dudhuve, &c.). Bhu, " to be," is anomalous, making its base babhiiv 
 before all the terminations. 
 
 Observe, that all the terminations of this tense begin with vowels. 
 It is indicated, however, in the scheme, that an initial i is some- 
 times rejected in the 3d pers. sing. This i may be optionally 
 rejected in those roots only in which (as we shall afterwards see) 
 
 tion of r. 21., find according to the same rule, kri, "to buy," 9th conj., makes its 
 bases /a7w7, /rrm?, ATi« (-^TTITfTr, sKhift?T:, i^T!^^. 
 
 * All Grammarians assert that there is an optional change to Guna in tlie 1st 
 ]»ers,, but this is never found. 
 
 t By a six'cial rule, the I of the base is here changed to the semi-vowel instead of 
 following r. 4. But roots ending in i or I, of which the initial consonant is double, 
 change i or ^ to iy before tliese same vowel terminations, that is, before aU excepting 
 the sing. par. : hence, from f^ come the three bases s/mh?-ai, shishre, and shishriy. 
 
 I All roots ending in u or u change ii or u to uv before these vowel terminations; 
 excepting, of course, the roots ^, jf(, -5, ^, in the persons marked with *. 
 
SECOND PRETERIT p.. 75 
 
 it is ncccssin-ily rojoctod in the futures/ In the other persons 
 the i marked with * is retained in every root in the lan<:;uai;e, 
 except eight, viz. ej, " to do "; >j, " to bear "; '^, " to hear "; ^, " to 
 praise," it, " to go," &e., all ending in vowels. Hence it happens 
 that consonants can never come into coalition, except in the 2d pers. 
 sing, of this tense. Its formation, therefore, is not attended with 
 any difficulties of consonantal combination. There are certain 
 rules, however, to be acquired, relative to the reduplication of an 
 initial consonant with its vowel, and an initial vowel. With 
 regard to the vowel belono;ino; to the initial consonant, a is redu- 
 plicated for a, d, ri, or rl ; i for ?, -7, or e ; u for u, u, or o : as, 
 from da, dadan ; from tri, tatara ; from sei; sisheva ; from jni, piipura. 
 
 99. Rules for the Beduplicaiion of an Initial Consononl. 
 
 a. If a root begin with an aspirated consonant, its corresponding 
 unaspirated form is reduplicated ; as, from b/iid, blbheda (f^*?^). ' 
 
 b. If with k or kh, the reduplicated letter is ch : as, from kri, 
 chakUra ('^cRtO ; from khan, chakhana ir^MT^). 
 
 c. If with g, gh, or A, the reduplicated letter is^: as, from o«w, 
 jogZima ; from ghra, jaghrau (sT^) ; from kri, jahura (»I^l). 
 
 d. If with a double consonant, the first only is reduplicated : as, 
 from fyaj, tati/aja (riwi»i) ,■ from kship, chikshepa (f^HjM). 
 
 e. If with a double cor.sonant, whose first is a sibilant and the 
 second a hard consonant, the second only is reduplicated : as, 
 from spn'sh, pasparsha (y^m^ ; from skand, chaskanda (^ ^r<^ ). 
 
 liediijillcation of an Initial Vuwel. 
 
 f. If a root ending in a single consonant begin with a, i, or ii, these vowels are 
 
 repeated, and the two similar vowels ])lend into one long one. Tims, ilsa from (f 
 
 and r/.f, "to Ite"; dpa from a and ap,r. 4. ; the dual 7!<hntvh from i and /.s7; ; riklnifuli 
 
 from u and uldi : hut in the sing, of the last two cases, t!ie radical z or // t;ik inn 
 
 * Thus, pack, "to cook," forbids i in the future ; therefore tlu^ 2d sing, is eiibci- 
 juifinktha or jirchitha. So also ?<i, " to lead," ninni/itha or ninrtUa, as above, 
 t So in the (Jreek, t^Outttui from Oairrw ; ire<l>i\iiKa from r/xAew. 
 I Grammarians a&ert that the short a i.s optionally retained in ihe fnst person. 
 
76 SECOND PRETERITE. 
 
 Guna, the reduplicated i becomes iy before e (iyesha), and uv before o {iivokha). 
 If a root ending in a double consonant begin with a, or, ending in a single consonant, 
 begin with ri, the reduplicated syllable is an : thus, ^T?I^, 3d sing, of ^^ ; 
 dnardha, oiridh. The root 3 i is in the sing, iydya^ iyayitha, t^c-, dual lyiva., S^c. 
 Anomalous Modes of forming the Second Preterite. 
 There are many anomalous ways of forming the base of the 2d pret. 
 
 a. Roots ending in « {as, da, "to give"; stkd, "to stand"; yd, "to go," &c.) 
 drop the d before all the terminations, except tha, and substitute au for that of the 
 1st and M sing. par. Hence, the bases dad, tasth, yay (^^ dadau, IT^ tasthau, 
 ^^n" yayau; dual, dadiva, tasthiva, yayiva). Similarly roots in ai, as gai (jagau). 
 
 b. Roots ending in the vowel ri, in accordance with r. 98, change ri to dr in the 
 ] st and 3d sing., and to ar in the 2d smg., and before the other terminations retain 
 the vowel ri changeable to r ; but roots in which ri is preceded by a double con- 
 sonant, and most roots in long ri, instead of retaining tliis vowel, change it to ar in 
 the dual and plur. par., and consequently throughout the atm. Thus, from srnri, 
 sing, sasmdra, sasmaritha, sasmdra, dual sasmariva, ike. ; atm. sasmare, S(C. 
 
 c. Roots beginning wth any consonant, and ending with a single consonant, and 
 inclosing a short a, lengthen the a in the 1st and Sd sing. : as, from pack, "to cook," 
 papdch; from tyaj, "to quit," tatydj {tatydja, tatyajitha, tatydja, tatyajiva, ^-c). 
 Moreover, before itha and in the dual and plur. par., and all the persons of the atm., 
 if the initial as well as the final consonant of the root be single, the a is changed to 
 e, and, to compensate for this, the reduplication suppressed. Thus, from pack come 
 the two has(is papdch and pech [papdLha,pechithaov papaktha,papdcha,pechiva; atm. 
 peche,SjC.); from laUi, atm. " to obtain " (cf. Xafx,3avu>, e\ai3ov), the base lebh through- 
 out {lebhe, lebhishe, lebhe, lebhivahe, S^r.).* 
 
 d. Roots of this last kind, that require a substituted consonant in the reduplication, 
 are excepted from the rule (but not bhaj and phal). So, also, certain roots begin- 
 ning with V are excepted. These require that the reduplicated syllable be u, or 
 the corresponding vowel of the semi-vowel, and change va of the root to u before 
 every termination, except those of the sing, par., the two «'s then blending into one 
 long one. Thus, from vach,^' to speak," come the two bases iivdch and iich (uvdcha, 
 uchatuh, uchuh). A similar rule is applied in ynj. " to sacrifice " {iydja, Ijatuh, yuh). 
 
 * The roots trap, and grath, and shrath, and ff, "to pass" {tatdra, teratuh, tcruh, 
 as if the root were tar), and bhram, smni, rdj, rndh, bhrdj {bhreje, hhrejdte, bhrylre), 
 bhrdsh, and vam mav follow this rule, althouali not answering the above condition^. 
 
FIRST AND SECOND FUTURE. 77 
 
 e. Gam^ "to go"; han, "to kill" (which forms its 2d pret. as if the root were 
 ghaii) ; jan, "to be bom"; and khan, "todia;"; drop the medial « before all the 
 terminations except those of the sing. par. Hence, from gam come the two bases 
 jagdni, jagm (jagdma^Jagmatuh, jngiiiuh ). 
 
 f. IT^, "to siege," and IT^, " to ask," make their bases irxn"? and IfTrir, W[^ 
 and TJT|;^ (^TTT^. "^I^*' '^•) 5 ^^' "*^ sleep," makes ^t:^TI and ^xy ; 
 ^, "to call," forms its base like roots in w {juhdva, juhuvatuh, juhuvuh) ; f^, 
 "to conquer," forms its base as if from ^rt {j^fl'^y^ij^iliictuli, £^c.). 
 
 g. Roots wliich begin with a vowel, long by nature or position,* and all roots of 
 more than one syllable, form their bases by adding dm to the root, and affixing the 
 2d pret. of some one of the auxiliaries, as, " to be"; bhn, " to become ": '^ /?;•/, " to 
 do." Thus, from ^ comes the base |^ (f;5n5lT^, or ^^fl'^^, or f^^n^cfin,). 
 
 100. The First and Second Future. 
 
 The first future (as noticed by Bopp) results from the union 
 of the nom. case of the noun of agency (formed with the affix w fri, 
 r. 41.) with the present tense of the verb, as, " to be." Thus, 
 taking datri, " a giver " (declined p. 37.), and combining its nom. 
 case with asmi and he, we have datusmi and datuhe, " I am a giver," 
 identical with the 1st pers. sing. par. and atm. of the 1st fut., " I 
 will give." So also datasi and datase, " thou art a giver," or 
 " thou wilt give." In the 1st and 2d persons dual and plur. the 
 sing, of the noun is joined with the dual and plur. of the auxiliary. 
 In the 3d i)erson the auxiliary is omitted, and the 3d pers. sing, dual 
 and plur. of the 1st future in both voices is then identical with 
 the nom. case sing, dual and plur. of the noun of agency. Thus, 
 data, " a giver," or " he will give "; datarau, " two givers," or 
 " they two will give," Sec J 
 
 The second future, in its terminations, stands in close relation- 
 ship with the present tense, the only difference being that si/ is 
 prefixed. 
 
 * Except dp, " to obtain," and roots having an initial a before two consonants, 
 t The future signification inherent in the noun of agency ddtd, seems imjjlied in 
 
 Latin In' the relation of d/ifor to diitiini.s. 
 
78 FIRST AND SECOND FUTURE. 
 
 The invariable rule for the formation of the base of both 
 future tenses is, that the Guna be substituted for the voNvel of 
 the root : thus, ivomjl, "to conquer,'" the base^'e {jetUsmi, jeshyrwii)\ 
 from shru, " to hear," the base shro (^fTfrrfWf , ^hiiPh). And the 
 general rule, moreover, is, that if the root end in a consonatit, 
 the vowel i be inserted between the base and terminations. Thus, 
 from budh comes the base bodhi (^fVpfrftT hodhitasmi, &c. ; ^VftnmftT 
 bodhishyami, &;c.). This insertion of i, the manifest object of which 
 is to prevent the coalition of consonants, is unfortunately, how- 
 ever, forbidden in about one hundred roots, some of which are of 
 very common occuiTence ; and the combination of the radical 
 consonant with the initial t and s of the terminations, will require 
 an acquaintance with the rules already laid down at p. 67. When 
 these rules are acquired, there will be no difficulty in the forma- 
 tion of these tenses. The only question is, how are we to 
 distinguish between those roots which insert i, and those which 
 do not? 
 
 The laws about to be laid down will determine this point, and 
 it is of the utmost importance that the attention of the student 
 be directed towards them, as the assumption or rejection of this 
 inserted vowel is not confined to the two futures, but extends to 
 many other parts of the verb ; insomuch, that if the first future 
 reject i, it is, as a necessary consequence, rejected in the third 
 preterite, the atm. of the benedictive, the conditional, the infinitive 
 mood, the passive past participle, the indeclinable past participle, 
 the future participle formed with the affix tavya, and the noun of 
 agency formed with the affix tn ; and is, moreover, optionally 
 rejected in the 2d pers. sing, of the 2d pret., and decides the 
 formation of the desiderative form of the root by s instead of ish. 
 So that the learner, if he know the first future, will pass on with 
 great ease to the formation of these other parts of the verb, and 
 should always look to this tense as his guide. For example, 
 taking the root kshii), " to throw," and finding the 1st fut. to be 
 ksheptasmi, he knows that i is rejected. Therefore he knows the 
 
 * Unless such substitution be forbidden according to r. 88. a. 
 
FIRST AND SECOND FUTURE. 79 
 
 2d future to be kshepsyUmi ; the 3d pret. to l)e aks/iaipsa??t ; the 
 atm. of the beuedietive, kshipsli/a ; the conditional, aksheps>/am; 
 the infinitive, ksheptum ; the passive past participle, ksMp^a ; the 
 indeclinable part, ksheptwa; the future part, ksheptavya ; the noun 
 of agency, kshepfri ; the 2d pers. sing, of the 2d pret. optionally 
 chiksheptha ; the desiderative, chikskipsumi. On the other hand, 
 taking the root yach, " to ask," and finding the 1st future to be 
 j/Uc/ii(a, he knows that i is inserted, and therefore the same parts 
 of the verb will be yacUshyami, ayachisham, yacMsMya, ayachishyam, 
 yUchitum, yUchita, yachitrva, yachitavya, yachitri, yayuchitha, yaya- 
 chishZtmU respectively. 
 
 It is evident that roots ending in vowels do not require i, and 
 it may be taken as a general rule that they do not insert it : 
 there are only a few exceptions, as follows : 
 
 101. Boots ending in Vowels, inserting i in the Primitive. 
 Obs. In the following lists the 3d pers. sing, of the 1st and 
 2d future is given after each root. 
 
 a. Roots ending in u ,• as, bhu, " to be " {bhavifa, bhavishyati). 
 
 b. Roots ending in rJ,- as, w(;i, "to pass" (tarita, tarishyati) : 
 and in these, inserted i is optionally lengthened {tarita, tarishyati). 
 
 c. Roots ending in ri short insert i in the 2d future, although 
 rejecting it in the first ; as, ^ {karishyami), ^ {harishymtii). 
 
 Boots ending in Consonants, inserting i in the Primitive. 
 
 d. All roots, without exception, ending in kh, g, gh, t, th, d, n, t, 
 th, b, y, r, I, 15, insert i ; in k there is one exception ; in ch, four ; in 
 chh, one ; in j, ten common exceptions ; in d, eight ; in dh, eleven ; 
 m n, two ; in p, twelve ; in bh, three ; in 7n, five ; in 5T^ sh, seven ; 
 in T| sh, nine ; in s, one ; in ^ h, twelve. 
 
 Boots ending in Vowels, rejecting i in the Primitive. 
 
 e. All roots in a reject i; as, da {data, dasyati): all common 
 roots in i and i ; as, je {jeta, jeshyati). 
 
 f. All common roots in u; as, shru (shrotrt, shroshyati): all in ri 
 reject i in the 1st future ; as, f hri (hartci, harishyati). 
 
80 ' FIRST AND SECOND FUEURE. 
 
 102. Boots ending in Consonants, rejecting i in the Primitive. 
 
 Of roots ending in K, 151^ {shakta, shakshyatU r. 91.)- In CH. 
 "pach {pakta, pakshyatih so vach ; sich {sekta, sekshyati), much 
 {mokta, mokshyati). In CHH> Tf^^ (prashta, r. 91., prakshyati). In 
 J, tyaj {tyakta, tydkshyati), so hhaj ; yaj {yashta, r. 91., yakshyati) ; 
 T^ (t.1;T , bsfff), so also bhanj, sanj ; yuj {yoktu, yokshyati), so bhuj; 
 iRir srij (^^TFT, ^r^lfiT); Jpl^ {marshta, markshyati). In D, ad {atta, 
 atsyati), so pad, sad ; bhid (bhetta, bhetsyati), so chhid, khid ; tud 
 {tottu, totsyati), so nud. In DH. bandh {banddhU, r. 91. a., bhatitsyati, 
 Y. 91. b), vyadh (vyaddha, vyatsyati), sddh (saddha, satsyati), so 
 radh; sidh (seddha, setsyati), biidh^ 4th conj. {boddha, bhotsyate, 
 V. 91. 6.); yudh {yoddha, yotsyate) ; so rudh, krudh, kshudh, sltudh. 
 In N, mavv {manta, mansyate), han (jianta, but hanishyati). In F, 
 tap {tapta, tapsyati), so vap, shap, swap ; Up {apta, apsyat'i), kship 
 {kshepta, kshepsyati), so Up ; lup {lopta, lopsyatt) ; W^ srip {sarpta 
 or srapta,* sarpsyati or srapsyati), so trip,^ drip-^ klrip {kalpta^ kalp- 
 syati). In BH, labh {labdhUi, r. 91, a., lapsyate, cf. Xrj^j/eTat, r. 91. 6.), 
 so rabh ; luhh (lobdha, ' but lobhishyati). In M, gam {ganta, but 
 gamishyati), nam {nantu, nansyati), so j/rt;/^ ; ram (ranta, ransyate), 
 so kram.^ In ^ SH, ffew^/* (^, ^^f?r), vish (^, r. 91. c, W^fff, 
 r. 91. e.), so dish; "E^ drish ("^^T,* "^^frr), so sprish, mrish ; krush 
 ("^T, "^tafrr). In T? SH, taksh (tashta,'^ taksyati), ish (eshta,'^ but 
 eshishyati), d/vish (ir^, l^rfir), so shlish, pish ; dush (^t?T, ^t^fw) ; 
 so push, shush, tush ; krish {krashtu or karshta, krakshyad or kark- 
 shyati). In S, 'cas {pasta, vatsyati). In ^ H, dah {dagdha, r. 91. A., 
 dhakshyati, r. 91. i) ; vah (^^T, r. 91. /«., a being changed to 0, 
 ^^fff). sah (^^,'' but sahishyate), nah {naddha, natsyati, as if from 
 nadli), gah (tttTT, tn^i^), lih (q5^, ^r^rfw), c/«A {degdha, dhekshyati, 
 r. 91. i), 5W27« {snegdha^ snekshyati), ruh (tt^, T^t^fff), muh (?ftTr" or 
 jftT^n, ^twfw). duh {dogdha, dhokshyati), druh^ (^tTT or ^ftnjT, llt^rf?T)» 
 
 * In certain roots containing the vowel rj, the vowel passes into ra and ?v?, 
 instead of the Guna ar or Vriddhi dr. Thus, the 1st future of srij is ^f^ for j^ ; 
 and the 3d pret. '^TBT^ for ^^HT^. 
 
 t All these roots may optionally take i in the futures. 
 
THIRD PRETERITE. 
 
 81 
 
 TlllUn PRKTEIIITF, TENSE. 
 
 
 TERMINATIONS OF THE TIIIKD PRETERITE. 
 
 
 PARASMAIl-ADA FoRM I. ATMANEl'ADA. 
 
 
 Terminations of Verbs inserting i. 
 
 isham 
 
 ishwa ishina 
 
 1 ishi 
 
 ishumhi 
 
 i.shmnhi 
 
 }h 
 
 ishtain ishta 
 
 ishthdh 
 
 ishdthdm 
 
 idhwaui or idhwam 
 
 it 
 
 islitdm 1 ishuh 
 
 1 ishta 
 
 iqhdtdm 
 
 ishata 
 
 
 Form II. 
 
 
 Terminations of Verbs rejecting i. 
 
 sam 
 
 swa 
 
 sma 
 
 si 
 
 swahi smahi 
 
 Slh 
 
 stam or tarn 
 
 sta or ta 
 
 sthdh or thdh 
 
 sdthdm dhwam or dhwam 
 
 sit 
 
 stdm or turn 
 
 suh 
 
 sta or ta 
 
 sdtdm satn 
 
 Obs. 
 
 By reason of r. 30. (with note) the initial sibilant almost always 
 
 takes tl 
 
 le cerebral fomi sli. 
 
 
 Form III. 
 
 
 Termitiations corresponding to the First Preterite. 
 
 am 
 
 dvn j dma e or i 
 
 drahi 
 
 dmahi 
 
 ah 
 
 ntam ata 
 
 athdh 
 
 ethdm or dtham 
 
 (idhwam 
 
 at 
 
 atdm an \ 
 
 ata 
 
 etdm or atam 
 
 anta 
 
 103. Formation of the Base of the Third Preterite. 
 
 This complex and "multiform" tense, the most troublesome and intricate in the 
 whole Sanscrit verb, is not so much one tense, as an aggregation of several tenses, all 
 more or less allied to each other, all beai-ing a manifest resemblance to the first 
 preterite, but none of them exactly assignable to that tense, and none of them so 
 distinct in its character or so universal in its application as to admit of segregation 
 from the general group, under any separate title of its own. 
 
 Fortunately for the study of Sanscrit, the third preterite very rarely occurs in tlie 
 earlier and better si)ecimcns of Hindu composition ; and the student who contents 
 himself with the Raraayana, Maliabharata, Ilitopadesha, and Laws of Manu, and 
 avoids the grammatical Poem of Bhatti, and the extravagant ^vritings of more 
 modern authors, will lose nothing by an almost total ignorance of this tense, or, at 
 least, may satisfy himself with a very cursory survey of its character and functions. 
 
82 THIRD PRETERITE. 
 
 All the varieties of this tense are reducible to three distinct forms, adapted to the 
 three schemes of tenninations given in the table above. The first form is that 
 which belongs to those roots which insert i before the terminations of the non-con- 
 jugational tenses : the second belongs to those which reject i : and the third, which 
 most nearly approximates to the 1st pret., belongs, in the first place, to certain 
 roots, whose bases in iheji)-st pret. present some important variation from the root ; 
 in the second, to certain roots ending in ^ sh, T( sh, or ^ 7i, which have i, ti, or ri 
 for their radical vowel ; and, in the third, to causals, or verbs of the 10th conjugation. 
 
 In all the modifications of this tense, the first step in the formation of the base 
 is the prefixing of the augment a, a further indication of its community of character 
 with the first preterite. But besides tliis there are changes of the base peculiar to 
 each form. 
 
 Form 1. Formation of the Base. 
 
 a. In the first form, if a root end in a vowel, the base must be formed in the 
 par. liy the Vriddhi change, and in the iltm. by the Guna : thus, from jm, "to pu- 
 rify," come the two bases apau and ripo (^fT(f^r^ fipdvisham, <^c. r. 8., ^TTf^f^ 
 apavishi, &;c., r. 10. J). Very few roots ending in vowels take the inserted i, and 
 therefore very few follow this form. 
 
 h. If a root end in a single consonant, Guna is required in both par. and atm. 
 (r.88. h.). Thus, from lmdh,abodh (w^\fx(i abodhisham, 8^c.,^(^tf^(f^ahodhisJli, S^c). 
 Almost all roots ending in consonants, which insert i, follow this form. 
 
 c. A medial a is sometimes lengthened; as, from vad, aiidd {avddisham, S^c). 
 
 d. A few roots in d, e, o, and ai, with three in m, viz. ya?n, ram, nam, insert s 
 before the terminations of this form, the final e, o, and ai, being changed to d. Thus, 
 from 1/d, ayds {aydsisham, S^c.) ; from so, asds {asdsisham, <Jfc.) ; from yara, ayans 
 {ayansisiham, ^-c). In the atm. they follow form 2. {aydsi, &;c., aransi, S^c). 
 
 Form 2. Formation of the Base. 
 
 e. The greater number of roots rejecting i follow this form. 
 
 Observe that the initial s may often be rejected from those terminations in which 
 it is compounded with t, th. This takes place when the base ends in any consonant 
 except a nasal or a semi- vowel, or in any short vowel; and dhwam (^) takes 
 the place of dhwam when the base ends in any other vowel than a. 
 
 f. If a root end in either a consonant or a vowel, Vriddlii takes place in the par. ; as, 
 from kri, akar (^fofiT^ akdrsham, (^'c), from yuj, ayauj (^^tl^ ayauksham, <Sfc., 
 dual ayaukshwa, ayauktam, S^c.) ; from rudh {arautsam, ^-c, dual arautswa, 
 
THIRD PRETERITE, 83 
 
 arauddham, r. 91.0.6.); ^om ^«A (adhakshajii, .SfC, dual (ulkakxhwa, (ulafjilhmn, 
 r. 91. /*. «.). 
 
 g. But in the fitm. if a root end in any other vowel than ri, Guna takes place ; as, 
 from chi, ache (^T^f^ acheshi, S;c.); and if in ri, or any consonant, tlien the vowel 
 is unchanged; as, from kri, akri {akrishi, akritluih, ^fc.) ; from yvj, uyuj {ayukshi, 
 ayukthdh, Sfc.) ; from rud/i, arudh {nnitsi, arxiddkah, anidd/ia, r. 91. a. b.). 
 
 Form 3.* Formation of the Base. 
 
 h. Roots of any conjugation, making use of this form, in general attach the ter- 
 minations directly to the root: thus, from gam, agam {agamam, ^c); from hhid, 
 abhid (^rfil^ abhidaru, S;c.). And no confusion can arise from this apparent identity 
 with the 1st pret., as in all cases where these terminations are used for the 8d pret., 
 the 1st pret. presents some difference in the form of its base ; as in agachchham, 
 abhinadam. So again, the sixth conjugation, which alone can ever shew a perfect 
 identity of root and base, never makes use of this form for its 3d pret., unless by 
 some special rule the base of its 1st pret. is made to differ from the root. Thus, 
 lip, "to smear" (cf. a\e'i(p<jo), which is alipam in the 3d pret., is alimpam in the first. 
 
 i. Certain roots ending in long vowels, as dii, "to give,"t make use of tlie termi- 
 nations of this form, but reject the initial vowel throughout {adnm, addh, addt ; 
 dual, addva; 3d pi. aduh ; atm. adishi, S^-c, form 2.t). So bhu, "to be," except in 
 the 1st sing, and 3d plur. (^^ nhhuvam, abhuh, Sjc. ; 3d plur. abhuvan ; in the atm. 
 abhavishi, <.^c. form 2.). 
 
 j. The roots vach, " to speak," and pat, " to fall," follow this form ; but, in contra- 
 distinction to the 1st pret., make their bases avoch, apapt {avocham, apaptam, 
 cf. e-Ki-KTov). As, " to throw," makes asth ; shas, ushish ; nash, anesh. 
 
 k. Certain roots ending in ^ sA, "q sh, ^ /*, inclosing a medial i, u, or ri, form their 
 3d pret. according to tliis third scheme ; but whenever confusion is likely to arise 
 
 * Bopp has noticed that this form of the 3d pret. corresponds very clearly with 
 the 2d aorist of the Greek (cf. asthdm, asthds, asthdt with evTrjv, eVr';?, fio-n;), and 
 that the first two fonns are more or less analogous to the 1st aorist. 
 
 t Bopp remarks that the 1st pret. of this root adaddm bears the same relation 
 to its 3d preterite addm, that eSlSmv does to eSwv. So also the relation of r/rf/m/n 
 (3d pret. of dhd) to adadhdm, (1st pret.) coiTcsponds to that of eOt]v to ertOiiv. 
 Cf. also abhavah and abhuh with e^ue? and efjiu?. 
 
 I Roots like dd, in the atin., change the radical d to I, and follow form 2. : thus, 
 adi,shi, adithdh, adita, adishwifhi, Sjc. 
 
84 
 
 BENEDICTIVE. — CONDITIONAL. 
 
 between the 1st and 3d preterites, the base is formed by the addition of sh to the 
 root, the final of the root bemg at the same time changed to k (r. 91. e.). 
 
 Thus from fk^ dish, " to point out," comes the base adiksh (^f^^ adiksham,S^-c., 
 cf. eSeifa, 1st pret. adishani); from dwish^ "to hate," adwiksh {adwiksham, S^c); 
 from duh, "to milk," adhuksh {adhuksham, S^c, r. 91. i.). But this class of roots 
 substitutes i for e, the termination of the 1st pers. sing. atm. (adikshi, adikshathdh, 
 3;c.), and atham, atam, for ethdm, etam, in the 2d and 3d dual {adikshathdm).* 
 
 Causal verbs make use of the terminations of this form, but the base assumes 
 a very peculiar reduplication (analogous to the Greek pluperfect), to be afterwards 
 explained. Thus, from hudh, abuhudh {abubudham, S^c). 
 
 BENEDICTIVE AND CONDITIONAL TENSES. 
 
 TERMINATIONS. 
 
 Benedictive. 
 
 PARASMAIPADA. ATMANEPADA. 
 
 ydsam 
 
 ydswa 1 ydsma 
 
 siya 
 
 slvahi 
 
 simahi 
 
 yah 
 
 ydstam ydsta 
 
 sishthdh 
 
 siydsthdm 
 
 sldhwam (rlhwam) 
 
 ydt 
 
 ydstdm ydsuh 
 
 sishta 
 
 siydstdm , slran 
 
 Conditional. 
 
 syam 
 
 sydva sydma 
 
 sye sydvahi 
 
 sydtnahi 
 
 syah 
 
 syatam syata 
 
 syathdh syethdm 
 
 syadhwam 
 
 syat 
 
 syatdm syan 
 
 syata syetdm 
 
 syanta 
 
 Obs. The initial sibilant, in the termmations of both these 
 
 tenses, almost always takes the cerebral form sh. 
 
 Formation of the Base of the Benedictive or Precative. 
 104. In forming the base of this tense the parasmaipada never admits inserted i, 
 but those roots wliich take inserted i in the futures (see p. 79. ) take it also in the 
 atmanepada of this tense ; as from bhu, " to be," the two bases bhu and bhavi 
 (jTXrW bhuydsam, S^c, >Tfcjvfli| bhavishlya, Sjc). 
 
 * A few roots of this kmd optionally follow form 2. in the atm. ; as, f^ may be 
 
 ^f^f^, 'si^trr:, ^^, &c., and |f , ^^, ^r^;, '^^, &c., r. 91. /*. i. 
 
BENEPICTIVE. CONDITIONAL. INFINITIVE. 85 
 
 «. If a root end in *7, this vowel is changed to e in the par. ; as, from ffil, dc ( '^^ \^ 
 deyasam, <Sff.), but not in the atm. (?iu1l| ddttli/it, ^c). 
 
 b. If in i or ?/, these vowels are lengthened in the par. ; as, from chi, chl ; from hit, 
 hu {chlydsam, S^c, hui/iisaiu, Syc), and changed to Guna in the atm. {clushlya, 
 hoshtya). Similarly ^ and ^ (^mM, *m*i). 
 
 c. If in ■^ ri, this vowel is changed to ft./u' in the par., but retained in the atm. ; thus, 
 from oB, the bases f^ and ^ (f^nn^, og^hl). After a double consonant ri becomes 
 (ir in the par. As also before inserted i {stanjdsam, starUhlifa from stri). 
 
 d. If in ^ r7, this vowel is changed to 7r,in both voices; as, from IT the base ifir. 
 {tlryasam, tlrshhja) ; but before inserted i in the atm. to ar {tarishlya or tarlshlya). 
 
 e. If in a consonant, there is no change in the par., and no change in the atm., 
 unless the root take the inserted i, when Guna is required ; as, from budh the 
 bases budh and bodhi (budhydsam, bodhishlya) ; from dwish, the base dwish (dwhih- 
 ydsam, dwikshlya). But in the par. certain roots undergo changes analogous to 
 those in the 2d pret. (r. 99. d.f.) and in the passive (r. 112. d.f.). Thus, from 
 grah, grihydsam, i^c. ; houi rack, uchydsam, ^c. ; from swap, supyd mm ; homyaj, 
 ijydsnm, S(C. 
 
 It is to be remarked of this tense, that the changes of the base before the y of the 
 par. terminations are analogous to those before the y which is the sign of neuter and 
 passive verbs (r. 89. 112.). Observe, moreover, that the terminations resemble 
 those of the potential of irregular primitives (p. 66.) ; the only difference being, that 
 in most cases a sibilant, and in some, two sibilants, are either prefixed or inserted. 
 Formation of the Base of the Conditional. 
 
 105. This tense, in its formation, lies half way between the first preterite and 
 the second future. It resembles the 1st pret. in prefixing the augment a to the 
 base, and in the latter part of its terminations : it resembles the second future in 
 inserting i in exactly those roots in which the future inserts i, and in the first 
 part of its terminations. Thus, from budh comes the base abodhi (-•KoTtfllut 
 ahodhishyaiit, ^f.) ; from kship, the base akshep (tH^LUJ akshepsyam, S^-c). 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 
 Termination turn (cf. tlie Latin supine). 
 
 Formation of the base. 
 
 106. 'Die base of the" infinitive is identical with the base of the 
 
 first future, and where one inserts i, the other does also. Thus 
 
 from budh, bodhi (^TftjJ bodhitum) ; from kship, kshep ("^ ksheptiim). 
 
 Moreover, all tlie rules for the eliaiio^e of the final consonant of a 
 
 root before the / of the future terminations ajiply (>((ually before 
 
86 CAUSAL VERBS. 
 
 the / of the infinitive. Hence, by substituting imi for the final a of 
 the 3d pers. sing, of the 1st future, the infinitive is at once obtained. 
 See p. SO. Thus, tyakta, tyaktum; jjrashtu, prashtum (jfi) ; sodM, 
 sodhum (;fft^). &c. &c. 
 
 CAUSALS, OR VERBS OF THE IOtii CONJUGATION. 
 
 107. Every root in the language may, in theory,' take what is 
 called a causal form ; and, moreover, practically, this is a most 
 useful form of the root, that may be used to give either a causal 
 or active sense to a primitive verb. Thus the primitive verb 
 bodhati, " he knows," becomes in the causal ^fttiprfir bodhai/ati, " he 
 causes to know,"" or "informs"; and the primitive kshubhyati, " he 
 is shaken," becomes kshobhayati, " he shakes." This form, also, 
 may sometimes give the sense of allowing or permitting, as 
 harayati, " he allows to take " ; nushayati, " he suffers to perish." 
 
 The Terminations of Causals. 
 
 a. These, in the conjugational tenses, are precisely those of 
 regular primitive verbs, p. 63. Of the non-conjugational tenses, 
 the second preterite necessarily conforms to the general scheme 
 in its terminations, inasmuch as the tense itself results from 
 the annexation of the 2d preterite of some one of the auxiliaries 
 as, bku or kri, to a particular form of the causal base. In the 
 two futures, the benedictive and conditional, the terminations are 
 precisely those of the general scheme. In the third preterite 
 they are those of the third form (p. 81.). 
 
 Formation of the Base of Causals. 
 
 b. The first step in the formation of the base is the addition 
 of ay to the root ; and this affix is retained throughout all the 
 tenses, conjugational and non-conjugational, excepting only the 
 third preterite, and excepting the bene,dictive par. 
 
 Conjugational Tenses. 
 
 c. If a root end in a vowel, Vriddhi is required : as, from wi, 
 nai, forming, with the affix ay, the base nayay, r. 8. (pres. «f|t|^ifVl 
 
CAUSAL VKRHS. 87 
 
 tini/ni/an/f, Scv. \ 1st \n-ct. anayaija))!, v^f.) ; from kri, the base kuray 
 (<+IWlf*< kuray a mi, &c.). 
 
 rf. Anomalies. — Roots in a or in e, o», changeable to /7, cannot take V'riddlu, hut 
 insert ;>, or sometimes y, between the root and the affix ay. Thus, from tla, the 
 base ddpay ; from /«7, "to drink," jxlijaij ; from li we, h wilt/a i/. But ;«7, " to pre- 
 serve," inserts Z {paltryruiii, ^^O- T^*<^ roots i, "to go"; j7, "to conquer"; smi, 
 " to smile "; chi, " to collect "; and bhl. " to fear "; fonn their bases, apny ;* jdpay ; 
 smapuxj ; chapai/ or chapay ; bhdpny, atm., or bhlshny, atm., respectively, llr'i, 
 " to be ashamed," and rj, " to go," take Guna, and form their bases hrepay and 
 arpay. 
 
 e. If a root end in a consonant and contain the vowel a, this 
 a is generally lengthened; as, from pack, puchay (i ^KH l fn , &c.) : 
 but not always; as from gam,gamay* (jih^iPh, &c.). If it contain 
 any other vowel, Guna takes place (unless as proliibited, r. 88. h.): 
 thus, from budh, bodliay (bodhnyUmi, &c,) ; from srip, sarpay. 
 
 f. Anomalies.— i2«/t, "to grow," foims ropay ; rfw.s/t, " to pollute," fi?M.s7ior/ y hdn^ 
 '^ to kill," ghdtay ; shdd, "to perish," shdtay ; sphur (^^^t(j, "to qwvcr," spMray ; 
 sphdy (^^ifin^), " to increase," sphdvay. 
 
 Non-conjugational Tenses. 
 The changes of the root requisite to form the base of the 
 conjugational tenses are continued in all of these, the ay only 
 being rejected in the 3d pret. and in the benedictive parasmai. 
 
 Second Preterite of Caiisals. 
 108. The second preterite is formed (according to r. 99. g.) by 
 adding am to the base of the conjugational tenses, and affixing to 
 this the second preterite of some one of the auxiliaries as, b/m 
 or kr'i ; thus, from budh, bodhayum (^fhnrnrm bodhayUmusa or 
 bodhayutnbabhUva^ or bodhayuhchakura). 
 
 * Thus, from adhl^ " to go over " or " read," comes adhydpayati, " he causes to 
 read " or " teaches." 
 
 t Few roots in m lengthen the a. Some, however, optionally do so. 
 + It may be questioned whether bhu is ever found added to causals. 
 
88 CAUSAL VERBS. 
 
 The First and Second Future of Causals. 
 In these tenses the inserted i is invariably assumed between 
 the base, as formed in the conjugational tenses, and the usual 
 terminations. Thus, from budh, bodhayi (bodhayitasmi, &c. ; bodha- 
 yishyami, &c.). 
 
 The Third Preterite of Causals. 
 109. In the formation of the base of this tense, the affix ay is rejected; but any- 
 other change that may take place in the conjugational tenses, such as the insertion 
 of p or ?/, is preserved. The base is a reduplicated form of this change, and to this 
 reduplication the augment a is prefixed. Thus, taking the bases hodhay and jdpay 
 (cans, bases of budh, "to know," and ji, "to conquer"), and rejectmg ay, we have 
 bodh and Jap ; and from these are formed the bases of the 3d pret., abubtidh and 
 ajljap {"^S^W^ abubudliam, ^-c, ^afNTtJ ajijapam, ^c, cf. the Greek pluperfect). 
 The rule for this reduplication is as follows:— The initial consonant of the root, 
 with its vowel, are reduplicated, and the reduplicated consonant follows the rules 
 given at r. 99. ; but the reduplication of the vowel is peculiar. 
 
 Rtdesfor the Reduplication of the Vowel of the Initial Consonant. 
 Causal bases, after rejecting ay, will end either in ay, dv, dr, or a consonant pre- 
 ceded by a, a, e, o, or ar. The usual reduplicated vowel for aU these vowels except 
 o, is i. But u is reduplicated for o, and sometimes also for di\ In general, this 
 reduplicated vowel is made long, and to compensate for this, the long vowel of the 
 causal base shortened, or, if it be Guna, changed to its cognate short vowel. Thus, 
 the causal base nay (from ni, rejecting ay) makes the base of the 3d pret. anlnay 
 {amnayam, ^c.) ; the causal base bhav (from bhli) makes ablbhav ; the causal base 
 kdr (from An), achikar ; gam (from gam),ajigam; pdch {irora pach),aptpach ; pal 
 (from pa), ap'ipal ; red (from vid), avivid ; vart (from vrit), avlvrit. But bodh 
 (from budh), dbubudh; and sdv (from su), asushav. Sometimes the reduplicated 
 vowel is only long by position before two consonants, the radical vowel being still 
 made short ; as, shrdv (from shru) makes ashushrav ; drdv (from dru), adudrav ; 
 bhrdj, abihhraj. Sometimes the reduplicated vowel remains short, whilst the vowel 
 of the causal base, which must be long either by nature or position, remains 
 unchano-ed. Thus, the causal hs&e jlv (ivoTajw) may make ajijiv ; chint, achi- 
 chint ; halp, achikalp. In such cases a may be reduplicated for a or a ; as, laksh 
 makes alalaksh ; ydch, ayaydch ; vart (from vrit) avavart, ^cf 
 
 t The following bases of the 3d preterite are formed anomalously from causal 
 
PASSIVE VERBS. 89 
 
 Rules/or the Reduplication of an Initial Vowel. 
 If a root begin with a vowel this vowel is not reduplicated, only coalescin:,' with 
 the augment a according to the rule, p. 64. ; but the reduplicated form of the final 
 consonant, with the vowel /, is inserted between the augment and vowel thus 
 coalescing, and the final consonant. Thus the root nksh makes dchiksh p. 75. b. 
 (achiksham, S(C.) ; arli, firjih ; dp, apip ; i(!{^^, nidid ; fih, aujih ; ridli, drdidh. 
 
 The Benedidive and Conditional of Causals. 
 
 110. The base of these tenses does not differ from that of the non-conjugational 
 
 tenses ; ai/ is retained, and after it the inserted i invaviablj'^ assumed ; excepting in 
 
 the benedictive paras., where both ai/ and i are rejected. Thus, from bndh, the bases 
 
 bodk, bodhayi, ahodhayi (bodhi/dsam, ^c. ; bodhayhhlya, ^c. ; abodhayishyain, S^c). 
 
 PASSIVE VERBS. 
 
 Every root in the language may take a passive form. It is 
 a form, however, little used, except in the 3d person sing, and 
 plural of the present and imperative ; for although a passive 
 construction is exceedingly common in Sansci'it syntax, yet almost 
 all the tenses of the passive verb are expressed by participles. 
 
 Our reasons for denominating the passive a distinct derivative 
 from the root rather than a voice of the primitive, and for 
 considering that the 4th conjugation of primitives results from 
 the occasional assumption of a parasmaipada form* by this passive 
 verl), have been already given''' (see pj). 58. 62.). 
 
 111. Passive verbs are conjugated with the regular atraanepada 
 
 bases, nphjy from pry (^^7^ « to drink"); ntishihlp from s/Aa/) (s^A<7, " to stand ") ; 
 adhyujigap fvQin adhyap (?, " to go," with adhi) ; ajicjhrip from 'jhrap. 
 
 * The 4th conjugation can hardly be said to possess an iitmanepada; orifso^ 
 then U3 atmanepada is identical with the passive. And it seems probable that tliose 
 atmancpada verbs, suchas/>«r7, "to go," and biidh, "to know," which are placed 
 ander the 4th conjugation, are in reality passive verbs; at any rate, the forms given 
 for their 3d preterites {apddi, abodhi) can only belong to passives. 
 
 t That the passive does occasionally take the terminations of the parasmaipada, 
 is corroborated by Bopp, who gives several instances; as, chhidijct for chhidi/efn. 
 N;jl. xiv. fi. ; mokshyasi for mokshyase, " tliou shalt be liberated-" Other instances, 
 ■may be found in Westergaard ; as, vi'hjati for vidycitr. 
 
 N 
 
90 PASSIVE VERBS. 
 
 inflections ; that is, in the conjugational tenses they conform to 
 the scheme for the atm. at p. 63., and in the non-conjugational 
 tenses to the general schemes at p. 73., p. 81., and p. 84. 
 
 In the third preterite they take the first two forms (p. 81.), 
 according as the root may admit the inserted i or not ; but 
 require that, in the 3d pers. sing, of both forms, the termination 
 be invariably / (^) in place of i^hta and sta. 
 
 Cofijugational Tenses. 
 112. In the formation of these the passive verb is to be treated 
 like a regular primitive of the 4th conjugation ; that is, in general 
 the only change made in the root is the affixing of j/ ,- but before 
 this affix certain changes of a final vowel may take place, some 
 of which are analogous to those of the 4th conj. A final a, e, 
 ai, or are changed to t: as, from da, the base dJy (3d sing. 
 ^71^) ; so also dM, pa, stha, ha, ma ; so also gai, " to sing,'' (gii/). 
 
 a. If in / or u, or a semi-vowel preceded by / or n, these vowels 
 are lengthened : as, from ji, jly ; from hu, huy ; from div, dwy. 
 
 b. If in "^ri, this vowel becomes ft ri ; as, fi'om oR, the base kriy 
 (f^ilrl) ; but ar, if two consonants precede ; as from ^ smn, smary. 
 
 c. If in ^ rl, this vowel becomes ir : as, from ^ kn, " to scatter," 
 klry (y^rS^, &c.). But hova pp, pury. 
 
 d. Roots ending in two consonants, of which the first is a nasal, 
 usually reject the nasal : as, from bandJu badhy ; from stambh, 
 stabhy ; from sahj {^S^), sajy. From ^rre comes f^p^ (p. 70. e.). 
 
 e. Jati, khan, and tan, may optionally reject the final nasal, but 
 the a is then lengthened : as, from jan, jay or jany (»n^ or ^pilff)- 
 
 /. From vach, vad, rap, vas, swap, come the bases tichy, udy, upy, 
 ushy, siipy : from grah, prachh, and vyadh, the bases grihy (tt^, &c.), 
 prichhy, vidhy : from yaj, hve, ve, come ijy, huy, uy. 
 
 Non-conjugational Tenses. — Second Preterite of Passives. 
 
 The base of this tense in the passive verb is identical wuth 
 
 that of all primitive verbs. The bases, therefore, as formed at 
 
 p. 74., will serve equally w^ell for the 2d preterite of the passive, 
 
 provided only that they be restricted to the atmanepada inflection. 
 
 The First and Second Future of Passives. 
 113. In these and the remaining tenses no variation can occur 
 
PASSIVE VERBS. 91 
 
 tVoni the bases of the same tenses in the {)riniitive, unless tlie 
 root end in a vowel. In that case the insertion of i may take 
 place in the passive, although prohibited in the primitive, provided 
 the final vowel of the root be first changed to its Vriddlii sub- 
 stitute. Thus, from chi, to gather,"" may come the base of the 
 1st and 2d fut. pass, chayi {chayitahe, Sec, chUyishye, &c.), although 
 the base of the same tenses in the primitive is die {chetahcy &c., 
 clies/iye, &c.). Similarly from hu and kri may come huvi and kuri 
 {hUvitahe, karituhe), although the bases in the primitive are ho and 
 kar. In like manner i may be inserted when the root ends in 
 long a, provided that, instead of a change to Vriddlii (which is 
 impossible), y be interposed between the final a and inserted i. 
 Thus, from c?o, " to give," may come the base of the fut. pass. 
 dayi {dUyitUhe, &c.), although the base of the same tenses in the 
 primitive is da (ddtahe, &c.). But in all these cases it is per- 
 mitted to take the base of the primitive for that of the passive, 
 and chetahe or chayitahe may equally stand for the 1st fut. pass.* 
 
 In the case of roots ending in consonants, the base of the two 
 futures in the passive will be identical with that of the same 
 tenses in the primitive,"^ the inflection being that of the atm. 
 
 The Third Preterite of Passives. 
 11-1. In this tense, also, variation from the primitive may occur when the root 
 ends in a vowel. For in tliat case the insertion of i may take place, although for- 
 bidden in the primitive, provided the final of the root be changed to Vriddhi. 
 Thus, from chi may come the base of the 3d pret. pass, achui/i {achdyishi, &c., form 1 . 
 p. 81.) although the base in the atm. of the primitive is ache {acheshi, ^c, form 2.). 
 So also, from hu and kri may come ahdvi and akdri (ahrivishi, akdrishi, form 1.), 
 although the bases in the atm. of the primitive are aho and aJcri (ahoshi, ukrishi, 
 form 2.). Again, i may be inserted when the root ends in long d, provided that y 
 be interposed between final d and inserted i. Thus, from dd may come addyi 
 (addyishi, ^c), although the base in the atm. of the primitive is adi (adishi, Sjc.)- 
 
 * This explanation of the passive, although at variance with that of Wilkins and 
 Bopp, rests on the authority of Pilnini (0. 4. 02.), and the Siddhiinta kaumudl. 
 
 t The root g^, however, in the passive, may bo ^3lflT% , ^fft^, a.s well n.s 
 ^T^' "5^ ■' ^"^^ ^*? "^^y ^'^ MIPhHI^, TnfrT"«^, as will as ^^\^, ff^^; and 
 T^ may be JTTf^lTT^, i^lft^'"^. as well as a<^1hi^, JT^t^. 
 
92 PASSIVE VERBS. 
 
 But in all these cases it is permitted to take the base of the primitive for that of the 
 passive (so that the passive of c/« may be either achayishi or acheshi), except in the 
 3d pers. sing, where the terminations ishta and sta being rejected, the base, as formed 
 by Vriddhi and the inserted i, must always stand alone ; thus, achdyi, " it was 
 gathered "; ahavi, " it was sacrificed "; oMri, " it was done "; adayi, " it was given." 
 If the i"oot end in a consonant, the base of the Sd pret. pass, will always be 
 identical with that of the Sd pret. atm. of the primitive, except in the 3d pers. sing., 
 where I (^) being substituted for the terminations ishta of the 1st form and *te of 
 the 2d form, invariably requires before it the lengthening of a medial a, and the 
 Guna of any other medial vowel.* Hence, from tan, the form of the 1st, 2d, and 
 3d sing. 3d pret. wiU be atu7iishi, atanishthah, atdni ; from kship, akshipsi, akship- 
 thdh, akshepi ; from vid, avedishi, avedishthdh, avedi. This 3d pers. sing, of the 
 3d pret. passive is not imfrequently found, even in the simplest writings. 
 
 The Benedictive and Conditional of Passives. 
 In these tenses the same variation is permitted in the case of roots ending in 
 vowels as in the last ; that is, the insertion of i is allowed, provided that, before it, 
 Vriddhi take place in a final vowel capable of such a change, and y be interposed 
 after final d. Thus, from chi may come the bases chdyi and achdyi (chdyi^hiya, 
 achdyishye) ; from hu, hdvi and ahdvi; from kri, kdi-i and akdri; from (Id, ddyi 
 and addyi. But cheshiya, acheshye, hoshlya, ahoshye, ^-c, the forms belonging to 
 the atm. of the primitive, are equally admissible in the passive. 
 
 Passive Infinitive Mood. 
 
 There is no passive infinitive mood in Sanscrit distinct in form from the active. 
 
 But although the affix timi has generally an active, it is capable of a passive sense, 
 
 when joined with certain verbs, especially with shak, "to be able." In the Hitopa- 
 
 desha it is also used passively, in connection with the participles drahdha and nirupita. 
 
 Passive Verbs from Causal Bases, 
 
 115. In forming a passive verb from a causal base, the affix ay is rejected, but the 
 other changes of the root are retained. Thus, from the causal base pdtay (root pat, 
 "to fall") is formed the passive causal base pdty {pdtye, " I am caused to fall"); so 
 also, i'roui sthdpay (sthd, "to stand"), sthdpy {sthdpye, "I am made to stand"); 
 from pdthay {path, "to read"), pdthy (pdthye, "I am taught to read") from 
 irtpT ^^rr "to know"), ^rcT (ff^^ "I am caused to know.") 
 
 * This rests on the authority of Panini, the Siddhanta kaumudl, and the Bhatti 
 kavya (1.5. 64,65.). 
 
93 
 
 o o 'S "S *^ 2 a ^'^-^ 
 
 
 
 '<« -^ ^ ^2 _ 
 
 o « 
 
 r3 O 
 
 ■par- SI - 13 c ■'^ 
 == ^- =; " '^ jT'";; -s ^ 
 ^^■^ ^ '^ i^ > I* ~ >»-^ 
 
 jp.s Jl-^ -;g-g 
 
 (LJ 
 
 ^ "^ -r ^ O 
 
 ^ "^ .2 G 
 
 D !> O -a 
 
 iu ■:;3 -2 "^^ ix) ,5- --- ■ ■ -.■ 
 
 5 O 
 
 : O ^ 
 
 R 
 ^ 
 
 3 f:^ 
 
 
 
 '^ o V \ -^ ^ ^ 3^ 'tS .2 
 
 •2° c^ >,>^^^"E> 
 "S ~ r ..^ J^ "- o 
 
 - 'P V 
 
 .S CvJ ?! -1 '^ if C "S CO O ,. 
 
 
 '5 
 
 > i^% 
 
 .15 S c3 j3 "^ c 
 
 J £ :^ l«'^ ^ 2 ^ 2 ^ - 
 o --S ;; -- ' - w 5JD li t .2 o 
 
 .5 .5 
 
 a 2 o "o 
 
 o 5 o c: .s 
 
 o t- 
 
 ;« be' o -s 'p 
 
 ^ o -5 ^ 5 .s._.5 - ^ o -g 
 bX)|r's |c5rt-P^5S.22 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 .». S 
 
 
 
 < 
 
 » 
 
 • ~ 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 Is 
 
 
 "S 
 
 
 
 
 C< 
 
 ?i 
 
 c 
 
 ICD 
 
 ^ ^ 
 
 IS s 
 
 c 
 
 > 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 "^ 
 
 •- 
 
 
 s 
 
 e 
 
 
 1 te 
 
 _3 
 
 w 
 
 ' ' 
 
 rn 
 
 ICS 
 
 c 
 
 c 
 
 la 
 
 c c 
 
 i« o 
 
 <S 
 
 ?5 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 t' CO 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 s. 
 
 
 
 e-, 
 
 
 IS s 
 
 .«, s 
 
 
 
 -■ 
 
 
 
 ~S ^ s 
 
 
 < 
 
 
 S 'S IS 
 
 is^ <= S 
 
 
 
 
 s^"::: ^ 
 
 t 5^. i-^ 
 
 5 -^ fc 
 
 >-] 
 
 
 
 14) ^ 4) 
 
 Qj 5^ v;^ 
 
 i, ^ (U 
 
 
 < 
 
 
 
 eIis 
 
 
 
 
 « 
 
 
 <i) 11) ^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ;=3 
 < 
 
 
 
 1. hodh 
 4. nrity 
 6. dish 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 s 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 s 
 
 ft. 
 
 
 
 
 -1 = 
 
 "s ^ s 
 
 » 
 
 
 . 
 
 
 
 r^ 
 
 ? -5 IS 
 
 s ^ "S? 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 H 
 
 
 
 «i 
 
 c 
 
 o 
 
 IS <4- a; 
 
 IS c s 
 
 
 <; 
 
 ft.- 
 
 
 
 
 te ^ ^ 
 
 s 
 
 
 a 
 
 s 
 
 .^ 
 
 •*.■> 
 
 § ^ IS 
 
 S = s 
 
 
 
 M 
 
 s 
 
 s 
 
 c 
 
 IS c o 
 
 IS s c 
 
 
 
 ' 
 
 
 
 ;<^^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1. abo 
 4. ail) 
 6. adi 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 s 
 
 a 
 
 li) 
 
 0) 
 
 "1^,- 
 
 s 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 
 t« O) 
 
 o 
 
 c 
 
 IS ^ ^ 
 
 IS 
 
 S 
 
 S 
 
 
 < 
 
 ** .^ 
 
 
 
 
 ir- 
 
 s 
 
 • ~i. 
 
 H 
 
 « s 
 
 •s 
 
 ■•;s 
 
 
 <: 
 
 R 
 
 •t, 
 
 « IS 
 
 c 
 
 s 
 
 IS s o 
 
 is 
 
 C 
 
 S 
 
 ^.■§^-? 
 
 
 
 
 c 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^ S^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 1--=:l 
 
 
 
 S 
 
 
 
 
 — -r cc 
 
 
 
 
94 
 
 
 vid 
 
 juhw 
 
 chinw 
 
 bhind 
 
 tanw 
 
 pun 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 vid 
 juhu 
 chinu 
 bhind 
 tanu 
 punl 
 
 
 vid 
 
 Juhu 
 
 chinu 
 
 bhind 
 
 tanu 
 
 punl 
 
 
 
 vid 
 juhw 
 chinw 
 bhind 
 tanw 
 pun 
 
 1 
 
 
 1 
 
 vid 
 
 juhw 
 
 (hinw 
 
 bhind 
 
 tanw 
 
 pun 
 
 
 
 vid 
 
 juhu 
 
 chinu 
 
 bhind 
 
 tanu 
 
 punl 
 
 
 
 . J 1 .1 1 'S 
 •1 •g.-g :§ 1 1, 
 
 
 
 'i 
 
 vit 
 
 Juhu 
 
 chinu 
 
 bhint 
 
 tanu 
 
 punl 
 
 U 
 
 
 vid 
 
 Juhw 
 
 chinw 
 
 bhind 
 
 tanw 
 
 pun 
 
 
 
 vid 
 juhw 
 chinw 
 bhind 
 tanw 
 pun 
 
 11 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 •l 
 
 S ( 
 
 vit 
 
 Juhu 
 
 ihinu 
 
 bhint 
 
 tanu 
 
 punl 
 
 
 V 
 
 vid 
 
 juhu 
 
 chinu 
 
 bhind 
 
 tanu 
 
 punl. 
 
 
 
 vit 
 
 juhu 
 
 ihinu 
 
 bhint 
 
 tanu 
 
 punl 
 
 
 
 
 vit 
 
 juhu 
 
 chinu 
 
 bhint 
 
 tanu 
 
 punt 
 
 
 
 vid 
 
 juhu 
 
 chinu 
 
 bhind 
 
 tanu 
 
 punl 
 
 
 
 vet 
 
 juho 
 
 chino 
 
 bhinat 
 
 tano 
 
 puna 
 
 CO 
 
 c 
 
 
 i 1 
 
 vet 
 
 juho 
 
 chino 
 
 bhinat 
 
 tano 
 
 puna 
 
 ^. 
 
 
 ved* 
 
 juho 
 
 chino 
 
 bhinad 
 
 tano 
 
 puna 
 
 
 
 argils 
 
 s-i c: »6 i- cc C5 
 
 Ji 
 
 1 
 
 avid 
 
 ajuhw 
 
 achinw 
 
 abhind 
 
 atanw 
 
 apun 
 
 g 
 
 avid 
 
 ajuhu 
 
 achinu 
 
 abhind 
 
 atanu 
 
 apunl 
 
 1 
 
 avid 
 
 ajuhu 
 
 achinu 
 
 abhind 
 
 atanu 
 
 apunl 
 
 "1 
 a 
 
 avid 
 
 ajuhw 
 
 achinw 
 
 abhind 
 
 atanw 
 
 apun 
 
 a 
 ig 
 
 avid 
 
 ajuhw 
 
 achinw 
 
 abhind 
 
 atanw 
 
 apun 
 
 i 
 
 avid 
 
 ajuhu 
 
 achinu 
 
 abhind 
 
 atanu 
 
 apunl 
 
 1 
 
 avit 
 
 ajuhu 
 
 achinu 
 
 abhint 
 
 atanu 
 
 apunl 
 
 e 
 
 avit 
 
 ajuhu 
 
 achinu 
 
 abhint 
 
 atanu 
 
 apunl 
 
 1 
 
 avid 
 
 ajuhw 
 
 achinw 
 
 abhind 
 
 atanw 
 
 apun 
 
 - 
 
 avid 
 
 ajuhav 
 
 achinw 
 
 abhind 
 
 atanw 
 
 apun 
 
 §.1 = 
 
 avit 
 
 ajuhu 
 
 achinu 
 
 abhint 
 
 atanu 
 
 apunl 
 
 e 
 
 avid 
 ajuhu 
 I arhinu 
 abhind 
 atanu 
 apunl 
 
 i 
 
 « e a s g 
 
 1 
 
 avit 
 
 ajuhu 
 
 achinu 
 
 abhint 
 
 atanu 
 
 s 
 
 "^ -« •« -i a 
 
 ,o rifi -5 .= a 
 
 5e .s •« ►« a 
 
 § I 
 
 « g 
 
 II 
 
 a a s 
 
 •s -I -i I 
 
 a a' a a a a 
 
 !^ 2; iSq t^ R, 
 c-i M »c ^-l 00 C5 
 
95 
 
 vid 
 
 juhw 
 
 chinw 
 
 bhind 
 
 tanw 
 
 pun 
 
 a 
 1 
 
 i4d vid 
 juhw juhw 
 chinw chinw 
 bhind bhind 
 tanw tanw 
 pun pun 
 
 S 
 
 i 
 
 1 
 
 s 
 
 vid 
 Juhw 
 chinw 
 bhind 
 tanw 
 pun 
 
 s 
 
 vid 
 
 juhw 
 
 chinw 
 
 bhind 
 
 tanw 
 
 pun 
 
 1 
 
 ,1^ 
 
 vid 
 juhw 
 chinw 
 bhind 
 tanw 
 pun 
 
 :« 
 
 1 
 
 vid 
 
 juhw 
 
 chinw 
 
 bhind 
 
 tanw 
 
 pun 
 
 s 
 
 vid 
 
 juhw 
 
 chinw 
 
 bhind 
 
 tanw 
 
 pun 
 
 1 
 
 vid 
 
 juhw 
 
 chinw 
 
 bhind 
 
 tanw 
 
 pun 
 
 ,1 
 
 vid 
 
 juhic 
 
 chinu 
 
 bhind 
 
 tanu 
 
 puni 
 
 I 
 
 vid 
 
 juhu 
 
 chinu 
 
 bhind 
 
 tcmu 
 
 puni 
 
 t 
 
 tnd 
 
 juhu 
 
 chinu 
 
 bhind 
 
 tanu 
 
 puni 
 
 t 
 
 vid 
 
 juhu 
 
 chinu 
 
 bhind 
 
 tanu 
 
 puni 
 
 1 
 
 '1. 
 
 vid 
 juhu 
 chinu 
 bhind 
 tanu 
 puul 
 
 a 
 1 
 
 vid 
 
 juhu 
 
 chinu 
 
 bhind 
 
 tanu 
 
 puni 
 
 '1. 
 
 vid 
 
 juhu 
 
 chinu 
 
 bhind 
 
 tanu 
 
 puni 
 
 t 
 
 vid 
 
 juhu 
 
 chinu 
 
 bhind 
 
 tanu 
 
 puni 
 
 -a 
 
 vid 
 
 juhu 
 
 chinu 
 
 bhind 
 
 tanu 
 
 puni 
 
 s 
 
 5 
 
 Oi CC "O t>l CO CJ 
 
 O H 
 
 a § 
 
 ^ 5 
 
 
 3 -« 
 
 ;- 
 
 .;^^^ 
 
 
 S. 
 
 "S 
 S 
 
 juhav 
 chinav 
 bhinad 
 
 a 
 5 
 
 a 
 
 •s,i; ^ -s 
 
 ^ -a .5 -s a 
 
 ^^ ^ -CS S4, 
 
 •S.-? :g 5 
 
 s a a § 's 
 •~ "a IS "S I a 
 
 :^ •'"^ ?j -C: -w a. 
 
 -^ -s -S -s a 
 
 •1 
 
 a 
 
 ■§ 
 
 S 
 
 _g 
 
 1. 
 
 
 J 
 
 i 
 
 .1 
 
 a 
 
 a 
 
 'a 
 
 
 
 
 
 r* 
 
 
 
 •^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 
 » 
 
 ,e 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 l!:^ 
 
 ■^ 
 
 :§ 
 
 -2 
 
 a. 
 
 •■^.1 
 
 ^ -S -S £ a 
 ■? :§ 5 I. 
 
 Jill 1 
 
 ^ 5 
 I s: a; c ^ 6 1^ 
 
 C^ CO "5 t>l CO oi 
 
 ^2 ^2 
 
 =§ - I ..i 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 to Oh 5i 
 
 a -o ,^ 
 
 :5 « 5 
 
 » CO .2 
 
 
 -^XS 
 
 o -a 4> 
 § t 3 
 
96 
 
 
 S !» ^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 g 
 
 i 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 T* 
 
 
 
 
 ' l^lt- 
 
 ^ 5si :a^. ;&^ 5>i ^ 
 <P -^' -^- <;^ ^ <;^ 
 
 rp, 
 
 '1 
 
 
 
 
 
 •^ 
 
 — 
 
 
 m 
 
 
 ^ ■< ^ 
 
 "« 
 
 •« 
 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 •oa 
 
 -< e -S 
 
 e e -^ 
 
 •^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 1 s 
 
 ej S '^ "-e 
 
 1 ^ ^ 
 
 s -s § 
 
 u 
 
 
 .1^ 
 
 1 
 
 
 ■< IB S CS 
 
 l§ e 5 
 
 15 !2 e 
 
 Zj 
 
 ■, ^ 
 
 
 s 
 
 e< 5n 5>, Ss 
 ►«? -^^ <? 
 
 Oi. Vi. OS- 
 
 a^ Srj ^ 
 
 «C' OD- =0- 
 
 ^ ^ =*^ 
 
 05. cc. «c- 
 
 < 
 
 CO 
 
 n 
 
 J 
 
 
 
 
 =1 ^ ^ <^ ^ ^ 's '§ 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 fl 
 
 .2 
 
 
 
 -JCQCO -^oco t^coo^ 
 
 
 g 
 
 H 
 
 " 
 
 
 
 
 <Ji 1 «a 
 
 
 "^ 0^ 
 
 •vc. 
 
 
 
 
 K^ ^ 
 
 -5S <« 
 
 
 T'- fc^ 
 
 2 
 
 
 s 
 
 
 e :§ s 
 
 
 -s; 
 
 
 
 ^ ^ ^ 
 
 
 SS 1^ ?S 
 
 S :5^ 
 
 S 
 
 ^ ^Vi 
 
 
 
 ^ -5i ^ 
 
 
 1 ll 1^ 
 
 SS ts 
 
 v 
 
 «J-I 
 
 
 
 IS IS 
 
 IS 
 
 IS IS 
 
 IS 
 
 'Z^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ■« "< 
 
 -< 
 
 
 •< i-2 
 
 
 t3 
 
 i s -^ 
 
 
 « « s 
 
 
 
 "^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 IS 1^ 
 
 
 '^ '^ '^ 
 
 IS 1^ 
 
 '^ 
 
 
 ^•<S) 
 
 
 •to 
 
 
 
 ^ ^ 
 
 
 1; ^ "§• '^ "§ 
 
 *g 
 
 S Sn 
 
 Si ^* 
 
 
 J i 
 
 -5S 
 
 § "^ -« ^ -S 
 
 ^ 
 
 " 1 
 
 
 
 — <m" 
 
 
 TT -O l> GO 
 
 ^ 
 
 y 
 
 
 S 
 
 
 :^ 
 
 
 
 s 
 
 1 
 ►^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 i 
 
 s 
 
 & 
 
 
 
 li -^ 
 
 ■^i 
 
 .§ IS IS 
 
 •%-^ 
 
 *^ 
 
 '"^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 > 
 
 
 13 
 
 
 
 
 •Sec 
 
 i 
 
 C 
 
 
 a 
 
 
 02 
 
 
 
 
 
 7i 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 -5; 
 
 
 2 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 M 
 
 
 1 
 
 ^ 
 
 .^ 
 
 E 
 
 
 S ^ "S 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 5 
 2 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 bB 
 
 
 
 13 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 s 
 
 c 
 
 i 
 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 
 III 
 
 1 ■§ ^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 IS 
 
 » 
 
 
 
 0: 
 
 M 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 e 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 * 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 -« 
 
 
 
 
 
 s 
 
 i<S 
 
 
 
 
 00 
 
 to 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 s" 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 :§ 
 
 •>^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 «.?^l 
 
 1 
 
 
 1. 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 -0 
 
 g 
 
 -^ 
 
 1 -^ .-^ 
 
 ■C) 
 
 ■* 
 
 
 e 
 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 ~o 
 
 
 
 s '^ -^ 
 
 
 •S 
 
 a. 
 
 -0 
 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 di 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 -0 
 
 -1-2 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 » 
 
 IS 
 
 ill 
 
 •5 
 
 1 
 
 5 
 
 a. 
 
 
 ,2 
 
 ^ 
 
 C>J 
 
 n 
 
 'vj! -d 
 
 i>^ 
 
 06 
 
 d 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^ 
 
97 
 
 -e e .* 
 
 IS s; 
 IS is 
 
 S B S I IS S 
 
 la"' 
 
 ,o .o ^ 
 
 s |s I 
 
 s iS s 
 
 *> S 2 m'~<. e •'' 
 
 "S s s 
 S § s 
 
 ^' i^' "5. -S' -S 
 
 1 J 2 
 
 .:5 ~ a 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^1 "^ 
 
 
 
 H 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 55 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 8, 
 
 
 1 
 
 ^ 
 
 narti 
 che 
 desk 
 hhet 
 
 « 
 C 
 
 
 '"' 
 
 Oi 
 
 c6 
 
 ^ vri o i> 
 
 at5 
 
 o> 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 S 
 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 a 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 
 4. 
 
 e 
 
 § 
 
 ►« 
 
 
 g 
 
 =^ 
 
 a 
 
 
 E ^ 
 
 w 
 
 ti 
 
 IS 
 
 
 
 
 
 B 
 
 
 S aj 
 
 s>, 
 
 a^ 
 
 *1 
 
 a> 
 
 S.5 
 
 »i 
 
 s^ 
 
 a^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 < 
 
 
 
 
 
 < 
 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 g 
 
 
 
 i 
 
 5 
 
 s 
 s 
 
 1 
 
 5 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 e 
 
 " 
 
 
 a^ 
 
 s^ 
 
 *» 
 
 v> 
 
 a^ 
 
 Si 
 
 :*^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 K 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ■^ 
 
 o 
 
 •^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 o 
 
 1 
 
 ^ 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 a, 
 
 
 
 
 s 
 
 ^ 
 
 IJ 
 
 s 
 
 •3 
 
 « 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 (j4 
 
 CO 
 
 ■<* 
 
 «5 
 
 CD 
 
 t-^ 
 
 M 
 
 CJ 
 
 TM. 
 
 sh'ishthdh 
 shishta 
 
 shivahi 
 ) shlydsthdm 
 shl ydstdm 
 
 shhnahi 
 shldhwam 
 shir an 
 
 1 II5 
 
 Q 
 
 « s ^ 
 
 yaswa narti 
 \ydstam che 
 ydstdm dik 
 ydsma bhit 
 ydsta tani 
 ydsuh pavi ^ 
 
 budh\ 
 
 vid 
 
 hit 
 
 nrit 
 
 chl 
 
 dish 
 
 bhid 
 
 tan 
 
 pu ) 
 
 -H <M TO 
 
 'I* «o 
 
 t^ CO 
 
98 
 
 
 
 
 
 •|!« § 
 
 s 
 
 H 
 
 e 
 
 g 
 
 ^ 1 1 
 
 ^ c ^ 
 
 . "^ "2 
 
 
 tS 
 
 » ^ Ig 
 
 S: "« S 
 
 [4 « 
 
 <s 
 
 tt 
 
 ICS ^ ^ 
 
 IC C is 
 
 
 
 a i 1 1 
 
 Isl 
 
 « 
 
 e i« ?s e 
 
 
 
 
 i '» 
 
 ;&^ 
 
 ^ ass 5Ss 5s Sn ^ 
 
 ^ gi gi ^ ^ jj^ ^ 
 
 'S 
 
 ,?:; 
 
 1 1 tl 1 II 
 
 -«: s -^ -^^ :$ '■£ S, 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 •■c 
 
 ''* 
 
 -"■ 
 
 (M- 
 
 CO TT iri CO i>* CO oi 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 s 
 
 s :§ 
 
 
 •^ 
 
 -5^ 
 
 ^ '•« 
 
 1 
 
 1 . 
 
 H e S 
 
 K 
 
 
 lO ic 
 
 ;<S ?S 
 
 < &i ^ 
 
 < 
 
 ^ 
 
 Si Ssv 
 
 
 '^ ^ 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 •A) 
 
 ^■' (;j' <4j 
 
 « ^ 
 
 5 P) s 
 
 
 
 § S e 
 
 -< 
 
 ^ S fei •« 
 
 .*.■, 
 
 a 
 
 ■S '-S S 
 
 •S 1, 
 
 w^ 5? ^ 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^ ^ <;j 
 
 ^ ij? 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 2 l>g. 
 
 a>i 
 
 1 
 
 1^ 1^1 
 
 ^ 5s^ 
 
 ^S 'S 
 
 § 
 
 g 
 
 il^-^ ^ 
 
 
 ^ ^ 
 
 i^ 
 
 S 
 
 •^ "§ S 
 
 S'^ 
 
 -H (M 
 
 CO 
 
 •^ 
 
 lO <o t- 
 
 00 05 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 g 
 
 
 
 •S 
 
 1 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 If 
 
 
 
 tt 
 
 IC 
 
 %i 
 
 <;» 
 
 IC 
 
 s ?s 
 
 PS 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Pi 
 
 "« 
 
 
 e 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 « 
 
 5 s 
 
 <s 
 
 « 
 
 lO 
 
 5S 
 
 5S 
 
 ICS 
 
 c e 
 
 r. ^ 
 
 s^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 tr 
 
 tti <i 
 
 -^ 
 
 •^^i 
 
 
 ,'^ 
 
 '§ 
 
 '^ 
 
 
 •s 
 
 :^ 
 
 1^ 
 
 
 -«: 
 
 11 
 
 e 
 
 <a 
 
 <s 
 
 <S 
 
 C 
 
 B 
 
 « 
 
 -5 
 
 (>5 
 
 CO 
 
 -^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 d 
 
 i> 
 
 QC Oi 
 
 
 ^ ^ § ^ 
 
 
 111 
 
 IS i^i ^ 
 
 IS ■« e 
 
 '^ 5?i gss SSi 
 . ►«> .«^ "JS' 
 
 -1^4^^ 
 
 Si S>i 5si 
 
 
 CO- CO- CO- 
 
 & .><,-« 
 
 ^ •«. 
 
 "S c -^s 
 
 C e •'* 
 
 g« s ■? ••« 
 
 g ^ 5 
 
 1 « S 
 
 ^ <5 i3 tt ?r 
 
 IS 5S C 
 
 IS <= ?5 
 
 Q^ ^ ^ ^ 
 
 ^ ^ ^ 
 
 5n ^ Srs 
 
 z. <z ^i <i 
 
 ►se "«: ■<!: 
 
 
 C<5- CO- CO- CO- CO- Co- 
 
 
 
 ^ ^ "^^ X ^ ^ ^ ^ X '^S. 
 
 •^J^^'?S^'«S"««« 
 
 "^^.S b'^^ <;jS» 
 
 ^s*'^ ^^•^►O'SS, 
 
 -H (N co' Tt in to i> c» Oi 
 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 <a 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 <i. 
 
 
 ■< 
 
 w 
 
 s 
 
 
 
 ;j 
 
 ►«; 
 
 s 
 
 « 
 
 s f^ 
 
 H <;i 
 
 
 
 § 
 
 Ib 
 
 « 
 
 s 
 
 ;S ^ 
 
 < ►«; 
 
 % 
 
 
 
 i« 
 
 v. 
 
 00 
 
 "« ^ 
 
 IS 
 
 
 l« 
 
 'S 
 
 IS 
 
 Ivl 
 
 IS IS 
 
 
 
 
 
 ■^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 rf» 
 
 -« 
 
 
 -« 
 
 
 & . -^ 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 « 
 
 
 <?! 
 
 11 
 
 
 
 
 g. 
 
 "S 
 
 « 
 
 s 
 
 CO 
 
 
 y> 
 
 so 
 
 
 
 CO *. 
 
 i:>! 
 
 iri 
 
 IS 
 
 nr< 
 
 IS 
 
 IS 
 
 IS IS 
 
 H -^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 '^ 
 
 
 
 
 S <r- 
 
 
 
 •50 
 
 
 . 
 
 
 5fi 
 
 •» 
 
 
 •*> 
 
 >v 
 
 Sn 
 
 ^^ 
 
 •«> -l-i 
 
 fe <s^ 
 
 s^ 
 
 '^ 
 
 w 
 
 f-y* 
 
 ^i' 
 
 a^ >5 
 
 S 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 In 
 
 ,5^ 
 
 -^ 
 
 -^ 
 
 1 g 
 
 O 
 ^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 -^s 
 
 "§ 
 
 -^ 
 
 s 
 
 S 'S, 
 
 -^ 
 
 (N 
 
 CO 
 
 "<* 
 
 
 
 d 
 
 t^ 
 
 00 05 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 <4i 
 
 ^^ 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 ^ 
 
 1 
 
 IS 
 
 •s 
 
 -^ 
 
 s 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 ►<? 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^i 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 -5? 
 
 3 
 
 -1 
 
 
 <i 
 
 s^ « 
 
 
 s 
 
 oo 
 
 « 
 
 s 
 
 
 s f§ 
 
 Co 
 
 CO 
 
 oo 
 'S 
 
 1?? 
 
 00 
 
 Co 
 
 Co 
 
 « s 
 
 10 
 
 IS 
 
 
 s 
 
 
 s 
 
 
 
 ^ IS 
 
 
 § 
 
 1- 
 
 IS 
 
 IS 
 
 IS 
 
 § 
 
 5; 
 
 5>i 
 
 IS 
 
 IS 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 =^ 
 
 IS 
 
 IS 
 
 !£^ 
 
 ->! 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 e 
 
 « 
 
 Sn 
 
 S^ 
 
 S ::?^ 
 
 ,« 
 
 
 
 !^ 
 
 
 -w 
 
 «■ 
 
 <s 
 
 " '§ 
 
 1^ 
 
 IS 
 
 B 
 
 :i 
 
 g 
 
 
 Ig 
 
 IS 
 
 "O 
 
 » 
 
 "^ 
 
 s 
 
 
 'ts 
 
 <i 
 
 », 
 
 -^ 
 
 <>{ 
 
 CO 
 
 '^• 
 
 
 
 «o 
 
 l> 
 
 ad 
 
 
 

 
 
 
 g 
 
 
 
 
 C4 
 
 
 
 
 •S 
 
 
 
 
 
 "§ to 
 
 I 
 
 t 
 
 11 
 
 1 
 
 '■§ 
 
 1 
 
 
 -H OJ 
 
 CO 
 
 '^' 
 
 o o 
 
 «>■ 
 
 CO 
 
 Ci 
 
 99 
 
 L. 
 
 ATM. 
 shye 
 
 shyuthdh 
 
 shyata 
 
 shydvahi 
 shyethdm 
 shyetdm 
 
 shyarnahi 
 
 shyadhwam 
 
 shyanta 
 
 NDITIONA 
 I'A 15. 
 
 shyam 
 shyuh 
 shyat 
 
 ^ a S « 
 
 ■fit 
 
 anartayi 
 
 aihajHiyi 
 
 adeshayi 
 
 abhedayi 
 
 atdnayi 
 
 apavayi y 
 
 r^ (N « 
 
 rtt »0 O 1> CO Oi 
 
 \r. 
 
 shlya 
 shlshthiih 
 shi.shta 
 
 •Jl 
 
 1 1 :l 
 •g. -§. •^. 
 
 ^ J i 
 
 fill 
 
 ^- 'li '§i '§-. 
 
 ■«a •<» 'v 
 
 t r r 
 
 a S S 
 
 1 1 1 
 "li 'li 'li 
 
 I'Si'l. 
 
 1 1 4 
 
 1 -2 1 
 
 t i i 
 
 ill HI lit 
 
 r^ d eo' Tji lo 6 i>l CO cj 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 s 
 
 
 -a 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 5 
 
 1 
 
 ►S 
 
 If 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 tf 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Eh .^ 
 
 
 
 
 S 
 
 ? 
 
 
 
 W'J j; 
 
 ,1^ 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 .2 
 
 IB 
 
 s 
 
 ■2 s 
 
 e. ^ 
 
 d 
 
 a 
 
 IC 
 
 
 c 
 
 le 
 
 ^ s 
 
 
 
 p 
 
 1 
 
 s 
 
 1 
 
 :l 
 
 :s 
 
 S « 
 
 H ,"s 
 
 's 
 
 '1 
 
 1 
 
 e 
 
 
 ■It 
 
 " 
 
 ci 
 
 ci 
 
 ■* 
 
 «o 
 
 •^ 
 
 i-^ 
 
 c6 ai 
 
 1 
 
 5 
 
 H 
 n 
 
 to 
 to -S" to 
 
 ^ to 
 
 S ■« to 
 •g IS .s 
 
 imahe 
 idhwe 
 ire 
 
 1. bubudh 
 
 2. vivid 
 
 3. ju/mv 
 
 4. nanrit 
 
 5. chic/iy 
 
 6. didish 
 
 7. bibhid 
 
 8. ten 
 
 9. pupuv ^ 
 
 ATIVE, 
 
 ai 
 
 aswa 
 
 atom 
 
 uvahai 
 ) etham 
 etUm 
 
 amahai 
 
 adhmam 
 
 antam 
 
 ilttftiiit 
 
 -5oico TaSurico t^ <£ d^ 
 
 TIAL. 
 
 eya 
 
 ethah 
 
 eta 
 
 ill 
 
 emahi 
 
 edhwam 
 
 eran 
 
 ^IttfltlM 
 
 — iCv}C0rl<O«0l>C0ai 
 
 
 to 
 
 s s 
 
 IS to to 
 
 Umahi 
 
 adhwam 
 
 anta 
 
 
 s c 
 i>i CO 
 
 4. anrity 
 
 5. achly 
 
 6. adishy 
 
 7. abhidy 
 
 8. atany 
 
 9. apuy 
 
 H 
 
 K 
 
 to 
 
 s s 
 
 civahe 
 ""ethe 
 ete 
 
 amahe 
 adhn-e 
 ante 
 
 
 Tsl CO 
 
 4. nrity 
 
 5. chly 
 
 6. dishy 
 
 "O .^S Ji, 
 I- rjD O 
 
100 
 
 w 
 
 >; 
 
 CO 
 CO 
 
 < 
 
 O 
 
 w 
 
 H 
 
 P^ 
 O 
 
 ;?; 
 o 
 
 H 
 O 
 
 
 •a 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ■^ 
 
 •"^ 
 
 13 
 
 1; 
 
 t 
 
 -^ 
 
 "i 
 
 ',s 
 
 iS 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 . 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 c 
 
 
 5; 
 
 « 
 
 « 
 
 « 
 
 » 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 5 
 
 H 
 
 CO 
 
 
 .< 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 il 
 
 1 
 
 S 
 i 
 
 a 
 
 PS 
 
 
 -^ 
 
 -§ 
 
 
 -§. 
 
 '^. 
 
 '^• 
 
 ■g. 
 
 =5 
 
 -s:. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 . 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 K 
 
 
 
 
 t^ 
 
 
 i-f 
 
 
 
 
 
 H 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 •s. 
 
 * 
 
 * 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 "« 
 
 
 
 
 .^ 
 
 
 ff 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 « 
 
 e 
 
 e 
 
 « 
 
 * 
 
 « 
 
 13 
 
 a 
 
 « 
 
 
 
 -^ 
 
 M 
 
 cj 
 
 ■<* 
 
 »o 
 
 CO 
 
 t^ 
 
 CO 
 
 CJ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 <15 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 ^ -S 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 1 
 
 If 
 
 
 <;5 
 
 c « 
 
 IC ^ 
 
 1;^ 
 
 l^( 
 
 t e 
 
 03 
 
 .^ 
 
 ^^ -^ 
 
 4^4^ 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 4^4^ 
 
 » 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 V 
 
 
 
 .^\ 
 
 b 
 
 
 
 
 "^ 
 
 
 
 § 
 
 
 
 
 < 
 
 
 
 
 Si 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Q 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ;-i 
 
 s 
 
 •«. 
 
 
 
 
 * 
 
 
 
 a2 
 
 jg 
 
 ^ -s 
 
 ^ ,^ 
 
 -45 
 
 'S 
 
 "§ § 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^ :^ 
 
 ^ -^ 
 
 -^ 
 
 :§ 
 
 •S 'S. 
 
 
 -^ 
 
 (M CO 
 
 Tj! 
 
 ■•6 
 
 i>* 
 
 GO C5 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 w 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 "^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^ s 
 
 
 g 
 
 •< 
 
 
 <il 
 
 V 
 
 
 g 
 
 IC « 
 
 ^ 
 
 ►< 
 
 ?s 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 =0 %. 
 
 ^c 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Pi 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 
 ^..^ 
 
 
 
 -^ 
 
 H 
 
 p 
 
 b 
 
 
 
 ,^ 
 
 
 1^ ^ 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 H 
 
 
 
 
 
 . '^ 
 
 
 
 s^ 
 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 ;: 
 
 It 
 
 1 
 
 § 
 
 a 
 
 '1 
 
 
 - 
 
 CM 
 
 n 
 
 -^ 
 
 «; 
 
 t^ 
 
 06 
 
 o? 
 
 
 ^ ?5 C -S 
 
 
 « 5 ^ 
 
 ,12 S '^ a CO 
 
 11 
 
 ■« S 
 
 1 t 
 
 4 S 
 
 
 
 6 -4 
 
 ph a 
 
 s S 
 
 
 « ,1 « 
 '* .s ■< 
 
 ^ :< -§ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 8 
 
 E ■< 
 
 1 
 
 S 
 
 1 
 
 « 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 C 
 
 
 
 'c- 
 
 
 
 S5 
 
 
 
 S^ 
 
 
 
 *^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 P 
 
 
 
 J 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Z 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 e^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 u 
 
 § 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 •» 
 
 
 
 
 
 * 
 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 
 II 
 
 1 
 
 
 5 
 
 'a 
 
 
 « 
 
 3 
 
 8 
 
 e e 
 
 * 
 
 3 
 
 B 
 
 
 
 s 
 
 
 
 -< 
 
 'S 
 
 s 
 
 
 g 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 VE. 
 
 ya 
 
 shth 
 
 shta 
 
 
 t 
 
 1 
 
 1 i 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^ -« -S -< 
 
 •^- 'S 
 
 
 <S rfS 
 
 
 
 
 
 p /■ 
 
 . 
 
 
 •j«^ 
 
 H ^ 
 
 
 
 p 
 
 « t 
 
 
 
 1, 
 
 « .« 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 hodh 
 vedi 
 havi 
 
 1 1 
 
 1 1 
 
 tani 
 pdvi 
 
( 101 ) 
 
 AUXILIARY VI;RBS. 
 
 116. Theie are three auxiliary verbs of constant occurrence: 
 as, " to be "; kri, " to do "; and bhu, " to become." The first 
 belongs to the 2d conjugation, the second to the 8th, and the 
 third to the 1st. The first two, however, are too irregular to be 
 placed under any conjugation, and their inflection is therefore 
 exhibited here. The third, bhu, will follow in its proper place at 
 the head of the examples under the 1st conjugation. 
 
 Root ^TO as, " to be." 
 
 (R. 92. d. Cf. the Latin sum, es, est, and the Greek e/j/xi, eaal, eari) 
 Present.—" I am." First Preterite.—" I was." 
 
 'ERS. SING. DUAL. PLCRAL. SING. DUAL. PLURAL. 
 
 1st, ^rfw r"<»ti, ^: swah, Tftf, smah. ^rnJ dsam, ^^ dsiva, ^nW dsma. 
 
 2d, •^rftr asi, ^n stkah, -^ stha. ^T#: dsih, ^TPST* dstnm, '5ITW dsta. 
 
 W, 'Srf^ asti, w, stall, ^rfiff santi. \ ^TRfhr dsit, ^^TTCrt dstdm, ^TTtR dsan. 
 
 Potential.—" I may be," &c. Imperative.—" Let me be." 
 
 'SI^jT'l asdni, WHT^ asdva, ^HfllH asdma. 
 ^ftj edhi, ^ stam, ^ sta. 
 
 ^;5r nstii, ^ stdm, ^pff santu. 
 
 ^PIT sydm, ^fcf syaxa, ^|44 sydma. 
 ^IT: "y"^'. ^TTTT sydtam, J!3^ sydta. 
 ^ITiT -v^rt/, ^trnn sydtam, -^CT, syuh. 
 
 Second Preterite.*—" I was," &c. 
 
 ^nftni as«7A«, ^rnr^ dsathuk, ^m ma. 
 
 '^T^ dsa, ^rnnn dsatuh, ^n^; aswA. 
 
 a) Cf. rioTov, ij(rrt]i/, and pi. ?ia-piev, ^o-re. 
 
 This tense is never found by itself, but is of gi-eat use in 
 forming the 2d pret. of causals, &c., see p. 77. g. and r. 108. 
 
 Root ^ kri. Infin. ■sr^ kartum, " to do " (r. 96.). 
 
 PARASMAIPADA. 
 Present Tense. — " I do." 
 ^5^ karomi, ^i" kurvah, -^^ kimnah. 
 
 ^f^" kaioshf, -^^^r. fotrut/m/,, ^y^ kumt/m. 
 
 ^5^ ''"'■"'^' ^^: '^nrnfa/,, ^|f^' kurvanti. 
 
102 
 
 AUXILIARY VERBS. 
 
 ^Tofi^ akaravavi, 
 ^o|s^: akaroh, 
 'Snjv^ akarot. 
 
 ^^ kurydm, 
 ^pqr: kurydh, 
 ^5!^ knrydt. 
 
 4Mti% karavani. 
 
 [_^ chakdra, 
 ■cfoh'^ chakartha, 
 chakdra. 
 
 First Preterite. — " I was doing," &c. 
 
 "STafil akurva, 
 ^■^i^W akiirutam^ 
 ^jofi^TTT akunitdm, 
 
 Poteiitial.—'-^l may do," &c. 
 
 akiirma. 
 
 ^Sni^ akuruta. 
 ^Tcfi^^ akurvan. 
 
 ^;lrR kmijdim, 
 d^7J\\A kurydtam, 
 ^T^Tirt kurydtam. 
 
 Imperative. — " Let me do," &c. 
 
 cliiMIH kurydma. 
 SjiqTfT kurydta. 
 efi^: kuryuh. 
 
 cR3T^ karavdva, 
 eft^lt kurutam, 
 cff ^T kunitdm, 
 
 Second Preterite. — " I did." 
 
 x(di<4 chakriva, 
 ■sq^"^; chakrathuh, 
 ■^^Al chakratuh. 
 
 ahlc|m karavama. 
 ^^ kuruta. 
 
 kurvantu. 
 
 AdM cliakrima. 
 ^^ chakra. 
 ^^ chakruh. 
 
 4^1 Pm kartdsmi, 
 oUtrftr kartdsi. 
 
 i^irs? Future. — " I will 
 
 efi^T^J kartdswah, 
 o B^lfVj ; karfdsthah, 
 
 gi%T7^ kartarau. 
 
 efiWTWt kartdsmah. 
 oh^l^Vj kartdstha. 
 eR^TC kartdrah. 
 
 ctiPomPH karishydmi, 
 ofiftTarftl karishyasi, 
 cfifbTfw karishyati, 
 
 ^c(iTM akdrsham, 
 ->I1c|i'mT: akdrshih, 
 "'SchmTi^ akdrsMt, 
 
 Second Future. — " I shall do.' 
 cj iPt lB^ T ^ ; karishydvah, 
 eHftTa iq i karishyathah, 
 c(,(V.U|HI karishyatah, 
 
 efiftUTTTt karishydmah. 
 ahPl.ll|V| karishyatha. 
 ohPl.U|P*f1 karishyanti. 
 
 Third Preterite. — " I did." 
 
 ■^41 1 ^ akdrshwa, -^4^^ akdrshma. 
 
 ga'eHI^ akdrshtam, "^ToBTF akdrshta. 
 
 ■grSBrlt akdrshtdm, ^ToRrt: akdrshuh. 
 
 The other tenses are, bened. fjUmw"", fgitrr:, Pfh^lH^. &c., cond. 
 
 >McfcP^«j "> 4ict,Pcm :. 'M<*Pi.»4H, &c. 
 
AUXILIARY VERKS. 
 
 103 
 
 ») r. 80. •") See p. 39. note. ') r. 7- ") r. 10. f. <•) r. 21. ') The 
 
 eightli conjugation rejects the hi of tlie hnperativc, in conformity with the fifth 
 conjugation, r. 04. e) p. 75. />. ■>) See the scheme for the 2cl prct. p. 73. 
 
 ')r.7. J)p. 79./ '')p.79. f. ')P-82./. "')P-85. «?. ■=)r. 105. 
 
 ^' kurre, 
 ejv^ kuriishe, 
 ■^^ kurute, 
 
 '^r^ff akitrvi, 
 •^HohKVUU f'kuruthu/i, 
 -H'^iiA akuruta, 
 
 W^fli kurvlya^ 
 ojT^f^; kurvlthdh, 
 
 o|5^ knravai, 
 e(i^U( kurushwa, 
 oh^HI kurutdm, 
 
 ^r^^ chakre, 
 -^dM c/iakrishe, 
 ^^ chakre, 
 
 ATMANEPADA. 
 
 Present Tense. 
 oR^ knrvahe^ 
 o|%l^ kurvdthe, 
 ^frw kurvdte. 
 
 First Preterite. 
 
 'W^f^ akurvahi, 
 ->i4ah^|V{*l akurvdthnm, 
 ^nRfTfTT akurvdtdm, 
 Potential. 
 
 afi-fTcrH^ kurvlvaki, 
 dt\^HJ\J[\ kurvli/dthdm, 
 ^j^fimn knrvli/dtdm. 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 ditiM\'i% karavdvahai, 
 e(i^|Vn kurvdthdm, 
 efSIXT knrvdtdm. 
 
 Second Preterite. 
 
 •^fM^ chakrivahe, 
 ^^|VJ chakrdthe, 
 'vlfliiri chakrdte, 
 
 c4i>^^ kurwahe. 
 ofi^S^ kurudhwe. 
 efi"^ kurvatc. 
 
 ^**^f^ okurmahi. 
 "^f^a^liSf akurudhwam. 
 <^oii^f1' akurvata. 
 
 dk^H r^ hurvlmahi. 
 e(i^Tl4 kurrldhwam. 
 kurvlran. 
 
 dil^c^lH^ knravdmahai. 
 'eK^l4 kiirudhwam. 
 oR^HT kurvatdm. 
 
 ■cfcMf^ chahrimahe. 
 ^eB5$ or ^ ehakridhwe. 
 ■^tPsfcl. cliakrire. 
 
 2d, 3d 
 
 The other tenses are 1st fut. efi^rt^ 2d fut. cjiftT^ , 3(1 
 
 J other tenses are 1st fut. efitrt", 2d fut. cfiftT^", 3d ])ret„ 1st, 
 sing. 4i<*fM', ^RTsn:, '^r^, bened. «g^\ cond. ^<+ft,u^\ 
 
 =*) r. 7. i-) r. 30. ') r. 10. f- '') r. 30. ') r. 98. and r. 7. ') See the 
 scheme for the 2d pret. p. 78. e) p. 79. / ") p. 79. c. ') p. 83. ^. J) p. 85. c. 
 ") r. 105. 
 
104 
 
 EXAMPLES OF REGULAR PRIMITIVE VERBS OF THE FIRST 
 CONJUGATION (r. 88.) 
 
 Root vr bhu. Infin. >?f%o bhavitum, " to become " or " be." 
 Parasmaipada. Present Tense. — " I become" or " I am." 
 
 PERS. SING. 
 
 1st, Hmfn hhavdmi, 
 2d, JTqftr bhavasi, 
 8d, H^fi( bhavati, 
 
 Vf^Xm bhatnvali, 
 >TT^t bhavathah, 
 Vf^jr, bhavatah. 
 
 ^%f^ abhavam, 
 ^>T^: abhavah, 
 ^fVl^Tr nbhavat, 
 
 Vf^ bhavei/aJH, 
 H%: bhaveh, 
 H%!T bhavet, 
 
 JT^rffT bhavdni, 
 >rf bhava, 
 >T5fH' bhavatu, 
 
 •Sf^^ babhfiva, 
 
 ^^P^VJ babhuvithi 
 '^ _ » 
 
 "qvm hahhuva, 
 
 First Preterite. — " I was becoming ' 
 ^>T^T^ abhavdva, 
 ^)r?rt abhavatam, 
 ^H'^Tft abhavatam.) 
 
 Potential.- 
 
 may become" or 
 
 )T^ bhaveva, 
 H%^ bliavetam, 
 ^T^iTT bJiavetdm, 
 
 Imperative. — " Let me become " or 
 
 Vt^[^ bhavdva, 
 V(^i{ bhavatam, 
 H^Tlt bhai^atdm. 
 
 Second Preterite. — " I became, 
 
 ■^irf^ babhuviva, 
 , ^^T^^t babhuvathuh, 
 
 ^V^rTI bahhuvatuh, 
 
 Hr<4riir^ bhavitdsmi, 
 >Tf%WTftr blmvitdsi, 
 ^ftdlT bhavitd, 
 
 First Future. — " I will become, 
 irf^Tff^: bhavitdsivah, 
 ^pMril^t bhavitdsthah, 
 vrNrn^ hlmvitdrau, 
 
 \lf^Jf{\ bhavdmah. 
 VT?^ bhavatlm. 
 Mctftff bhavanti. 
 
 ^H<41H abhavdma. 
 ^nr^ abhavata. 
 UiT^lT nbhavan. 
 
 may be." 
 )T^ bhavema. 
 >T^ bhaveta. 
 vi^(m bhaveyuh. 
 
 let me be." 
 
 H^TJT bhavdma. 
 H"^ bhavata. 
 H'<4rri bhavantu. 
 
 " I was." 
 
 ^wfcfM babhiivima. 
 '^>i{^ habhuva. 
 ^pr^ babhuvuh. 
 
 " &c. 
 WP^ril^t bJiavitdsmah. 
 J^f^tlTW bhavitdstha. 
 >jf<4(IK> bhavitdrah. 
 
 Second Future. — " I shall become," &c. 
 Hf^^ l fa bhavishydmi, »TfWI^: bhavishydvah, ^fcjmw: bhavi^hydmah. 
 >ffc(mfjH bhavishyasi, hP^UI^: bhaviskyathah, Vtf^rq^ hhavishyatha. 
 
 irfV^rfir bhavishyati, ^TpM^rft bhavishyatah, vrf^TJjfTfT bhavishyanti. 
 
EXAMPLES or VF.KHS OK THE FIRST CON.IUOATION. 
 
 lO; 
 
 The other tenses are. ;kl {)ret. ^^, ^^, ^^ , &c. ; bened. 
 ^^Ti(\ Sec. ; coiid. ^T^rfVoT. v<:c. ; pass. part. ^ . 
 
 '*)r.88. fl. '')r.98. ') P- 79. a. ■>) p. 03. i. '■)p.85. A. ') This is 
 given in anticipation of r. 125. as being the most useful of all the participles. 
 
 Root fw smi. Infill. ^ smcfum, " to smile." 
 Atmanepaoa. Present Tense. — "I smile." 
 
 7J(^ smoi/e", 
 ■^(Tf^ s)>iai/ase, 
 ;pT^ smayate, 
 
 ^m^ asmai/e, 
 ^rWHTTT: asmayathdh, 
 "^m^t^ (ismmjata, 
 
 J^V[^ smayeya, 
 ?JT^^; smayethdh, 
 l^^ •o'l'iyetn, 
 
 Jf^ smnyoi, 
 7H^^ smayasica, 
 JHH'in smayafnin, 
 
 ■ftrfrji^ sishmiye, 
 •ftrfTjrf^ sishmlyisJie, 
 ■ftrfTJI^ sisjluniye., 
 
 "^kfCX^" fimetdhe, 
 ^rild smetase^ 
 ?^in ■''iiietd, 
 
 J^^ .siiics/tye, 
 JMm^ sineshyase, 
 7^U((^ f^meijhyate. 
 
 Wi\\^\ smaydva/ie, 
 T^^^ smaycfhe, 
 ^Hi\^ smayete, 
 
 V^i\W^ smaydinahe. 
 ^inr^ smayadhwe. 
 W^'^ smayante. 
 
 First Pri'teritc. — "I was smiling." 
 
 '^R'rrRf^ asmaydvahi, WiH^mf^ asmnydmahi. 
 ^tH^Vjl asmayethdm, ^J^fm^ nsmayadhivam. 
 
 ^WJ^Tlt asmayetdm, ^^^nTtT ostnayajita. 
 
 Potential. — " I may smile." 
 ^1^'^f? smayevahi, ^^f^ smayemahi. 
 
 ^IjlllVl] ■'itnayeydthdm, '^W^t^ smaye.rlhwam. 
 W^TflT sniayeydtdm., ^ijirl smayeran. 
 
 Imperative. — " Let me smile." 
 7HMN^ sniaydvahai, ^H^IH^ smaydniaJiai. 
 
 ^Hl)V(i sniayethdm, umi4 siiiayadhwam. 
 
 ^'T^TTT snuiyetdni, ^M^fl'l smayantdm. 
 
 Second Preferi:e. — "I smiled." 
 ■ftrfTjrftra^ sishmiyiva/te, fijftJTftlJJ^ si.^/nniyiyna/te. 
 f^jfi^lliv) sishjniydfhe, 'ftrf^f^JM sishiniyidhwe. 
 
 ftrf^Jnrr^ xishmiydte., ftlftHfiR sisJimiyire. 
 
 First Future. — " I will smile." 
 ^ffl^^ .snietdswahe, J^^m^ snictdsina/ie. 
 
 f^A\H\^ snietdsdthe, JHAV^ smctddhirr. 
 
 ^'ITTTO' •'■metdrau, WTTTC '^nietdmh. 
 
 Second Future. — " I shall smile." 
 
 ^U(N^ sniesliydvuhf, ^Ujm^ sineslnjdnuihe. 
 
 ^^UfQ smesliyethe., THVfUT snirshyadltwc. 
 
 44) u)^ smeshyeti', ^^niTff smcslii/tinfe. 
 
 P 
 
106 EXAMPLES OF VERBS OF THE FIRST CONJUGATION. 
 
 3d pret. ^^^i? , bened. ;(^^t^^ cond. ^^^, 
 
 *) r. 88. a. ") p. 74. note t and r. 80. '') p. 79. e. 
 
 pass. part. ftJTTT. 
 
 •i) p. 83. g. ') p. 85. b. 
 
 Obs. By 2 pr. 1 sin., is meant the 1st person sing, of the 2d 
 preterite ; by 2 pr. 1 du., the 1st person dual of the 2d pret ; by 
 pass, part., the passive past participle (r. 125,). 
 
 Jl, par. 
 
 cb'ii, par. 
 
 hri, par. 
 
 fijaj, par. 
 
 labh, atm. 
 
 " conquer." 
 
 "run." 
 
 "seize." 
 
 "quit." 
 
 " obtain." 
 
 ^t^tPh 
 
 ^mfn 
 
 ^TjfiT 
 
 m=iTTf»» 
 
 ^^ 
 
 ^Tf-q 
 
 -ii^<^ 
 
 ^Tfi 
 
 ^Wlt 
 
 ^q5^ 
 
 W^^ 
 
 ^^ 
 
 ^4 
 
 ww4 
 
 Qji^ 
 
 w^^fr{ 
 
 ■5^1% 
 
 ^nfti 
 
 wsTiftr 
 
 ^^^ 
 
 f^nm 
 
 ^^' 
 
 5>l^R 
 
 rtiMl^i 
 
 ^h" 
 
 f^T^' 
 
 ir 
 
 =Hf^^ 
 
 TTWf»T^ 
 
 ^^^ 
 
 tinftn' 
 
 
 ^?ITf<»T^ 
 
 urarftjT"' 
 
 ^ja^rf 
 
 siujiPh 
 
 ■?ft"anfiT 
 
 fftwifir 
 
 
 ^Jt^" 
 
 ^■ 
 
 -^i 
 
 ^1 
 
 m^ 
 
 ^t' 
 
 fira 
 
 F 
 
 fw 
 
 w^ 
 
 ^' 
 
 Root 
 
 ( 
 Pres. 
 
 1st pret. 
 Pot. 
 
 Imp. 
 
 2 pr. 1 sin. 
 2 pr. 1 du. 
 1st fut. 
 2d fut. 
 Infin. 
 Pass. part. 
 ») r. 88. a. 
 ') r. 98. 6) See the scheme for the 2d pret. p. 
 J) p. 79./ 
 P) r. 106. 
 
 *') P- 77./ p. 75. 6'. •■) p. 74. note t. 
 13. '>)p. 
 ') p. 80. 
 
 Root { 
 
 Pres. 
 
 1st pret. 
 Pot. 
 
 Imp. 
 
 2 pr. 1 sin, 
 2 pr. 1 du. 
 1st fut. 
 2d fut. 
 Infin. 
 Pass, part 
 
 ") p. 79. c 
 ') r. 125. i. 
 
 rrit, atm. 
 "be, exist." 
 
 ■)p.76. 
 Op. 74. 
 
 ) r. 98. ") r. 88. h with note. 
 
 yacli, par. 
 "ask." 
 
 irr^Tfvr 
 ■mf^Trrfw 
 
 jlv, par. 
 " live." 
 
 sintbh, atm. 
 " shine." 
 
 ^^ 
 
 ^^ 
 
 ^^ 
 
 e) r. 106. 
 JQ.f. ') r. 98. and 99. c. 
 -) p. 76. c. ») p. 80. 
 
 tiind, par. 
 " blame." 
 
 Op. 79. 
 
 
 
 ed?i, atm. 
 
 arh, par. 
 
 "flourish." 
 
 " deserve.'' 
 
 IT^ 
 
 ■^Tfir 
 
 ^^ 
 
 ^t 
 
 5?VTI 
 
 ■^"^ 
 
 ^^^ 
 
 ^fTfirr 
 
 ^nr^^' 
 
 ^T^' 
 
 ^>n^f^ 
 
 ^n^ff^ 
 
 ^ftrrrt 
 
 ■^rff inftT 
 
 '?fti'«^ 
 
 ^ffwifT 
 
 TjfVW 
 
 wffff 
 
 TrfVfT 
 
 ^rffw 
 
 ■)p.77..9. ^)p.75./. ^) 
 
 . 88. b. note. 
 
EXAMPLES UK VERBS OV THE I'lUST COX.irfJATION. 
 
 10' 
 
 Root ' 
 
 Pres. 
 1st pret. 
 Pot. 
 Imp. 
 
 2 pr. 1 sin. 
 2 pr. I du. 
 1st flit. 
 2d flit. 
 Infill. 
 Pass. part. 
 
 s(ul, par. 
 •'sink." 
 
 '')p.7C. 
 
 (jiii/i, par. 
 "cro." 
 
 
 
 
 .'<t/i(i, par. 
 
 (Irish, par. 
 
 >/ti/i, j)ar. 
 
 " remain." 
 
 "see." 
 
 '^ burn." 
 
 friaifn 
 
 M^^lfH 
 
 T^TfiT 
 
 
 
 
 IriKIIrl 
 
 Wlrilfw 
 
 wi^^iTh 
 
 fWfT 
 
 
 
 rail, par. 
 " boar." 
 
 •) r. 125. J. '')p.75. c. 
 
 ') P- 7; 
 
 Op.l 
 
 ») p. G4. c. 
 
 *) r. 125. 0. *") p. 64. c. cf. "Kyriifn. ') cf. T<rTa»;»', and Lat. ste7n. J) p. 75. e. 
 and 76. «. See the 2d pret. of the root da, given at full under the 3d conjugation. 
 '')p.79. c. ')r.l25. c. "OrlOfi- ")r.l25. ?. ") p.76. c. and 68. /*. 
 
 ") p. 80. and 69. /. ") Cf. the Lat. veho. ') p. 76. d. ') p. 80. Whenever 
 the final '^ blonds with the initial of the termination into ^, the medial a of the 
 root, instead of being lengthened by r. 91. h., is changed to 0. Thus in the 3d pret. 
 
 par. 'sr^rcf, ?N^i«fl:, ^irmfTT, w^rr^. w^, -n^lidi, -a^w^, »n<4\^, 
 
 -HMWii: ; atm. ^57^^, TOTT:, ^T^, ^l^T^ff , &c. Sec p. 82. /. ,7. Simi- 
 larly sali, "to bear." With ardkshlf, cf. the Lat. vexit. ') r. 106. ") r. 125. m. 
 
 Root. < 
 
 Pres. 
 
 1st pret. 
 Pot. 
 Imp. 
 
 2 pr. 1 sin. 
 2 pr. 1 du. 
 1st flit. 
 2d flit. 
 Infin. 
 Pass. part. 
 
 pa, par. 
 " drink.' 
 
 fqrrftr 
 
 MlrilPfH 
 
 gh7a, par. 
 " smell." 
 
 ftnnftir 
 
 mrfifw 
 mwjipH juiuiiPH 
 
 .a^_ c 1 ^ 
 
 WfT Trnr 
 
 dhma, par. 
 
 /«t'e, par 
 
 " blow." 
 
 "call." 
 
 wfti' 
 
 d^MlP*l 
 
 "^yjA 
 
 ^^ 
 
 v^ 
 
 2^^^ 
 
 >mTf^ 
 
 ii^T^Tftr 
 
 ^' 
 
 1^' 
 
 <Pw('^ 
 
 ^f^ 
 
 d^MlPw 
 
 WITfMlPH 
 
 i^lfMlPH 
 
 «nw 
 
 ^r 
 
 wmr 
 
 p" 
 
 </rti, par. 
 " sing." 
 
 TTTirrf'T 
 
 J|Ti||P*T 
 
 TTTTrrfR'' 
 jii«4iPh' 
 
 
 vas, par. 
 "dweU." 
 
 «miPH 
 
 -MWlPoT 
 <iPi(H 
 
 a) p. 64. c. Cf. Latin inho, hihis, S^c. 
 f/tl, 8d conjugation. '^) r. 125. c. 
 
 '') p. 76. a. See the tense at full under 
 '') This root substitutes ///iniii lor (//nnu. 
 
108 EXAMPLES OF VERBS OF THE FOURTH CONJUGATION. 
 
 ") r. 10. t- P- 77- /. Other roots in e follow the analogy of those in a 
 
 (p. 70. a.); as dhe^ dadhau. s) Roots ending in the diphthongs e and ai change 
 these letters to a before the t and a- of a termination. Hence, gai in the 3d pret. 
 is agdsam, ^c. Hwe may foUow Form III. in the 3d pret. rejecting its final ; thus, 
 ahwam, ahioah, S^c. Atm. ahwe, ahioathdh^ S^c, or Form II. ahwdsi, &;c. 
 'Or. 125. e. ') r. 8. J)r.l25./. ") p. 76. rf. ') P- 80. ">) r. 125. wi. 
 
 EXAMPLES OF REGULAR PRIMITIVE VERBS OF THE 
 FOURTH CONJUGATION (r. 89.). 
 
 Root g^, mtth. Infin. jfif^. "to be troubled." 
 Parasmaipada. Present Tense. — " I am troubled." 
 
 g?n1^ mnhydmi, 
 ^■ftr muhyasi, 
 5^rilT mahyati, 
 
 ^m^ amuhyam^ 
 ^SPT^; amuhyah^ 
 ^ra^nr amuhyat, 
 
 M^A, muhyeyam, 
 H^ muhyeh, 
 JHi^^ri miihyet, 
 
 \\ muhydvah, 
 H^^\ muhyathah, 
 JT^nn muhyatah, 
 
 jr^JTT; muhydmah. 
 a^'^ muliyatha. 
 'T^'tT muhyanti. 
 
 First Preterite. — " I was troubled." 
 
 ■>H*4rf]N amuhydva^ 
 'iJM^ri amiihyatam, 
 ^WSTflT amuhyatdm^ 
 
 ^IIH^JJH anmhydma. 
 ^n^TT amuhyata. 
 ^nT?r*T amuhyan. 
 
 Potential. 
 
 may be troubled." 
 
 »^^ muhyeva, H^ muhyema. 
 
 TT^ir miihyetam, IT^TT muhyeta. 
 
 JT^ITT muhyetdm, M^m muhyeyuh. 
 
 Let me be troubled.' 
 
 JTirrf«T muhydni^ 
 a^ muhya, 
 a^nr muhyatu^ 
 
 JTJTt? mumoha, 
 T{^^;^^ mumohitha., 
 TTn^ mumoha^ 
 
 irtfffTTftf " mohitdsmi, 
 ?ftf)$rilf« mohitdsi, 
 jftffTTI muhitd, 
 
 Imperative.- 
 
 a^HT muhydma. 
 a^if viuhyata. 
 a^I»jT muhyantu. 
 
 Second Preterite. — " I became troubled." 
 
 ir^IT? muhydva, 
 JT'^rff inuhyatarn, 
 jf^nrt muhyatdm, 
 
 mmnuhiva. 
 
 5^ 
 jmanzn mumuhathuh, 
 jfJT^t mumuhatuJi, 
 First Future. 
 
 STtf^in^: mohitdswah, 
 T^tf^HT^, mohitdsthah, 
 Hlf^rtltr mohitdrau, 
 
 ^^^f^ mumuhirna. 
 aiT^ mumuha. 
 vm^\ mumuhuh. 
 
 'R^'f^fTTfT: mohitdsmah. 
 if^r^ri'lfVl mokitdstha. 
 Iflf^TnTJ mohitdrah. 
 
EXAMPLES OF VERBS OF THE FOURTH CONJUGATION. 100 
 
 Hlf^UJlfn mohishijiuni 
 ^\f^^^f^ moMshyasi, 
 Htn^mfif mohishyati, 
 
 Second Future- 
 Hir f UT I"?: mohlshyavnh, 
 Iflf^UIVj; moJihliyatJidli, 
 jfVf^^onn mohlshyatah, 
 
 Hlf^miHt mohisliyamnh. 
 ^tf'?T^y^ moldsliyatha. 
 Hir^U4fti mohishyantl. 
 
 3cl pret, Wf , bened. ^^^^^^ cond. >i{Hin^«i, p. part, g^ or J^r^^ 
 
 ') Or »f^^*>T or ITPVlfw, P- »0. 
 
 ') p. 83. h. 
 
 Root < 
 
 Pres. 
 
 1st pret. 
 Pot. 
 Imp. 
 
 2 pr. 1 sin. 
 2 pr. 1 du. 
 1st fut. 
 2d fut. 
 Infill. 
 Pass. part. 
 
 as, par. 
 " throw." 
 
 
 
 nash, par. 
 " perish." 
 
 pad,'a.im. 
 
 "go." 
 
 sham, par. 
 "be cahn." 
 
 ^IT»iT' 
 
 ^) p. 85. e. 
 
 1) r. 125. i. 
 
 sidh, par. 
 
 trip, par. 
 
 " succeed." 
 
 "be pleased.' 
 
 
 
 
 
 ftrfqfv^ 
 
 rifffM^ 
 
 ^^rrfw 
 
 1T^«T 
 
 ^WTfir 
 
 TTt^rrftf 
 
 
 
 *) Many of these roots of the 4th conjugation follow the 3d Form for the 3d pret. 
 See p. 83. A-. b) p. 75./ <^) p. 76. c. '^) This root may optionaUy reject ?, 
 and insert a nasal in the futures ; thus, ttsiftw, ^t^rrfJT . *) p. 89. note marked *. 
 p. 80. e) r. 125. j. •■) There are seven other useful roots which lengthen 
 the medial a after the manner of sham; viz. hram, bhram (r. 89. a.) dam, klam 
 
 ksham, shrajn^ mad. ') r. 125. p. J) r. 125. 
 
 Root. 
 
 Pres. 
 
 1st pret. 
 
 Pot. 
 
 Imp. 
 
 2 pr. 1 sin. 
 
 2 pr. 1 du. 
 
 1st fut. 
 
 2d fut. 
 
 Infin. -mi^ 
 
 Pass. part, ftrff 
 
 so, par. 
 {vyava) 
 "strive." 
 
 ^^ 
 ^^ 
 
 ■*<'f*1 -A 
 
 I ^ I ri I r«T 
 
 bhransh, 
 par. " fall." 
 
 vyadh, par. 
 " pierce." 
 
 
 ) Ci. reptrofiat, reTapirofxi^v. 
 
 hrish, par. 
 " rejoice." 
 
 ^^ 
 
 «i I 
 
 yiidh,atm. 
 
 tush, p 
 
 "fight." 
 
 "become 
 
 5^ 
 
 ^TinfiT 
 
 ^5^ 
 
 ^jJUf 
 
 ^tqzT 
 
 1"^ 
 
 5^ 
 
 jJUIlOlJ 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^wt^ 
 
 W^ 
 
 ^5^^ 
 
 ■q^^^' 
 
 fflyiPui' 
 
 ^fti^^ 
 
 > 1^ 
 
 iH'mUH 
 
 ^t 
 
 "ift? 
 
 ^^ 
 
 ^ 
 
110 EXAMPLES OF VERBS OF THE SIXTH CONJUGATION. 
 
 *) There are three other uncommon roots which follow so ; viz. sho, chho, do. 
 *•) Roots ending in e or follow the analogy of those in a and ai in the 2d pret., 
 see p. 76. a. «) Roots ending in o change o to « before the t and s of a termina- 
 tion. ^)v.l25.g. '=)r. 89. «. f) P- "5. «. and 64. /?. e) p. 78. note *. 
 '')r. 125. M. i)P-75. rf. J)p.80. ") r. 125. i. ') P- "5. c. '°)Or^F. 
 
 EXA.MPLES OF REGULAR PRIMITIVE VERBS OF THE 
 
 SIXTH CONJUGATION (r. 90.). 
 
 Root ^ srij. Infill. ^^ srashtum, " to create,"" or " let go.'"' 
 
 PARASMAIPADA Only. 
 Present Tense. — " I create." 
 
 ^nrrfir* srijatni, 
 
 ^sfffl srijasi, 
 ^Sffir srijati, 
 
 '^nr^ asrijani, 
 ^^nr: asrijalt, 
 ^r^nrff asrijat. 
 
 ^^ srijeyam, 
 ^; srijeh, 
 ^7T srijet, 
 
 ^^IIPH srijdni. 
 
 f; srtjdvah, 
 ^afvn srijathah^ 
 ^'^ri: srijatah. 
 
 \\ srij amah. 
 JVt^ srijatha. 
 WllPiT siijanti. 
 
 First Preterite. 
 
 was creating. 
 
 asrijava, 
 ^nnfif asryatam, 
 ^^raUfft asrijatdm, 
 
 Potential. — " I may create. 
 ^tR' srijeva, 
 ^nrff srijetam, 
 ^TWfTT srijetam, 
 
 asrijama. 
 ■^infrT asrijata. 
 ^raip^ asrijan. 
 
 ^npT srijema. 
 ip^ srij eta. 
 ^^: srijeyuh. 
 
 Imperative 
 T(^T^ srijdva, 
 jnft srijatam, 
 srijatdm. 
 
 " Let me create. 
 
 ^nr^ sasarja, 
 Tnrf#^ sasarjitha, 
 ■?rH^ sasarja. 
 
 Second Preterite. 
 
 TfrnPH^ sasrijivtt, 
 ^nT"5T^ sasrijathuh, 
 ^miTff: sasrijatuh, 
 
 srijama. 
 ^nnr snjata. 
 ^ST-iJ srijantu. 
 
 ^nrf^nr sasrijima. 
 ^nnr sasHja. 
 ■^r^: sasrijuh. 
 
EXAMPLES OF VERBS OF THE SIXTH CON JUfJATION . II I 
 
 H\i\\H srasfifnsi, 
 
 H'm\[H si-nkshymni, 
 H^rftr sraks/iyasi, 
 H^tRt srakshyati, 
 
 The other tenses 
 pass. part. tt?^. 
 
 '*) p. 65. note *. '') 
 ^) p. 85. e. ') r. 105. 
 
 Root < 
 
 Pres. 
 
 1st pret. 
 Pot. 
 Imp. 
 
 2 pr. 1 sin. 
 2 ])r. 1 du. 
 1st fut. 
 2(1 fut. 
 Infin. 
 Pass. part. 
 
 First Future. 
 
 Umfcjt sni^fiftlswii/i, 
 ^g|^; srashtristfiiih, 
 (JSKT sras/iffiraii. 
 
 Second Future. 
 
 ^^Ht ■•^rtik.'^hi/nvah, 
 ^'Afim srnks/iyathah, 
 gVJtHri: srakshyatnh. 
 
 CynTt sriisjildsmiili. 
 ^^7^ srashfnstha. 
 H^\l^, srushtdrah. 
 
 fJVi^l^I srakshyamnh . 
 fJVi4|iq srakshyatha. 
 t l Hj4r>ri srakshyanti. 
 
 are, 3d pret. ^rer^', bened. ^TiflfT , cond. ■^ 
 
 or ^T¥?. ^ee p. 
 f) r. 125. i. 
 
 ). note *, and r. 91. «) p. 80. note *. 
 
 ?nri, atm- 
 " die." 
 
 fTTR 
 
 "I 
 
 pi'achchh, 
 par. "ask." 
 
 /nas;. par. 
 " dive." 
 
 isA, par. 
 
 kship, par. 
 
 " wish." 
 
 " throw." 
 
 ^TjAlfH 
 
 
 ^^^ 
 
 ^f^ 
 
 ^4 
 
 
 d^TSilM 
 
 
 Pmij^ 
 
 ff^ 
 
 
 FfRTTrftiT 
 
 SfXlPtH 
 
 TrfETonfiT 
 
 ^i^^nfH 
 
 ifftrw 
 
 ^, 
 
 ^ " 
 
 f^ 
 
 much, par. 
 " let go." 
 
 ») r. 90. a. ") p. 79. c. '^) p. 77./ With the 2d pers. sing. inTftaTI, 
 of. the Latin poposcisfi. So also with Tpftf^ (from tud), tutodisti. ^) p. 80. 
 ') r. 125. i. f) So lajjdmi from lasj. But these roots are sometimes written 
 majj and lajj. i) p. 64. h. •") This root inserts a nasal in the fixtures, 
 i) r. 125. k. J) r. 88. ") p. 75./ ') p. 65. note *. ") p. 75. d. ») r. 90. b. 
 
( 11-^ ) 
 
 EXAMPLES OF IRREGULAR PRIMITIVE VERBS OF THE 
 SECOND CONJUGATION (r. 92). 
 
 Root TIT. Infill. infT» " to go." 
 
 PARASMAIPADA Ollly. 
 Present. — " I go. 
 Trrftr yaml, TTR: yavah, inTt ydmali. 
 
 tUfU yasi, T^^, yathah, TrrT ydtha. 
 Tnfff ydti, Trnn yatak, Tirf^fT ydntl 
 
 First Preterite. 
 
 "W^ ayarn, 
 •^i\\; ayah. 
 
 Tjrqr ydydm, 
 
 TTTm: ydydh, 
 TTninr yaydt, 
 
 ■trrftr y^'^h 
 
 HTW ydtu, 
 
 ayava, 
 ^prnf aydtam, 
 aydtdm, 
 
 Potential. 
 
 ^nnT ayama. 
 
 b 
 
 HI'^IM ydydva, ITIum ydydma. 
 
 inTmf ydydtavu V|^M ydydta. 
 
 XfJZUWt ydydtd7Ji, TfX^i ydyuh. 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 xrr^ i/ava, TnT yama. 
 
 •qTff ydtam, t^ ydta. 
 
 TJIiTT ydtdm, Tn^ ^awj'M. 
 
 2d pret. xr^°, &c. ; 1st fut. '^Tr^Tfw'' 
 &c. ; 2d fut. ^ji^ i fH ^ &c. ; 3d pret 
 
 p. part. TiTiT 
 
 '')p. 70. ft. '') or '^r^:, p. 69. notej. 
 
 Root 1^. lufin. Ult, "to go." 
 
 PARASMAIPADA. 
 Present. — " I go." 
 
 ^: ivah^ ^: imah. 
 
 ^TJK ithahi ^^ itha. 
 
 
 
 ^: iydh. 
 
 i^irs/ Preterite. 
 
 ^TT aitam., ^TT ««^«. 
 ^rjTT aitdm, wnT«T ^'3/«; 
 
 Potential. 
 
 •^^[^ iydva, 
 ^TITff iydtam. 
 
 Imperative. 
 ^nrrf»T' ay dm, ^TTR' aydva, 
 
 ^TTTrT iydta 
 
 ^ ita. 
 Tptf^ yantu 
 
 2d pret. ^XTPT , ^TTftni or ^ 
 
 , ^TTRI, tfiR, &e.; 1st fut. ^inftTT 
 
 bened. '^\l\\^ ; cond. wqTRT ; 2d fut. Jj'OTrf'T ; 3d pret. ^iTP^ (fro 
 root ITT ) ; bened. ^irre ; cond. ^i 
 p. part. ^. 
 <=) p. 76. a. ") p. 79. e. «') p. 82. d. 
 f) r. 92. e) r. 7- '') a with e—ai, r. 6., «i with am=dyam, v. R. ') « with 
 
 i=ai, r. 88. J) e with d7ii=aydni. '') p. 75. k. ') p. 85. ft. 
 
 The above root ^ i, " to go," is constantly compounded with pre- 
 positions,* in accordance with the usual rules of combination. 
 
 * It is desirable to introduce the inflection of these compound verbs here, 
 although the subject properly belongs to the cliapter on compound words. 
 
;XAMFLES OF VKUHS OF THE SECOND CONJUOA'llON, 
 
 in 
 
 Tims, with tho prep, a, "to;" pros, ^, ^f^, ^; dual v^., ike; 
 1st pret. "^m, h' i^f-'>; pot. ir^T, 6i:c. ; imp. -kniPh. ^, ^, v*<;c. 
 A»ain with apa prefixed to ^fk, 8:e. ; pres. ^^^f^, isic. ; 1st pret. 
 •HH\ zi, &c. ; pot. ^^in, &c. ; inii). ^qmifH, ^ST^ff . The preposition 
 ad/ii prefixed to the root ^ gives the sense of " to read," and ^ i 
 then blends with ad/ii into (cJ/ai/ before the vowel, and adhi before 
 tlu> eonsonantal tm-niinations. Hence the pres. (jitm. only) '^nf^^, 
 ^TV^, ^TVt^, ^niNr^, &e. ; 1st -pret. "^Tfmftf (adhi + a = ad/i// a ; adliya 
 + i = adhyai, r. SS ; ad/njai + i = adhyuyi, r. 8.). ^t^:, ^J^; dual 
 ^n^^ff, ^HiilFrRt, &c. ; pot. ^nfhfhl, &c. ; imp. ^Tiq% {adhi-^ e = 
 adhi/e ; adhye + ai = adhi/ayai), ^snfl^, &c. In the 2d pret. the root 
 is changed to t^; thus, ^!rf>nT^. ^fvurffT^. ^>nT^. 'Kr^ifON^, &c. 
 In the 3d preterite the root becomes jft, and takes Form II. ; thus, 
 ■^rapfiftT. ?Hu<jflai:, 'HtuJily , &c. 
 
 Root -^ft. Inf. ^[ifTIW. "to lie down," "to sleep." atmanepada. 
 
 This root takes Guna before all the terminations, and inserts 
 r in the 3d plur. of the pres. 1st pret. and imp. 
 
 
 Present. 
 Potential. 
 
 i5nfls4 
 
 First Preterite. 
 
 ^T^iftr ^^i'^f? "^^f? 
 
 ire? 
 
 Ijiipcratire. 
 
 3iiir<]t 
 
 7rs4 
 
 2(1 pret. %3xr", 1st fut. •^iftnrrt'. 2d fut. •^rftr^, 3d pret. ^gr^TTfti, 
 bened. ■^rftnfHT ', cond. ^STJlf^rai, pass. part. '^I'ftra"'. 
 
 *) r. 10. t. Cf. KtiiJiai, Kf.laat, Kclrat, Keifxeda, &:c., and see note, p. 45. '') r. 98. 
 
 ') This is an exception to r. 101. e. <^) p, 85. h. '') r. 125. b. note. 
 
 Root ^. Inf. wti^, " to praise." parasmaipada. 
 
 Present. ' First Preterite, 
 
 wt^^ f^^i f^: 'UH'-l ^M^M 'i<wH 
 
 ?t^XI J^. Jr^ j W^: ^5n?^W ^^TRJff 
 
 ^iftfiT W^' Tt^ffif I 'HWlri ^3n?1^fn '^''J^ 
 Q 
 
il4 EXAMPLES OF VERBS OF THE SECOND CONJUGATION. 
 
 Pot. ^^, &c. ; Imp. ^?3=rrf^ (in the Vedas ;gr^^). ^^> ^W, 
 &c. ; 2d pret. iffT^'' ; dual irp' ; 1st fut. ^cftHrfw" ; 2d fut. W^imiPH ; 
 3d pret. W^fTTf^q^' ; atm. pres. t^, &c. 
 
 ») p. 70. c. ^ may also make ^r^ before the consonantal P terminations ; thus, 
 jyjtflfa , ^ efl fq, &c., after the analogy of ^. It makes stuv and rarely stav before 
 the vowel P terminations. '') p. 75. e. ") See the table, p. 73. '^) p. 79./. 
 •) p. 82. a. 
 
 
 Root ^ 
 
 (p. 70. c). 
 
 Inf. ^^ 
 
 "to say." 
 
 
 PARASMAIPADA. 
 
 ATMANEPADA. 
 
 
 
 Present. 
 
 
 
 W^f'T 
 
 ^. 
 
 ^• 
 
 I^ 
 
 ^^ 
 
 1^ 
 
 13 if) Cm 
 
 I'^i 
 
 ^ . 
 
 * 
 
 ^"^Im 
 
 ^ 
 
 y«flfrt 
 
 W' 
 
 1^ 1 ^ 
 First Preterite. 
 
 ^^Iri 
 
 1^ 
 
 ^1^ 
 
 W^ 
 
 ^fm 
 
 ^r^ 
 
 ^sr^f 
 
 ^T^f? 
 
 ^■3^: 
 
 ^T^ 
 
 ■»Ht|H 
 
 'Hj^vfi: 
 
 _ ♦ 
 
 ^■ai4 
 
 ^5<4l(T 
 
 »ud^rir 
 
 '^ rf ^=1 •! 
 
 •«««rt 
 
 'i<s^mrti 
 
 '^^^IH 
 
 y^ir*ii 
 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 1 is c 
 
 •^c 
 
 
 sf'in? 
 
 ^^IH 
 
 1^ 
 
 I^nt 
 
 ricim^^ 
 
 ^.^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 1? 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^^m 
 
 ^^ 
 
 ■3^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 1^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 ■^WT 
 
 ■3"^ 
 
 Pot. par. ^, fin:, f"^. &c. ; atm. ^^, ^^Ntk, ■§^, &c. 
 The other tenses are from the root ^ ; as, 2d pret. j«rM , du. 
 ■gifg^', 1st fut. -^wfw, 2d fut. •q^?nftT, 3d pret. 'SItN', p. part. "3^°. 
 
 ») Borrowed from cTq' . '') For these are sometimes substituted the termina- 
 tion of the 2d pret. of a defective root ^i^ with a present signification : thus, 
 2d sing. WTF?! ; 8d sing. 'SSTT? ; 2d dual -"Hi^y: ; 3d dual ^IT?rT: ; 3d plur. ^^TT^', . 
 ') The radical vowel is here changed to iiv instead of av. Pdnini, 7. 3. 88. 
 In the Vedas G^ramm occurs. '') r. 10. J. '■)p. 76. f/. Op-SS.J. f ) r. 125. wi. 
 
 Root ^(p. 70. d.) Inf. -^f^, "to kill." 
 
 PARASMAIPADA. 
 
 
 Present. 
 
 
 
 i^//-.sf Preterite. 
 
 ?fVH 
 
 V^: 
 
 V^: 
 
 ^T^' 
 
 w^^ 'sr^^ 
 
 ?f¥ 
 
 ^: 
 
 F^ 
 
 ^^ 
 
 'H?-ri JJ^d 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^: 
 
 wf% 
 
 ^^H 
 
 W^J ^^i1 
 
EXAMPLES OF VERliS OE THE SECOND CONJUGATION. 1 15 
 
 Imperative 
 
 ?^ frTT TPH 
 
 ") Or ^. ") p. 69. a. ') p. 77. 
 p. 82. c. f) r. 125. o. 
 
 Pot. ir;tit, X:c'. ; rid prot. »iVM , 
 jfTifTf^ or •sniv^, duiil sTfjFI ; 1st 
 flit. •^TTinfw'', .K:c. ; :2(i fiit. ^pHm ifiT, 
 &c*. ; 3d pret. -sT^rfv^ , ^^c. ; p. 
 part. fTT^. 
 
 '^) p. 80. '') Substituted from ^v , 
 
 Root ^rnr (p. 70. e. \ 
 F resent. 
 
 ^^nftR ^TT^*. ^5rnR: 
 
 Intperatlve. 
 
 
 Infill. 5nf«ff , " to rule." 
 i^/r«^ Preterite. 
 
 I 
 
 
 
 Pot. f^art, &c. ; 2d pret. ^T^tm; 
 1st future, ^nfaif i r fflr ; 2d future, 
 5lir««(lOT; 3d pret. '^f^ ; p. 
 part. f^\ 
 
 ") p. 69. note X- ^) Or ^T^TTt* the final being changed to Visargali instead of t. 
 ^) Or ^^llf^, p. 68. g. The termination dhi (corresponding to the Greek Oi) belongs 
 to roots ending in consonants, but was originally applicable to roots ending in vowels. 
 See Prof. Johnson's Mahabharata Selections, p. 107. ■»iim<*flj. ■') p. 83.y. ^) r.l 25. ??. 
 
 
 Root fVw (r. 92.) Infill, f^ , " to hcate. 
 Present. 
 
 PARASMAIPADA. 
 
 ^§1? 
 
 
 
 
 
 T^eV.^; Preterite. 
 
 ATMANEPADA. 
 
 
 
116 EXAMPLES OF VERBS OF THE SECOND CONJUGATION. 
 
 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 gmPiTir 
 
 l^TR 
 
 ^MIH 
 
 ^ 
 
 firfe^ 
 
 f¥? 
 
 %¥ 
 
 fwm' 
 
 n 
 
 fwsi 
 
 fg^^ 
 
 fw^ 
 
 
 
 Pot. par. fg^'h iT<m:, &c. ; atm. fg^tfj, ff^hn:, &c. ; 2d pret. 
 par. f^; atm. f^%^; 1st fut. iFrf<JT', i^T^ ; 2d fut. i^rrftT^, |^; 
 3d pret. ^f%^', ^flf^; bened. firanH\ f^T'^t^" ; coiid. ■n'^ ' iii , ^^^; 
 p. part. ft?'. 
 
 »)p.68. e. ^)^.68.d. ^) p. 60. a. ■*) Or ^^rf^: , p- 09. note J. ^)p. 08./. 
 f) p. 80. ?) p. 83. k. ") p. 85. e. ') r. 125. i. 
 
 Root ^^. Inf. df^' "to weep" (p. 70. d.). 
 
 Present First Preterite. 
 
 ^rf^ ^f^: ^f^; 'ST^ ^T^f^ 'ST^f^ 
 
 ^f?f«T ^fif^: ^fir^ ^J^:" ^^r^f^ sH^jP^d 
 
 df^frT ^f^: ^ctP^' ^t^^" ^r^f^TTT ^r^^ 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 ^f<f^ ^f^ ^Hiff 
 
 trf^ ^1^ ^^ 
 
 ^) Bopp compares the terminations of this tense to the Latin terminations in legi 
 legisti, legit, legimus, legitis, legunt. ^) Or ^T^^;. '^) Or ^T^f^hrT . '') p. 83. /* 
 
 Pot. ^ut, 2d pret. '^tt^, 1st fut. 
 tr%TftH, 2d fut. trf^^ttrrfJT, 3d pret. 
 ^^^ , bened. ^^ifl, cond. ^^rf^, 
 p. part. •^f^. 
 
 
 Root 
 
 If. Inf. 
 
 »^, " to milk.'"' 
 
 
 
 
 Present. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1^ 
 
 
 
 
 First Preterite. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
EXAMPLES OF VEUJiS OF TllK rillHl) CONJlUi ATION. 
 
 Pot. par, 
 
 
 <ft?TJT 
 
 Tinperatire. 
 
 pit, Titm. phr; 2d pret. p.... ^,^,«,, »..,.. ^, 
 ^Wrfw. ritin. ^Wrt"; ^^l f"t. >ftT?TTftT", atm. \ft^; belied 
 atm. irafhr; od pret. '^'^ 
 
 J^, fitm. 1^; 1st fut. 
 
 f ^ 
 
 iTijf^ ; beiied, pire, atm. >J#iI ; 
 
 cond. wt^*, atm. '^nft^ ; p. part. H'V 
 
 ») p. G9. /. '') p. 08. h. <■) p. G9. a. '') s4 and 5^, like terminations 
 
 beginning with a sibilant, have the effect of throwing back the aspirate (wliich has 
 been changed to g) on the mitial of the root. *■) p. 8.'3. A-. Q p. 84. note. 
 
 EXAMPLES OF IRREGULAR PRIMITIVES OF THE THIRD 
 CONJUGATION (r. 93.). 
 
 Root^. Infill. )?lr, "to support," "bear." 
 
 f^^rf^ hthharmi, 
 f^^f^" hibharshi, 
 f^^rf^ ' bibharti, 
 
 ^^f^^X^ nhibharam, 
 ^f^^lT,' abibhar, 
 ^rf%HT, abib/mr, 
 
 "Nvrrftr bibhamm, 
 f^ijf^ bib/iri/n, 
 f%>T^ bibhartu, 
 
 PARASMAIPADA. 
 
 Present Tt'w.'Je.— "I support" 
 
 f^JT^; bibhrivah, 
 f^VTZf, hibhrithah, 
 f^WjT: bibhritah, 
 
 First Preterite. 
 ^r<sf»T^ abibhriva, 
 ^f^Wff abihhritam, 
 ^"f^r^TTTT (ibibhritdm, 
 
 Imperative. 
 ■f^i^J^ bibhardva, 
 f%>nT bibfi,.itam, 
 f^vnV! bi/>/irifdm, 
 
 bear." 
 
 f^^ir: bibhrimah. 
 f^vr^ bibhritha. 
 f^\jf([ bibhrati. 
 
 ^fspW abibhrima. 
 ^f^>Tff abibhrita. 
 ^fq>T^j abibharuh. 
 
 f^^HR bibhardma. 
 f^^TcT bibhrita. 
 f%>JiT bibhrntu. 
 
 Pot. f%>jTit bibhrii/rim, f^Pjm:, &e. ; pres. atm, f^ , f^>J^, &c. 
 1st pret. 'sr^iV', 'srf^ipT:, &c. ; pot. "Mfhr ; imp. f%v^, fV«^, &c. 
 2d pret. par. '^v^i_, dual WVR, atm. "q^^ ; 1st fut. >^tTf♦JT^ atm. irlrir 
 2d fut. >TfwrfiT\ atm. ^rft:^ ; p. part. tjrT ; 3d pret. 'swttt', atm 
 
118 EXAMPLES OF VERBS OF THE THIRD CONJUGATION. 
 
 '^) Cf. the Latin fers, fert,ferimus,fertis,ferimt. '') Or wf%>T:. Since the 
 
 vowel ri is changed to ar, the rule at p. 69. a. applies to this verb. *=) r. 93. last 
 sentence. <')r.21. '^) r. 7- P- "5. a. «) P- 79./ '>)p.79.c. ') P- 82./. 
 j)p.83.sr. 
 
 Root ^. Infin. ^, "to give." (p. 71. «.). 
 
 PARASMAIPADA. 
 Present Tense- — " I give." 
 a^fflT" daddmi, ^l dadwah, ^: dadmah. 
 
 ff^ftr daddsi, ^?!K datthah, ^rT dattJia. 
 
 ^ T fri daddti, ^Wt dattah, ^^fiT dadati. 
 
 First Preterite. — " I was giving." 
 
 ^^^ adaddm, ^T^ adadwa^ W^ adadma. 
 
 ■ ^^^V . adaddh, ^^ adattam, ^^ adatta. 
 
 ^^^Y i adaddt, -^^iCy adattam, ^^* adaduh. 
 
 Imperative. — " Let me give." 
 
 jjr^TfVr daddni, ^r^ daddva, ^^ daddma. 
 
 ^^' dehi, ^ dattam, ^ 6?a«a. 
 
 ^^ daddtu, ^Wt dattdm, ^^ dadatu. 
 
 Pot. ^, &c. ; pres. atm. ^, ^, ^, 
 
 imp. ^ ; pot. 1^^ , 
 
 ?^ dadau, 
 ^r«^V| daditha, 
 ^^ dadau, 
 
 &c. 
 
 1st pret. 'sr^: 
 
 Second Preterite. — " 1 gave." 
 
 ;^f^ dadiva, ^f^ dadima. 
 
 ^■^rq; dadathuh, ^ rfac^a. 
 
 ^^: dadatuh, ^: daduh. 
 
 2d pret. atm. ^^, ^i^^. ^. <r«^-=l^, &c. ; 1st fut. par. ^nrrftiT^ ; 
 
 2d fut. ^T^infiT^ 3d pret. ^ 
 p. part. ^'. 
 
 ») Cf. 3r5ft)A«, p. 69. note *. ' 
 
 "") Or c[^T^. Cf. the Latin dedisti 
 ')p.85. a. J)r.l25. c. 
 
 bened. ^^rra'; cond. ^^^; 
 ') p. 83. note t- 
 
 <=) p. 71. a. ^) p. 76. 
 
 Or ^^- ^) P- 79. e. ") p. 83. i. 
 
EXAMPLES OF VERBS OF THE THIRl) CONJUGATION. 119 
 
 
 Root VT. 
 
 Inf. VTff. " to place," 
 
 &c. 
 
 (p. 71. «.) 
 
 
 Present. 
 
 
 
 i^/r^r Preterite. 
 
 ^VTf^" 
 
 ^£^: 
 
 ?^: 
 
 ^SJT^ 
 
 
 T!Tf^ '^Hf^ 
 
 ^vrftr 
 
 Vr^: 
 
 M75I 
 
 ^^rrvr: 
 
 
 ^snr^ ^mm 
 
 ^vrfrT 
 
 v^: 
 
 ^w 
 
 '^^MTT^ 
 
 
 ^nrwr ^'t^* 
 
 Pot. ^«it, ^c. ; imp. ^vrr«T. vf?'. ^VTff, ^>rR, ir#. WT . ^VTR, VW, 
 ^^TW; pres. atm. ^, vw, v^, ^fi^. *^e. ; 1st pret. ^51^, ^nir^;, ike; 
 pot. cjvhi; imp. ^, Vr^, &c. ; 2d pret. par. ^'^; atm. ^; 1st 
 fut. vnTTftT; 2d fat. \i i f^|f^ ; 3d pret. ^r*JT* ; bcned. thTHT^ cond. 
 ^3nm4; p. part, ffff'. 
 
 ») Cf. Tiflij/uf, Tt0»7?, ri6n<yi- ") p. 88. note t. ') p- 71. n. '') p.7G. a. 
 
 *)p.83. ;. f)P-85. fl. ?)r. 125. r. 
 
 Present. 
 lT?TftT l!THr. ^T^ 
 
 Root ^. Inf. ^Tff, "to quit." 
 
 i^iVs^ Preterite. 
 
 ^HTft ^STrT^t^ 'i<1?^*1 
 
 Pot. -ST^, &c. ; imp. ^^ i fH , if^'H^', »f^, &c. ; 2d pret. 'if^ ; 
 1st fut. ■^nnfw; 2d fut. ^i^ i Ph ; 3d pret. -H^iftlM''; bened. l^mT ; 
 cond. "^TfTf^; p. part, irhr". 
 
 ») r. 93. '') Tliis root changes dio i before the consonantal terminations not 
 
 marked with p, and drops a altogether before the vowel terminations. •=) Or >rf^f^ . 
 ^) p. 76. a. «) p. 82. d. p. 85. a. «) r. 125. c. 
 
 Root >?>. Inf. i^, " to fear." 
 
 Present. j First Preterite. 
 
 f^irfiT fWNr;* f%>fhR: ^fwir ^f^^ft^ ^3rf^r>ftR 
 
 f^irfti fWhr. f^nfNi ^f^: ^^rf^ntw 'srN^rhf 
 
 fcf Hfrt f^Tir: f^^TfrT ^fWfT ^f%>#rrt ^^rf^r^ro: 
 
 Pot. f^'hlT, &c. ; imp. f^>nTTf^, f^tf?, f^»T^, &e. ; 2d pret. f^^rnr' ; 
 
 du. f^f«R; 1st fut. vTrTrffT; 2(1 fut. irrinftT ; 3d pret. ^^4'; p. part. >fhT. 
 
 ") The radical vowel may be optionally sliortencd (f^fiT^) before a consonant, 
 
 whenever Guna does not take place. ") r. 93. last sentence. • } r. 98. '') p. 82. /. 
 
( 120 ) 
 
 EXAMPLES OF IRREGULAR PRIMITIVES OF THE FIFTH 
 CONJUGATION (r. 94). 
 
 Root WR. Infin. •grrsi, "to obtain." 
 
 PARASMAIPADA. 
 
 Present Tense. — " I obtain.' 
 
 ^TTTtf*? (ipnomi, 
 ^TTTtf? dpyioshi, 
 ^TJftfiT dpnoti, 
 
 ^TJT^ dpnavam, 
 ^TjftfT apnot, 
 
 »iJIM<^ir«iT dpnavdni, 
 ^n^ff dpnuhi, 
 ^rnft^ dpnotu. 
 
 r; dptmvah, 
 ^T?r^I dpnutJiah, 
 ^n?nn dpnutak. 
 
 ^TTTTJlt dpnumah. 
 '^TTT'^ dpnidha. 
 ■»iJTM^r»d dpnuvanti. 
 
 First Preterite. — " I was obtaining." 
 
 ■»illM<=l dpnuva, ^TJTH dpnuvia. 
 
 ^T^ dpnutam, ^TTSnT dpnuta. 
 
 "^TJJirt dpnutam., ^TJT^ dpnuvan. 
 
 Imperative. — " Let me obtain." 
 
 '>^li>l<4r<4 dpnavdva, 
 '^TT^ dpnutam, 
 dpnutdm., 
 
 ^snTT^TT apnavama. 
 ?HIMi1 dpnuta. 
 ■^TJT^rT dpnuvantu. 
 
 Pot. ^Tg^ apnuyum, ^raxn: apnuyah, ^IHi<l'H cqmiq/at, Sec. 
 2d pret. 'snxi' ; dual ^ifrR; 1st fut. ^TTrrfw'; 2d pret. ^nt^qiftr'' 
 3d pret. ■^14" ; bened. ^twiw ; cond. ^nt.T<T ; p. part. ^HT. 
 
 «Jp.75./. '')p.80. ^)p. 83. A. 
 
 Root ^^ . Infill, wf^nf , " to pervade," " obtain," " enjoy.' 
 
 ATMANEPADA. 
 
 
 Present. 
 
 
 First Preterite. 
 ■^TT^f^ ^TT^^f^ ^T^i^ff 
 
 Pot. W^«fin ; imp. 
 ^TR^^ ^TRf^I^, &c.; 
 ^T%ft[ , "iilf^fSi:, &e. ; 
 
 ") This root, although not 
 plicated syllable be d?i, see p. 
 
 W^t, W!^, W^sm, WS^"^, &c. ; 2d pret. 
 1st fut. ^rf^nnt "; 2d fut. ^f^lT^'; 3d pret. 
 bened. wf^qhi; cond. ^if^I'^; p. part. •^^. 
 
 ending in a double consonant, requires that the redu- 
 75./. ^)Ov^(^. OOr^^. '')p.82. a. 
 
FXAMTLES OF VERBS OF THE SEVENTH CONJUGATION. 121 
 
 Root ^0^. Infill. ^^, " to 1)0 able." 
 
 Present. 
 
 First Preterite. 
 'x^iai^ ^sT^rai^ ^niaiH 
 
 ^ish^fH ^r^: ^i^: 
 
 ^ishlTM ^ym: ^"^ \ '^n^: ^si^it '^^^if 
 
 ^ratfir ^r^. ^^^f^ I "^r^ratrr 'si^r^ "^^r^^ 
 
 Pot. ^r^TTT, i^'c. ; imp. ^T^RTf^. -S^c. ; 2d pret. ^l^llch'; dual, ^fftFI '. 
 ^^c. ; 1st fut. 51 7^,1 fw"; 2cl fut. ■^r^nf^'; 3(1 pret. '3?^^'; p. i)art. "^Ri. 
 
 ") p. 7G. c. b) p, 00. ') p. 83. h. 
 
 Root ^. Infill. -^fVrT, "to hear." 
 
 Present. 
 
 5F*u1(h 5i<y«i: ^tot: 
 
 5l*inf^ ^T^^ ^TO^ 
 
 ^KiriPrt ^l^rtt ^iHr»H 
 
 i^«>s; Preterite. 
 4131111^ 'M5KU^ ^rST^TR 
 ^^r^nrrh ■^^nrrH ^■^ixfrw 
 ^fi^njftfT ^r^T^TTT ^T^n^nr 
 
 Pot. -sfi^ ; imp. ^lUNifH, '^TO, "^TOtj, i>RI^N > &c. ; 2d pret. ^^^ , 
 dual ^r^''; 1st fut. •^ftilTftJT" ; 2d fut. •^"orfiT' ; 3d pret. -ji^m*^; 
 pass. part. "^nr. 
 
 «)r. 21. '')Or^nFi. '^) Or^JTt. "*) See the scheme of terminations, 
 
 p. 73. *)p.79./. ' Op- 82./. 
 
 EXAMPLES OF IRREGULAR PRIMITIVES OF THE 
 SEVENTH CONJUGATION (r. 95.). 
 
 Root f^. Infin. ^, "to cut." 
 Present. — " I cut." 
 fg^f-fl chhinadmi, fSFi": chhi7idwali, fgr??It chhi?ulma/i . 
 
 nSfHTrtf chhinatsi, f^rVlj" chhinthah, frfV^" chhintha. 
 
 fg[7Tf% chhinattly fSpfTt ' chintah, ftj^t^f^d chhlndanti. 
 
 First Preterite. — " I was cutting." 
 'UpdH'^ achhinadam, ^TpSf^ achhindwa, ^fdr^ ac/ihitidi/ia. 
 
 ^?rf^R^' achliinat, ^Td/ri achhintam, ^f^nT (ichhinta. 
 
 ■^HmH" achhinat, ^STf^^ffT nchhintum, ^rf^p^ achhindim. 
 
 Pot. f%?aT, &^c-. , imp. f%?T^TfW, ftirrd . f^RW. &c. ; fitra. pros. 
 
122 EXAMPLES OF VERBS OF THE SEVENTH CONJUGATION. 
 
 fS[^, fepW, f^S^, &c. ; 1st pret. '^rf^r^; pot. Pi^r^hq ; imp. f^ffft, 
 fg[?f^, &c. ; 2d pret. par, f^^i^ ; atm. f^jPft^ ; 1st fut. ^^ifw*^ ; 2d 
 fut. %?5nfiT'; 3d pret. par. ^%w^ atm. 'gif5fw% 'Sif^n^^:, ^fg[W, 
 &c. ; pass. part, f^ . 
 
 ») Roots ending in t or d may reject these letters before th and t, when 7i imme- 
 diately precedes. ") Or ^rf^3[tT^, &c. <=) p. 69. a. or ^f%^;. '^)Orfgfi^. 
 ')p.80. ')P-82./. ^)p.83.^. '>)r.l25./ 
 
 Root ^tj. Infin. ^, " to hinder." 
 
 First Preterite. 
 ^r^ijry ^r^^fsci ^^t»t 
 
 ^H^nI I IH^ " 'ST^^ '5T^^lI7(^ 
 
 Pot. ^wut; imp. ^TJiUTftT, '^^\ ^^1' ^^' ' atm. pres. ;^, &e. ; 
 1st pret. ^T^f?^, ^^^igr:, &c. ; pot. ^^ifN; imp. ^rn^; 2d pret. par. 
 ^:^; atm. 'S^^ ; 1st fut. ^fw"; 2d fut. CIi^jj i Ph '; 3d pret. par. 
 ^^^ atm. -a^frtJ^; p. part. ^if. 
 
 
 Present. 
 
 
 fv^lfuj 
 
 '^-^, 
 
 ^^wt: 
 
 ^wfw 
 
 ^^: 
 
 ^^ 
 
 W%" 
 
 ^^: 
 
 ^^^jf^ 
 
 ») R. 95. ") p. 08. h. 
 
 Op. 82./. s)p.8a5. 
 
 >=) p. 67. a. "') p. 69. a., or '^T^W*.- 
 
 »)p. 
 
 Root •q;?^. Infin. "JtV^, " to join." 
 Parasmaipada. Present. Atmanepada. Present. 
 
 
 
 First Preterite. 
 
 First Preterite. 
 
 ^^H't -a^^ ^JW 
 
 'H^Pg 'y^^^^r^ 'a4T*ir^ 
 
 ^N^H* ^y^^ fly* 
 
 ^jj^wi: -n^^iiiTi -i<^J54 
 
 ^ii^Hct, ^a^^y 4i^^H 
 
 Miti 'y^^^irii 'i<^4^ri 
 
 Pot. par. ^3?it, &c. ; atm. ^#^, &c. ; imp. par. ^H^ilPH, ^f^r', 
 5^, ^H^N , &c ; atm. 5^, 5^, jw, ^^WT^, &c. ; 2d pret. par. 
 ^jft^T ; atm. 5^ ; 1st fut. ^l^hlfa ; 2d fut. i\\^i\ \ ?H ; 3d pret. par. 
 '^r^"; atm. 'ST^fTB^*, ^T^^RT., 'S?^, &c.; pass. part. 5^. 
 
 ") R . 91 . ") Cf. the Latin jungi77ms,jungunt. <=) p. 69. a. ^) p. 82./. («■ p. 83. g. 
 
EXAMPLES OF VERHS OF THE NINTH CONJUGATION. 
 
 123 
 
 Root ffw. Infill. f^r«H , "to injure." 
 Present. i First Preterite. 
 
 r^HPw f^^: f^w. ! 'srf^^ ^f?^ ^f^ 
 
 ff^rfw' ft^: f^w ^ff^ ^tINt ^f^^ 
 
 r^^ftd ff^cT. p^^ph ^f^^ ^f?^ ^^ 
 
 Pot. -f^wt. <.^c. ; imp. P^H^ l P ^. "i^c. ; ^d prct. P»iP^'f< '; 1st fut. 
 f^ fHrilPw ''; 2d fut. P^T^m i PH : 3d prct. ^P^Pjhm ''; pass. part. f^ftnT. 
 
 ") According to Carey fj^^^rft^. *") Or ^t{P^ti: . ") p. 75. c. <>) p. 04., note t- 
 
 For examples of verbs of the Stli conjugation the student is re- 
 ferred to the auxiliary verb ^ kri, at p. 101, and the verb in^ in 
 the tables, pp. 94 — 97. These are the only two roots in this con- 
 jugation that are ever likely to occur. 
 
 EXAMPLES OF IRREGULAR PRIMITIVES OF THE NINTH 
 CONJUGATION (r.97.) 
 
 Root ITT. Infin. ^rw, " to know.'" 
 
 Parasmaipada. Present Tense. — " I know." 
 
 ^IrpHt jdnhnah. 
 'fl I hT 'Hjanitha. 
 »T M P»H jdnanti. 
 
 First Preterite.—'" I was knowing." 
 
 ^ijlrflcj ajdniva, ^SHTR^ qjdnlrna. 
 
 'HTlIrftri ajdnltam, ^jiiMlif ajdn'ita. 
 
 ^nrRhrt ajdnltdm, '5f"3n«nT (ijdnan. 
 
 Imperative. — " Let me know." 
 
 iTT^rnfir jdnami. 
 lfj^\f^ jdndsi, 
 ^\^\CAJdndti, 
 
 \jdnlvah, 
 Jljdnithah, 
 'Srr^ljdnita/i, 
 
 ajanam, 
 W ajdndh, 
 ^nfRTi^ ajdndt 
 
 ^MlPHi«««'"' 
 Wni^Jdnlhi, 
 ^\^\Ajdndtu, 
 
 KT^jdne, 
 Ifnfft jdnishe, 
 »il«flfl jdnlte, 
 
 • janava^ 
 sTPFfhr jdnltam^ 
 TfTjfhiTt jdnltdm, 
 
 Atmanepada. Present. 
 
 irnfN^ jdnivaJie, 
 aiHiQ jdndthe, 
 iTRTff jnndte., 
 
 janama. 
 in^fhf jdnlta. 
 »1H»H jdnantu. 
 
 I know." 
 
 »1 1 ^h4 Jdnhimhe. 
 ^\ri\iJSf Jdn'id/iwe. 
 jdnate. 
 
124 EXAMPLES OF VERBS OF THE NINTH CONJUGATION. 
 
 First Preterite. — " I was knowing." 
 
 ^T^TTftr fijfini, ^TlTrfNrf^ ajdnlvahi, ^^rfi^fi^ ajdnlmahi. 
 
 ^ ^ I rflvj i; ajdnithah, ^l<a1|rjlVlT ajdndthdm., WSfPlfts^ njdn'idhicam. 
 
 '^ » n «ftrf ajdnita^ ^srSTRTTn ajdndtdm, ^HTRTT ajdnata. 
 
 Imperative.— '■'■Let me know." 
 
 in%yG?«aJ, jfl'l «H l^% JdndvaJiai, «i I «1 IH^ jdndtrmhal 
 
 ^ \ ^^ jdnishwa, ^\f\-iy] Jdndthdm, "^-^^t^ jdiildkwam. 
 
 'S^y:;^Jdnltdm, -^fji^ Jd)idtd?n, ^\^Al jatmtd7}i. 
 
 Pot. par. wrW, ^m1^ i:> "iMl^iK, . &c. ; atm. ^m1ii, *rnfhzn:, &c. 
 
 2d pret. par. »r#r^ dual irf^. &c. ; atm. 5?%; 1st. fiit. sJlHlfw" 
 2d fut. ^n^lfH *'; 3d pret. ■^T^rrftTR' ; atm. -ii^\?n ; p. part. ^rni. 
 «) p. 76. a. ") p. 79. e. ^) p. 82. d. 
 
 '')p-77./. 
 
 Root xr^. 
 
 Present. 
 Imperative. 
 
 
 
 Infin. zi^ , " to take." 
 
 First Preterite. 
 ^TT^ WJT^ ^TT^ 
 
 ^iT^jn -yJi^lH ^n^fhfT 
 ^T^mr ^anr^'hrt ^ij^tT 
 
 Pot. Jj^lii i, &c. ; 2d pret. 
 1TJTT^^ ^m%q ; dual wf^\ &c. ; 
 
 1st fut. Jj^lri l ^ H"; 2d fut. i^^lmipH ; 
 3d pret. ■grxn^h?"; p. part. 3T?hr. 
 
 *") This root lengthens the inserted i. ") This is on the authority 
 of the Sitldhanta KaumudI, but Carey and Wilkins give ^{zr^M • All agree in 
 making the atm. ^^JJ^^IPm. 
 
 Root ^^r^. Infill, 'srf^ 
 Present. 
 
 ^^iTh w!^\ ^"^tNt: 
 ^p^rfti 'H'^vj: ^r^hi 
 ^^iPri ^t^tt: '^r^f^ 
 
 ^rpjJT 
 
 wr^TrT 
 
 to eat. 
 
 First Preterite. 
 
 Pot. ^^srgl^, &c. ; imp. ^a y IR , ^5^M^ &c. ; 2d pret. ^r^T ; 1st 
 fut. ^%(TTfw; 2d fut. 'STf^nqiftr; 3d pret. 'Siif^'; pass. i>art. 'srftuw. 
 
 ') R. 07- last paragraph. 
 
 p. 75./. 
 
 )p.82 
 
EXAMPLES OF VERBS OF THE NINTH CON.UKJ ATloN. 125 
 
 Root ^. Iniiu. ^, "to Imv."" 
 
 Prrsrnf. 
 
 ^luiiftr #iTft^. ttHiirixi 
 
 i^jr.s/ Prelrritc 
 
 'ST^Nn" wg?hifNr ^snRNf^ 
 "^r^hnr: ^"gRhrftiT w^hrfhr 
 
 •gfi;inf7T "SRhrftw; "^MmT ^sr^hnTiT w^trfhrt 'sra^hrr^ 
 
 Pot. sRNfHn, ^^c. ; iini>. "^NlTf^, "^NifH^f , I'scc. ; •2d pret. fi^ra^T^^ 
 f^lSiftrzi or fq^; dual f^ftr^'; 1st fiit. ^gfinfw; 2d fiit. rfim i PH ; 
 3d pret. -^ilfw ; pass. part. -gKhr. 
 
 ") Cf. -repvanat. ") Cf. eirepvav. ') p. 75. b. ") p. 74. t- ') p. 82./. 
 
 Root ^ or ^. Infill, ^ft^, "to spread." 
 
 Present. 
 
 ^uhPh f^<ifl<4; ^TjThr: 
 ^jwrftr ^rpjfhi: ^TtrNr 
 
 WAlllfw trt<ylrt: ^cjwP^ 
 
 First Preterite. 
 
 '3T^^ ^^T^ 'HWiiRh 
 -^f^in i: -ii^iiflri ^^"hr 
 
 'MWIilli^ '^T^JlftTTt ^Mlir^ 
 
 Pot. ^^Tjfhn; imp. «*IJirH ; atm. pres. ^^ ; 1st pret. ^^airrir; pot. 
 ^liD^; imp. ^3[^; 2d pret. par. TreTR\ Wwft^, &e. ; dual Trerfe' ; 
 fitm. iTwl', &c. ; 1st fut. wfiiilfw" or wOhiTw ; 2d fut. wftwrfir'' or 
 w Ouj ifa ; 3d pret. 'i<«lW ; pass. part. ^at^*^. 
 
 ») This verb is also of the 5th conjugation ^fnrftftr, W^lFrfM, W^lflfrf, ^FniT^:, 
 
 t * e e \> 
 
 &:c., when there is a striking resemblance to the Greek o-to/ji/v/jj, ar6pvv<„ SiC. ; and 
 impcrf. eo-Topwi/, €ffTo)9vi;?, &c. '')p.76. e. '') p. 7C. ^. '') p. 79. 6. '')p. 82. o. 
 f) r. 125. d. 
 
 EXAMPLE OF CAUSALS, OR VERBS OF THE TENTH 
 CONJUGATION (p. 86. r. 107.). 
 
 Root ^ dris/t. Inf. ^ftnt, " to cause to see," " show." 
 PAii.ASMAip.'vnA. Present. — " I cause to see." 
 ^ll^JlPH (larnhayumi, ^|)l||c|; darshuijuvali., ^fHTWl durskaydmuli. 
 
 ^ Ii qfa dars/iai/a.ii, r^Pmi darshayutha/i, ^^i^Zf darslunjutha. 
 
 <j5iqrd ddrshujiati "^twff: dai\</iiif/ata/i, r^V^ darsliai/anti. 
 
126 EXAMPLE OF CAUSAL VERBS. 
 
 Imperfect. " I was causing to see." 
 
 ■ 4t<^fH adarshayam, W^fpTR adarshaydva, ^i\^\[i\\H adarshaydma. 
 
 ^3TH^pj; adarshayah, '>^d|iMri adarshayatam, ^(^JfAIri adarshayata. 
 
 ^^^\\ T\ A adarsliayat, ->!^^|)^ri] adarshayatdm, 4i(^||^rl adarshayan. 
 
 Potential. — " I may cause to see." 
 
 7^444 daj'sliayeyam, ^^V^ darshayeva, ^^IMH darsTiayema. 
 
 ^\[^', darshayeh^ ^^^ darshayetam, fj||i|rf darshayeta. 
 
 ^|)i4ri darshayet, ^^^Tflt damhayetdm, ^\[*\^\ darshayeyuh. 
 
 Imperative. — " Let me cause to see." 
 
 ^|nrrf*T darshayani, ^^[^T^ darshaydva, ^fpTTT darsJiaydma. 
 
 ^fnr darshaya, ^^TTiT darshayatam., ^fnUT darshayata. 
 
 ^If^rT darshayatu, ^\{^ii\ darshayatdm, ^^"TW darshayantu. 
 
 Second Preterite. — " I caused to see." 
 
 ^^PTRT^t" darshaydmdsa, ^[ftTlTrftr^ darshaydnidsiva, r^^HWl^HH darshaydmdsim 
 
 ^fnnrrrftr?! darshayamasitha, r[^H\H\H^l darshaydmasathuh, ^fRTTRl darshaydmdsa. 
 (ffNIHI^ darshaydmdsa, t^fNI^I^rf! darshaydmdsatuh, ^fpTniTOt darshaydmdsuh. 
 
 First Future. — " I will cause to see." 
 
 <||ft j ri T fi »T darshayitdsmi, ^flf^ril^: darshayitdswah, ^frftTrTTW: darsJiayitdsmah 
 
 ^tlf^jriir^ darshayitdsi, ^^iH^ril^Jil; darshayitdsthah, ^%ftnTTW darshayitdstha. 
 
 (J^lf^lri l darshayitd, ^tlfilrilS darshayitdrau, ^^fxTiTR: darshayitdrah. 
 
 Second Future.— ^^ I will cause to see." 
 
 t^ajPumir^i darshayishydmi, (^llf^mN : dars/iayishydvah, ^frftrOTR; darshayishydma 
 (j^irmMfi a darshayishyasi, (^flP^mm : darshayishyatJiah, ^^ftimvj darshayishyaiha. 
 
 t^fir^ttlPri darsJmyishyati, ^frfTf^mr. darshayishyatah, ^firumfed darshayishyanti 
 
 3d pret. ■^?^'' or ^c^; bened. ^c^^to'; cond. ^^|tf^; Atm. 
 pres. ^^, rjtfi^H, ^^R^, &c. ; 1st pret. ^I^|t^; pot. «^:^|Iin ; imp. 
 ^^, <||^4<< , &c. ; 2d pret. ^fnn^; 1st fut. ^frftmrl; 2d fut. 
 ^frftro ; 3d pret. '^r^t^, ^^<l^^|Vi T; , &e. ; bened. t^llHlMl*! ; cond. 
 ^gr^frftro; p. part. ^f^'. 
 
 ^) 01" ^ |N l ^etiH, (Jarg/ia;/«»c/iaA:a/-a, p. 87. r. 108. ") r. 109. '')r. 110. '')r. 125. r. 
 
 After this model may be conjugated all causal verbs. 
 
( 1^^^ ) 
 
 1-28. EXAMPLES OF PASSIVE VERBS, (p. 81). i. 111.). 
 Root 1^. Infill. ^, "to be given." (p. 90. r. 112.). 
 Pirsait. — " I am given." 
 ^ (i7i/e, ^hrr^ dhjdvahe, ^^\h\ (lli/uniahc. 
 
 ^*\H (I'lijose, ■<{|i<v| (t/i/ethe, ^Hr^ dli/adhwe. 
 
 «{lMfi (Ill/ate, ^hnr d/i/etc, ({Iq-rJ d'lyante, 
 
 First Preterite. — " I was given." 
 W^TJ adiye, ^cfhlTcjO^ adii/avrdii, ^({li|WfV <i(liil<imahi. 
 
 ^T^hrqr: adii/athnk, "^"^t^yfT adiyethrn/i, ^5nfhl54 iid/i/adkwam. 
 
 "^^hnr adii/ata, ^T^t^TTT ad/yetam, ^ST^hpfT adlyanta. 
 
 Potential.— '■'■I may be given." 
 ^^^^ d/yeya, ^^Wff diyevaJii, ^ivmf^ d'lyemahi. 
 
 ^irr^: dlyethdh, ^^^^TRT dlyeydthdm, ^t^s4 diyedhwain. 
 
 ^t^ (ZZ^eto, ^Nnniri dlyeydtdm, ^^^T*T dlyeran. 
 
 Imperative. — " Let me be given." 
 ^ %ai, ^^H^ d'tydvahai, ^ ^ \H^ dJydmahni. 
 
 <l<jy dlyaswu, ^^«fl dlydhdm, ^Hl24 diyadhwam. 
 
 ^t^nrt dlyatdm, <{l^rti dlyetdm, ^hTjn diyantdm. 
 
 Second Preterite.—" I have been given." 
 ^^ rfa^e, <^n^M^ dadivahe, ^^^^ dadimahe. 
 
 ^^ dadishe, <TTr^ daddthe, ^^^ dudidhwe (or ^). 
 
 ^ riade, ^i»T^ daddte, ^f^ dadire. 
 
 First Future. — " I shall be given." 
 j ^nn^ Az^aAe, or <IHiy^ ddtdswahe, r^ \ t{ \ m^ ddtdsmahe, Sfc. 
 
 l^rftnrrt dayitahe, r^\[i\A\i^\ddyitdswahe, ^ Uj rf UH^ ddyitdsmahe,S^c . 
 
 Second Future. — " I shall be given." 
 ( ^T^ c^asyp, or ^T^TR^ (l<'isydvahc, ^^tTTTf ddsydmahe, S^c. 
 
 Uir*i«i ddyishye, ^yfljnjy^ ddyishydvahe, t^ T Hl Uj I H^ ddyi.shydmahe,S)r 
 
 Third Preterite. — " I was given." 
 ( Wf^ a'^w/'i, or '^rft^t.^f^ adishwnhi, ^ G^mP^ adishmahi. 
 
 \w^[ftjf^ addyishi, '.H <^ I r-4 H Pf addyishwahi, ^^f^jfufmf^ addyishmahi. 
 
 \ 'iin^Vli: adithdh, or ^rr(MI«jl adishathdm, ^rf^ adidhwam. 
 
 l-en^lfMBi; addyhihthdh, ^TTTftrRPZlt addyishdthdm, ^n^rftrs4 addyidhwam 
 ■•Sn^Mldi tidi.<thdtdm, ^.M 0^ M rf udishata. 
 
 ^^if^mrii (iddyishatdm, ^^rftnTtT addyishata. 
 
 ^I^[Tf^ «(/airJ, " it was given, " j 
 
128 EXAMPLES OF PASSIVE VERBS. 
 
 Bened. ^rotq or ^i PMql ^, &c. ; cond. '^r^^ or ^3T^ftr^. 
 Root -an . Inf. oR^ , " to be made " or " done "" (p. 90. b.). 
 
 Present. — " I am made.'' 
 
 fjhM^ f^^vj fSHTJ^ 
 
 fwiT^ f^!^ fwi^ 
 
 First Preterite. — " I was made." 
 '^rf^nr^jT; ^fss^^ ^rf^irs^ 
 
 ^f^'Tif ^'Siiirri ^frfi^'fl 
 
 Potential. — " I may be made."" ! Imperative. — " Let me be made. 
 
 Second Preterite. 
 
 
 ■•^fsRIfi '^^ 
 
 First Future. 
 
 ' or cfirftjTrf oRTftjTT^^ eBTft?nW^,&C. 
 Second fut. chfijuf or efirft]^, &c. 
 
 Third Preterite. 
 
 W^^ or ^jjcuriPM 
 
 ^!n»^: or ?H<*iri.yi: 
 
 ^r^t^ or ^SHRlfXT^f^ ] ^H'^'^iP^ or '^efiTfi^lTf^ 
 ^np-RT or iHohin^m^T 1 '^{^f or WoBTft-S^ 
 
 ^nfirft " it was done," , '^T^THt or ^snurfWin | '3T^iT or ^ilohlPl^Mri 
 
 Bened. ■^^ or oRtftiqhT ; cond. 'STofift:^ or ^ ch i P^u^ . 
 
 The following is an example of a passive verb from a root 
 endins in a consonant. 
 
 Root ^rsT. Infin. "t^, "to be fitting." 
 
 Pres. •^3^, " I am fitting," JW^, ^sijri, &c. ; 1st pret. 'H^liif, 
 »J|iJtM«JI:, 'H^43*|H. &c. ; pot. "^a^, &c. ; imp. 5^, ^m^, ij-riiril, &c.; 
 2d pret. 55^, "^^ftr^. ^5^» &c ; 1st fut. ift^^, ift^, ift^, &c. ; 
 2d fut. ift^, ift^^, "jft^tr^, &c. ; 3d pret. ^Tjf^, ^^Ttpprr:, ^nftftf, 
 '^l^tijJp^, ^frjT^mr, &c. ; bened. J^^T, &c. ; cond. 'ST^^, &c. 
 
( 129 ) 
 
 DESIDERATIVE VERBS. 
 
 1 19. Although this form of the root rarely appears in its character 
 of a verb, yet iioims and participles derived from the desidera- 
 tive base are not mieommon (see p. 23. xiii. r. 40., and p. 141. s.). 
 Some explanation, therefore, of its structure is indispensable. 
 Moreover, there are certain roots which take a desiderative form, 
 without exactly yielding a volitive signification ; and these, as 
 being equivalent to primitive verbs (amongst which they are some- 
 times classed), may occur in the best writers. For example, 
 jugups, "to blame," from the root gup; chikits, "to cure," from 
 kit ; titiksh, " to bear," from /// ,- mlmuns, " to reason," from man ; 
 blbhats, " to abhor," from badh. 
 
 The Terminations. 
 
 a. Desideratives take the terminations of the regular scheme 
 at p. 63., and their inflection either in the par. or atm. is deter- 
 mined by the practice of the primitive verb. Thus, the root 
 budh, taking both inflections in the primitive, may take both in 
 the desiderative (bubodhishami, &c., or bubodhishe, &c.); and labh, 
 taking only the atm. in the primitives, may take only the atm. 
 in the desiderative (lipse, &c.). 
 
 FORMATION OF THE BASE. 
 
 Conjugational Tenses. 
 
 b. The initial consonant and vowel of the root are reduplicated, 
 and if the root inserts i in the primitive (see p. 79.), then ish is 
 affixed : if the root rejects i, then simply s, changeable to '^^ s/i, 
 is affixed. Thus, from kship, " to throw," the base chikships 
 (f^TJIwrftT chikshipsami, &c.); but from rid, "to know," taking 
 inserted i in the primitive, vividish (frfM^TRTf'T vividishami, Sec). 
 The reduplication of the consonant is strictly in conformity with 
 the rules laid down at p. 75., and that of the vowel of the initial 
 consonant follows the analogy of causal third preterites (p. 8S.) ; 
 that is, the vowel i (generally, however, short) is redu})licated for 
 a, a, i, 7, ri, rl, e, or ai ; but the vowel u for u, U, and o.* Thus, 
 
 * And if the root begin with a vowel the reduplication still follows the analogy 
 of the same tcnso ; thus, from osh. ashish, and with ish added, fiahn/iisli. See p. Hi). 
 
 S 
 
130 DESIDERATIVE VERBS. 
 
 from pack, pijjoksh ; from ijUcIi, yiyucMsh ; from jw, jijhnsh ; from 
 (Irish, dkJrlksh ; from sen, sisevish ; from gai, jigUs ; but from 
 yiij, yuyuksh ; f I'om pu, pujMsh. 
 
 c. It lias been said that the annexation of ish or s to the 
 reduplicated root is generally determined by the assumption or 
 rejection of inserted i in the primitive. When ish is affixed, the 
 radical vowel may in general be optionally changed to Guna. 
 Thus, from mud, either mumodish or mumudish. 
 
 d. When s is affixed to roots ending in vowels it has the effect 
 of lengthening a final ^ or ii, and changing ri or n to Ir ; thus, 
 from chi, chicMsh ; from shru, shushrmh ; from kri, chikzrsh ; from 
 tn, titirsh* When to roots ending in consonants, the radical 
 vowel remains unchanged, but the final consonant combines with the 
 initial sibilant, in accordance with the rules laid down in pp. 67. 68. ; 
 as, from yndk, yuyuts (p. 68. 6.) ; from dah, didhaksh (p. 69. i?). 
 
 e. The following roots form their desiderative bases anoma- 
 lously. From da, " to give," dits {ditsami, " I wish to give '') ; 
 from iq), " to obtain," Ips ; from dha, dhits ; from ji, " to conquer," 
 jiglsh ; from chi, chiklsh, as well as chichlsh ; from han, " to kill," 
 jigMns ; from ir?, ftf^'^ ; from ii^, fmjf-csJM^ ; from ^tr , ^^^ ; 
 
 from TJT^, " to be able," f^t^ ; from ^j>? , " to obtain,' f<J5«^ ; from 
 
 Non Conjugational Tenses. 
 
 The second preterite is formed by affixing dm to the desiderative base, as already 
 formed, and adding the second preterite of either one of the auxiliaries kri or bhu 
 (see p. 77. g.)- Thus from pack, the 2d pret. pipakshdftchakdra, " I wished to cook." 
 In all the remaining tenses it is an universal rule that inserted i be assumed after 
 the desiderative base, whetlier formed by s or ish, except in the bened. par. Tlius, 
 1st fut. of pipaksh, 1st pcrs. sing, pipakshitdsmi, S^c. ; 2d fut. pipakskishydmi, ^c. ; 
 3d pret. apipakshisliam, &;c. (form 1. p. 81.); bened. par. pipakshydsam, S^c. ; 
 iitm. pipakshishri/a, Sjc. ; condit. npipakshishyam, S^c. So, also, taking vividish 
 (formed with ish from vid), the 1st fut. is vividishitdsmi ; 2d fut. vividiskishydmi ; 
 ;5d pi-et. avividishisham, SjC. 
 
 But the root TJ may make '^^ ; 4T, ^^ ; and ^, ^|rt 
 
( 131 ) 
 
 INTENSIVE OR FREQUENTATI Vi: Vi'lHiS. 
 120. This form of the root is even less usyd than the cleside- 
 rative. In the present partieiple, however, and in a few nouns, 
 it may sometimes appear (r. 38. xiii. and 124.). It gives intensity 
 to the radical idea, es})eeially in tlie case of roots signifying " to 
 shine," " to be beautiful," or " to lament." Thus, from dip, " to 
 shine," comes the intensive form dedlpy, " to shine brightly," and 
 the present participle dedtpyamZma (see r. 121.) ; so also from shubh, 
 shoshubhy and shoshitbyamana ; from rud, rorudy and rorudyamUna. 
 There are two kinds of intensive verb, the one a reduplicated 
 atmanepada verb, conforming, like neuter and passive vei-bs, to 
 the 4th conjugation, and usually found in a neuter or passive signi- 
 fication ; the other a redui)lieated parasmaipada verl), formed 
 analogously to the 3d conjugation. The first of these is the only 
 form ever likely to occur. 
 
 The Term inat ions. 
 The terminations may be either those of the atm. of the regular 
 scheme at p. 63., or the par. of the irregular scheme at p. 66. ; 
 the former being adapted to that form of intensive which results 
 from a reduplication of the passive ; the latter to that form which 
 bears analogy to the 3d conjugation. 
 
 I'ORMATION OF THE BASE OF THE ATMANEPADA FORM OF INTENSIVES. 
 
 Conjugational Tenses. 
 The general rule is, that the initial consonant and vowel of the 
 passive base be reduplicated. The consonant being reduplicated 
 according to the usual rules (p. 75.), witli the Guna substitute of 
 the radical vowel, whether it be long or short. Thus, from the 
 j)assive base dry (of du, " to give ") comes the intensive base dedJy 
 {ded'iye, dediyase, &c., see p. 127.); from hly (passive of lui), jeliiy 
 {jehlye, &c.) ; from sfiry, tesfiry ; from puy, ])opUy ; from vidy, 
 vecidy ; from biulhy, bobudhy. 
 
 If the passive base contain a medial «, long a is substituted in the reduplication, 
 as papach}! from pack ; msmary from stnarij ; if a medial ^7, e, or o, the Siime are 
 reduplicated ; as yuydchy from ynch, ses/tcn-y Itohi scd, lulochy from lochy : if a medial 
 r/, then nr'i is substituted in the reduplication, as darhlrhhy from dris/iy, parl- 
 sprlshy from sprishy. 
 
132 INTENSIVE OR FREQUENTATIVE VERBS. 
 
 If a passive base contain "ft, 77, this becomes ^ in the intensive base; as ^^Ht 
 from fgrtf (pass, of ofi, "to do"). If the base begin with a, as in aty (from WZ, 
 " to wander " ), the initial at is repeated, and the radical a lengthened, thus atdty. 
 
 If the passive base contain a nasal after short a, this nasal is often repeated; as 
 from gam^jan-gamy (if^T^f, &c.), "to walk crookedly"; from hhrain^bamhhramy. 
 The passive bases japy, jalpy^ dashy^ b^mjy^ and some others, may insert nasals, 
 instead of lengthening the vowel in the reduplication. Thus janjapy, ^c. Pady 
 inserts n;/ aspanipady; and from chaj'y is formed chahchFiry ; h-om.hany,jeg1inty; 
 from ghrdy,jeghrly ; from dhmdy, dedhmly. 
 
 Non-Co7iJugational Tenses. 
 In these tenses intensives follow the analogy of passives and reject the affix y. 
 Since, however, the base of the second pret. is formed by affixing dm. (as usual in 
 all polysyllabic forms, p. 77. g.), and since, in aU the other tenses, inserted i is 
 assumed, a coalition of vowels might arise were it not allowed to retain the y in all 
 cases in which a vowel immediately precedes that affix.* Thus, from dedlpy is 
 formed the 2d pret. (1st pers. sing.) dedipdfichakre, i^c. rejecting y; but from dedly, 
 dediydnchahre, S^x. retaining it. Shnilarly in the other tenses : 1st fut. dedipitdhe, 
 S(C. ; dedlyitdhe, S^c. : 2d fut. dedlpishye, cSjc, dedlyishye., &;c. ; 3d pret. adedlpishi, 
 S(C., adedlyishi, S^c. ;\ bened. dedlpishlya, S^c, dedlyisJilya, S^c. ; cond. adedipishye, 
 ^c, adedlyishye, S^c 
 
 FORMATION OF THE BASE OF THE PARASMAIPADA FORM OF INTENSIVES. 
 
 Conjugational Tenses. 
 121. The base is here also formed by a reduplication similar to that of atmane- 
 pada intensives ; not, however, from the passive, but from the root. Thus fi-om the 
 root pack, pdpach ; from vid., vevid ; from drish, daridrish ; from kri, charlkrt.'\ 
 Moreover, in accordance with the rules for the 2d and 3d conjugation (pp. 69. 70.) 
 the radical vowel requix'es Guna before the P terminations of the scheme (p. 60.). 
 Hence the two bases veved and iievid (pres. vevedmi, vevetsi, vevetti ; dual, vevidwah, 
 S^c.j 1st pret. avevedam, avevet, avevet, azmndwa, S^x. ; pot. vevidydm, &;c.; imp. 
 
 * In passives this coalition of vowels is avoided by the change of a final vowel to 
 Vriddhi, as of chi to chdy, of hu to lidv., and oikri to kdr ; and by the change of 
 final d to (ly, as of da to day., see r. 113. 
 
 t In the par. form of intensive, the reduplication may also be duridrish, charikri, 
 or, according to the general rule dardrish, charkri. 
 
NOMINAL VKUHS. I'A'S 
 
 t^ei'eddiii, veriddhi, revettii, vevedava, reriftam, (^c). Again, the base will vary in 
 accordance with the rules of combination at p. G7., as in btiM (pres. Iwhodhmi, 
 Mihotsi, bohoddhi, bobudhwah, S^c). And in further analogy to the 2d conjugation 
 (r. 92. c.) long 7 is often optionally inserted before the consonantal P terminations 
 (pres. vevedlmi, vevedishi, vevediti ; dual, i-cvidwcdi, 6;c. ; 1st prct. avevedaiii, ave- 
 vedlh, avevedlt, avevldwa, S;c. ; imp. rei^edani, veviddhi, veveditu.). 
 
 Ljistly, when the root ends in a vowel, the usual changes take place of i and i to 
 >/ or ii/ ; of u and ft to «r / and of ri to r : as in the roots bhl, bhil, kri (pres. 1st sing. 
 bcbhemi, bobhomi, charknnyii ; 3d plur. bchhyatl, hobhuvnti, charkrnti). 
 IVon- Conjugatiomd Tenses. 
 
 The second preterite follows the usual rule for polysyllabic bases (p. 77. .v), 
 and affixes am with the auxiliaries. Thus from v'td (1st pers. sing.), veviddmdsa ; 
 from bh'i, bebhydmdsa. In the other tenses, excepting the bened., inserted i is 
 invariably assumed, and before this inserted / a root ending in a vowel forbids the 
 usual Guna change in the futures, but admits Vriddhi in the 3d pret. Thus, 1st 
 fut. (1st sing.) vei'sditdsini, S)C., bebhyitdsmi, S^-c. ; 2d fut. vevedishydmi, S^c, bebhyi- 
 shydmi, S;c. ; 3d pret. avevedisham, SfC, abebhdylsham, i*yc. / bened. veindydsam, ^c., 
 behhlydsam ; cond. avevedishyam, abebhyishyajn. This rejection of Guna is taken 
 from Forster, but admits of question, especially in the case of roots in ^l or u. 
 
 NOMINALS, OR VERBS DERIVED FROM NOUNS. 
 
 122. These are formed by adding certain affixes to the crude 
 of nouns. They are not in very common use, but, theoretically, 
 there is no limit to their formation. They may be classed under 
 three heads : 1st, transitive nominals, yielding the sense of per- 
 forming, practising, making or using the thing or quality expressed 
 by the noun ; 2d, intransitive nominals, giving a sense of behaving 
 like, becoming like, acting like the person or thing expressed by 
 the noun ; 3d, desiderative nominals, yielding the sense of wishing 
 for the thing expressed by the noun. The latter are rarely found. 
 The Terminations. 
 
 a. All the nominal verbs make use of the regular scheme at 
 p. 63. ; but it should be observed that they are rarely found con- 
 jugated in any other tense than the present. 
 
 Formation of the Base of Transitive Nominals. 
 
 b. These are formed from nouns in the way that causals are 
 
134 NOMINAL VERBS. 
 
 formed from roots, by the addition of ay to the crude. But tlie 
 final vowel or final consonant, and preceding vowel of the crude, 
 must be rejected before this affix is annexed. Thus, from vastra, 
 " cloth," is formed vastray, " to clothe " (3d sing. ej^ginPrf vastrayatiy 
 " he clothes ") ; from varman, " armour," varinay, " to put on 
 armour" (^i^^JlfTT varmayati); from y^nm, "authority," inrnsrtr, 
 " to propose as authority." Whatever modifications adjectives 
 may undergo before the affixes tyas and ishtha (p. 47. j-.), the same 
 are required before this nominal affix : thus, from dirgha, " long," 
 draghay, " to lengthen "; from antika, " near," neday, " to make 
 near," &c. 
 
 In the Mitralabha (Prof. Joluison's edition, p. 97) there is an instance of a nomi- 
 nal verb formed by adding the terminations directly to the noun ; thus, ^^ift? , 
 "^I peck," from '^^, "a beak." 
 
 Formation of the Base of Intransitive Nominals. 
 
 c. The final of the crude of the noun is rejected, as in the last 
 case, and ay affixed. Thus, from pandita, " wise," panditay, " to 
 act the part of a wise man " (3d sing. MfijdriN^) ; from druma, 
 " a tree," drumay, " to be like a tree " (tj^tPTw) ; from rajan, " a 
 king," rajay, " to act the king " (<Nm^). This nominal usually 
 has a neuter or passive signification, and is generally restricted to 
 the atm. It is found, however, in an active sense, especially 
 when derived from nouns expressive of colour ; as, from ^H!? . 
 " black," fuiwn^ , " to blacken " (<jU!llMfi). 
 
 Formation of the Base of Desiderative Nominals. 
 
 d. These are formed by affixing y to the final vowel of a crude noun. The effect, 
 however, of tliis affix is to change a final a or a to ^, to lengthen a final i or z<, and 
 to change ^ ri to ^^. Thus from putra, "a son," putriy, "to desire a son" 
 (3d sing, xr^hrfir) ; from j^a^j, " a husband," patiy^ " to desire a husband " (qfihlfrr). 
 So also from jfTj, J^Nhi; from rrT/ara, rdjiy (r.20. TO- 
 
 A desiderative nominal verb may also be formed by adding kdmy (derived from 
 kam, " to desire " ) to the crude of nouns : thus from putra, putrakdmy, " to desire 
 a son " (3d sing. M-jah i mfrf ) ; or by affixing sy ; as from dhana, dhanasy, " to 
 desire wealth" ( viH^^jfri ). 
 
CHAPTER VII. 
 
 PARTICIPLES. 
 
 This is a subject in some respects perhaps the most important 
 tliat has hitherto engaged our attention. We have endeavoured 
 in the last cliapter to show, that however complex the structure 
 of the Sanscrit verb, and however repulsive to the student at the 
 commencement of his studies, this complexity is one rather of 
 theory than practice, and one that hardly extends beyond the pages 
 of the grammar, and is little felt, provided the attention be con- 
 fined to the earlier and purer specimens of Hindu literature. 
 The cause of this has been shown to be, that the difficulty of the 
 verb expends itself on tenses that are rarely if ever used by the 
 best writers. We are now to show that the necessity for these 
 tenses is superseded by participles, the use of which prevails to 
 an extent wholly unparalleled in any other language, even in 
 the Greek. These participles often discharge the functions of 
 the verb itself, and are constantly found occupying the place of 
 past and future tenses, and more especially those of passive verbs ; 
 insomuch that an instance of a passive in any other tense than 
 the present or imperative rarely occurs. The consideration, 
 therefore, of this portion of our subject bears most closely upon 
 the idiomatic structure of the language; and so prominent a 
 position do these verbal derivatives hold in the construction of 
 sentences and collocation of words, that an accurate knowledge 
 of the mode of their formation and the nature of their duties 
 affords the best insight into the peculiarities of Sanscrit syntax, 
 and elucidates many of the difficulties of idiom in the cognate 
 dialects of India. 
 
 It may he desirable to premise that the most important of these 
 participles are not derived immediately from the verb, but from 
 a common source with the verb, viz. the root. The subject, 
 therefore, has not l)een mixed up with that of verbal inflection, 
 
136 PRESENT PARTICIPLES. 
 
 althougli in the very first instance, and in others which follow, 
 the participle is deducible directly from a tense. 
 
 PRESENT PARTICIPLES. Parasmaipada. 
 Formation of the Crude. 
 123. These are the only participles that have any affinity with 
 the conjugational structure of the verb. The crude is formed by 
 substituting at for anti, the termination of the 3d person plural of 
 the present tense, so that the peculiarities of conjugation neces- 
 sarily appear in the participle. Thus, from pachanti, " they cook " 
 (3d plur. pres. of tj^, 1st conj.), comes V^^nt^ pachat, "cooking"; 
 from ghnanti (3d plur. of han, 2d conj.), ghnat ; from Trf^fT , " they 
 go," iftT , " going "; from irfPtT , ilTff ; from juhmati (3d plur. of hu, 
 3d conj.), '^^T^^ju/iwat; from nritijanti (4th conj.), nrityat ; from 
 chinroanti (5th conj.), f^rt^Ti chinwat ; from apmwanti (5th conj.), 
 dpnuvat ; from rundhanti {rudh, 7th conj.), rundhat ; from kurvanti 
 (^, 8th conj.), kurvat ; from punanti (pu, 9th conj.), punat. So 
 again from santi (3d plur. of as, " to be "), sat ; from the causal 
 darsliayanti (p. 125.), darshayat ; from the desiderative ditsanti 
 (p. 130. e), ditsat. 
 
 a. It has been remarked (p. 62. and p. 89., note t) that the passive verb may 
 sometimes assume a parasmaipada inflection ; and that all the neuter verbs placed 
 under the 4th conjugation may be considered as so many examples of this fomi of 
 the passive. This theory is corroborated by the fact of the existence of a paras- 
 maipada present participle derivable from a passive base. Thus from g^ , i,\i\A , 
 " being seen " ; from ^hl , -«n^ri , " being gathered." 
 
 Declension. 
 
 b. This in general conforms to r. 63. Thus, i?^, nom. sing, 
 du. pi. masc. 'iT^'q: pachon, xt^t^ pachantaii, tr^^: pachantah ; fern. 
 H-=itil, i|-<li<rt , xr^n^: ; neut. ir^, T^^, Ti^»tr. 
 
 c. But in irregular primitives of the 3d conj., and all verbs 
 from polysyllabic roots, and all other verbs which reject the nasal 
 from the plural of the parasmaipada (see p. 69. note), the nom. 
 sing. masc. is identical with the crude, and ends in at instead of 
 an ; and the nasal is, moreover, rejected from the du. and pi. 
 
PRESENT I'AUTlCll'LES. 137 
 
 masc, and tVoni tlu" fcm. Tims, bibltrat (from kj, "to hear," 
 3(1 conj.), nom. siii^. dii. pi. masc, bihhrat, b'lbhrntou, bibhralnh ; 
 fom. hibhrat'i, bibhratyau, bibhratt/ah. So also jagrat (from jTPT) 
 and shasat (from ^ITh). They also drop the nasal in the dual neiit. 
 d. It must also be taken as a general rule, that all other 
 irregular primitives of the 2d, 5th, 7th, Stli, and 9th conjugations 
 reject the nasal in the feminine, although they retain it in the 
 masculine. Thus, adat (from ad, 2d conj.), nom. masc. adav, 
 adontau, adanlah; fem. adatJ, &e. ; and rundhat (from rudh, 7th 
 conj.), nom. masc. rundhan, rundhantaii, &c., fem. rundhatl, ike. 
 But this rule is not universal, for kurvat (from ^, 8th conj.) is 
 kurvantl in the nom. fem. 
 
 PRESENT PARTICIPLES. Atmanepada. 
 Formation of the Crude. 
 124. The crude is formed by substituting amana for ante, the 
 termination of the 3d plur. pres. of regular primitive and passive 
 verbs ; and by substituting Una for ate, the termination of the 
 3d plur. pres. of irregular primitives. Causal verbs take cither 
 amana or Una, but more frecjuently the latter. Thus, from xj^^ 
 pachante, M-«mM pachamana ; from f^rw^ (sthU, 1st conj.), fdyniH ; 
 from -TTifr^ (4th conj.), H(<4MIH; from fcjiUir?^ (lip, 6th conj.), fcj>mHM ; 
 from the causal darahayante (p. 126.), either dar shay amana, or, more 
 frequently, darshayUna ; from vedayante, vedayana ; from the de- 
 siderative ditsante, ditsamUna. 
 
 a. But from "^^ bruvate ("^, 2d conj.), ^^^4!! bruvdna ; from 
 ^V7f {dha, 3d conj.), ^tTTfl ; from chinwate (oth conj.), chinwUna ; 
 from 5^ (7th conj.), ^WT; from '^l^ (sth conj.), ^frW ; from 
 "5^ (9th conj.), gHTH- The root ■^THT, "to sit" (2d conj.), makes 
 
 ^rnrhr for ^rrar*!. 
 
 Declension. 
 
 b. These participles are declined like nouns of the first class, 
 p. 31. Thus, pachamUna, nom. masc. pachamUnah, fem. pachamUnU, 
 neut. pachamUnam. 
 
 PAST PARTICIPLES. 
 
 Passive Past Participle. — Formation of the Crude. 
 125. This is the most useful derivative in the language, and is 
 
 T 
 
138 PASSIVE PAST PARTICIPLE. 
 
 of constant occurrence. It corresponds to the Latin participle 
 in ftt^, and, like it, often supplies the place of the past tense. In 
 neuter roots, especially those which imply motion of any kind, it 
 is used actively, and often stands for the perfect tense active ; as, 
 f^^ TTftrf:» "he entered his hole"; ITIH JTrTt. "he went to the 
 village." And in all cases this participle may be used to supply 
 the place of the past tenses of the passive verb, the agent being 
 placed in the instrumental case, and the participle agreeing with 
 the object: as. ^ N'MHlf-d fri^lPn, " by him the bonds were cut."* 
 Moreover, it mav be used with the auxiliarv verbs ^m and h , 
 " to be," to form a compound past or future tense, as the Latin 
 participle is used with the auxiliary sum. Thus, UTfTT^f^. " he 
 has obtained "; TTirft ^TfraTfrT, " he will have obtained ""; JTift-ftiT, 
 " I am gone "; "^TnTftcT, " it is done." Lastly, it is sometimes used 
 in the neuter gender for a substantive; as, ^, "a gift": ^TW • 
 " an excavation." ' 
 
 This participle may be regarded as falling under four heads : 
 1st, as derived from roots : 2dly, as derived from causal bases ; 
 3dly, as derived from desiderative bases : 4thly, as derived from 
 nominal bases. 
 
 1. Deri fed from Roots. 
 
 a. In general the crude is formed by adding ta {id directly to 
 the root ; as, from f^ kship, " to throw," kshipta, " throvni "; or 
 if the root end in ^ rl. by adding no (tf) ; as, from oB kri, " to 
 scatter," ^h§ klnia, " scattered." Some roots in u, 7, and u, some 
 in at preceded by two consonants, with some of those in d, r. and 
 
 J, rejecting inserted i, also take tia instead of ta. 
 
 b. Roots ending in vowels do not admit inserted / in this 
 
 * This kind of construction is exceedingly common in Sanscrit, and has been 
 transferred from it to Hindiistam. The particle ne in this hitter language corre- 
 sponds most clearly to the Sanscrit net, which is the usual sign of the instrumental 
 case, and can never occasion any difficulty if it be regarded in this light. 
 
 t In a few instances this participle has a present signiiication ; as, ifllT, " fearing." 
 f^BTff, " standing." 
 
PASSIVE I'AST I'ARTICII'LK. i3i> 
 
 participle, alth(>n«i[li t\\c\ may adniit it in the fnturos* (p. 79. a. /i.e.), 
 but attach /a or no dircftly to the root : as, from ^u, i/u(a ; from 
 //. jita ; from til, )fita ; from shru, sliruta ; from hhu, bhutd ; fi-om 
 ^, ^; from TIT, ITTO (r. "^1.) ; from /^ Una; from ^7. 'fhrr; from 
 ill, Ifina. 
 
 c. But in certain cases the final vowel of the root is clian<;cd ; 
 thus, some roots in U change a to i before ta : as, from stha, sthita ,• 
 from via, mita ; from daridrU, daridri/a. Dha, " to place." 
 becomes lata ; da, " to give," datta ;* pa, " to drink," pita. Ha, 
 " to (juit," becomes hJ before tia (^hr). Some roots in a take both 
 na and ta ; as, from in, Tnni and inw; from ^ with the prepo- 
 sition f^, fti^ITtr and f^rtnT. 
 
 (/. Roots in -^ >7 change n to 7/- before na. wjiich passes into 
 )ia (Js) by r. 21. ; as, from TT, "to pass," rfh§ , "passed." Hut 
 frt)m Tj, Ti^, " full." 
 
 e. The root d/ie, " to suck," becomes dhl before fa ; /aoe, *' to 
 call," /lu (?tt) ; ue, " to weave." « (ttt). 
 
 /. Roots in % ai generally change ai to (7, before tia or fa ; as, 
 from T^ i/dai, "to fade," v^T^ mfdiia ; from i^, "to meditate," 
 iirnr; from "I, "to purify," ^; from %,"to rescue," ■^Tur or -^ttt. 
 But from ^, "to sing," iftiT; from ^, "to waste," •^J^. 
 
 g. Roots in ^0 change o to /; as, from so, sifa ; from ^, f^. 
 
 h. Those roots ending in consonants which take the inserted i 
 (p. 79. d.) generally take this vowel also in the past participle. 
 In such cases ta is affixed, and never na ; as, from pat, " to fall," 
 patifa, " fallen "; and if u or ri precede the final consonant of the 
 root, these vowels may take Guna ; as, from dyut, dyotita ,■ from 
 JTH^, jrflfT. Grah, lengthens the inserted i (jT^, "taken"). 
 
 /. Roots ending in consonants which forbid the inserted i nmst 
 be combined with ta, agreeably to the rules at pp. 67. 68. What- 
 ever form, therefore, the final consonant assumes before the 
 termination to, of the 1st future (p. 80.), the same form will gcne- 
 
 * 1^, however, makes ^^rf^TfT, anJ Tj may be Iffcid as well as T^. 
 
 t When prepositions are prefixed to datta^ the initial da may be rejected ; thus, 
 alta for ddutta, " taken "; prattii for prniUitttt^ " bestowed "; vydtta for ri/adatla, 
 " expanded "; par'ittn for pnridattu ; si'dtu for mdatlu^ tlie /ami a being lengthened. 
 
1-10 PASSIVE PAST PARTICIPLE. 
 
 rally be preserved before the ta of the past participle ; so that, 
 in many cases, this participle may be derived from the 3d sing, 
 of the 1st future by shortening the final a, and, if necessary, 
 restoring the radical vowel to its original state. Thus, taking 
 some of the examples at p. 80 ; shakta, " he will be able," gives 
 shakta, " able "; sekta, " he will sprinkle,"" sikta, " sprinkled "; viokta, 
 mukta ; If?T. "'I^; tyakta, tyakta ; yokta, yukta ; ^^, ics; Jrrtr, Mt; 
 seddha, siddha ; boddha, buddha ; yoddha, yuddha ; kshepta, kshipta ; 
 lopta, hipta ; sarpta, snpta ; kalpfa, klripta ; labdha, labdha ; lohdha, 
 lubdfia ; %?T, f^ ; ^T^, ??; ^tFT, W; WFT. 7!?; TJ?T, J^ \ ^YT, 
 
 ■%?; ^^» ^; ^iST, ^; ^nrr, ^^v; ^ftrr, ^Effe; tm, ■jti'; Trei, 
 
 TTl?; ^TT, c^(p. 68. /^); ^r^, f^; ^t^, f^nr; d^, ^2- (p. 68. A.); 
 JTteT, 5^; or id'VT, ^'V; ^'t'Vr, ^JV; 'ft^, JT2". 
 
 /. Most roots ending in d, forbidding: the inserted i, take na in- 
 stead of /a, and are combined with wa, agreeably to r. 15 ; as, 
 from pad, panna ; from ad, anna ; from bhid, bhinna ; from '^^, 
 with the preposition f%, f^M^ (r. 30. and 21.) 
 
 k. Those roots ending in j, which take na, change j to g before 
 na ; as, from vij, vigna ; from ritj, rugna. So from 77iasj, rejecting 
 the s, magna ; from la-y, /agna. 
 
 I. Some roots which admit i in the futures, forbid it in this 
 participle ; as, ^, in 1st fut. >iftirr, in part. ■^; so ^|, '^srffin, but 
 ^(with a prefixed, ^rT#, " pained"); ^, ^ffm, but f^; jt^, nf^, 
 but w^. See also p. 109. 
 
 in. If in forming the passive base (p. 90. /.), or in the 2d pret. 
 (p. 76. d.), the v or y contained in a root are changed to their 
 semi-vowels u or i, the same change takes place in the pass, par- 
 ticiple ; thus, from vach, "to say," ukfa ; from vap, upta ; from "q^, 
 ■grg-; from ^t^, ^; from in^, ^. Similarly, from f^, ^ or ariT; 
 from ^, jr§. 
 
 91. Some other changes which take place in forming the passive 
 base (see p. 90. d.f.) are preserved before ta ; thus, from ^[TW^, %?; 
 from ^T^, f^. And when the root ends in two conjunct con- 
 sonants, of which the first is a nasal, this nasal is rejected ; as, from 
 ^7^, ^^; from )j^, >r?; from -gr^, ^ru; from ^r^, ^r^; from >t^, 
 ^^J^■. but not if i is inserted; as, from ^IJ^, ^f^!3TT; from ■g^, 
 shfr^ri (except JT'^, making jrfvnr). 
 
 0. Roots ending in m or n reject these nasals before ta ; as. 
 
PASSIVE PAST PARTICIPLK. It I 
 
 from gam, " to i^o/' gala ; from yain, yata ; from ram, rata ; from 
 fan, fata ; from hafi, hafa : but retain them if / is instM-ted ; as. 
 from sman, swanifa. ¥ voiw jan, "to be born/' is formed y<7/a ; from 
 khan, khUfa ; the a bein^ lengthened. 
 
 p. Those roots ending in vi, of the 4th conjugation, wiiieh 
 lengthen a medial a before the conjugational affix y, also lengthen 
 it before fa, and change m to n as in the futures ; thus, from kram 
 (r. 89. rt.), krunta ; from bhrUm, bhrunta ; from sham, shUnta ; from 
 (lam, diinta ; from ksham, kshatUa ; from klam, kluntu- Similarly, 
 from vam, ranta ; from kam, kUnta. 
 
 q. From FBTH^. " to swell," is formed t^o^ ; from "orn^, xfhr or "utr. 
 
 r. Tlie following are quite anomalous ; from pack, " to cook,'' 
 pakwa ; from ^T^, "to dry," ^p<li; from '^^, "to be drunk," '^C^. 
 
 2. Derived from Causal Bases, 
 r. In forming the passive past participles from these, the 
 causal affix ay is rejected, but the inserted i is always assumed. 
 Thus, from karay, kurita; from sthapay, sthapita ; from veday, vedita. 
 
 3. Derived from Desiderative Bases, 
 s. In adding fa to a desiderative base, the only rule to be 
 observed is the invariable insertion of i ; as, from pipus, pipasifa ; 
 from chiklrsh, chikirshita ; from Ips, ipsita. 
 
 4. Derived from Nominal Bases, 
 t. There are in Sanscrit certain participles, which are said to 
 be formed by adding ita to nouns. Thus, from ftfrftl^, " loose," 
 f^lftrf^, " loosened "; from ftRT, " crooked," f»Tf?nr, " curved." 
 These may be regarded as the passive participles of the transitive 
 nominal verbs f^rftr^^, f^l^^Pri (r. 122. b.); and whenever this 
 kind of adjective is found, it may indicate that a nominal verb is 
 in use, whence the participle is derived. 
 
 Declension of Passive Past Participles. 
 They all follow the declension of the first class of nouns (r. 48. 
 49. 50.), and in this exhibit a perfect similarity to the declension 
 of the Latin participle in tus. Thus, krita, nom. masc. fern. neut. 
 kritah, krita, kritam.* 
 
 * Since li is equivalent to .<; and a to ?^ the nom. might be written -tus, -id, -turn. 
 
( 142 ) 
 
 ACTIVE PAST PARTICIPLES. 
 
 126. These are of two kinds ; 1st, those derived from the 
 passive past participle; 2dly, those derived from the second pre- 
 terite. These latter rarely occur. The former are much used 
 (especially in modern Sanscrit, and in the writings of commen- 
 tators), to supply the place of a perfect tense active. Thus, tat 
 kritavan, " he did that "; tat kritavatl, " she did that." They may 
 also be used with the auxiliaries as and bhu, to form a compound 
 perfect tense ; thus, tat kritavan asti, " he has done that "; tal 
 kritavan hhavishyati, " he will have done that." 
 
 Formation of the Crude, 
 a. In the case of those derived from the passive past participle, 
 the crude is easily formed by adding vat to that participle. Thus, 
 from krita, kritavat (<^d«lH^) ; from dagdha, dagdhavat ; from ukta, 
 uktavat ; from bhinna, bhinnavat ; from sthapita, sthapitavat, &c. 
 
 b. In the case of those derived from the 2d pret., either vas or ivas is added to 
 the base of that tense, as formed in the dual and plur. Vas, when the base in the 
 dual and plur. consists of more than one syllable ; as, from vivid (p. 96.), vividwas ; 
 from chichi (p. 96), chichivas. But ivas, wlien the base in the dual and plur. con- 
 sists of one syllable only; as from ten (p. 90.) tenivas ; horn jagm (p. 77. c), 
 jagmivas. There is an atmanepada participle of the 2d pret. formed by adding ana 
 to the base ; thus, vividdna, chichydna, tendna,jagmdiia. 
 
 Declension. 
 
 127. Those formed from the passive past participle are 
 declined r. 62. ; thus, kritavat, nom. masc. fem. neut. kritavan, 
 kritavatl, r. 49., kritavat. 
 
 Those formed from the 2d pret. are declmed m the last paragraph of p. 44. ; thus, 
 vividwas, nom. masc. fem. neut. vividiodn, vividiish'i, vividwah ; and chichivas, 
 nom. ckichivdn, chichyushi, chichivah. Those formed with ivas do not retain i in 
 the fem. ; thus, tenivas, nom. masc. fem. neut. tenivdn, tenushi,* tenivah ; and 
 jagmivas, nom. Jagmivdn, jagmushi, jagmivah. The atmanepada participles are 
 declined like nouns of the first class, p. 31. 
 
 * Similarly the instr. case masc. is tenushd. There seems, however, much dif- 
 ference of opinion as to the rejection of i, and some Grammarians make the fem. 
 teni/ushi, and. the inst masc. tenyushd. 
 
( 143 ) 
 
 INDECLINABLE PAST PARTICIPLES. 
 
 128. These may be classed under two heads : 1st, as formed 
 by affixinc^ ^ twU to uncompounded roots ; as, from bhU, " to be," 
 bhufrva, " having been ''; 2dly, as formed by affixing >T i/a to roots 
 compounded with prepositions or other adverbial prefixes ; as, 
 from anubhu, anubhuya, " having percinved "; from sajjlbhU, saj- 
 jibhuya, " having become ready." These indeclinable participles 
 are of the utmost importance, and some of the chief peculiarities 
 of the syntax of the language are to be traced to the frequency 
 of their occurrence. 
 
 The sparing use made in Sanscrit composition of relative 
 pronouns, conjunctions, and connective particles, is partly to be 
 attributed to the continual appearance of tliese indeclinable par- 
 ticiples, by means of which the sense of a whole clause may be 
 suspended, and sentence after sentence strung together without 
 the aid of a single copulative. The sense involved in them is gene- 
 rally expressed by the English " when," " after," ** having," or "by "; 
 thus, tat kritwu (iTiT ^gsr), " when he had done that," " after he liad 
 done that," " having done that," " by doing that." See syntax. 
 
 Formation of the Indeclinable Participle from Uncompomided Boots. 
 
 a. When the root stands alone and uncompounded, the inde- 
 clinable participle is formed with wt twa* 
 
 This affix is closely allied to the ta of the passive past parti- 
 ciple, r. 125., insomuch that the rules for the annexation of ta to 
 the root apply equally to the indeclinable affix tma. The forma- 
 tion, therefore, of one participle generally involves that of the 
 other; thus, kshipia, "thrown," kshiptma, "having thrown"; ^Fff. 
 " done," ^RT, "having done"; so fwff, f^n^ ; F?» ^; <^. ^^; 
 TJhr , if^ ; WfT , *i*rti ; JT^ , jj^Iht ; <jfMrf, Tptn^ ; t^ , t^i ; ^, 
 ^T ; ^fS", "3!^ ; f^TI (from vt), ffi^. And where i is inserted 
 there is often an optional change of the radical vowel to Guna, as 
 
 * There are one or two instances in which an uncompounded root takes TJ ; as, 
 ^^r^, "having reverenced. "_Manu, 7th Book, 1-1.5. I. 4. Mahahh. ^. 8017. 
 
144 INDECLINABLE PARTICIPLES. 
 
 in the passive participle (r. 125. A.) ; thus, dyutitwa or dyotitwa from 
 dyut ; and ijq always takes Guna (?rfl?Tr). There are a few 
 instances in which the inserted i is admitted before twa, although 
 rejected before ta ; as, lagna, lajjitwa; and, vice versa, as tPw, T|T. 
 
 b. A penultimate nasal is not always rejected before ttva ; thus, 
 from T.^, T^, but tliT or tut, the rejection in the indeclinable 
 participle being generally optional. 
 
 c. The causal^verb, which rejects its characteristic ay before the 
 ita of the passive participle, retains it before itrva. Thus, sthaplta, 
 " made to stand "" (from the causal base sthapay), but sthapayifwa, 
 *' having made to stand." 
 
 d. The only important variation from the passive participle 
 occurs in those roots which take na for ta (r. 125. a.). In such 
 roots no corresponding change takes place of two, to nwa. Thus, 
 from •^, ift^, but T^ fi^H T (or "ifdi^) ; from W, fft%, but Tft?lT; from 
 f^, fs^, but fw^; from VT^, H7TT» but HW or >TfiT; from ^i^, 
 T^Trf, but ^w; from ^, fhr, but f^i^, "having quitted'' (not 
 distinguishable from f^t^, " having placed," from \(t). 
 
 Formation of the Indeclinable Participle from Compounded Roots. 
 When a root is compounded with a preposition or indeclinable 
 word, the indeclinable participle cannot be formed with twa. 
 The affix t^ ya is then used, and the rules which regulate its 
 annexation to the root are some of them analogous to those which 
 prevail in other cases in which y is affixed ; see the rules for the 
 formation of neuters (r. 89.), passives (p. 90.), and the benedictive 
 mood (p. 85.). 
 
 a. But if a root end in a short vowel, instead of any lengthen- 
 ing of this vowel, t is interposed ; as, from ashri, " to take refuge " 
 (root fti), ashritya, " having taken refuge "; from f?rP?J. f«Tfta7T ; 
 from Tr!^, drJji<< ; from ^^, ^R^m; from f^T;^, f^:^. The 
 lengthening of the radical vowel by coalition does not prevent this 
 rule ; as, from atl (ati with i), atltya. 
 
 b. If a root end in long a, z, or u, no change takes place : as, 
 from viha, vihaya ; from upakrt, upakrlya ; from vidhu, vihhuya. 
 
 c. If in long ^ rl, this vowel becomes ir ; as, from ^i^^ , 
 xSdflil)^. But from ^nT|. ^TTjtr • 
 
INDECLINABLE PARTICIPLES. J45 
 
 d. Final diphthongs pass into a. : as, from Tlft.^, TjfirinTj (also 
 Trft^fHr ; ffom ^^rfir^i^, ■^rfHurnr; from ^i^wt. ^st^rtfi. But fiom ^ 
 with ^r^, oM^lHl ; IVoMi ^TTd^, »!iig^i| . 
 
 e. A penultimate nasal is generally rejected ; as, from samnsanj, 
 samosaj^a ,• from pramanth, pramatln/a (used adverbially, " vio- 
 lently ") ; but from ^^n^ , -iJI^I^ ; ffom ^mroi^- , WT%^ . 
 
 / If a root end in a consonant the general rule is, that no 
 change takes place ; as, from nikship, nikshipya ; from prap {pro. 
 and Up), prUpi/a ; from vlksh (v'l and Iks/,), vlksht/a. 
 
 g. But some roots ending in am and an may optionally reject 
 the nasal, and interpose t between short a and ya ; as, from 
 fiirgam, nirgafi/a or nirgamya ; from n'lhan, nihatya. Jan and 
 khan inste:id of interposing t, lengthen the a; as, from utkhan, 
 ufk/idya. 
 
 h. The changes wliich take place in certain roots before the y 
 of the passive (p. 90./.) are preserved before ^« ; as, from f^^, 
 f^jpi; from ^mra, 41!<4?^:i; from avyadh, avidhya ; from vivas, 
 vyushya. TO^L lengthens its vowel before ya ; as, fiffit.^ . 
 
 i. In affixing ya to causal bases the characteristic ay is gene- 
 rally rejected :* as, from prabodhay, prabodhya (tN^) ; from TfmTJ^ , 
 M«|5i; from ^?n^^, ^Tf^.^ 
 
 Adverbial Indeclinable Participle. 
 There is another indeclinable participle yielding the same sense as those formed 
 with tied and ya, but of very rare occurrence except in the Bhatti kavya. It is 
 equivalent to the accusative case of a noun derived from a root, used adverbially ; 
 and is formed by adding am to the root, before whicli affix changes of the radical 
 vowel take place, similar to those required before the causal affix ay (p. 86. c). 
 Thus, from ni, " to lead," mlyam, " having led "; from pa, " to drink," puyam, 
 "having drunk "; from hwe, hwdyam ; from pack, pdcham ; from kskip, kshepam ; 
 from han, "to kill," ghtltam. It often occupies the last place in a compound ; as in 
 
 * It is retained in some few instances; as, fclJiirjztl, "having calculated"; 
 ■^FTToFqST^ . " having imagined "; 4)^*'<iJ4i4, "having narrated." 
 
 t Tliore are one or two instances of compounded roots formed with hnl; as, 
 ■.! T j«r i rJ T(fi"m ^), Ram. 1 . 2. 20. Especially in the case of causals, as f^^ -SP ^rjI • 
 
 U 
 
146 I'UTURE PASSIVE PARTICIPLES. 
 
 the expression ^ H^ ' t l lfi , "■having totally exterminated"; and in the following; 
 passage from Bhatti : 
 
 " The descendant of Kakutstha, smiling softly, repeatedly bending down the 
 creepers, would pluck the blossoms ; descending to the streams, would sip (the 
 waters) ; seating himself on some variegated rock, would recline in admiration 
 (of the scene)." 
 
 These participles generally imply repetition of the action, as in the passage 
 above, and in this sense are themselves often repeated ; as, dayam, ddyam^ " having 
 repeatedly given." 
 
 FUTURE PASSIVE PARTICIPLES. 
 
 129. These are amongst the most common and useful of all 
 participles, and may be classed under three heads : 1st, as formed 
 with the affix 7T^ tavya ,■ 2dly, as formed with ^nfhl anli/a ; 3dly, 
 as formed with XT ya. These affixes yield a sense corresponding 
 to the Latin dus and the English able and ihle, and most commonly 
 denote obligation or propriety and fitness. Thus, from bhiij, " to 
 eat," hhoktavya, or bhojanlya, or bhojya, " edible," " eatable," " that 
 oucrht to be eaten "; from vach, " to speak," vaktavya, or vachanlya, 
 or vachya, " to be spoken," " dicendus.'" They sometimes denote 
 simple futurity ; as, vft^^ , " about to be eaten ": and as the passive 
 past participle supplies the place of a past tense, so the future 
 passive participle may supply the place of a future tense passive ; 
 as in the following sentence, xrf^ q'sft TTtrftT TT^T ^^\ yrf^ri^: , " If 
 the bird falls, then it shall be eaten by me." 
 Formation of Future Passive Participles with the affix w^ tavya. 
 
 a. These are formed by substituting tavya for ta, the termina- 
 tion of the 3d pers. sing, of the 1st future. Thus, from -^ttt 
 kshepta, " he will throw," -^ir^ ksheptavya, " to be thrown "; karta, 
 " he will do," kartavya, " to be done "; from bhavita, " he will be," 
 bhavitavya, " about to be." And in the case of roots ending in 
 consonants rejecting i, whatever changes take place before ta, the 
 same take place before my^/a (see p. SO.) ; thus, tijakta, tyaktavya 
 {relinquendus) : ir?T> 3TF^; ^T^T, ?Fai; boddha, boddhavya ; dagdhn. 
 dngdhnrya. 8:c. 
 
FUTURE I'ASSIVF, 1' A 1{ TU'I I'LHS. 147 
 
 Formation of Future Fassire Particip/es trith the affix ^'^x\ aniva. 
 
 b. This aifix is added directly to the root, without any other 
 cliange than th(^ Guna of the radical vowel. Thus, from f^ chi, 
 " to gather," ^tr^T chai/aulf/a, " to be gathered "; from bhu, b/iava- 
 nlija ; from cB . oR^rfhi (r. 21.) ; from %^, ^T^rftTi ; from ^ , '^fhRhl ; 
 from •^, w|h1h; from ^, cB^it (r. 21.). A final diphthong 
 is changed to a; as, from ^, xqitf^^; from ?^, JTRI^. 
 
 Formation of Future Fassire Participles with the affix t\ ya. 
 
 c. Before this affix, as before all others beginning with y, cer- 
 tain changes of final vowels become necessary. If a root end in 
 5, or in e, ai, o, changeable to a, this vowel becomes e (cf. p. 85. a) ; 
 as, from inU, "to measure," meya, "to be measured," "measurable"; 
 from ha, heya ; from dhyai, dhyeya, Sec. 
 
 d. If in i, I, u, or u, these vowels take Guna ; as, from chi, 
 cheya. But the Guna o is changed to av, and sometimes e to ay, 
 before ya (as if before a vowel) : thus, from bhu, bhavya ; from ji, 
 " to conquer," jayya. The Guna o, however, oftener passes into 
 civ before y ; as, from ■^, ^tT^T ; from plu, plavya. 
 
 p. If in ri or rl these vowels take Vriddhi ; as, from oR, oRT^. 
 
 /. Sometimes if a root end in a short vowel no change takes 
 place, but t is interposed, after the analogy of the indeclinable 
 participle formed with ya (p. 144. a.), so that the crude of the future 
 participle is not distinguishable from the indeclinable, except by 
 the absence of a preposition. Thus, from ji, jitya, " conquerable "''•, 
 from stu, stutya, " laudable "; from kri, kritya, " practicable." 
 
 g. If a root end in a single consonant with a medial a, Vriddhi 
 sometimes takes place ; as, from grah, grahya : but not alwavs ; 
 as, from shak, shakya ; fi'om sah, sahya ; from badh, badhya ; and 
 rarely if the final is a labial ; as, from gam, gamya ; from labh, 
 labhya. 
 
 h. If with a medial i or u, Guna generally takes place ; ns. 
 from bhuj, bhojya ; from Jih, lehya. 
 
 i. If with a medial ri, no change takes place ; as, from ^'T^T, wpiT. 
 
 / A final ch may be changed to k, and / to g ; and other changes 
 may take place, some of which are similar to those before the y of 
 passives ; as, from pach, pakya ; fi"om vach, vuki/a ; from bhuj. 
 
148 NOUNS OF AGENCY. 
 
 bhogya ; from groh, grihya, as well as grahya ; from vud, udya ; 
 from yaj, ijya ; from shas, shishya (p. 90. d. /.) ; from khan, kheya. 
 
 k. Many of these latter are used as substantives, and there are 
 other examples of substantives formed with this affix ; as, >Tn§T 
 (fem.), " a wife,'" from w , "to support," &c. 
 
 Declension of Future Passive Participles. 
 They are all declined like nouns of the first class, pp. 31, 32. 
 Thus, kartavya ; nom. m. f. n. kartavyah, kartavya, kartavyam. Si- 
 milarly, karanlya and karya. 
 
 PARTICIPLES OF THE SECOND FUTURE. 
 
 Formation of the Crude. 
 
 130. These are not very common. They are of two kinds, 
 eitlier as belonging to the parasmaipada, or to the atmanepada ; 
 the former being formed by changing anti, the termination of the 
 3d plur. of the 2d fut., into at ; the latter by changing ante into 
 amana. Thus, from karishyanti and karishyante, " they will do," 
 karishyat and karishyamana (eBft^Trr grfb'TOTTir), "about to do" ; from 
 the passive 2d fut. vnkshyante, " they will be said," vakshyamdna, 
 " about to be said." 
 
 These participles, in the mode of their formation from the 3d 
 pars, plur., by the affixes at and amana, resemble present parti- 
 ciples, r. 123. 
 
 Declension of Participles of the Second Future. 
 a. Their declension also conforms to that of present participles. 
 Those of the parasmaipada are declined according to p. 136. b., 
 and those of the atmanepada according to p. 137. b. 
 
 PARTICIPIAL NOUNS OF AGENCY. 
 131. These have been already incidentally noticed in Chap. IIL 
 As, however, they partake of the nature of participles, and are of 
 great practical utility, some further mention of them is necessary 
 in the present chapter. They may be classed under three heads ; 
 1st, as formed from the root ; 2dly, as formed from the 1st future ; 
 3dlv, as formed from the causal base. 
 
NOUNS OF A(;r,NC"V. N!) 
 
 1. The crude of tlie first class is foriiu^d iVoni tlic root l)y ailix- 
 ing a, before which Guna, and rarely Vriddhi, of a final vowel is 
 required ; as, from ji, " to oonquerr jaya (iT^), " concjuering." 
 Medial vowels are generally uneluinged ; as, from vad, " to say," 
 vada, "saying"; from (ud, "to vex," tuda, "vexing"': and final U, 
 am, or an, are dropped; as, from dZi, "to give," da (^), "giving"; 
 fi-om gam, " to go," ga (n), " going " ; from jan, " to be born," ja, 
 "being born" (see their declension, r. 38. 1. and p. 31.). These 
 noims of agency are constantly used in poetry as a substitute for 
 the present participle,* sometimes governing the same case as this 
 participle, but always united with the word which they govern in 
 one compound; thus, puraujatja (^T^tt), " city-contjuering" ; pri- 
 1/amrada (ftpH^), "speaking kind words"; jalechara ("iTc^-MI.) "going 
 in the water"; sarasija, "lake-born." The word which they go- 
 vern often remains in the crude form ; as, from tejas and kri, 
 tejasJx-ara, "light-making" {s remaining unchanged, in violation of 
 r. 29.); from manas and hri, manohara, "mind-captivating" (r. 29.); 
 from haJiit and da, ba/uida, "giving much"; from ^^nUTT and ^, 
 '^TTr'T^r, " self-knowing." 
 
 2. The crude of the second class is formed from the 3d pers. 
 sing, of the 1st future of primitive verbs, by substituting the vowel 
 ■^ ri for the final vowel a, the nominative case being therefore 
 identical with the 3d pers. sing, of that tense (see p. 77. r. 100. p. 37. 
 and r. 41.), Thus, from hhoktu, "he wull eat," bhoktri, "an eater" 
 (nom. bhokfa); from TitgT, "he will fight," xftg', "a fighter"; from 
 yucJdta, yachitri ; from ^i^, iffte, &c. This noun of agency is 
 sometimes, but rarely, found as a participle governing the case 
 of the verb; as, cf^T ^TT^, "speaking a speech" (Drau])adiliaranam, 
 32.); ^^ cT^HT't'Tr, "bearing the Ganges" (Ratniivali, p. 1.). 
 
 3. The crude of the third class is formed in three ways. 
 
 a. By adding in to the root, before which affix changes take 
 place similar to those required before the causal affix ay (r. 107. 
 c. cf.) ; as, from kri, kurin (cfilfic^), "a doer"; from han, ghutin, "a 
 killer" ; from shl, shayin, " a sleeper" : y being inserted after roots 
 
 * Implying, however, hnhitunl action, aud therefore son-.ethinj,' niore tlian pre- 
 sent time. 
 
150 1NDE('LINA13LE WORDS. 
 
 in a, as, h'om. pa, pdyin, "a drinker"; from dU, duyin, "a giver" 
 (see their declension, r. 43. iii. and p. 43.). This noun of agency- 
 has often, Uke the first class, the sense of a present participle, and 
 is then always united with the crude of the word which it governs 
 in one compound : thus, from manas and hri, manoharin, " mind- 
 captivating " (r. 29.). It sometimes, also, governs the case of the 
 verb, being still united with the word which it governs in one 
 compound ; as, gromevasin, " dwelling in the village." 
 
 b. By adding oka to the root before which affix changes take 
 place analogous to those before the causal ay (r. 107. c. d. e.f.) ; as, 
 from kri, karaka (cfiRofi), "a doer," "doing"; from m, nai/aka, "a 
 leader," "leading"; ivova. grah, grahaka\ hom. sidJi, mdhaka ; from 
 han, ghataka ; from tt^, g^ofi ; from kram, kramaka ; from nand, 
 nandaka ; from slha, sthapaka (see their declension, r. 38. ii. and p. 31.). 
 This participial noun is also often joined with the crude of the 
 noun which it governs in one compound word; as, ohiuj^iVTsi;, " ef- 
 fecting the business." It is very rarely found governing the case 
 of the verb ; as, 5^^Tf*T ^IRi: , " kissing the buds " (Ratnavali, p. 7.). 
 
 c. By adding ana to some few roots ending in consonants, after 
 changes similar to those required before the causal affix ; as, from 
 nand, nandana, "rejoicing"; from ^, ^^TJI, "vitiating"; from 
 3r«(. ^fty^, "cleansing" (see their declension, r. 38. iii. and p. 31.) 
 
 CHAPTER VIII. 
 
 INDECLINABLE WORDS. 
 
 Adverbs. 
 
 132. Adverbs, like nouns and verbs, may be divided into simple 
 and compound. The latter are treated of in the next Chapter 
 on Compound Words. 
 
 Simple adverbs may be classed under four heads ; 1st, as 
 
ADVERBS. 151 
 
 formed from the cases of nouns ; 2dly, as formed with alfixes ; 
 3dly, as of uncertain derivation ; -Ithly, as prefixes to otlier words. 
 
 Adverbs formed from (he Cases of Nouns. 
 Tlie following cases of nouns are used adverbially : 
 
 a. The nominative or accusative neuter of any adjective ; as, 
 ^. " truly "'; ^., "much''; ^li, f^, "quickly"; 'j^, "fitly''; 
 ^Tj, "near"; ^, "lightly"; frfj^, 'srwFtt, mi, >^^, "exceed- 
 ingly "; ^r^'^, " certainly "; f^, " constantly "; ^^TiT , " strongly." 
 The nom. or ace. neuter of certain pronouns ; as, fTfT , " there- 
 fore "; TTf^, "wherefore," "when"; irni^, "so long as"; ifHif , 
 " as long as "; fofij^, " why ? " The nom. or ace. neut. of certain 
 substantives and obsolete words ; as t?:, " secretly "; oRT^, " will- 
 ingly "; ■tTTT, " by name," " that is to say "; ^ "qrt. " repeatedly "; 
 fNrt, "long ago"; ^, "pleasantly"; ^ivyd, " now "; •^, "by 
 night " (noctu). 
 
 b. The instrumental case of nouns and pronouns ; as, vwftrj, 
 " virtuously "; crf^#«T, " southwards ''; IT^TJT, " northwards "; 
 ■3^:, " above "; rft%:, " below "; •51%:, " slowly "; w^, " therefore "; 
 ^, " wherefore." The instr. case of certain obsolete nouns ; as, 
 f^tilT, " for a long time "; ^f^tiiiir, " in a short time "; f^WT, " by 
 day"; H^wi, "fortunately"; TtTpn, "^T^^, "quickly"; ^Y^T. "now." 
 
 c. The ablative case of a few nouns and pronouns ; as, ^oTn^;^, 
 " forcibly "'; ^^TTiT, " at a distance "; w^TTt^, '* therefore "; ^fiWTTf , 
 "wherefore"? ^^rcfiWTT^, "without cause," "unexpectedly"; T^nw, 
 "from the north": and of a few obsolete nouns; as, f^Tff, "for a 
 long time "; tt^TW, " afterwards." 
 
 d. The locative case of a few nouns and obsolete words ; as, 
 TT^, "at night"; ^, "far off"; U7%?. "in the forenoon"; WT^. 
 " suitably "; "^k, " in front "; ^chM^, " at once "; WJjf^, " instantly "; 
 ^Tfft- " within." 
 
 Adverbs formed with Affixes. 
 133. f^ chit, ^rftr api, and ^*T chana, may form Indefinite adverbs 
 of time and place, wlicn affixed to interrogative adverbs ; as, from 
 oR^, "when?" oWlT-^H' "oPrrftT. and cp^r^TT, "sometimes"; from ^^ 
 and 3, "where?" '^^f^lT , ^F^rfq , gf^TT. girftl, "somewhere"; from 
 ^im, "whence?" ^Hf^yd and ^^tT^^, "from somewhere"; from 
 
152 ADVERBS. 
 
 eirf^, "when?" ■gifff^lT, "at some time"; from ofi^, "how?" 
 «(ivr^r|, "somehow or other" (cf. r, 85.). 
 
 a. TITT tas (changeable to w: or "rft, r. 29.) may be added to any 
 noun, and to some pronouns, to form adverbs ; as, from xn?I» ^msTiTt, 
 "with effort"; from ^nf^, ^if^t, "from the beginning"; from k 
 (the proper crude of the pronoun -fT^), 'iTiT:, "thence"; similarly, 
 '^nr: , ^: , " hence." This affix usually gives the sense of the 
 prepositions with and//*o;«, and is often equivalent to the ablative 
 case; as, in ww:, "from me "; T^^t, "from thee ":* but it is some- 
 times vaguely employed to express other relations; as, "^^Tr;, 
 " behind the back "; ir^PTir. , " in the first place "; q^>riri : , " on all 
 sides"; ^inr:, "in front"; ^rfWlT:, "near to." 
 
 h. -^ tra, forming adverbs of Time ; a?, ^r^, " here "; tR, 
 " there "; ^, " where ? " xr^, " where "; ^!%^, " everywhere "; 
 ■^^ir^, " in another place"; t?oB^, "in one place"; ^?^, " in many 
 places"; ^H'^, "there," "in the next world." 
 
 c. "qr tha and "^ tliam, forming adverbs of Manner ; as, thTT, 
 "so"; zirrr, "as"; fi|vj|, "in every way"; ^n^r^IT, "otherwise"; 
 ^, "how?" ^, "thus." 
 
 d. ^ da, forming adverbs of Time from pronouns, &c. ; as, fj^, 
 " then "; zi^, " when "; ci;^, " when?" T!:^^^, " once "; fJTW^, "con- 
 stantly "; T^[^, ^, " always." 
 
 e. >n, dJm, forming adverbs of Distribution from numeral adjec- 
 tives ; as, TTSfiVT, "in one way"; flVT, "in two ways"; ■^in» "in 
 six ways "; ^pniT, " in a hundred ways "; ^^^qr, " in a thousand 
 ways "; ^r^VT, " in many ways." 
 
 /. ^ vat may be added to any noun to form adverbs of Simi- 
 litude ; as, from ^i;^, wi§^w, "like the sun"; from xr|f, "T^^, 
 " as before." 
 
 g. '^nr shas, forming adverbs of Quantity ; as, '^F^: , " abun- 
 dantly"; ^ar^Tl^:, " in small quantities "; «»<*5i:, " singly "; l^lff^^^^r:. 
 " by hundreds and thousands "; ^M^V, , " by degrees." 
 
 * These are the forms generally used for the ablative case of the personal pro- 
 nouns, the proper ablative cases JfjT , r^TT being never used except as substitutes for 
 the crude, in compound words. 
 
ADVERHS. 163 
 
 Adverbs of Uncert((hi Derivation. 
 13-1. Of Affirmation. — -g^, ^. f^^, ??^, " indeed "; ^f^, " even.*" 
 
 a. Of Negation. — '^. »ft. vrff, "not." m, TTW are prohibitive; 
 as, m ^, " do not." m is often used with the 3d preterite, the 
 augment being rejocted. as ^\ ojn'^ff:, "do not" (p. 102.). 
 
 b. Of Interrogation. — f^, 'Sfif^TT. ^. 'JT^, 'ftfiig?, " whether .'^" 
 
 f. Of Comparison. — in', "like"; ir^, ir4. "so"; O+m^W^. "how 
 much rather." 
 
 d. Oi Quant it I/. — 'HrfN, "exceedingly"; ^^, " a little "; ^T^, 
 "once": ^«ejrf , "^tt: ^fTT, ^^. ^^' "repeatedly." 
 
 e. O^ Manner. — ^, F#. " so," "thus"; TJTT,. "again"; ITHTO, 
 "for the most part"; "JTrtTT. "variously"; Y''^-' '^^P^'^^'^'^tely "; 
 finm, "falsely"; Tsn, 5>n, "in vain"; 'g?^, " enough "; ^sfTfir, 
 ^THT (cf. (dKUf), " quickly "; |ra!ff. " silently." 
 
 f. Of T<we. — ^TST- "to day," "now"; ^^T»f^*, ^T^qfir, "now"; 
 ri(jHT , "then"; •gn, "formerly"; ^tjt, ^TSTTFT, Trra,'' "before"; 
 jTrTTrT , " at once "; ^Rnr , " instantly "; xm* " after death "; tit,* 
 " afterwards "; irrj, " ever "; "^ ^HJ. " never." 
 
 ^. Oi Place. — ^, "here"; gi, " where .^" '^f?Tr - "without." 
 ^. Of Dow6a — Pcd^H ri^ . -yrmm, " perhaps." 
 
 Adverbial Prefixes. 
 135. 'ST a prefixed to nouns and even to participles with a priva- 
 tive or negative force, corresponding to the Greek a, the Latin in, 
 and the English in, im, un ; as, from ^r^, "possible," ^^TW, "im- 
 possible "; from Wf^:\, " touching " (pres. part.), ^n=^^, " not 
 touching." When a word begins with a vowel, ^n^ is euphoni- 
 cally substituted ; as, ^r^it, " end "; ?m»fl, " endless." 
 
 a. ^rfeT ati, " excessively," " very "; as, ^rfim^, " very great." 
 
 b. -^ a, prefixed to imply "diminution"; as, ^Tn?!3. "some- 
 what pale." ^^^ is prefixed w4th the same sense. 
 
 f. ^ ka or ^ ku, prefixed to words to imply " disparagement "; 
 as, cfc t ij^M , "a coward"; ^^xj, "deformed." 
 
 d. fC^ dur, prefixed to imply " badly," or " with difficulty "; as, 
 Ttsp, "badly done" (cf. p. 15. note); ^if?r, "not easily broken." 
 It is opposed to ^, and eoiTesponds to the Greek ^va. 
 
 * These, however, admit of derivation, and a few others less ohviously 
 X 
 
154 CONJUNCTIONS. 
 
 e. frfl. nir and f^ vi are prefixed to nouns like ^ a with a pri- 
 vative or negative sense ; as, frf%Q5, " pov.'erless "; f^^IT^, " un- 
 armed "; but not to participles. 
 
 /. TT su, prefixed to imply " well/' " easily "; as, ^sri, " well 
 done''; 7W?r. "easily broken." In this sense it is opposed to ^, 
 and corresponds to the Greek ev. It is also used for ^"fir, to 
 imply "very," "excessively"; as, ^H^ri, "very great." 
 
 CONJUNCTIONS. 
 
 Copulative. 
 
 136. "^ cha, " and," " also," corresponding to the Latin que and 
 not et. It can never, therefore, stand as the first word in a sen- 
 tence. It is not, however, like que, necessarily interposed between 
 the first and second words, but may be admitted to any part of 
 the sentence, being only excluded from the first place. 
 
 o. f^, "for," like "^ is always placed after its w^ord, and never 
 admitted to the first place in a sentence. 
 
 h. irf^, "^W, "if"; ^r?!, "then," "now," used very commonly as 
 an inceptive particle. TnnT, " upon that," " then " (r. 133. «.). 
 ^rai^, f^fi^, 'Sqitf , TTi.^, ^rfri^, " again," " moreover," used very com- 
 monly before quotations. %^, " also." 
 
 Disjunctive. 
 
 137. "qr va, " or," corresponds to the Latin ve, and is always 
 placed after its word, being never admitted to the first place in a 
 sentence. j', f^, "but"; the former is placed after its word; 
 ^rafxr. " although "; TnTTf^, " nevertheless," " yet," sometimes used as 
 a correlative to the last ; -iivjcji, ftp^, " or else "; "q^, " or not "; 
 Tlf^, " whether," " whether or no." W, f , w, %, are expletives, 
 often used in poetry with no other object than to fill up the verse. 
 
 PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 138. Of all the internal evidences of the antiquity of Sanscrit, 
 there is none more decisive than the sparing use which this lan- 
 guage makes of prepositions, in expressing the dependence of one 
 word upon another. These aids to syntactical combination are 
 always to be regarded as a result of modern refinement, incom- 
 
PREPOSITIONS. 155 
 
 patible with tlie sternness and simplicity of the most ancient 
 languages. TJius, even the Greek, which of all others is the most 
 copiously provided with these auxiliaries, made comparatively 
 small use of them in the days of Homer, and imitated the Sanscrit 
 in expressing a variety of different relations by some of the cases 
 of its nouns. It cannot be doubted that much ambiguity may 
 result from this rigid rejection of any other aid to the construc- 
 tion of sentences than nominal inflection ; but when, as in Sanscrit, 
 even this inflection is but sparingly used, and long compounds are' 
 formed, consisting of words joined together in their crude state, 
 the last only taking any case ; and when even the assistance of 
 a verb is often denied to guide the reader to the nature of the 
 dependence of these words upon each other; we are forced to 
 admit that this language would gain much in ease and perspicuity, 
 if It were more abundantly supplied with such important elements 
 of syntactical arrangement. 
 
 But let not the reader imagine that no prepositions exist in 
 Sanscrit. It Avill be found by a reference to r. 165. that they 
 exist in great abundance, but only as inseparable prefixes, qualify- 
 ing the sense of roots, and the nouns and verbs derived from roots. 
 There are only three, out of all this list of prepositions, that are 
 ever used in goverament with nouns; viz. ^ o, Jrf^ pratl, and 
 ^ anu ; and of these the two last are never so used, except as 
 pos/positions. 
 
 a. ^ a, generally signifying "as far as," "up to," governs the 
 ablative case ; as, 'STHig^, "as far as the ocean "; m^r^,, " up to 
 Manu '■, and rarely the accusative, as ijnm '^TTTOt:, " for a hun- 
 dred births." But instances are not common of words in regi- 
 men with this preposition. '^ 
 
 h. ^ prati, generally signifying "at," "with regard to," 
 "gainst," governs the accusative ; as, tt^? ^, " at the Ganges "; 
 V^ Ufw, " with regard to justice "; ^^ irfTT, " against an enemy " 
 It sometimes has the force of apud ;\., m Jifk, '' apud mer "as 
 far as regards me."' 
 
 c. ^ is occasionally found governing the accusative ; as, w?^ 
 " after that." '^' 
 
 The preposition ^, however, is not separat(>(l fr-oni the word 
 
156 PREPOSITIONS. INTERJECTIONS. 
 
 which it governs, and may be regarded as forming with it a kind 
 of adverbial compound, especially as instances are not uncommon 
 of other prepositions united in composition with the neuter form 
 or accusative case of nouns ; as, yfriH'^, " upon the shoulders "; 
 Tlfir^^, " face to face "; ^3riWF|, " upon the tree '; ^SPTT^, " along 
 the Ganges " (see r. 171. 6.). 
 
 ADVERBS USED FOR PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 139. There are certain adverbs used for prepositions in govern- 
 ment with nouns, but generally placed after the nouns which 
 they govern. 
 
 a. ^i, " besides,' governing the accusative and sometimes 
 ablative case. H\<iA^, " up to," " as far as,'' sometimes found with 
 the accusative. 
 
 b. ^, Ttn^, "with," "along with,' governing the instrumental, 
 
 c. "f^TT, " without," with the instrumental or accusative, or 
 sometimes the ablative. 
 
 cl. "^firi., "out" and W^, ''hide a,' "from a particular time," 
 with the ablative. 
 
 e. •^^, ■^^', ^;, lift, ^, f^irfir^. "on accovmt of," "for the 
 sake of," with the genitive, or more usually wath the crude form, 
 grrft., " above " (cf. virep, super), w^ith the genitive. So WJ^ or 
 ^rvWTW, "below": WTt^, ffehl^'l, "near"; 'flojil^l^ "from"; ^, 
 UH^, &c., "in the presence of""; M^yii^, "after ""; W^, "before"; 
 ■sHmUA!;, "without," "except"; ^Tfri., "within"'; all governing the 
 genitive. TTft. and ^HRT are sometimes doubled; thus, Tty^Rft,. 
 
 INTERJECTIONS. 
 
 140. Ht:, vft, ^, are vocative ; \, 'sft, less respectfully vocative, or 
 sometimes expressive of contempt. ftnii expresses " abhorrence "; 
 ^:, ^r^, ^Tf^. "surprise"; '^t, fT^, ^Tft, ^T^t?iT» "grief"; ;ht^. 
 ^, "approbation"; ^^fm, "salutation." 
 
CHAPTER IX. 
 
 COMPOUND WORDS. 
 
 Compounds abound in Sanscrit to a degree wholly unequalled in 
 any other language, and it becomes necessary to study the prin- 
 ciples on which they are constructed, before the learner can hope 
 to understand the simplest sentence in the most elementary book. 
 In the foregoing chapters we have treated of simple nouns, simple 
 verbs, and simple adverbs. We have now to treat of compound 
 nouns, compound verbs, and compovmd adverbs. 
 
 Observe, that in this chapter a dot placed underneath marks 
 the division of the words in a compound. 
 
 Sect. I.— COMPOUND NOUNS. 
 
 141. The student has now arrived at that portion of the subject 
 in which the use of the crude state of the noun becomes most 
 strikingly apparent. This use has been already noticed at r. 36., 
 pp. 19, 20 ; and its formation explained, pp. 21 — 27, In all com- 
 pound nouns (with some few exceptions) the last word alone 
 admits of declension, and the preceding word or words require 
 to be placed in the crude form, this crude form admitting of a 
 plural as well as singular signification. 
 
 Native grammarians class compound nouns under five heads : 
 the 1st they call T,aTPirRirsB.a, or those composed of two nouns, 
 the first of which (being in the crude) would be, if uncompounded, 
 in a case different from, or dependent on, the last ; as, '*i«T'H*TT , 
 " moon-light " (for Mr^^ TWT, " the light of the moon '') ; ^Ifj^cd^roS: . 
 -^. -^,* "skilled in arms'' (for ^n?^ cF^IqJ;) ; »rfiBroftnr., -m, -ifr 
 
 * Observe, that in this chapter the nom, case, and not the cmde, of a substantive 
 terminating a compound wUl be given, and in the instance of an adjective foi-ming 
 the last member of a compound, the nom. case masc., fern., and neut. The 
 examples are chiefly taken from the Hitopadesha, and sometimes the oblique cases 
 jn which thev are there found have been retained 
 
158 COMPOUND WORDS. 
 
 adorned with gems " (for irftufiR gftin). The 2d, 
 
 B-WTAXfBWA, 
 
 or those formed by the aggregation into one compound of two or 
 more nouns (the last word being, according to circumstances, 
 either in the dual, plural, or neuter singular, and the pre- 
 ceding word or words being in the crude), when, if uncompounded, 
 they would all be in the same case, connected by a copulative 
 conjunction ; as, JjixP^lufi, " master and pupil " (for it^: f^imva ) ; 
 JTTJij^rrfv^ftoliT: , " death, sickness, and sorrow '" (for JTT?ir ^rrfv: lS[ftoir?j) ; 
 MlCmm^, " hand and foot '' (for tnfti: ttt^). The 3d, karikeasha- 
 RAYA, or those composed of an adjective and substantive, the 
 adjective being placed first in its crude state, when, if uncom- 
 pounded, it would be in grammatical concord with the substantive ; 
 as, fll^^flcjj:, "a good disposition" (for TTJtn ^f^) ; ^l^^lPlU . "all 
 things " (for ^IfTftu ^=mfi!!r). The 4th, nxmov, or those in which 
 a numeral in its crude state is compounded with a noun, either 
 so as to form a singular collective noun, or an adjective ; as, 
 f%msr, "three qualities" (for -girt Jjmi); f^Pjm, -W, -^y "possess- 
 ing the three qualities." The 5th, BAHWxtzai,^ or those formed 
 of any number of words associated to form an epithet to a noun ; 
 as, ^^rgTw:, -vn, -H, "brilliant as the moon "; JTTJIRnfv^ftsii: , -eRT, -oR, 
 "liable to death, sickness, and sorrow"; ^rrg^ft^:, -^, -^, "well- 
 disposed." 
 
 Such then, in brief, is the native division of compound words, 
 a division leading to some confusion, from the incompleteness and 
 want of sufficient comprehensiveness in the definitions, and the 
 absence of sufficient distinctness and opposition between the seve- 
 
 * These names either furnish examples of the several kinds of compounds, or 
 give some sort of definition of them. Thus, rirMiNNI, "his servant," is an example 
 of the 1st kind (for tt^ "T^t) ; 1"^: is a definition of the 2d kind, meaning 
 "conjunction"; ofiT^VTT?!: is a definition of the od kind, i.e. "containing the 
 object," (ep^) ; f^TTt is an example of the 4th kind, meaning " any thing to the 
 value of two cows "; W?wH^: is an example of the 5th kind, meaning " possessed of 
 much rice." There is a 6th class of compounds called ^r^pfhrr^; acyayibhdvah, 
 i.e. "the indeclinable state"; but these will be noticed under the head of compound 
 adverbs. 
 
COMPOUND NOUNS. 159 
 
 ral parts or members of the division. For it is plain, from the 
 examples given, that the 5th class of compounds may often be 
 regarded as another name for the first three, when they take the 
 form of adjectives declinable in three genders ; and that the second 
 species of the 4th class is for this reason referriblc to the 5tli. 
 The student, moreover, finds it difficult to understand why, if the 
 definition of the 5th class of compounds be, that they are epithets 
 of other nouns ; such compounds as ^IW^^I^ and Jrfw^fnw should 
 not be comprehended under it. And further, he is often at a 
 loss to refer a compound to its proper head,* from the inadequacy 
 of the definitions to express all the cases included under each 
 class. 
 
 In the following pages the subject is discussed according 
 to a different method, although it has been thought desirable to 
 keep the native arrangement in view. 
 
 Compound nouns may be regarded either as simply or com- 
 plexly compounded. The latter have reference to a class of com- 
 pounds within compounds, very prevalent in poetry, involving 
 two or three species of simple compounds under one head. 
 
 SIMPLY COMPOUNDED NOUNS. 
 142. These will be divided into, 1st, Dependent in case (corre- 
 sponding to Tatpurusha) ; 2d, Aggregative {Dwandwa) ; 3d, De- 
 scriptive + (corresponding to Karmadharaya) ; 4th, Collective 
 (corresponding to Dwigu) ; 5th, Relative (corresponding to Bahu- 
 vrlhi). This last includes, a. Relative form of absolute Dependent 
 compounds, terminated by substantives; b. Relative form of 
 Aggregative compounds ; c. Relative form of Descriptive com- 
 pounds ; d. Relative form of Collective compounds ; e. Relative 
 form of substantives in composition with certain adverbial prefixes. 
 
 * As, for instance, such a compound as ^W^. -^iT, -^, "any thing black 
 and white." 
 
 t As being composed of an adjective or participle preceding a substantive, and 
 always descriptive of the substantive. Prof. Bopp calls them " Determinativa," a 
 word of similar import. Tlie names " Dependent" and "Collective" were sug- 
 gested by Prof. Bopp's " Dependentia " ai:d " Collectiva. " 
 
160 DEPENDENT COMPOUNDS. 
 
 dependent compounds, or compounds dependent in case 
 (tatpurusha). 
 
 Accusatively Dependent. 
 
 143. These comprehend all those compounds in which the 
 relation of the first word (being in the crude) to the last is equi- 
 valent to that of an accusative case. They are generally com- 
 posed of a noun in the first member, and a participle or noun of 
 agency in the last; as, 4<jiJiTivi:, -TTT, -Ti» "one who has obtained 
 heaven" (equivalent to ^^f irnn) ; ril^.5|l?{l, "one who speaks kind 
 words"; "^f;^., "one who gives much "; ^T^STTfT, " one who bears 
 arms." 
 
 a. Before the nouns of agency the accusative case is often 
 retained, especially in poetry; as, ^rft»^:> -TT, -A, "enemy- 
 subduing"; 4<^^^'H: > -m, -A, "heart-touching"; >T>T1t;, -TI. -i. 
 " fear-inspiring " (see r. 131. 1.). 
 
 Instrumentally Dependent. 
 
 144. Or those in which the relation of the first word (being in 
 the crude) to the last is equivalent to that of an instrumental case. 
 These are very common, and are, for the most part, composed of 
 a substantive in the first member, and a passive participle in the 
 last; as, ofTwrf^:. -WT, -Tt, "beguiled by avarice" (for ^t>l^ 
 ifrf^) ; ci^^f^ri :, -m, -if, " covered with clothes "; U>j,i(r=»1ri:, -HT, -W, 
 "honoured by kings"; Niii.^lH:, -"^, -"A, "deserted by {i.e. desti- 
 tute of) learning "; |:^Tt:. -fr, -^, " pained with grief "; ^^rrTJT^:, 
 -TTT, -if, "done by one's self"; ^snt^W^T?^:, -"^, -ut- "like the sun" 
 (for 'srrf^^, ^r?^.). 
 
 a. Sometimes, but rarely, this kind of compound contains a 
 substantive or noun of agency in the last member ; as, r«jiir.v«t , 
 " money acquired by science "; ^l^'^M^flcjl, " one who lives by arms." 
 
 Datively Dependent 
 
 145. Or those in which the relation of the first word to the 
 last is equivalent to that of a dative ; as, Mr<MM.'«<«=fic4> " bark for 
 clothing"; ^KlilNIri :, -in, -if, "come for protection" (for \\m\*\ 
 ^IJlri ). This kind of compound is very rare, and is generally 
 supplied by the use of ^ (r. 139. e) ; as, ^ir^iT^ 
 
DEPENDENT COMPOUNDS OH TATPURl SHA, 161 
 
 AblativeJii Dependent, 
 
 146. Or those in wliidi the relation of the first word to tlie 
 last is equivalent to that of an ablative ; as, um^J?:, -■?!, -F, 
 " fallen from the kinp^doni " (for TH^n^ H?:) ; >T^^: , " other 
 than you " (for H^'^'^:) ; M'M^M. " fear of you/'' 
 
 Genitively Dependent, 
 
 147. Or those in which the relation of the first word to the 
 last is equivalent to that of a genitive. These are the most 
 common of all dependent compounds, and may generally be 
 expressed by a similar compound in English They are for the 
 most part composed of two substantives ; as, flH^rJll, " sea-shore '' 
 (for ■^mTTRI ^' " shore of the sea ") ; ^Tjoy^Mtf, " horse-back "; 
 ^r^^:. "bow-string"; ^fgifiTTTf, "brick-house''; frrfrTr^, "moun- 
 tain-torrent''; ^T^pTT:, "acquisition of wealth "; fV'Tp.'^n. " state of 
 misfortune ■'; ^^f^:, "separation of friends"; "H^^. "on whose 
 brow '^ (loc. c.) ; 'BT^:, " his words "; ftpj^, " on what account ?" 
 V»^T^, " on account of virtue "; ^#;^;, " with hundreds of fools " 
 (inst. c. I ; "gVcJTf^, "a couple of shlokas "; ^TcT^, "the surface of 
 the earth"; Mrvj^lMPri ;, "lord of the earth"; riWl^HN . "for his 
 support" (dat. c.) ; »sWr^-4"i:, "our sons"; R^rlr, "thy deed"; 
 fcnTT^» " a father s speech "; 'l^int. " the gate of death "; 
 ^^aTHnn^, " fulfilment of wishes "; JTRpI^:. " a mother's joy." 
 
 a. Sometimes an adjective in the superlative degree, used 
 substantively, occupies the last place in the compound ; as, ff|.;$ ) 8 ; 
 or (j^Mt^i^:, " the best of men." 
 
 b. In a few instances the genitive case is retained ; as, f^^TT^rfir: . 
 " lord of men "; "i^j^wfiT: , " lord of day." 
 
 Locatively Dependent, 
 
 148. Or those in which the relation of the first word to the 
 last is equivalent to that of a locative case ; as, m^»hm :. -'^. -'^. 
 "sunk in the mud" (for xj-J »r^) ; mnirf^FR), " sporting in the 
 sky; sT^^^rr, "sport in the water"; xrni^TTfi". "a dweller in a 
 village"; ai<«j»i:, "born in the water." 
 
 a. It is very usual to retain the locative case, especially hpfore 
 nouns of agency : as, xn^Tf^, "a villncror "; T T r^-qr . . "going in 
 
 V 
 
162 AaGREGATIVE COMPOUNDS OR DWANDWA. 
 
 the water"; Tdirgf^TT:, -m, -TT, "ornamented on the breast" 
 (see r. 131. 1.). 
 
 Dependent in more than one Case. 
 
 149. Dependent compounds do not always consist of two words. 
 They may be composed of almost any number of nouns, all 
 depending upon each other, in the manner that one case depends 
 upon another in a sentence ; thus, ^Tgf^irinfir^lTJfl": , -'R^, -'^, 
 " passed beyond the range of the eye " (for ^^"tff f^^^ ^rfrTSiFff:) ; 
 ITTTHfl^W:, " standing in the middle of the chariot"; ^fhrqlT^lD^^- 
 TTT^jwrftjTiT:, "skilful in censuring the means of rescuing those in 
 danger." 
 
 AGGREGATIVE COMPOUNDS (dWANDWA). 
 
 150. This class of compounds has no parallel in other languages. 
 WTien two or more persons or things are enumerated together, 
 
 it is usual in Sanscrit, instead of connecting them by a copulative, 
 to aggregate them into one compound word. No syntactical 
 dependence of one case upon another subsists between the mem- 
 bers of Dwandwa compounds, since they must always consist of 
 words which, if uncompounded, would be in the same case ; and no 
 other grammatical connection exists than that which would 
 ordinarily be expressed by the use of the copulative conjunction 
 and in English, or ^ in Sanscrit. And it should be observed, that 
 the chief difference between this class and the last turns upon 
 this dependence in case of the words compounded on each other ; 
 insomuch that the existence or absence of such dependence, as 
 deducible from the context, is, in some cases, the only guide by 
 which the student is enabled to refer the compound to the one 
 head or to the other. Thus, n^;f^rir^^r=BT: may either be a 
 Dependent compound, and mean " the servants of the pupils of 
 the Gurn," or an Aggregative, " the Guru, and the pupil, and the 
 servant." And JTtH;;5fH%rf may either be Dependent, " the blood 
 of the flesh," or Aggregative, " flesh and blood." This ambiguity, 
 however, can never occur in aorofregatives inflected in the dual, 
 and very rarely occasions any practical difficulty. 
 
 There are three kinds of Aggregative compounds : 1st, inflected 
 
AGGREGATIVE COMPOUNDS Oil DWANDMA. 103 
 
 in the plural ; AJ, inflcctrd in the dual ; 3d, inHfcted in tlu> sin- 
 gular. In the first two cases the final letter of the crude of the 
 word terminating the compound determines the declension, and 
 its gender the particular form of declension ; in the third case it 
 seems to be a law that this kind of compound cannot be formed 
 unless the last word ends in a, or in a vowel changeable to a, or 
 in a consonant to which a may be subjoined ; and the gender is 
 invariably neuter, whatever may be the gender of the final word. 
 
 Inflecled in the Plural. 
 151. When wore than f7vo animate objects are enumerated, the 
 last is inflected in the plural; as, ^'^ i f^cit.^ ^nt.T;. " Indra, Anila, 
 Yama, and Arka " (for ^; ^f^^: xnr; ^%:) ; TFT .c!tH*<^i.*<^ri i:, " Rama, 
 Lakshmana, and Bharata "; «i|,<>mvnTq^;?r^.Ti: , " the deer, the hunter, 
 the serpent, and the hog." The learner will observe, that althouo-h 
 the last member of the compound is inflected in the plural, each 
 of the members has here a singular acceptation. But a plural 
 signification may often be inherent in some or all of the words 
 constituting the compound ; thus, f*T^>^^fhT;^r^: , " friends, neutrals, 
 and foes" (for U-^m, ^^T^fhrr;, ■^n-^:) ; fia^^TRT^frtTTT: , "lions, 
 tigers, and serpents"; TT.mJ.=k^'.<+.l +i^?Tnr7flJn^Tqm: , "dogs, vul- 
 tures, herons, ravens, kites, jackals, and crows." 
 
 a. So also when more than two inanimate objects are enume- 
 rated, the last may be inflected in the plural; as, V^^TWRTTI'SJT: , 
 "virtue, wealth, enjoyment, and beatitude" (for\n^:, w^:, cfiur:, 
 Jrr^:); ^-rtljui^H H^Htf^, "sacrifice, study, and liberality" (for ^i?rr. 
 'CIizrtR, ^T^). In some of the following a plural signifieation is in- 
 herent; as, MiM^oi.ific^lfJTi "flowers, roots, and fruits"; 'STiTTinTrrrritTTrrf , 
 "of the unborn, the dead, and the foolish" (for ^nrrfTT'iTr, win^. 
 jp^TOt); ■q'T'^'JTl^HTTr: , "eyes, mind, and disposition"; l^TT^^ftciniftjn- 
 iJT'^R^iRnTTftT, " sickness, sorrow, anguish, bonds, and afllictions." 
 
 b. So also when only two animate or inanimate objects are enu- 
 merated, in which a plural signification is inherent, the last is in- 
 flected in the plural; as, Jic^M^ufi:, "gods and men"; TnnfiTr.. 
 "sons and grandsons"; MlrijfMM i:, "fills and rises"; in"3JiTrtTfwr: , 
 " ramparts and trenches "; ^"i^:^. " in pleasures and pains " (for 
 «^u, ^^T?) ; nn .vhwtP^. "sins and virtues." 
 
164 DESCRIPTIVE COMPOUNDS OR KARMADHARAYA. 
 
 Inflected in the Dual. 
 
 152. When only two animate objects are enumerated, in each 
 of which a singular signification is inherent, the last is inflected 
 in the dual ; as, i.m,c!JW*Jntt, " Rama and Lakshmana"" (for xtt: ^5T5TO:); 
 "^•t[.t«<4l , " the moon and sun "; Hii'ohi^, " a deer and a crow," 
 
 a. So also when only two inanimate objects are enumerated, in 
 each of which a singular signification is inherent, the last is inflected 
 in the dual; as, ^^^TFTT'TO^T, "affection and enmity" (for '^TFT:, 
 -iHI<|J|:) ; "^frltrr^, "hunger and thirst" (for -^ fMMmi); "^IITV^, 
 " hunger and sickness "; WRpRT«rt, " by standing and sitting " 
 (for ti^HH> ^TTO^) ; 'l^Trf^'Eft, " honey and ghee "; ^:^:^, " plea- 
 sure and pain." 
 
 b. In aggregating two nouns of relationship, formed with the affix "iT (r. 41.), the 
 first is placed in the nominative case instead of the crude; as, HlrilfMritt, "mother 
 and father." 
 
 Inflected in the Singular Neuter. 
 
 153. When two or more inanimate objects are enumerated, whe- 
 ther singular or plural in their signification, the last may either 
 be inflected as above, r. 151. a. b. r. 152., or in the singular number, 
 neut. gender; as, ■qrnTf^rq^, "flowers, roots and fruits" (for ^nnirrr, 
 g^rftr, tKcrrfJr); tt^^tt^^^^^^, "grass, food, water, and fuel" (for 
 T^^W,, ^, ^^, ^;^) ; ^T^^TT^, "a day and night" (for w^:, ?jf^.) ; 
 f^^, " tjuarters and coimtries " (for f^:, ^^.)- 
 
 a. Sometimes two or more animate objects are thus compounded ; as, M-:! tll-^, 
 "sons and grandsons"; ^^pq^, "elephants and horses"; especially inferior objects, 
 "s >y,'«4H{il<j, "a dog and an outcast." 
 
 b. In enumerating two qualities the opposite of each other, it 
 is common to form a Dwandwa compound of this kind, by 
 doubling an adjective or participle, and interposing the negative 
 a ; as, ^TT^, " moveable and immoveable " (for ^ttt^ W^ ^) ; 
 ^WTSgit, " good and evil "; nnrrfir^ , " in agreeable and disagree- 
 able " (for ftR 'srfiR^); ??T^, "seen and not seen"; e^HI«^d, 
 " doric and not done." 
 
 DESCRIPTIVE COMPOUNDS (kARMADHARAYa). 
 
 151. In describing, qualifying, or defining a substantive by 
 
DESCRITTTVE COMrOlNDS OH K ARM ADH AH A VA . IG5 
 
 means of an adjective or participle, it is common in Sanscrit to 
 compound the two words together, placing the adjective or parti- 
 ciple in the first member of the compound in its crude state ; as, 
 ^IV*H:, "a good man" (for ^rrgl, »T'?r:) ; ftjiLfn^ , "an old friend" 
 (for fM: fir#) ; ftnwp^T*. " a ihwv wife" (for firqT ^T^) ; ^tt^ST^*. 
 " a beautiful wife" (for Jfxrwtft HTx^t) ; WWT^T., " a troubled ocean"; 
 ■q7nr«B»^, "a holy act"; ^TPiTTrRT, "the infinite soul"; ^ <^ff)f ^; , 
 " polished speech "; i^?in<+4<ifiir. " holy acts " (for ^(tutPh ^wrTfiff) ; 
 T^iTTOTITt, " of the best men " (for ;t? i HM I iTTRrt). 
 
 (I. w^ is substituted for the crude Jr^» " great," in the first 
 member of a Descriptive compound^; as, H^IiKnM'., not *<^rM^ ' M :, 
 " a great man" (for »(^T^ "5^*); H^IMIri^, "a great crime" (for 
 H^rMlricii) ; »T^rf^, " a great family." 
 
 b. When the substantive tTiT^, " a king," is taken to form the 
 last member of a Descriptive compound, it loses its proper form 
 of declension as a noun of the 6th class (p. 41.), and is declined 
 like a noun of the 1st class (see p. 42. note #.). '^rf^, "a friend": 
 nfvj^, "a road"; ^^, "the eye"; Jjf^, "the night," and some 
 other words undergo a similar change in inflection, and become 
 nouns of the 1st class; as, ftnr^T^., "a dear friend"; ^Httt^, "a 
 long night." When these latter words form the last member of 
 Dependent or Collective compounds the same holds good; as in 
 
 c. Numerals in their crude state are sometimes found occupying 
 the place of adjectives in the first member of a compound of this 
 class; as, -MH^^IT:, "the four castes"; "q^RTTiirT:. "five arrows." 
 
 \a • • 
 
 d. Adjectives, used substantively, sometimes occui)y the last place in Descriptive 
 compounds; as, iH.H.mr*H<*:, "a very just man"; l4I.H]^rJ, "a very wonderful 
 thing." 
 
 e. Compounds expressing comparison fall under this class, and are composed of 
 two substantives, the last being generally the name of an animal denoting superiority ; 
 as, Ui\M^l|^«4;, (l^i{]fv^:, TJ^'^qH;, equivalent to "an illustrious man." 
 
 * Feminine nouns are rarely compounded in this way ; and there can be no ques- 
 tion that fipn fin'l ^M<4f0 are the proper crudes of the feminine fonn of the 
 adjective. AV'hen the feminine of an adjective is used substantively, it does not 
 give place to the crude ; as, oFTftrjfHnTt . '"a wanton woman." 
 
 t But JTtTfT i^ retained in a Dependent ; as. JT^^TTnTt. "recour-se to the great." 
 
166 COLLECTIVE COMPOUNDS OR DWIQU. 
 
 COLLECTIVE COMPOUNDS (dWIGU). 
 
 155. A numeral is often compounded with a substantive to form 
 a collective noun of the neuter gender ; thus, wl'T, " the four 
 ages" (for ^]|^t. ^f?r) ; ^ff^. "the four quarters"; frf^, 
 "three days" (ef. the Latin triduum); fOT?, "three nights" (ij^ 
 being substituted for Tjf^); ^JT^, "three years" (cf. triennium). 
 
 a. Sometimes the final vowel of the substantive is changed to ^; as, f?^t«R^, 
 " the three worlds." 
 
 RELATIVE COMPOUNDS (bAHUVRIHI). 
 
 156. The greater number of compounds in the preceding four 
 divisions are terminated by substantives, the sense of each being 
 in that case absolute and complete in itself. All such compounds 
 may be used relatively, that is, as epithets of other words, the final 
 substantive becoming susceptible of three genders, like an adjec- 
 tive (p. 32. 'I", p. 34. 'I'.) : and it cannot be too forcibly impressed 
 upon the student that the terms Belative and Bahuvnhi have refe- 
 rence to the adjective use of those compounds only which have a 
 substantive in the last member. This is not to be regarded, 
 therefore, as a distinct division of the subject of compound words, 
 so much as a distinct view of the same subject, the object of which 
 is to show that all compounds, which are in themselves absolute 
 and complete in sense, and are terminated by substantives, may 
 be used adjectively, and in the relation of an epithet to some other 
 word in the sentence. We have given the name relative to com- 
 pounds when thus used, not only for the obvious reason of their 
 being relatively and not absolutely employed, but also because 
 they usually involve a relative pronoun, and are sometimes trans- 
 lated into English by the aid of this pronoun, and are, moreover, 
 resolved by native commentators into their equivalent uncom- 
 pounded words by the aid of the genitive case of the relative (il^). 
 Thus, iTfnnt is a Descriptive compound, meaning, "great wealth": 
 and may be used adjectively in relation to ^i?: ; as, JT^nR: ^m. 
 " a man rvho has great wealth ": or to ^ ; as, ^^imi ^, " a 
 woman who has great wealth," and would be resolved by com- 
 mentators into 1T«T or tttctt: »T?^ vnt- la English we have similar 
 compounds ; as. " high-minded," " left-handed," and the like, where 
 
RELATIVE COMlorNDS OR BAHI\RIJ11. 167 
 
 the substantive terminating tlie compound is converted into an 
 adjective. 
 
 Beladve Form of Dependent Conipoiind>i. 
 
 157. Many Dependent compounds (especially those that are 
 iustrumentally dependent) are already in their 07vn nature relative, 
 and caiHiot be used except in connection with some other word in 
 the sentence. But, on the otlier hand, many others, and espe- 
 cially tliose which are genitively dependent, constituting by far 
 the largest number of this class of compounds, are in their nature 
 absolute, and yield a sense complete in itself. These may be 
 made relative by declining the final substantive after the manner 
 of an adjective. The following are instances: -M'^lcjffl':, -fir:, -fff, 
 " moon-shaped " (p. 34. '|'.), from the absolute compound ^^^n"^: , 
 "the shape of the moon''; ^=j;^t^:, -ift, -tj, "whose form is god- 
 like "; ^t^tptr:, -tt, -•^,* " splendid as the sun "; ^r«.m<:, -^, -^,'^ 
 " elephant-footed "; •BTTTptr:, -nTI, -^,* " ending at the sea "; JtwpfT:, 
 -TffT, -^, "terminated by death''; oR§"."5ttTm: , -m, -4, or ^;^:, 
 -^^, -^,* "headed by Karna"; f^UH^l^.HlHl, -HT, -^, " named Vishnu- 
 sharma" (p. 42. note t); qi!3tl"<*T^: , -"^t, -■^, "lotus-eyed " (r. 154. b.); 
 ^\imm*^'„ -Wn, -•^, "called Narayana"; th.^^cj;, -^, -^, 
 " founded on wealth "; c4KjjH<9i<|fiT (agreeing with v«TTf^)> " money 
 to the amount of a lac"; J^l^^wt. -"^t -W, "having a club in 
 the hand"'; ^IJM.Mlfw:. -fw., -ftn. "having arms in the hand"; 
 t|tq f^rrq; , -^, -■^, " on the subject of flowers," " relating to flowers." 
 These examples are not distinguishable from absolute dependent 
 compounds, except by declension in three genders. 
 
 a. Many of them, however, are not found, except as relatives ; 
 and if used absolutely would yield a diSerent sense ; thus, -c B^^^ 
 means "the face of Karna," but when used relatively to <mh:. 
 " the kings headed by Kariia." So also '^TT^T?t: signifies " the eye 
 of the spy," but when used relatively to ttstt. " a king who sees by 
 means of his spies," the nom. case masc. being then ^^tt.^^. 
 
 /). The substantive ^nf^, " a beginning," when it occurs in 
 
 * See p. o2. T. -qr*? may be sul.stituted for TTT^ in conipiniiids like ^fwHIti . 
 
168 RELATIVE COMPOUNDS OR BAHUVRIIII. 
 
 the last member of a compound of this nature, is always used 
 relatively to some word expressed or understood, and yields a 
 sense equivalent to et cetera. It is necessarily found either in 
 the plural or neuter singular; as, ^»5T^:, " Indra and the others'" 
 (agreeing with the nom. case ^m: expressed or understood, " the 
 gods commencing with Indra ■") ; '^n'ajT^hTt, " of Agni and the 
 others " (agreeing with g^TrhlH I understood, " of those above- 
 named things of which Agni was the first 'O ; T^irnfH^, " the 
 eyes, &c." (agreeing with ^fr^iiiriir, " the senses commencing with 
 the eyes "). When used in the neut. sing, it either agrees with 
 ■gwr^, "the aforesaid," understood, or with a number of things 
 taken collectively, and the adverb iti * may be prefixed ; as, 
 ^^•TWrf^, " the word devan, &c." (agreeing with ^\ity understood, 
 " the aforesaid sentence of which devan is the first word ") ; 
 ^Tqrf^^, " by liberality, &c." (agreeing with some class of things 
 understood, " by that class of things of which liberality is the 
 first"). Sometimes ^if^ is used for ^if^; as, ^T^rf^, "gifts, 
 &c. ": and sometimes ^rnST; as, ^»5T?IT; ^tu;, "the gods of whom 
 Indra is the first "; or sometimes the substantive Tprfff ; as, 
 
 Belative Form of Aggregative Compounds. 
 
 158. Aggregative compounds are sometimes used relatively; 
 as, fli.'llloMlfv srleK, -■gsT, -ofi, "that which is liable to sorrow, sickness, 
 and death "; especially in the case of adjectives or participles ; as, 
 <J«i|.^li:, "inr, -^, "black and white"; wnTTg%?r:, -"RT, -H, "bathed 
 and anointed"; ifil..5iMM(^:, -^, -^, "city and country"; e^rtl^cJH:, 
 -fTT, -if, "done and done badly"; ^viT5Tvr:, ->TT, -A. "good and 
 evil " (r. 153. i.). Examples are still more common under the 
 head of complex compounds. 
 
 Relative Form of Descriptive Compounds. 
 
 159. A greater number of compound words may be referred to 
 this head than to any other. Every style of writing abounds 
 
 * Sometimes cvam is prefixed ; as, 'l?'^?rnftf*T TT^TTTPfI . " lamentations 
 beginning thus." 
 
RELATIVE COMPOUNDS OK BA IIUVRIII 1. KJ!) 
 
 with thoni. The following may servo as exanii)los : '!jrq srfTfi: . 
 -f^. -f^. "whose strength is small" (p. 31. f.) ; H^rr^:. -^. -^. 
 "whose strength is great" (r. 154. a. p. 32. ■[.) ; h^I.Hj^i:, -jTT:. -"3T:. 
 " whose glory is great" (r. 68. 69.) ; H^lrMI. -WT, -W, " high-mindiMJ " 
 (p. 4), 42.); ■J^TT^ficff:. -ITT, -TT, " of noble demeanour"; •qftlJir^:. 
 -■%:, -fs, "of wise intellect" (p. 34. -j-.) ; ftprvrn^:, -7§t, -^, " having 
 a dear wife";* ^sr^T^TirflTR:, -■JTT. -«t> " not to be reconciled." 
 
 a. Although a passive participle is not often prefixed to a noun 
 in an absolute sense, this kind of combination prevails most ex- 
 tensively in the formation of relative compounds ; as, PTtHFToS": , 
 -^, -^. " whose time has arrived"; ftr^f^:, -m, -"4. " whose pas- 
 sions are subdued"; ^TRT^TTT:, -wr., -w:, "whose mind is composed"; 
 iTrrjT^n, -■^TT. -^, "whose hopes are broken"; ^WTTriri* -WT, -nf, 
 " whose kingdom is taken away"; ^rftnr^K»n:, -WT:, -"3T:» "whose 
 glory is boundless"; c^HchH:, -m, -A, "whose desire is accom- 
 plished," i.e. "successful"; ^^fVpTrT^n^*. . -W^' -^» "by whom 
 the shastras have not been read"; fir^^:, -tjt, -t(, " whose heart 
 is pierced." 
 
 Relative form of Collective Compounds. 
 
 160. The following are examples of Collective or Dwigu com- 
 pounds used relatively: fl"TT^:, -Trff, -^, "two-leaved"; frj^t^i^',, 
 -'ft, -*t, " tri-ocular "; 1Vg#:, -ifT, -^, "three-headed" (^ being 
 substituted for gt^) ; '^ww^:, -^, -^, "four-faced"; Hc^>-«h l *li :, 
 -W, -xj. " quadrangular"; ^nriR:. -TI. -t, " hundred-gated"; 
 TtTf^^:, -?rr, -^, " possessed of the four sciences"; y^«j^:, -"^t, -iif , 
 " thousand-eyed." 
 
 Relative form of Substantives compounded with certain Adverbial 
 Prefixes. 
 
 161. This includes a class of compounds possessing no corre- 
 sponding absolute form,' and composed of an adverb prefixed to a 
 substantive. By far the greater number of these are formed with 
 
 * Occasionally the feminine of the adjective appears in the compound ; as, 
 tfyf^n^: , " having a sixth wife." 
 
 t Unless they be regarded as the relative form of .Vyaylbhava compounds. 
 
 7. 
 
170 COMPLEX COMPOUND NOUNS. 
 
 the adverbial preposition ^, " with," contracted into ^ ; as, ^T^hn, 
 ->JT, -V, "angry"; ^rqE^r., -^, -^. " fruitful " (p. 32. f .) 5 ^^:. 
 -■?^:, -"f^, "possessed of kindred"' (r. o4, 55, 56.); fi hm:» -T*IT. -J^, 
 "energetic"; ^H< »> -''^T, -^y "joyful"; ^rirfsR:, -TT, -^, "ac- 
 companied by ministers " ; ^ 5rVJ» -3?IT> -I'f > "strung" (as a bow). 
 The following are examples of other adverbial prefixes : ^i(mv:, 
 -m. -V, " with uplifted weapon "; v{|r|| HoJik:, -xj, -t, " of various 
 forms"; ajHcjm ;, -m, -H, "where dwelling".? gh.^rHI , -'sn, -■»?, 
 "where born".? ^tj;^:, -vfj;, -fW, "fearless" (p. 33. f.) ; rivi i jm n, 
 -VI, -V, " of that kind." 
 
 COMPLEX COMPOUND NOUNS. 
 
 162. We have now to speak of those complex compound words, 
 or compounds within compounds, which form the most remarkable 
 feature in Sanscrit poetical composition. Instances might be 
 given of twenty or thirty words thus compounded together, but 
 these are the productions of the vitiated taste of more modern 
 times, and are only curious as showing that the power of com- 
 pounding words may often be perverted to the formation of a 
 style the most extravagant and ridiculous. But even in the best 
 specimens of Sanscrit composition, and in the simplest prose writings, 
 four, five, or even six words are commonly compounded together, in- 
 volving two or three forms under one head. It will be easy, how- 
 ever, to determine the character of the forms involved, by the rules 
 propounded in the preceding pages ; in proof of which the student 
 has only to study attentively the examples we are about to give. 
 
 a. Instances of absolute complex compounds, whose sense is 
 complete and unconnected, are not very abundant. The following 
 may be taken as examples : eR^pffiT|fw;;5pTT^>TrftT, " good and evil 
 (occurring) in the revolutions of the interval of time," the whole 
 being a dependent, involving a dependent and an aggregative ; 
 dHIMfri^^QijUii^, " the general and the overseer of the forces," the 
 whole being an aggregative, involving two dependents ; ^fjcfcicirrf- 
 M^.^mr, " the protection from sorrow, enemies, and perils," the 
 whole being a dependent, involving an aggregative ; ^imiDPljI^^^l+J, 
 " the disregarded words of a friend," the whole being a descrip- 
 tive, involving a dependent. 
 
COMTLEX COMPOUND NOUNS. 171 
 
 b. But the greater imniber of complex compounds are used 
 relatively, as epithets of some other word in the sentence ; as, 
 ^ i rcj5ri;»{j«^.H<4H: , -fft, -tt. "whose teeth and eyes were decayed," 
 the whole being the relative form of descriptive, involving an aggre- 
 gative ; ^ [ ;^H I tj|l j^m ;. -"JTT. -'t. "having a white garland and un- 
 guents,'' the whole being the relative form of aggregative, involv- 
 ing a descriptive ; i|^| sfrH ohH:, -K\, -if, " done in a former birth," 
 the whole being the relative form of dependent, involving a de- 
 scriptive ; f^STT^TTt^ir: , -5T, -^, "advanced in learning and age," 
 the whole being the relative form of dependent, involving an ag- 
 gregative ; ^fMd.^JAJsfl.^TH:, -»n. -«T. "having fresh garlands, and 
 being free from dust," the whole being tlie relative form of ag- 
 gregative, involving a descriptive and dependent ; "STftrq^T^i^T: , 
 -TJ:, -v., " whose head was moist with unction." 
 
 c. The substantive ^rrf^, " a beginning," often occurs in com- 
 plex relative compounds, as in simple relatives (r. 157. b.) ; thus, 
 ^rairrftofiT^: , " parrots, starlings, &c." (agreeing w^ith "qrHJlLi:, " birds 
 beginning with parrots and starlings "), the whole being the relative 
 form of dependent, involving an aggregative ; ^P^i P^M^jfrj. " peace, 
 war, &c." (agreeing with -glft^ understood) ; Jjf^j^^FmTf^.^'^; , -W> 
 -ifi, "possessed of houses, temples, &c." Similarly, ^trt in the 
 example TWTT^^ITSrr: (agreeing with h»T:» "garlands possessing the 
 best odour and other qualities "), 
 
 d. Long complex compounds may be generally translated by beginning at the 
 last word and proceeding regularly backwards; as in the following JT^TraoHC/'l <M. - 
 *J*.*fc.4'KfHrc^H,<*ir<*c:il<^m «^nri«*.44l?JN^:, -^, -•^, "causing pleasure by the 
 music of the voice of the cuckoo, blended with the hum emitted by tbe swanns of 
 joyous bees." 
 
 P- ^TTtTSR or '^TJ, as occupying the last place in a complex relative, denote " com- 
 posed of "; thus, ^♦fyvj l,VJM<J|rri'*»^<+<lrH<* ^^5^, " a force consisting of elephants, 
 horses, chariots, infantry, and servants"; mJ«1«^.^^r1.riM,ri,^i) 4*^410, "the two 
 actions consisting of the good and evil done in a former l)irth." 
 
 Certain Anomalous Compoiinh. 
 f. There are certain compounds which are too anomalous in their 
 formation to admit of ready classification under any one of tin- 
 preceding heads. Amongst these may be placed those compounds 
 
172 ANOMALOUS COMPOUNDS. 
 
 expressive of comparison or likeness, usually included under 
 the Karmadharaya or Descriptive class. In these the adjec- 
 tive is placed last ; as, •^l^ni-ci^^:, -^, -^, "fickle as a shadow '^ 
 "^^fttnrtj -'TT, -JT, "like foam"'; ^t^^^^ttr:, -v[\, -^, "dark as a 
 cloud"; ^V^f^^cft^;, -5§T» -Irr, "spread out like a mountain"; 
 'ic*.r=K.c4lc*7=IMc4:,-Q^, -^> "unsteady as a trembling drop of water"; 
 HfciH\^c*.iri^;rfl.c^:. -^> -^. "tremulous as water on the leaf of a 
 lotus "; the last two examples are complex. 
 
 g. There is a common anomalous compound formed by placing 
 '^TfR. after another word, to express " another," " otlier "; as, 
 ■jprRpift, " another place "; TnrpaTJl!! ^> " along with another king "; 
 lI^TpinjftT. " other births." The following examples, also, are not 
 readily assignable to any class : Traijftf^Tnfhft, " a fighter who aban- 
 dons all idea of life"; flTI.fl. Pi rflu:, -irr, -^^, "accompanied by the 
 Sarasa "; »il^B.^|, " never before seen." 
 
 Compound Nouns formed from Boots combined with Prepositions. 
 
 163. In the next section it will be shewn that the combination 
 of roots with prepositions prevails most extensively in Sanscrit. 
 From roots thus combined nouns of the most various significations 
 may be formed; thus, from ^, "to seize," with f^ and w^, is 
 formed <^^^k:, "practice," from ^, "to do," with "SR, ■^HTcRR, 
 " imitation." Hardly a line can occur in any book that does not 
 afford an example of this kind of compound. 
 
 Sect. II.— COMPOUND VERBS. 
 
 164. The learner might look over the list of 1900 simple roots, 
 and very well imagine that in some of these would be contained 
 every possible variety of idea, and that the aid of prepositions and 
 adverbial prefixes to expand and modify the sense of each root 
 would be unnecessary. But the real fact is, that there are com- 
 paratively very few Sanscrit roots in common use ; and that whilst 
 those that are so appear in a multitude of different forms by the 
 prefixing of one or two or even three prepositions, the remainder 
 
 So ^Nlf^fO^: in Nala, translated by Bopp, iimbra gemhiatus 
 
COMPOUND VERBS. 173 
 
 are (juito useless for any practical purposes, exce})t the formation 
 of nouns. 
 
 Hence it is that compound verbs are of more frequent occur- 
 rence than simple ones. They are formed in two ways : 1st, by 
 combining roots with prepositions ; 2dly, by combining the auxi- 
 liaries ^, "to do," and vr, "to be," with adverbs, or nouns con- 
 verted into adverbs. 
 
 Compound Verbs formed by combining Prepositions with Hoots. 
 I6n. The following list exhibits the prepositions chiefly used in 
 
 combination with roots : 
 
 ^frT a/i, "across," "beyond"; as, ^rfinn (p. 112.); ^nft, " to pass 
 by," "transgress" (pres. ^T^fH, &c. p. 112.). 
 
 'grfVr adhi, " above," " upon," " over "; as, '^fwr, " to stand over," 
 "preside" (p. 107. pres. •THfvfTTBTf'T) ; '^rfV^^, "to climb upon"; 
 ^rfV^ft, "to lie upon" (p. 113.); ^fVpTH, "to go over towards" 
 (p. 107.); ^nft, "to go over" in the sense of "reading" (p. 113.). 
 
 Tirg ami, "after"; as, ^rg^, "to follow"; ^StJVI, "to follow," in 
 the sense of " performing "; "^rg^, " to imitate" (p. 102.) ; ^SHHtT , 
 " to assent." 
 
 ^TfT^ antar, " within "(cf. inter) ; as, ^»irtjT, " to place within," " con- 
 ceal" (p. 119.), in pass, "to vanish"; '5Tnr|, "to be within" 
 (p. 101.) ; ^PfT^, "to walk in the midst" (r. 31.). 
 
 ^m apa, "off," "away" (cf. aixo); as, ^nTT^, ^im, ^^ (from ^tj 
 and ^, p. 112.), "to go away"; -HM»/I, "to lead away"; '^TPra^, 
 " to abstract "; ^TT^, " to bear away." It also implies detrac- 
 tion ; as, ^TT^. " to defame." 
 
 ^stPt api, " on," " over," only used with tn and ^f? ; as, ^rfrnT, " to 
 shut up"; ^rPtR^, "to bind on." The initial a is generally 
 rejected, leaving fTrvT, f^T^?. 
 
 ^^ abhi, "to," "towards" (jf. ctt/) ; as, ^rftnTT, ^wt, "to go to- 
 wards "; ^fH>rR , " to run towards "; »*<r»<g^| , " to behold " 
 (p. 107.); 'srfiTf^, "to address," "salute." 
 
 ^nr rtrff, "down," "off"; as, '^R^, ^^, "to descend"; ^ ^ e^ , 
 "to look down"; ^r^, "to throw down," "scatter"; ^TqRrfTr 
 "to cut off." It also implies disparagement; as, W^:^, "to 
 despise" (p. 123.); ^^ft^, "to insult " (p. 111.). 
 
174 COMPOUND VERBS. 
 
 ^ a, "to," "towards,"" "up" (Latin ad)\ as, ^srrftn?!^, "to enter"; 
 ^n^, " to go towards "; ^rr^^, " to mount up." When pre- 
 fixed to im^ and -m, "to go," and c[T, "to give," it reverses the 
 action ; as, "mn^, ^sum, " to come "; ^t^, " to take." With 
 ■^T. , "to practise." 
 ■^ ut, " up," " upwards " (opposed to ffr) ; as, -g^i. (r. 16.), Tf^, 
 "to go up," "rise" (pres. Jt^^lPH , 1st conj.) ; -j^t, "to fly up"; 
 TS ("^ and ^, r. 18.), "to extract"; ^fwr^ and Twfti^r (r. 15.), 
 " to open the eyes "; TT^mj^, ^fo5^» " to cut up "; ^'rij^Jj^, " to root 
 up"; Tfe, "to lift up" ("31^ and f^, r. 17.). When prefixed 
 to 7OTT it causes the elision of s ; as, "^T^rr. " to stand up." In 
 some cases it reverses the action ; as, from TTfl!^, " to fall," 
 ■^r^nT, "to leap up"; from 7{f{^ "to bend down," g^ (r. 15.), 
 " to raise up "; from tpt , "to keep down," TUJ{, " to lift up." 
 ^T| upa, " to," " towards " (jf. utto), joined like ^TT and ^lf>T to roots 
 of motion ; as, 4i|i|l, " to approach "; yq-«<l., " to wait upon," 
 with f^, " to sit down." 
 fir ni, " down," " downwards," " under " (opposed to Tff ) ; as, fiT^ 
 " to fall down "; f^nr^. " to suppress "; f»TfiT^ and f^Hlc^, " to 
 close the eyes "; fqft^, fw. 'anr. " to lay down," " deposit "; 
 ■ftrf^* " to go within," " encamp." With ^^ it signifies " to 
 return," " desist "; with i^pr » " to hear." In some cases it does 
 not alter the sense ; as, ftr^, " to kill." 
 f^ nir, "out"; as, f^^\ (cf. note, p. 15.), fH^i^, f^.^ (r. 31.), "to 
 go out "; f^l^TT, " to cut up "; ffT^TT, " to come to an end," 
 " cease." With f^, "to determine." 
 1TO para, " back," " backwards " (cf. -napa). combined with f^ and 
 >T in the sense of " defeat "; as, tRjfsT, " to overcome " (cf. -napa- 
 viKoco), iEsch. Choe.) ; tnnr^, " to be defeated." When joined with 
 ^, 2d conj., it signifies " to retire towards " (pres. '^fir) ; when 
 with ^, 1st conj. atra., " to run away," " to retreat," r being 
 changed to I (pres. TT^n^). 
 Tift, pari, " around " (cf. Tiept, per) ; as, tift,%^, '^f^^, " to sur- 
 round "; Tift:^^, q ft/ T *^ . " to go round "; "qd^, " to look round," 
 " examine "; ^ft^» " to turn round "; trfbrnr, " to run round." 
 When prefixed to oR it signifies "to adorn," and ?|^ is inserted, 
 tiftc^. With >|^ "to despise," and with 5, "to avoid." It some- 
 
COMPOUND VERBS. 175 
 
 times merely gives intensity to tlie action ; as, xrf^jin^, " to 
 abandon altogether/'' 
 
 ■R prn, " before/' " forward " (cf. iipo, pro, pro) ; as, TPP^. WCQ, " to 
 proceed "; inn^, " to set before," " present "; ir^, " to begin "; 
 HVT^, " to run forward "; irWT, " to set out," " advance "; "m^, 
 "to be superior," " prevail "; tt?^ ." to foresee." With ^M^, 
 "to deceive." In combination with the causal of ^, it drops 
 its final a ; as, ummiCh. " I send." The r influences a following 
 nasal by r. 21. ; as, TTOT?^, " to bend before," " salute." 
 
 ufw prati, "against," "towards," "back again"; as, iifri q v , "to 
 fight against "; inft, " to go towards " (pres. Tj^fir) ; iifinrH , " to 
 return"; "Rfw^, "to counteract"; ufirf;^, "to beat back," 
 "repel"; TrfTT^, "to answer"; TlfiTc5>T "to recover"; uf?rtft, 
 " to lead back "; irfinr*^. '* to re-salute." With ^, " to promise "; 
 with xi^, "to arrive at," "obtain." 
 
 f^ vi, " apart," implying " separation^ " distinction,'''' " distribution,'''' 
 " dispersion " (Latin dis, se) ; as, f^^ , " to wander about "; fr^ , 
 "to vacillate"; f^, "to roam for pleasure"; f^, "to dissi- 
 pate"; fr?, " to tear asunder"; f^>ni(^, "to divide"; fM^, 
 " to distinguish." Sometimes it gives a privative signification ; 
 as, f^^, "to disunite"; f^, "to forget"; f^, "to sell." 
 With ^ , "to change for the worse." Sometimes it has no 
 apparent influence on the root ; as, f^^T^T, " to perish." 
 
 ^ Sam, "with," "together with" (crui', con); as, ^rf^, ftg>^ , "to 
 collect"; ^^, "to join together"; TIl^, "to meet together"; 
 ^TKl^, " to happen "; ^rf^, " to contract." With a; it signifies 
 " to perfect," and ^ is inserted, ^t^ . It is often prefixed 
 without altering the sense ; as, fi^rj^, " to be produced." 
 166. Two prepositions are often combined with a root ; as, ^qr^, 
 
 "to open" (f^, ^); ^, "to assemble" (^, ^m, with root \); 
 
 Hr*ilMH^, " to prostrate one's self" (u, f^, r. 21.) ; ijte, " to raise up" 
 
 (ij, T?^, with root ^). 
 
 Occasionally three prepositions are combined ; as, ifaq i^, " to 
 
 predict" (u, f^, ^; Trj^^, "to answer" (nfir, tk, '?n). 
 
 * The final i of the prepositions, jf^, xyft., f^, is optionally lengthened in 
 forming certain nouns ; as, TTcfh^.R, y;|O^I^, "jfhRR. 
 
176 COMPOUND VERBS. 
 
 167. In conjugating compound verbs formed with prepositions, 
 the augment and reduplication do not change their position, but 
 are inserted between the preposition and the root;* as, q ^i ir 4 . 1st 
 pret. of ^, with xcfi; Trnfr^, 1st pret. of f^, witli "g-TT ; ^.Mrc<rri» , 
 1st pret. of T^, with ^g ; nfri^lUM, 2d pret. of ^, with irfir ; jTl-rrf^K, 
 2d pret. of if, with H and TTT. 
 
 168. Grammarians restrict certain roots to particular voices, 
 when in combination with particular prepositions ; as, for ex- 
 ample, the root f^, "to conquer," with f^, and the root f^, " to 
 enter," with ff{, are restricted to the atmanepada; but no certain 
 rules can be propounded on this subject : and in the two epic 
 poems especially, the choice of voice seems so entirely arbitrary 
 and subservient to the purposes of metre, that many atmanepada 
 primitive, and even passive verbs, are occasionally permitted to 
 take a parasmaipada inflection.' 
 
 Co?npou)id Verbs fanned by combining Adverbs with the Boots ^ and H. 
 
 169. These are of two kinds ; 1st, those formed by combining 
 adverbs with g; and >|^; 2dly, those formed by combining nouns 
 used adverbially with these roots. Examples of the first kind are, 
 ^?^, "to adorn"; wrf^, "to make manifest" (cf. note, p. 15.) ; 
 ^ff^, "to eject"; jr^, "to place in front" "follow"; Pmhio^, 
 " to deprive "; ifTrfi, " to entertain as a guest"; ^h*^, " to revere "; 
 ' <j i a|lrf > HT^^. " to become manifest," &c. 
 
 170. In forming the second kind, the final of a crude word being 
 a or o, is changed to t ; as, from ^rsf, flTifl<j, " to make ready ;" 
 from orair, ejroiftofi, "to blacken"; or, in a few cases, to a, as fjnTTcfi 
 from fin. A final i or u are lengthened ; as, from ^f^. "5|^^J,' 
 " to become pure "; from ^, "^^^ " to lighten." A final ri is 
 
 * There are a few exceptions to this rule in the Mahabharata ; as in ^TT^^ET^RTT 
 (Prof. Johnson's Ed. p. 33.). 
 
 t Thus, ITiT , " to strive," and T([^ , " to beg for," which are properly atmane- 
 pada verbs, are found in the paras. Instances of passive verbs have been given at 
 p. 89. notet- On the other hand, tT»^, "to rejoice," which is properly a paras- 
 maipada verb, is found in the atm. 
 
rOM POUND A U VERBS OH A V Y AYIHII A V A. 177 
 
 (.•lumped to t} n ; as, from JrnT. JrNt»J. "to boconie a luotlicr." A 
 final as becomes eithci- 7. as, from W^?T. ^^*Jo " to be of gopd 
 mind"; or asl, as, from f^R^T. f^RjfhjT. " to place on the head." 
 
 o. But the greater number of compounds of this kind are 
 formed from crude nouns in a. The following are other examples : 
 ^i^ ' f , "to esteem as a straw"; w<Aft<*. "to stiffen"; ifohpMW^. "to 
 fix tlie mind on one object." 
 
 b. Sometimes w«T, placed after a crude noun, is used to form a 
 compound verb of this kind; as, from jTqS, " water," if^Wi^. "to 
 reduce to liquid "; from >?Fn^, " ashes," HWHTi^, " to reduce to 
 ashes." 
 
 Sect. III.— COMPOUND ADVERBS (corresponuing to 
 
 AVYAYIBHAVA CoMPOUNDs). 
 
 171. Compound adverbs are formed by combining adverbs, pre- 
 positions, or adverbial prefixes with nouns in the singular number 
 neuter gender. 
 
 a. The greater number are formed with the adverbial preposi- 
 tion ^ saha, contracted into ^ sa ; as, from cRfq, "anger," ^brH. 
 " angrily "; from ^T^, " respect," ^n^, " respectfully '' ; from 
 ^8l^*mri, " prostration of the limbs," ^ iB i ^- qi d , " reverentially." 
 As, however, the neuter of all adjectives may be used adverbially, 
 these compound adverbs may be regarded as the neuter of the 
 fifth form of relative compounds (r. 161.). 
 
 b. The following may be taken as examples of compound ad- 
 verbs formed with other prefixes: 'Sj.ii^tf, "according to seniority"; 
 TJT^^, " over every limb "; wfri/<r*4, " every month "; Tj^i^fvr, " ac- 
 cording to rule "; Trqr^rf^, or ^HTsA+i, " according to one's power "; 
 *''^'.*J^' " lisppily ; '^T'T'Bf, " before the eyes" (^^ being substituted 
 for '^rfgf , cf. p. 165. b.) ; >i< H^iM , " undoubtedly "; firft^. " without 
 distinction." 
 
 c. Some of the advei'bs at r. 139. may be placed after crude 
 nouns; thus, ^JTc^^inmft^, "near the child"; X^^f^, "for the sake 
 of protection." 
 
 d. A kind of compound adverb is formed by doul)ling a noun, 
 lengthening the final of the first word, and changing the final of 
 the last to i; as, from •^^, "a stick," (^^^It^O lg, "mutual striking." 
 
178 SYNTAX. 
 
 e. Complex compound adverbs, involving other compounds, are 
 sometimes found ; as, ^.Jl^.Hft^w, " not difFerently from one's 
 own house''; ^^iTrf%^T»T?JTar.iT^:pT^, " regardlessly of the curving 
 of her waist bending under the weight of her bosom." 
 
 /. The indec. part. '5TTW, " having begun," is joined with ^rer, 
 "today" (^rem«T), in the sense of "from this time forward." 
 injfifr is placed adverbially after words, in the same sense ; as, 
 WsnT^jfir, " from birth upwards." 
 
 CHAPTER X. 
 
 SYNTAX. 
 
 Strive as we may, it is impossible to free the orthographical and 
 etymological part of Sanscrit Grammar from a certain degree of 
 intricacy and complexity. But admitting, as we do, this com- 
 plexity in the early part of the subject to be greater than is 
 ordinarily found, we at the same time affirm, that, in the ag- 
 gregate calculation, the preponderance of difficulty is on the side 
 of the classical languages. When the student has once thoroughly 
 mastered the rules relating to the combination of letters and the 
 inflection of nouns and verbs, the path, in Sanscrit, becomes easy 
 to him, and he passes with the utmost certainty to a complete ac- 
 quaintance with the subject in all its bearings. Not so in Greek 
 or Latin. At the point in Sanscrit where our labours end, at that 
 point in the others do our real labours begin ; and the young 
 scholar, however versed in the declension of nouns and conjugation 
 of verbs, finds, when he enters upon the syntax of these two lan- 
 guages, that he has hardly passed the threshold of his studies. It 
 is in the syntax of Greek and Latin that the true test of scholar- 
 ship lies. It is here that an almost interminable field of inquiry 
 opens before the grammarian, and difficulties assail the student, 
 demanding, for their complete mastery, a more than ordinary de- 
 gree of mental application and capacity. In Sanscrit, on the other 
 hand, the subject of syntax is reducible to a few plain rules, and 
 
SYNTAX. 171) 
 
 might almost be merged in that of compound words. The almost 
 entire absence of prepositions in government with nouns removes 
 one fertile source of difficulty ; and such is the extraordinary pre- 
 valence of compounds, that the student who has acquired a thorough 
 insight into their formation has little else to learn, and the writer 
 who has properly expounded this portion of the grammar has 
 already more than half completed his investigation into the laws 
 which regulate syntactical combinations. We shall endeavour, in 
 the present chapter, to collect together all the most useful rules 
 for the connection and collocation of uncompounded words, pre- 
 supposing, as we have done throughout, that the student is ac- 
 (juainted with the general principles of the subject before us. 
 Much vagueness and uncertainty, however, may be expected to 
 attach to the rules propounded, when it is remembered that San- 
 scrit literature consists almost entirely of poetry, and that the laws 
 of syntax are ever prone to yield to the necessities of metrical 
 composition. 
 
 Observe, in the present chapter on Syntax, that the subject may 
 be made as clear as possible, each word will be separated from 
 the next, and vowels will not be allowed to coalesce, although such 
 coalition be required by the laws of combination. Whenever com- 
 pounds are introduced into the examples, a dot, placed underneath, 
 will mark the division of the words. The examples have been, 
 in general, selected from the Hitopadesha, or the Mahabharata, 
 with the view of serving as an easy delectus, in which the beginner 
 may exercise himself before passing to continuous translation. 
 
 CONCORD OF THE VERB WITH THE NOMINATIVE CASE. 
 
 172. The verb must agree with the nominative case in number 
 and person, as in the following examples: ^T^ chWlf^ir, "I must 
 perform;'' RPT ^wff . "do thou attend''; TT ^?;TfiT, "he gives"; 
 wr^ ^:, " we two say""; «*Tftrf| ■gt^, "the pigeons said"; xxm »T^ 
 ^ ifJiHH:, "the king and minister went": i<N-m ■«<»^l4if fdad:, "as 
 long as the moon and sun remain "; ^tt f^^fHTfT, " do you two re- 
 flect "; ^xnr -Hii(M, "do ye come"; «-nm: yi*^^, "good men are 
 honoured"; Wlfir ^n^, "the wind blows"; ^Jtfvfrf I^r^ll^*:. " the 
 moon rises"; n^^A Tjai. "the flower blossoms." 
 
180 SYNTAX. 
 
 a. When a participle takes the place of the verb, it must agree 
 with the nominative in number and gender \ as, TffTnr:, "he went"; 
 W niTT, " she went "; «iiu|N "^^cji^fj, " the two women spoke "; TJWT 
 ^:, " the king was killed "; ^^g^nffT r^sj l P^ , " the bonds were cut." 
 
 h. Sometimes, when it is placed between two or more nominative cases, it agrees 
 with one only ; as, ^cHi; Jl^fwr M-4^, " his wife and son were awakened." 
 
 c. Very often the copula, or verb which connects the subject 
 with the predicate, is omitted ; when, if an adjective stand in 
 the place of the verb, it will follow the rules of concord in gender 
 and number; as, >rff |^» "wealth is difficult of attainment"; 
 W^ ^RTT^T^, " we two have finished eating." But if a substantive 
 stand in the place of the verb, no concord of gender or number 
 need take place ; as, ^«ic[: tf^ ^"R^ , " successes are the road to 
 misfortunes." 
 
 CONCORD OF THE ADJECTIVE WITH THE SUBSTANTIVE. 
 
 173. An adjective, participle, or adjective pronoun, qualifying a 
 substantive, when not compounded with it, must agree with the 
 substantive in gender, number, and case; as, ^rr^: "J^:, "a good 
 man "; iT^^ |:^, " great pain "; ^^^ ^frii^ Tltl?. " "^ these before- 
 mentioned countries "; -^^ ^^-W^t^, " three friends." 
 
 CONCORD OF THE RELATIVE WITH THE ANTECEDENT. 
 
 174 The Relative must agree with the antecedent noun in 
 gender, number, and person ; but, in Sanscrit, the relative pronoun 
 almost invariably precedes the noun to which it refers, and this 
 noun is then put in the same case with the relative, and the pro- 
 noun ^: generally follows in the latter clause of the sentence ; as, 
 q^ iTl^ ^%t ^ ^^^T«T, " of whatever man there is intellect, he is 
 strong." The noun referred to by the relative may also be joined 
 with "W, , as, -q^ ^f%: ^ "^Td ^^5^T^; or may be omitted altogether, 
 as, "m^ TTfirfrnf rnr q'lc^M, " What you have promised, that abide by"; 
 ^mi^ ^M U iiilfH ^3Tf^f^ t: (TTf^fW;, understood) f^^m ^WR?^, " By 
 those (birds) whose young ones were devoured, an inquiry was set 
 on foot." 
 
 a. The Relative sometimes stands alone, an antecedent noun or 
 pronoun being understood, from which it takes its gender and num- 
 
SYNTAX OF SUBSTANTIVES. 181 
 
 ber ; as, ■^rfta" ^rnnn^ (KWIrf understood) ttW fW^ «»*<m;. " thrre 
 is not a hai)pitM- (tli:\n that man) of whom there is conversation 
 with a friend "; V^ f^ ^ ^ ^^ifir, "What is the use of wealth (to 
 him) who does not give?'" 
 
 h. Sometimes, though rarely, the antecedent noun precedes the 
 relative in the natural order ; as, »T^ >Tn^ "^^ >T%T '^ w^ilfif. " She 
 is not a wife in whom the husband does not take pleasure." 
 
 r. (TRTT and iTRTT stand to each other in the relation of demon- 
 strative and relative ; as, TTRf^ 7T^ ifN^ ^^^ WT^f'fT vi**iI'*h 
 dMHri«=mrfi , " As many products as belong to that island, so many 
 are to be brought to us." 
 
 d. Similarly, rTIg^r and m^^| ; as, ^n?^ "^ rfllV' "iT^ <*rv(rf^»H:. 
 " As the event occurred, so they related it to him," 
 
 SYNTAX OF SUBSTANTIVES. 
 
 Under this head it is proposed to explain the construction of 
 substantives, without reference to their connection with particular 
 adjectives, verbs, or participles ; and for this purpose it will be 
 desirable to exhibit examples under each case. 
 
 Nominative Case. 
 A substantive simply and absolutely expressed must be placed 
 in the nominative case; as, ffifVq^^:, "the Hitopadesha "; irf^cfir^, 
 " the poem of Bhatti." 
 
 a. Two nominative cases in different numbers may be placed 
 in apposition to each other ; as, TnrjTfW W^^ " gi'ass as a bed." 
 
 Accusative Case. 
 
 b. Substantives are not found in the accusative, unconnected 
 with verbs or participles, except as expressing duration of time or 
 space. See r. 180. 181. 
 
 Instrumental Case. 
 
 175. This case yields a variety of senses. The most usual is 
 that of the instrument or means by which any thing is done ; as, 
 ^^[ (-3^), " by me it was said "; ^m^ (iTqft ^ITTT:), " by the fowler 
 a snare was laid "; ^(^ i m q ^H , " l>y the study of the Vedas "; 
 W-^Kim, " with one's own eve. ' 
 
 a. It also has the force of " with " in expressing other col- 
 
182 SYNTAX OF SUBSTANTIVES. 
 
 lateral ideas ; as, ^f^fhnHT ^trtr, " vying with the strong "; fa^m 
 44»Hm:, " conversation with a friend "; Tj^fi?: f( | HM , " equality with 
 beasts "; ftrw^ irl-^Tlmf, " with the knowledge of (his) father "; espe- 
 cially when accompaniment is intended ; as, f^r^ ^:, " the 
 master with his pupil." 
 
 b. The other senses yielded by this case are " through,'' " by 
 reason of "; as, dMi\\, " through compassion "; ^ ^SHRT^, " on 
 account of that transgression." 
 
 c. "According to," " by ""; as, f^rf>nn. "according to rule"; 
 ^^ ^IWTW^, "according to my opinion"; wnm, "by birth," 
 
 d. The " manner " in which any thing is done, as denoted in 
 English by the adverbial affix It/, or by the prepositions in, at; 
 as, '«(l|'tdLit1, " in abundance "; vwNr, " virtuously "; ^saCTT, " at 
 pleasure"; ^^, "at ease"; ^r^ ftrftRT. "in this way"; jt^ht 
 ^^ ("ftmnr.). " they both dwell together in great intimacy "; 
 (^. ^Brf^gTrrftr '^ftonfir) ^inn, " a king surpasses all beings in glory "; 
 mm\ (tT cfi-^), " such a deed must not even be imagined in the 
 mind "; Hl^M.^MU.r, " in human form." 
 
 e. Substantives expressive of " want," " need," may be joined 
 with the instrumental of the thing wanted ; as, ^#irr *T inft^nt, 
 " there is no occasion for inquiry "; »Txrr ^^T^ «T 3nft»nf . " there is 
 no need of me as a servant "; ir^ oFT^, " there is use for a straw." 
 
 / The price for which any thmg is done may be in the instrumental; as, 
 ■"I^IW: ^Tf^^ (^rrfff c|TOr#), " for five puranas he becomes a slave "; ^rff>T^ ^%T. 
 (^HT^), "they fight for great rewards." Similarly, irniinTfW'rgc^ (^fk rf 
 ^jwn^), " fortune is not obtained at the price of the sacrifice of life." 
 
 g. So, also, difference between two things; as, f^X(\ mi^ill ^ JT^ ?a>ril. , 
 " there is great difference between you and the ocean." 
 
 h. The English expression " under the idea that " is expressed by the inst. case 
 of the substantive 'qf^ ; as, <4|||| cj^i, " under the idea that he was a tiger." 
 
 Double Instrumental, 
 i. Sometimes when two substantives come together, expressing parts of a common 
 idea, they are both placed in the instrumental, instead of one in the genitive ; as, 
 e(cfi^: qtqv. e||f<l{ri, "an odoui- is emitted by the bakul-plants by their flowers" (for 
 Mc^c^Mi 5^:). Similarly, irm -'ii l ^ l ^^lH l fl ^trrfirgi x|,<^H|,jtj;:, "he caused 
 her to revive by her attendants by Simdal- water." 
 
SYNTAX OK SUHSTANTIVES. 183 
 
 Dative Case. 
 176. This case is of very limited applicability, and its func- 
 tions, irrespectively of the influence of verbs, are restricted to 
 the expression of the object, motive, or cause for which any thino- 
 is done, or the result to \vhifli any act tends ; as, ^T7»r%ir^, 
 "for self-aggrandizement ^*; ^n mrM ri lctii^. R, "for the counteraction 
 of calamity ''; ^i^ '^ ^TT^ ^ MPriM^Il , " arms and books (lead) to 
 renown." When, as in the last example, the result or end to 
 which any thing leads is denoted by this case, the verb is seldom 
 expressed, but appears to be involved in the case itself. The 
 following are other examples, -q^ ^sjt^ f^inmf ^^ W^ ^, 
 " where there is admixture of poison, then even nectar (leads) to 
 death "; ^t?^ |r#TTrrt H<*lm^ ^ ^TRm, " advice to fools (leads) to 
 ircitation, not to conciliation ; ^ fiTTf^HT imv, Wt^HI ^ 'STH^^, 
 
 " that old husband was not to her likino-.'"' 
 
 o 
 
 a. It wiU be seen hereafter that certain verbs of "giving" and "relating," govern 
 the dative. Substantives derived from such verbs exercise a similar influence ; as, 
 'SnqW ^, "the givmg to another"; ^3^?^% zpin^, "the telHng to another." 
 
 b. WovAs expressive of salutation or reverence are joined with the dative ; as, 
 TTTrr^TR fnr., "reverence to Ganesha"; ^57^ ^, "health to thee." 
 
 Ablative Case. 
 177. The proper force of the ablative case is expressed by 
 ' from ; as, ^tHTr!; (^tv: iwrfir), " from avarice anger arises "; 
 fiR; W^t, " foiling from a mountain "^; M\K\m 51^, " from the 
 mouth of the spies.' 
 
 a. Hence this case passes to the expression of various cor- 
 relative ideas ; as, ^gn^Kni; ftfif^iT, " a portion of (from) their food "; 
 and like the instrumental it very commonly signifies " by reason 
 of," "in consequence of"; as, Jn.HjMHi r l ?VT1T. "on account of 
 the slaughter of cows and men": 'ST^T^^TI^ (^ ffT^), " he 
 blames his son for entering inopportunely"; ^i^i^H^\^ , " through fear 
 of punishment "; 'STR^nnit^iniT, " by reason of my good fortune." 
 
 b. " According to "; as, jrf^'^^TT?^, " according to the advice 
 of the minister." Abstract nouns in j# are often found in this 
 case to express some of these ideas ; as, ^TRf^enrf^WT^, " by 
 reason of the unsteadiness of his mind." Especially in the 
 
184 SYNTAX or SUBSTANTIVES. 
 
 writings of commentators; as, ^^RTWRTtT, "according to what 
 will be said hereafter.'" 
 
 c. It also expresses " through the means "■ or " instrumentality 
 of"; as, ^JTT5?Tf^ xjrgR^;, "caught in the toils throvigh the instru- 
 mentality of the jackall "; rf '^^ti^ft.^rRT^ (■gnv: ^flfni^ H%Tt), " the 
 alleviation of disease is not effected by the mere knowledge of 
 the medicine." 
 
 d. The "manner" in which any thing is done, is occasionally expressed by the 
 ablative; as, l|H | d^> "with diligence"; ^QmT, "forcibly"; <*ri^cjMri , "with 
 wonder"; g^JT^ TgT?ir> "tearing up by the roots"; or by the ablative affix 
 iHT; as, 4^-ed.Tri':, "at one's own pleasure" (cf. p. 152. a.). 
 
 e. This case also denotes "after"; as, ^T^^cf^JIHIri , "after separation from the 
 body "; H^^^ITfriN'Mfilri , " after the imprisonment of the Chief"; TTPT ^NTH*1M , 
 " since his arrival " 
 
 /. In reference to time, " within "; as, f^^gpTT , " within three fortnights." 
 g. Nouns expressive of fear are joined with the ablative of the thing feared ; as, 
 JTpfrt. vni, "fear of death"; '^Tjfl' »t4, " fear of robbers." 
 
 Genitive Case. 
 
 178. This and the locative case are of the most extensive ap- 
 plication, and are often employed, in a vague and indeterminate 
 manner, to express relations properly belonging to the other cases. 
 
 The true force of the genitive is equivalent to " of," and this 
 case appears most frequently when two substantives are to be con- 
 nected, so as to present one idea ; as, fH-MfJM ^^^, " the speech of 
 a friend "; >T#T Hl^i: ^W?T ^W, " the best ornament of a woman is 
 her husband "; »f tTliW •fd ^Ttft ^TO^ 5 ^^^, " man is not the 
 slave of man, but the slave of wealth."" 
 
 a. Possession is frequently expressed by the genitive case alone, 
 without a verb ; as, ^rfr: ^Twr^TTH IC^ ^Hff? in?T HM<4, " all riches 
 belong to him who has a contented mind "; \r?ft^'^ ^l^ t^^ >TP^T, 
 " happy am I in possessing such a wife." 
 
 b. It often, however, has the force of " to," and is very gene- 
 rally used to supply the place of the dative ; as, UTTJirr ^nrtnft ^^HtFT; , 
 " one's own life is dear to one's self "; Vf iftaT»T^^ gt^l^HHf*! ^W^, 
 " a hundred yojanas is not far to one borne away by thirst (of 
 gain)"; fsfi Us(NrilM, ^f^f^, "what is unknown to the wise".^ "Nw 
 
SYNTAX OF SUBSTANTIVES. 185 
 
 'H'Hm TTSFT^nrfir ir^lm, "what does a lamp sliow to a blind niair'f' 
 f^ jnrr ^^^A TJ^:, " what ofTence have I committed towards the 
 king"? f^ ^nn^ 'HWT* eB^ ^PT^:, " what can this man do to us?" 
 c. And not unfi-eijuently of "in'' or "on"; as, ^^fhrn f^gju r;, 
 "confidence in women"; ^^ "^TH-^M, "dependence on me." 
 
 d. It is even equivalent occasionally to " from " or " by," as usually expressed by 
 the ablative or instramental; as, rl cfi^lfq (dqN«i Tr^TTnr). " one ought not to 
 accept a present from any one"; '>5{^l4(^^ i^It^)* "the wood is to be abandoned 
 by us"; ^ "ipift TJ^ "HfQnl IT TTTrfnT PmhI?)!:, ''he is blessed from whom su]»- 
 pliants do not depart in disappointment." 
 
 e. Difference between two tilings is expressed by this case ; as, ^^T^cjofirft^ V[^ 
 •^rJJR, " there is great difference between the master and the servant." Cf. p. 182. g. 
 
 Locative Case. 
 
 179. The locative, like the genitive, expresses the most diversi- 
 fied relations, and frequently usurps the functions of the other 
 cases. Properly, it has the force of " in," " on," or " at," as ex- 
 pressive of many collateral and analogous ideas ; thus, Tptt, "in the 
 night"; Tfj^, "in the village"; J^, "on the back"; j^ f^vjm ;, 
 ■' confidence in you "; H^'.WcMI ^?, " rain on desert ground "; 
 HVjH'^MHjUji . "at the first desire of eating"; ijftr^ dfTrfr f^i, "a 
 tree planted in the earth." 
 
 a. Hence it passes into the sense " towards "; as, -^m ^^p^ ^ fil% 
 ^, " leniency towards an enemy as well as a friend "; ^rf^^r^ ^, 
 " compassion towards all creatures "; ^l"r^ '^■ftnr: , " uj)right to- 
 wards friends "; ♦j<*H^5Mii^ 'HHrtj ff^, " a hundred good offices are 
 thrown away upon the wicked." 
 
 b. AVords signifying " cause," " motive," or " need," are joined with the locative ; 
 as, W^ t^:, "the cause of his modesty"; ^HTT^TflT f^R^ >I^^^ Ph^^M . 
 "your speech was the cause of the war between the two princes"; mVjfctii^JH ; 
 Krft^ 4>\IM fW'TTt, "the absence of a suitor is the cause of a woman's chastity "; 
 ffjctil'l)) f^ inft^nt. " ^vhat need of a boat." Also, words signifying cmi>loyment 
 or occupation ; as, ^T^rlpT HTf^ , " engaging in the acquisition of wealth." 
 A\'ords derived from the root i/iij usually require the locative ; as, jflf <|tM ^KJ I ^J I H 
 TTcftTJ, " I am of service in preserving the kingdom." 
 
 c. This case may yield other senses equivalent to "by reason of," "for," &c. ; as, 
 ^ fd^^, "through my faults"; ^RJ M<.<IKIUFJ« ^^^yt«fi^, ''a spy is for the 
 
 13 U 
 
186 SYNTAX OF NOUNS OF TIME AND PLACE. 
 
 sake of examining the territory of one's enemies "; T{^ oBT^*"'T, " this is the time 
 for battle"; rTWR W^TJIT:, "affection for her"; T^l^:^ "^^T^l,:, "disregard for 
 advice"; ^T f^^fTT 'WW 'OT; " ^^'hat anxiety about dying in battle?" 
 
 d. It is also used in giving the meaning of a root; as, IJ^ '^'mc^l*! » "the root 
 grah is in taking" i.e. conveys the idea of " taking." 
 
 SYNTAX OF NOUNS OF TIME. 
 
 180. When reference is made to any particular division of 
 time, the instrumental case is usually required ; as, f%fiR ^"i , 
 "in three years"; iT^fW^ J^T^t, "in twelve months"; ^^tt, "in 
 an instant"; "ftRina ^T%'?r, "in how long time".^ ^[^r;^:, "in 
 hundreds of years "; <+lc4»^«||i|ill, " in process of time." 
 
 a. When, to duration of time, the accusative case is generally 
 used ; as, W^RFfSEI^, " for a long time "; ^ m^, " for one month "; 
 ^ J^T^, " for two months "; ^V^HT, " for a hundred years "; ^ir^fft: 
 ^fnrrt, " to all eternity." The instrumental, however, is sometimes 
 used in this sense also; as, lT?^f>TT^ ^^^ ^ifiiraif ^r^» "having 
 traded for twelve years "; ohfri'mi'^lf:, "for a few days." 
 
 b. When any particular period or epoch is referred to, the 
 locative may be employed ; as, efifwftj^^ f^^, " on a certain day "; 
 ■fTlft^ f^^. " on the third day ;" or sometimes the accusative ; as, 
 ^ ^ w iTfn: irfW'JT w 3^* Tri ts^ >n^vT wr ?¥:, " on the night 
 when the ambassadors entered the city, on that night a dream 
 was seen by Bharata." 
 
 NOUNS OF PLACE AND DISTANCE. 
 
 181. Nouns expressive of distance between two places (according 
 to Carey) may be in the nominative ; as, 'ssmx ^"ft "^tr^TI ^HWIvfld,, 
 " Krishna is a hundred Kos from Somanath." Space may also be 
 expressed by the accusative ; as, i^ frTft.:, " a hill for a Kos "; or 
 by the instrumental ; as, ^t%«T ^'T?^, " having gone for a Kos." 
 The place in which any thing is done may be in the locative ; as, 
 f^^^, " in Vidarbha." 
 
 SYNTAX OF ADJECTIVES. 
 
 Accusative after the Adjective. 
 18:2. The only adjectives governing an accusative are those 
 formed from desiderative bases; as, ^xnt fWTftr^;, "desirous of 
 
SYNTAX OF ADJECTIVES. 187 
 
 ^o'lu^j^ liomi' "; g^ Wjfh^:, " desirous of obtuininjjj a son '; ^HM 
 ft^^Vij: . "desirous of seeing the kino^."' 
 
 Instrumental after the Adjective. 
 
 a. Adjectives or participles used adjectively, expressive of 
 want or possession, require this case ; as, 'sr^ ^t^I. " destitute of 
 wealth"; ^1% UHI^^:, "possessed of riches"; ^rftjUT "g^^ tjt: , 
 " a jar full of water." 
 
 b. So also of " likeness " or *' equality "; as, ^rr ^T?^ ^I^ "^ 
 >J(ft '^ ^rfVaTfcT, " there has never been, nor will there ever be, any 
 one like him in this world "; ■^^r^^nn ^ m^, " a crime equal to 
 that of killing a Brahman ''; Tn^; ^i^iT xn^ft, " a wife as dear as life "; 
 "^rrf^^ fTctr:, "equal to the sun." These are also joined with a 
 genitive. 
 
 Genitive after the Adjective. 
 
 183. Adjectives signifying " dear to," or the reverse, are joined 
 with the genitive; as, i^rt ftnTl. "dear to kings"; >T?ik: h^m 
 frnn:, "husbands are dear to Avomen "; ^ ofifsjir ^^^^hilJTH ^ftni: . 
 "women dislike nobody"; i^aft JT^flf hO^'*!! r , " he is detestable to 
 his ministers." 
 
 a. Adjectives expressive of equality often require this case as 
 well as the instrumental; thus, «^W ^HT:, " equal to all "; cnw 
 W^-ftt:, "like him"; A^^ ^P^:, "like the moon"; ^ nw Wc^i: 
 ofiTjjrf, "nobody is ecpuil to him." 
 
 b. So colso other adjectives; a-s, tr^jTrJ^lt ^rlfRt TTcRt •Ttirf, "giving advice to 
 others is easy to all men"; ^(.^Itjl^ Tf^lTt, '"'' u-orthi/ of happiness"; ^P^Irf: 
 °|i^nH]> ''^capable of toil." 
 
 Locative after the Adjective. 
 
 184. Adjectives or participles used adjectively, expressive of 
 " power " or " abiUty," are joined with this case ; as, -^mf^ ^T 
 'ijvji;, " horses able for the journey "; Jr^fir ^^T^ '^^^ UWT, " a king 
 who is a match for a great enemy * ; ^T^raiT T^w ^T^ 'TT;»T^. 
 " unable to build a house, but able to demolish one." 
 
 n. So also other adjectives; as, ^fMM ^J^fc^:, '"'' skilled m arms"; '>l{«^q UTsT:. 
 '■'• loisc in trifles"; i^fxi ••!<H<7hl ^Ahi\\ «n ^1*0, " is your master attndicd or 
 (idccrse to you ? " ^"J^ifH^^ Sln'^C , •" itnjlixtfnl of his dependants." 
 
188 SYNTAX OF THE COMPARATIVE AND SUPERLATIVE. 
 SYNTAX OF THE COMPARATIVE AND SUPERLATIVE DEGREE. 
 
 185. Adjectives in the comparative degree require the ablative 
 ease ; as, t^ TTTOfwff^f'T ■HlJn"^, " a wife dearer even than one's 
 life "; ^'aijqtrTK ^^tR: W^" ^^ ^ f^^ , " there is no pleasanter 
 touch in this world than the touch of a son "; ^i^vfiri Ti*ii c,aj<U ^t , 
 " the protection of one's subjects is better than aggrandizement "; 
 »I JT^ J^lf^TTH^t 4*1T*i^ ^^, " there is not a more wretched man 
 than I"; JTfwt. ^^^^r^sbtnft, " mind is more powerful than strength." 
 a. Sometimes they govern the instrumental ; as, Tn%t ftnnTT: , 
 " dearer than life "; »T ^fw Tm ^Rfts^ W^T^TFmrd ^f^^ " there is 
 nobody upon earth more unfortunate than I.'' 
 
 b. When it is intended to express " the better of two things " the genitive may be 
 used ; as, Wrltftl. "^^nft: cSt ^^ W^TTRI , " of these two countries which is the 
 better?" 
 
 c. The comparative, in Sanscrit, is often resolved into the 
 expression " better and not "; as, ^ TITORftjTPft "JT 5^^ t^^tl «J«'^fi!I 
 ir^fr:, " better abandon life than (literally, and not) engage in 
 such an action "; ^ m^ oFTO -^ ^ c^h ^ xr^ 'spjiT, " it is better 
 that silence should be kept than a speech uttered which is untrue." 
 
 d. The superlative degree is usually joined with the genitive ; 
 
 as, wRRjft fgrj^ w^ % ^ftsT '^w^ I g^ Tx^nmi ^t ^t mfr^ 
 
 ^:, "a Brahman is the best of all bipeds, a cow of quadrupeds, 
 a Guru of venerable things, a son of things possessed of touch "; 
 but sometimes with the locative; as, fTig Mc6«<rlH:, "the most 
 powerful of men "; and even with an ablative ; as, VT'^Trif T[^ 
 W^l 'Hgl.^g-inT, "a store of grain is the best of all stores." 
 
 e. Comparison is often expressed by an adjective in the positive 
 degree, joined wdth a noun in the ablative case ; as, tTrfw TR'R'nr 
 xnni^T^, " there is not a happier than he." 
 
 /. Many words are in their nature comparative and require an ablative case, 
 especially ^t, -^T^, W!^, W^^^, ^-^H, ^TffT., ^, ^TfVafi, "gR ; as, H«Jic?tifl^ 
 H^.f^( ?H4:*<:|i«i "^j "it is better not to touch mud than to wash it off"; ^Tft^'T 
 W^ q ijll I A > "poverty is less desirable than death"; ofit TT "f'T^TT^ ^'^TO ^TT^ 
 TR§:. "who is able to rescue me, other than a friend?" fofi^ T-^^l, ^fl^ ^' 
 '' wl at grief is greater than this?" "^ ^rTT^ '^'^'^ f^fTHl^, "one ought not to 
 speak differently from what one has heard"; in^X^yr^ ^^'T^) "at another time 
 
SYNTAX OF TRONOUNS. IN9 
 
 than the present "; fj|,f44 ff ^T^nT HIAIIIH^ W^, "there is no cause of fear to man 
 from any otlier quarter than from death"; ^i >{ H ,^l i1 1 ^1 ^fv^> "more than a 
 hundred yojanas"; oRT^^; ^ijjM l ri f^fif^^ -gr^: , " mtelligence of a lover is 
 something less than a meeting." 
 
 g. Numerals if used partitively may take the genitive ; as, ^vji»^f ^M,f<^^lf4!), 
 "a hundred thousand of the horses"; and, if comparatively, the ablative; as, 
 ■f^TT^TW r3"'l^r ^, "a fine the double of that which is in dispute." 
 
 SYNTAX OF PRONOUNS. 
 
 156. The chief peculiarities in the syntax of pronouns have 
 ah'eady been noticed in Chapter V., pp. 50 — 55. It remains to 
 offer one or two remarks with reference more especially to tlie 
 relative and interrogative. 
 
 a. In the use of these pronouns a very peculiar attraction is often 
 to be obsei'ved ; that is, when either a relative or interrogative 
 pronoun has been used, and an indefinite pronoun would naturally 
 be expected to follow, the relative or interrogative are repeated, 
 as in the following examples : ift IPPT (for ofi^qiViT ) HT^: FTITT, 
 "whatever may be the disposition of whom (2.^. any one) "; tj^ 
 ^^ TT^%, "whatever is pleasing to any one"; ^lT^ ^ ^pum ^rOff, 
 " whatever excellencies belong to any one "; tt? ^ "TST^, " what- 
 ever corresponds with any thing ''; ^ f^ !^| | ^h ^nzR"^ , " what 
 book is to be read by whom .^ {i.e. by any one)."'* 
 
 157. The relative and interrogative are sometimes used together 
 in an indefinite distributive sense ; as, mfiT =nf*T fH^lftrr, " any 
 friends whatever "; or more usually with f^ affixed to the inter- 
 rogative ; as, XR% oR^f^, " to any one whatever." 
 
 a. The neuter of the interrogative is often joined with the 
 instrumental to signify " what is the use of ? " " there is no need 
 of"; as, -^WlT fsfi ^ ^ VW^ 'ill^^rt^ ftlW 'STTTR^ ^ ^ ftf^f^^^ >?^, 
 " of what use is scriptural knowledge (to one) who does not prac- 
 tice virtue, of what use is a soul (to one) whose passions are not 
 kept in subjection ?''' f^ ^ w^^ Tf^, " what business have you to 
 make this inquiry?" 
 
 * See, on this subject, Bopp's Comp. Gram. (Prof. Eastwick's Translation), 
 vol. ii. p. 0.37. 
 
190 SYNTAX OF VERBS. 
 
 b. As alread}'^ shewn (p. 166.), a relative pronoun is sometimes rendered unne- 
 cessary by the use of the relative compound ; thus, rfTrQ' ^f^^T^rvtlT^'^ is equi- 
 valent to TfTT^ ^fMl^r '^T'^ohTTlrTnffT ^*^ir*ir, "a city whose palaces were sil- 
 vered by the moon-beams." The relative, when followed by a pluperfect tense, 
 may sometimes be expressed by the indeclinable participle ; thus, "ftff^ "^V^ '^r^ , 
 " a lion having killed a hunter," or " a lion who had killed a hunter." 
 SYNTAX OF VERBS. 
 
 188. Nothing is more common in Sanscrit syntax than for the 
 verb to be omitted altogether, or supplied from the context. 
 This is more especially the case with the copula, or substantive 
 verb ; thus, in^ ^f^nTT ^ ^TRf n^ H^l . ri^ \ ^KI^" TT^ "^T^ 
 TTT^^ f<^M.<*^ ^, " as long as the gods have existed in Meru, as 
 long as the Ganges upon earth, as long as the sun and moon in 
 the sky, so long have w^e (existed) in the family of Brahmans "; 
 ^fi.^^ Trrft!3?T, " discrimination (is) wisdom." 
 
 Nominative, Genitive, and Locative Absolute. 
 
 189. These cases are used absolutely with participles. The no- 
 minative is very rarely thus used ; as, ^^ ^ ^JTTTnr: Uiwmn "^rftj? , 
 " my friend having arrived, I am happy." The genitive more 
 frequently; as, wrq^PT ^ymritflni, "calamities impending"; H^Md] 
 "JTOTrrt, "the men looking on." The locative very commonly; as, 
 rrfwiT 'sftrfir aflwifH ij^ TrlWi^ fg^ 5^: , " he living I live, he dying 
 I die"; . ^I^^^nit U^, "the night being ended"; ^T^rfrT TTPTpflT, 
 " there being no other expedient." Sometimes the verb is omitted ; 
 as, ^ >T^, " the danger (being) distant." When the passive parti- 
 ciple is thus used absolutely with a noun in the locative case, the 
 present participle of WS^, " to be," is often redundantly added ; as, 
 irqr ^W ^rflT, " it being so done." 
 
 Hence it is evident that the genitive or locative absolute often 
 takes the place of the particles, " when," " while," "since," "although." 
 
 Kominative Case after the Verb. 
 
 190. Verbs signifying " to be," " to become," " to appear," " to 
 
 * The writer of these pages is indebted for this couplet to Mr. Seton Karr, of the 
 Bengal Civil Service. It is in the mouth of all the Kidin Brahmans of Bengal, and 
 is that on which they found their claim to precedence. 
 
SYNTAX OF VERBS. 101 
 
 be calle(],''" or " to be esteemed,"'' and other passive verbs used 
 denominutively, may take a nominative after them ; as. TTin il ' H i M l e^eh : 
 TWn[^, " let a king be the protector of liis subjects ''; ^ fir uH^^ I 
 JifrtHlfri, "she appears sorrowful"; J^wt-T^nt nfrTHTftT. "the village 
 appears like a desert"; Tjrn "M'^ ^rfififhr^, "a king is called Jus- 
 tice "; ^ift n^iiJM^^n*^ , " this (book) is called Hitopadesha."" 
 
 Accusative Case after the Verb. 
 191. Transitive verbs generally govern this case ; as, f^vj '^^^ 
 ^MT;, "Brahma created the universe'"; ■gii^Trr fqiftftr *n^, "the 
 woman gathers flowers "; umiirj^ »T^ 5?,^*' " the dying man gave up 
 the ghost'"; Jj-g ^-^Tnr , " one should rtuoiV/ wine '''; tt^ irf^, ''speak 
 the truth."'' 
 
 a. So also verbs of " motion ''; as, ^nfrT ifttf gf^:, " the holy man 
 goes to the place of pilgrimage"'''; VRr: ^m^ ^'^ftf, " rivers n«? 
 into the ocean ''; >jJrfrT T^*, " he wanders over the earth.'''' 
 
 b. Verbs of motion are not unfrequently used wdth substantives 
 to supply the place of other verbs ; as, ^ sM l Pri ^nfw, " he goes to 
 fame " for " he becomes famous"; '«HrilH Trfir, " he goes to equality" 
 for " he becomes equal.'" 
 
 c. The following are other examples : 411(1 Uju ^Tj^frf, "he desires what is unat- 
 tainable"; f^^i r^lfl^H , "he should think on wisdom"; -tt^vj^ WT^T^fff, "" lit" 
 Twoj^n^s his horse"; ofiJ^rfiir ^?ftf*Tt., "they began the business"; i \ A\A TT ^T^:. 
 "^^^V'^•eno^/or the departed"; ftl.c^ledlf^MKJ^ HH^Prt , "he rfeserre.s the sovereignty 
 of the universe"; i||ri«(it^i. %ff , " lie ^'ex down in a cave of the mountain." 
 
 d. There are certain verbs which take a redundant accusative case after them of 
 a substantive derived from the same root; as, ^m'v) ;^|^, "he swore an oath"; 
 ■^Trfk TTR', "he dwells"; '^^^ Tfw, "he conducts himself"; "^FR '^^fk, "he 
 speaks a speech"; ^^^Ph »n<t> "l^e raises a cry" (cf. the Greek expressions Xi'^M 
 \6yov, xfl'pw x''P°''» &e.). 
 
 Double Accusatirje after the Verb. 
 
 192. Verbs of "asking" govern a double accusative; as, ^ '^ {Jlxf^, "he 
 seeks a boon of the god"; ■^ li^\A WW^, "he begs money from the king." 
 Of " speaking " ; as, TTSfnT ^-<Nr|^ ^TcT^hT, "he addressed a speech to the king." 
 
 0. Causal verbs; as, ■^fJTfT^ ^ftinrfir ^T^, "he causes the guest to eat food"; 
 rS(T ^nnrrftr "m^ Tt f^, "I cause you to know what is for your interest"; 
 fjT^ ^<^H 'HunM^flT ^:, "the Guru teaches his pupil the Vedas"; in T^ 
 
192 SYNTAX OF VERBS. 
 
 H^^^nrfff, "he causes her to enter the house"; TBoSTT^ft^ *II^MIHt^ ^^TTTTlf, 
 " he presented the king's son with fruits, flowers, and water"; JJ^m ^T^jH ^RlQ^fri, 
 " she causes her son to sit on her lap " (literally " her hip ") ; f^^n «Ti. ^ ^^-H^fri, 
 " learning leads a man into the presence of a king." 
 
 b. The following are other examples : if flHIMfil^ w5?f^fw^: , " they iimtigu- 
 rated him general," more usually joined with an ace. and loc. ; "^ "qfTT ^iT^frf, 
 " she chooses a god for her husband "; W^f^lfw <^iAH I Ph '^'^^ , " she gathers 
 blossoms from the trees"; HT^T TITf^Tlft^ ^H,*il(^'H, "he sent them to the abode of 
 Yama" (Hades) ; t;jpir8riir>1 -^t ^f^ njM< ! riri] ^ H^P^d , "his own acts had 
 a man to eminence or the reverse." 
 
 Instrumental Case after the Verb. 
 193. Any verb may be joined with the instrumental, to express the 
 instrument, or cause, or manner of the action ; as, "^^ Tra"»T ^pr^rfw, 
 " the flower fades by reason of the wind ■"; ^%: ^hljfri, " he plays 
 with dice "; ^rft^lTTt ^ift. ftT^nrrfiT, " the cloud puts out the fire with 
 its rain "; ^^ ^A^A , " he lives happily." 
 
 a. In this sense many causals take an instrumental; as, irtfJT^T^T. vftTnTRTIT. 
 " he caused her to eat sweet-meats." 
 
 h. After verbs oi" motion" this case is used in reference either to the vehicle by ivhich, 
 or the place on which, the motion takes place; as, ^^ inrrfw, "he goes in a 
 chariot "; ^^^[^ TfT^rfw, "he goes on horse-bach "; ITRTO T^aifn', " he goes on the 
 road"; q ^l^ Wit tflchill, "he navigated the ocean in a boat." Similarly, 
 ^THR "TB^. Wf^, "tears flowed through the eyes." 
 
 c. After verbs of " carrying" ^'■placing" ^c, it is used in reference to the place 
 on which any thing is carried or placed : as, ej^fri ^Irr ^'U't, "he bears faggots 
 on his Jiead"; ^^: ^I^^T "3^, "the dog is borne on the shoidders." efi is 
 found with this case in the sense of placmg ; as, fl^KVI J^ '^Hfid^. " he placed 
 his son on his head." The following are other examples : f^l u)iy TT^afir ^T^t , 
 " the master ^roes in coinpanywith the pupil"; JT^gXTRTO if^^fiTl, " he considted 
 with his ministers." But in this sense ;g^ is usualiy placed after it. >TWT >4|i^<4l 
 f»^-qd.rri , " the husband meets the wife "; jj^Tl ^ ^ ' ^rri T!^ ^: , " he harnesses the 
 horses to the chariot; ^^ "ftpii^rff, "he is separated from the body," more usu- 
 ally with the ablative, "mx^ "^T^'" "he fights his enemies," or ^TJ^T: ^. 
 
 d. Verbs of '' boast itig"; as, Iwm ftC'Kr'W, "jo" boast of your learning"; 
 tjt^ H^m \ "^rnr^, "you glory in the fame of others." Of "swearing"; as, 
 V^T^T ^T^, "he sicore by his bow." 
 
SYNTAX OV VERHS. I'Ki 
 
 e. Verbs of '''hiii/ini/" and "srl/ii/;/" take the instrumental of tlio price; as. 
 ^^^i "^ffq sr^TJinT Tl-SR l^vfh^ t^f^jjff , ''1)111/ one wise man even for thousands of 
 fools"; TT^t ^rf¥5T "^t fr^hrftw, " lit-- «'//*' l^s house for a thousand cows." 
 Dative after the Verb. 
 194. All verbs in which a sense of imparting or communicating 
 any thing to any object is inherent, may take an accusative of the 
 thing imparted, and a dative of the object to which it is imparted. 
 (Frequently, however, they take a genitive or even a locative of 
 the object), ^m Hl<<+I H <(<^lfd , " he gives sweetmeats to his son "; 
 f^TTR it uffT^ratfk, " he promises a cow to the Brahman'"; ^"^^^ni 
 ■vnt vjK^fri, "he owes money to Devadatta "; ofivilt rR^ ITfinn^. 
 " consign the maiden to him," more usually with the locative. 
 The following are other examples of the dative ; w^ P^HI^IN M^fxr^ 
 JR:, "he sets his mind on their destruction"; JmHI^ 5=lftt ^, " he 
 set his mind on departure," or with the locative. fr\ ^ d^, 
 "that is pleasing to me"; f^rnrwi: lI^^nf'T sTTT^, "I will declare this 
 to my pupils "; ^ Tl^ fWHT^rfrT, " he makes known all to the 
 king," these are also joined with the genitive of the person. 
 ^Win^TT «fr5r^, " he is rendered fit for immort;ility "; IW^^ W{ ^vm, 
 " lie has the power to kill me "; tTT^ JTT^ ^VHT ^T^t^'HT, " b.e incited 
 them to the murder of their mother "; tt^HT "SWItt, " he is angry 
 with his son." 
 
 Ablative after the Verb. 
 195. All verbs may take an ablative of the object fi-om which 
 any thing proceeds, or arises, or is produced ; as, ^T^irfTr '^\^\\ ^, 
 " the leaf falls from the tree "; ^f>R 'JINfrf TT^Tr^, " blood flows from 
 the body "; ^STRHTT^ Tfw¥fifr, " he rises from his seat "; JjfTcn^rn ^ftl 
 5^ ^ra^ i^'^f ri , " from the lump of clay the artist makes whatever 
 he wishes " (p. 152. «.); N»ii|id WJT m-JKcfl, " from education a per- 
 son attains capacity"; fJT^rnJT ■fRtTrT , " he went out from the city." 
 a. Verbs of ''fearing''' may be joined with the ablative ; as, 
 W^ ^ Tnn JTimT. f^irfir ^r^ ^^ITTTI;, " a good man does not fear death 
 so much as falsehood "; ^IJJT? Tf^riiw "snTTT , " the whole world stands 
 in awe of punishment." 
 
 h. The following arc other examples : ITnTpn^^ST^^ffT, " ha descends fro7n the 
 palace"; f^mn: ^^7? '.M^rfrili, "Vishnu descended from heaven"; a|ir|«h.|l^^ 
 WgT^ ^c^riR^fri > "he <«/ce.y f^ (causes to descend) the golden bracelet from his 
 
 C C 
 
194 SYNTAX OF VERBS. 
 
 body"; frj-^^Ti ■qPHTH', "he ceases from wickedness"; ^Jxit^fi^ f^TJJT, "he left off 
 speaking "; fTToBTlT fxirR -sfmri ^^ Vrft^oK , " a virtuous son saves his father 
 frona hell"; ^TSSf^^nT^FTfT ¥(AH -^sH Pri r<-=M ri , "truth is siipej-ior to a thousand 
 sacrifices"; ^^f^TW UJ^TUfrT, " he nf^Zec^s his owTi interest." 
 
 Genitive after the Verb. 
 196. The genitive, in Sanscrit, is constantly interchangeable with 
 the dative, locative, or even accusative.* It is more especially, 
 however, used to supply the place of the first of these cases, so 
 that almost all verbs may take a genitive as well as dative of the 
 object to which any thing is imparted. For example, ^fT:5W ^HT 
 «J<^lfri, " he gives money to the poor." It may be used for the 
 locative after verbs of " consigning ''; as, fTT^rj jijt ^WttTrfir, " he 
 deposits a pledge with me"": or, of "trusting"'; as, ^ cjiftjrT;^ ^^Nlt 
 ^^^rftr, " nobody puts trust in women ""; and for the accusative, in 
 examples such as, ^'^JtrFTTftr ^'.^f^ ^'Rlf^ tff^. " unexpected ills 
 come upon corporeal beings. " 
 
 a. Other examples are ; ^nTTrTirP^ WWra "^^rnR "sfiFT ^^rftr HTWT, " tdl us 
 who are ignorant of it, whose wife you are?" efi^ (for ofifTrT^) f^«rftT VTfi=^T:, 
 'of whom are the righteous afraid f Tf^ WJITPT WfrislMl^ ^ TT?? ^THI^ ^TTT , 
 "one should not ijive to one what one promises to another,"; v^ Vf '5iT!f|f?T, 
 " he does not hear me" (cf. the Greek usage) ; V^ WTJ , " remember me," or with 
 the accusative. ->K^t4i JTW, IW^fir, "death overcomes us"; ^TfTrJT. "^ Forfff 
 fire is not satisfied ivith fuel"; ^t?T ^HVJj: , "forgive them." 
 
 Locative after the Verb. 
 197. This case is very widely applicable, but, as elsewhere re- 
 marked, is frequently interchangeable with the dative and genitive. 
 The first sense of the locative requires that it should be united 
 with verbs, in reference only to the place or time in which any 
 thing is done ; as, "q^ >nirf?T> " he sinks in the mud ''; ■jt ^^fir, " he 
 dwells in the city "; W^gf^ ftT^fir. " he stands in the front of the 
 fight"; ^uj)t^^ irf«Iff, "at sun-rise he awakes." But the transi- 
 tion from the place to the object, or recipient of any action, is 
 
 * This A^ague use of the genitive to express various relations prevails also in 
 early Greek." 
 
SYNl'AX OK VKKliS, 19.') 
 
 iiatiiral, aiul luMU-e it is that vei'hs are foiuiel with the lui-ativc of 
 tht> objei't to which any thinj; is imp irt(>d or communicated, as in 
 the following examples : m WT^ fm >r^, " bestow not monc^y on 
 thi' miijhty ""; iriw^ oRn^rftrr fvTfsjTrrfiT , "I intrust my allairs to 
 him "": "q^ ^^(iJ4<* TTRf^trfff, " he consigns a rinfy to his son "; li^ 
 ^^ ^iR?Tfw ^TTq".>TTi. " lu> i/itrusts the burthen of the kingdom to a 
 capable minister '"; inr ^nfr fJ=r^mTrT, " one should place (bury) a dead 
 man in the ground " ; ^n^f JR^ c^vrftr. " he applies his mind to virtue/' 
 In this sense oR is used ; as, f^ ^ahh ^ToR^, " he placed the wood 
 on his back "'; JTfiT ^n^ efidfff. " he applies his mind to sin." 
 
 a. A\'hen ^, " to give," is used for " to put," it follows the same analogy; as, 
 iT^^Tsilit f^ ^f^. 'V"' yo"'' h'l"'^ on the end of its tail ;" >TTIT^ ^^r^ ^, 
 '■'•he phued his foot on a heap of ashes." Similarly, ^f^|a^^ TJlft^'ftcr. '"he was 
 /leld by the skirt of his garment." So also verbs of *•' seizing," " striking," 
 ■^575 JI^iPh or ^yiohMrrf, "he seizes or drajs him by the hair"; :fT^ H^l^frf, 
 •' he strikes a sleeping man." 
 
 h. Other examples are. "^xf ffJJV^ "H^ii , "he is engaged in a very severe 
 penance"; m.ohl'Um JTT ^TRlft ^J, "do not busy yourself about other people's 
 affairs"; fciMiiM ^t^H, '' he is addicted to objects of sense "; ^| Qjlohf^^ THW, 
 '• he detiglits in the good of all the world"; H.JHrMg^K PH^i^ri > "lie is apjioiuted 
 to the command of the fort"; ^ ^W^ vfl. f^^'Tl'iniffT , "he yokes two bulls to 
 the pole"; ^*imi«) ^ftrfri^ Jft* '^'^ anoint me to the generalship"; ZTfTTT 
 •qjq-f^ffq^, " he strirrs to suppress evil-doers." 
 
 c. TT llflrv i<H(n ■^T^nr l^g^i, " such language is not suifed to a person like me "; 
 UiTi^ ^^r^ Hi^-tMA, -sovereignty is suited to you "; ^nm^ dM l P^^Iri . "he rc- 
 clinrd on a seat '; c|Ut|M 41 1 f1 ^ , "«7 thou on a cusliion"; W^ f^'^^ftrfir, 
 -'■hecotifides in his enemies"; ^T^pfh llriPri, "■ it fulls at his feet"; ^frT '^'^ , 
 " it rolls at the feet." 
 
 Change of Case after the same Verb. 
 10«. This sometimes occurs; as, fVvTt "UTnTFTiT oR7?ft -^ m^T^t ^M 
 •lj'-|<iydi. " Vidhura and Kunti announced every thing, the one to Dhritarashtra, 
 the other to Gandhari" (Astrashiksha 34. Ed. Prof. Johnson), where the same 
 verb governs a dative and genitive. Similarly, in the Mitralabha (p. 10.), ^%int 
 P=l»jmi IT cjrl^: i^ ^, "confidence is not to be placed in horned animals or 
 
196 SYNTAX OF PASSIVE VERBS. 
 
 SYNTAX OF PASSIVE VERBS. 
 
 199. The prevalence of a passive construction is the most re- 
 markable feature in the syntax of this language. Passive verbs 
 are joined with the agent, instrument, or cause, in the instrumental 
 case,* and agree with the object in number and person ; as, "wnCri 
 T5T "S"^^, "the dust is raised by the wind"; ^rf ^l^^aiiPiir ^TSifhfwRri, 
 " let all things be prepared by him "; ^Iht, ^5rrf^rJft^'iTT>fNTlT, " the 
 sun was concealed by arrows." But the passive participle, as 
 elsewhere observed, usually takes the place of the past tenses of 
 the passive verb, and agrees with the object in gender as well as 
 number ; as, ^^rfw fl^l^rilfd Nlfinill, " (their) eyes were suffused with 
 tears "; im -g^ (^ being understood), " it was said by him." This 
 is the favourite construction of Sanscrit prose composition, and the 
 love for this idiom is very remarkably displayed in such phrases 
 as the following : fT:^^ Tjnj^, " he is gone to by misery," for ^ 
 TT^fff; and ^J<|J||Wjri) ^^, "let it be come by your majesty," for 
 VH|J|^^ ^\ ; and again, '^WTFfiTT. UoR^ ^sfhnrt, " let it be remained 
 by us in one spot," for " let us remain in one spot "; ^ jthrt ^ 
 ^ J|W(rit > " by whatever road it is desired, by that let it be gone." 
 
 a. Acth'e or causal verbs, wliich take a double accusative, will retain one accusative 
 when constructed passively ; Init the other accusative passes into a nominative case : 
 thus, instead of ^ tif q^^'tuHu "gcJM, "he addressed me in harsh words," may be 
 written ^ ^^ tr^^TfijT "3^1, "by him I was addressed in liarsh words." 
 
 SYNTAX OF THE INFINITIVE. 
 
 200. The student must guard against supposing that the infini- 
 tive, in Sanscrit, may be used with the same latitude as in other 
 languages. Its use is very limited, corresponding rather to that 
 of the Latin supines, as, indeed, its termination um may be sup- 
 posed to indicate. And this restriction in the employment of a 
 part of speech so important, might be expected to cripple very 
 seriously the syntactical capabilities of the language, were it not 
 that the power of compounding words abundantly compensates for 
 any such deficiency. Let the student, therefore, sccui'ately distin- 
 
 * There are a- few instances of the agent in the genitive case; as, V[t{ oSTT '^[^, 
 "a crime committed bv me.' for JT^T- 
 
SYNTAX OF THF, INFIXITIVK M(>(»1). I<)7 
 
 guish between the intinitive of Sanscrit, and the infinitive of the 
 classical languages. In these latter \vc have this part of speech 
 constantly made the subject of a proposition ; or, in other words, 
 standing in the place of a nominative, and an accusative ease often 
 admissible before it. We have it also assuming different forms, 
 to express present, past, or future time, and completeness or in- 
 completeness in the progress of the action. The Sanscrit infini- 
 tive, on the other hand, can never be made the subject or nomi- 
 native case to a verb, admits of no accusative before it, and can 
 only express indeterminate time and incomplete action. Wherever 
 it occurs it must always be considered as the object, and never the 
 subject, of some verb expressed or understood. And as the object 
 of the verb, it may be regarded as equivalent to an indeclinable 
 substantive, in which the force of two cases, an accusative and 
 dative,* is inherent, and which difTers from other substantives in 
 its power of governing a case. Its use as a substantive with the 
 force of the accusative case corresponds to one use of the Latin 
 infinitive; thus, W^ ^ Tsfl^H ^^[TfJT, "I desire to hear all that," 
 " id aud'ire cupio^ where "^jVff and audire are both equivalent to 
 accusative cases, themselves also governing an accusative. Simi- 
 larly, ^rf^ ITI^. "she began to weep'"; and JT^* %g37 '^fn^, "he 
 began to concjuer the earth,"' where J^^')m^*^^ ^TTT»^, " he began the 
 conquest of the earth," would be equally correct. But the San- 
 scrit infinitive appears most commonly in the character of a sub- 
 stantive with the force of a dative case ; or, in other words, will 
 be found in most instances to involve a sense which belongs espe- 
 cially to the Sanscrit dative, viz. that of the end or purpose for 
 which any thing is done, and which it would often be equally 
 idiomatic to express by that case ; thus, ^TRojrR Hf«| rifl ^TFratfir, 
 " he comes to devour the young ones "; ^^ ^fS ^Rj nrffTjfViT, " he 
 sent an army to fight the enemy."' In these cases it would be 
 equally correct in Sanscrit to substitute for the infinitive the dative 
 case of the verbal noun formed with the affix ana; thus, JT^pjnr. 
 
 * Bopp considers the termination of the infinitive to Ik; tlie accusative of tlic affix 
 W, and it is certain that in the Vedas an irref^iilar infinitive in ff% mid jf^ is found, 
 wliicli \vould sccni to Ite the dative of the same affix. ?ee I'aiiini .'^. 1. !». 
 
198 SYNTAX OF THE INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 
 " for the eating"; xfl^RT'T. " for the fighting"; and in Latin the 
 infinitive could not be used at all, but either the supine, devoratum, 
 pugnatum, or still more properly, the conjunction with the sub- 
 junctive mood, " ut devoreW " ut pugnarent.'''' The following are 
 other examples in which the infinitive has a dative force in ex- 
 pressing the purpose of the action : tn^iH m^ '^'^^ ^TJUTiT, " he 
 went to the river to drink water "; »tj? ^"s^ %^i7 ■3'XRT^rT, " he 
 comes to cut asunder my bonds "; irt ^Tfl" ^TJT^t (^rftfT being under- 
 stood), "he is able to rescue me"; XTT^T^ '^^ft^ ^nnsft ^^, "he 
 busied himself about collecting together the snares." 
 
 a. The Sanscrit infinitive, therefore, rather deserves the name 
 of a supine than an infinitive, and in its character of supine is 
 susceptible of either an active or passive signification. In its 
 passive character, however, like the Latin supine in u, it is joined 
 with certain words only, the most usual being the passive verb 
 ■^f-^, "to be able," and its derivatives; thus, tfl'^ft "^T %^ ^«Mrt , 
 " the snare cannot be cut "; Vf ■^nqr: ^Wmrff W ^"Rr., " those evils 
 cannot be remedied." The following are other instances : ^J^^^ 
 cBTT fi TH^ "^RSi:, "the shed was begun to be built"; TTS^ ^rfvr^ 
 iTTFT fri^Pqri : , " your honour has been selected to be inaugurated 
 to the kingdom"; -^fifT '«B^, "it deserves to be done" (Naisha- 
 diya, 5. 11?.) J «B^'^W?lf^, "improper to be done" (cL fadu in- 
 dignum and TToieiv aca-y^pov). 
 
 b. The root ^|r, " to deserve," when used in combination with an infinitive, is 
 usually equivalent to an entreaty or respectful imperative ; as, V*^IH^ 'jft «(^iH 
 ^%fH> "deign (or simply ' be pleased') to tell us our duties." It sometimes has 
 the force of the Latin debet; as, Tf JTTll^ft rTR wfWTSW ^T^fw, "such a person 
 as I ought not to address you"; *T ^ "^ftf'^rriT ^%ftT, "you ought not to 
 bewail him." 
 
 c. The infinitive is sometimes joined with the noun cBTT. "desire," to form a 
 kind of compound adjective, expressive of the " wish to do any thing," and the 
 final m of the infinitive is then rejected; thus, ^^g(iR:, -iTT, -jf, "desirous of 
 seeing"; %ri«fiW;, -TT, -4, " wishmg to conquer." 
 
 USE AND CONNEXION OF THE TENSES. 
 201. PKESENT TEio-SE. — This tcnsc, besides its proper use, is 
 frequently used for the future ; as, H JItshHh, " whither shall I 
 go?" efi^ rSft ■'?^^Tfi=r, " when shall I see thee .^" 
 
USE AND CONNEXION OK THE TENSES. 199 
 
 a. In narration it is connnonly used for the past tense ; as, 
 TT "^ ^fX^ cfi^ w^^ifrf "^ ^. " lie, liavinii; touelied the f2:roun(l, 
 touclies his ears and says."' 
 
 h. It may denote habitual or repeated action ; as. JTTt UFT? W^ ^Hr^ '^H^ 
 ^T^fir. '"the deer goinu' there every day was in flie liabit of eating the corn"; 
 '^^ '^ J^fHeJi^fc^ ^nifffiT W^ fqsicJ -H^Tfir, "whenever he heard tlie noise 
 of the mouse then he would feed the cat." 
 
 c. It is usually found after TT^ \ as, "qi^ ^ ^^ "^ I^T^ l^V^ IT^ "TT^ 
 ■f^ftff^, "as long as my teeth do not break, so long will I gnaw asunder your 
 fettere." (Cf. the use of ihnn). 
 
 d. The present tense of the root '^TW , " to sit," " remain," is used with the 
 present participle of another verb to denote continuous or simultaneous action ; as, 
 "T^^ ^ ^t^ ^^, " he keeps making a slaughter of the beasts"; T{t{ TJ^STR 
 ^ [^ i Tad'J ^TP^, " he is in the act of coming after me." 
 
 e. The particle ^, when used with the present, gives it the force of a perfect ; 
 as, TrfT^rftfT IT '^', "they entered the city." 
 
 202. riRST PRETERITE. — Although this tense properly has 
 reference to past incomplete action, and has been so rendered in 
 the examples given at pp. 101 — 128., yet the student must guard 
 against supposing that this is its usual force. It is most com- 
 monly used to denote indefinite past time, without any necessary 
 connexion with another action ; as, ^^ ij^lri "qT*T«7 '5ToR3^, " I made 
 an effort to collect wealth,'"' not necessarily, " I was making."" 
 
 203. POTENTiAi.. — The name of this tense is no guide to its 
 numerous uses. Perhaps its most common force is that of fitness 
 in phrases, where in Latin we should expect to find oportet 
 with the infinitive ; as, ■^^\i\A >t4 ^ft^ "^Rt ^'^ T^v^jP^d, " having 
 beheld danger actually present, a man should act in a becoming 
 manner.'"' 
 
 n. It is also employed, as might be expected, in indefinite general expressions ; as, 
 TlTl? ift >TR: TXTTrT, "whatever may be the disposition of any one"; T^ jj^i 
 ^4 -^ ^i^TTT ^iF^tni, " ^vhen the kmg may not himself make investigation of 
 tlie case"; THHIM^IcJ-^-Mti "3^ ITIM^^ ?Hl|HM, "by uttering unseasonable 
 words one may meet with dishonour." 
 
 b. Especially in conditional sentences; as, irf^ X^^^ 7^ ^ UTTRIT I^ I WJ 
 oSfwf^ TT TZrnr ^HTTrTqRJ f»TitT»T, '"if the king were not to inflict punish- 
 ment, osvnership would remain witli nobody, and all bairiers would be l>roken 
 
200 USE AND CONNEXION OY THE TENSES. 
 
 down." Sometimes the conjunction is omitted ; as, -^ H^, " should it not be so"; 
 ■^T WTfT TTOVN't . " '^'^^'^ 1^^ ^ot subject to another." 
 
 c. The potential often occurs as a softened imperative, this language, in common 
 with others in the East, being averse to the more abrupt form ; thus, 7]^; , " do 
 thou go," for 7T«a[ ; and ^TfTTiT^ TScTrfiT) " let him eat fruits," for ^W. 
 
 204. lasPERATivE. — This tense yields the usual force of " com- 
 mand " or "entreaty'"; as, 'STisyf^r^, "take courage''; in'T ^"JT^JR, 
 " remember me." m and not 'tT must be used in prohibition ; 
 as, ^iTW m ff^, " do not tell a falsehood." The first person is 
 used to express necessity, see example, r. 172. 
 
 a. It is sometimes employed in conditional phrases to express contingency ; as, 
 ■»H H M h1 r^ JTT ^l-gi lfiT> "permit me (and) I will go," i.e. "if you will permit me, 
 I will go"; '^i^m^i ^frR ^F3nt) "if you command me I will kiU the villain"; 
 ^aTH M^^N ^ ^'^ J|T3A | ft t, "if you give me a promise of security I will go." 
 
 205. SECONU PSETSRITE. — As observed at p. 57., this tense is 
 properlv used to express an action done at some definite period 
 of past time ; as, '^r^T^J^ *pf^ <5Jl.'4 '^^'^:» " Kaushalya and the 
 others bewailed king Dasharatha.'" It is frequently, hov.ever. 
 employed indeterminately. 
 
 206. riRST FUTURE. — This tense expresses definite futurity ; 
 as, WTO f^^ cfiW^ W ^^frftr, " in those regions thou shalt obtain 
 the fruit of thy desire ""; but is rarely found. 
 
 207. sscoM-s FUTURE. — Tliis tense, although properly indefinite, 
 is employed to express all degrees and kinds of futurity, immediate 
 or remote, definite or indefinite ; as, WT^ "TDT. iirwfti, " thou 
 shalt drink sweet ^vater "'; 1PS( W^r^ tn^ft* "^^fff, " there certainly 
 he will see his wife." 
 
 a. It is sometimes used for the imperative ; as, "q^ ^ "H^ <iwftl. 
 " whatever is to be given that you will give " (do thou give). 
 
 208. THIRD PRETERITE. — This tcuse properly expresses time 
 indefinitely past ; as, ^spgrf "^ , " there lived (in former times) a 
 king." It is not, however, often used as a past tense by earlier 
 writers, but is frequently employed to supply the place of the im- 
 perative, after the prohibitive particle m or mm, the augment 
 being omitted; as, JTT "^^tt;, "do not make"; »n WT^l wr^, "do 
 not lose the opportunity"; »nw ^SRTT ^T^:, "do not tell an un- 
 truth"; m "^w:* " do not be angry "; m 31^:, " do not grieve "; m 
 f^Wt, " do not injure." 
 
SYNTAX OF PARTICIPLES. 201 
 
 209. BENEDICTXVE. — Oiilv oiie example of this teuso occurs in 
 the Hitopailesha : frfW ^JTrm; ?!<+c*'.*4i!=lj=I«rff:. "may he constantly be 
 the abode of all happiness." It is only used in pronouncing 
 benedictions. 
 
 210. coN-BXTXONAi.. — Tliis tciisc is even less frequent than tlu? 
 last. It is used in conditional propositions, as illustrated by the 
 following example from Manu : Trf^ Tjin ^ ^ H*ii^d IT^ ^ Hm\H 
 ^ ^ni^r^ I^T*^ '^^f^'^Ti:. "if the king were not to inflict punish- 
 ment, then the stronger would roast the weak like fish on a 
 spit"; or, according to the Scholiast, f^^rm 'il<*Q,mH, "would cause 
 injury." 
 
 SY'NTAX OF PARTICIPLES. 
 
 211. Participles govern the cases of the verbs whence they are 
 derived; as, "anv M^il«1, "seeing the fowler"; ^i,iu) 'gi^T. " walking 
 in the forest"; 5r=<H '^TRiint, " having heard a noise "; MifflM*^ wfh^ 
 inn, " he went away without drinking water." 
 
 Passive Past Participle. 
 
 212. The syntax of this most useful participle has been ex- 
 plained at p. 137. r. 125. and r. 199. When used actively it may 
 often govern the accusative case ; as, W^t^ WJWSl , " he ascended 
 the tree "; Tr^ rfh^:, " having crossed the road "; ^ hjiOm, W^rrnr: . 
 " I reached the city." But its active use is restricted to neuter 
 verbs. The following are other examples ; trf^TBr ^rMfriifi:, "the 
 birds flew away"; ^nvt fH«l»c:, "the fowler returned"; "^Tfwst:, 
 " he fell asleep." 
 
 Active Past Participle. 
 
 213. This participle is commonly used for a perfect tense active, 
 and may govern the case of the verb ; as, ^ ^iTfT^, " he heard 
 everything "; ttR^ xHtht ■^iH^r^-rt'^iO, " the wife embraced her hus- 
 band "; iT^rt f% TR^ <r('lM, "he gave the fruit into the hand of 
 the king." 
 
 In'leclinahle Past Participles. 
 
 214. The importance of these participles has been noticed, p. 14;}. 
 They occur, in narration, more commonly than any other, and are 
 almost invariably used for the past tense, as united with a copula- 
 tive conjunction ; thus, w^ 4ll<*?fi| fHOgrf*?^ ^T^ ^"^ ^t ^ fTFTT "Wn 
 
 D D 
 
202 SYNTAX OF PARTICIPLES. 
 
 WIST ^i^Ti^T ^^ ^'^. "having heard this, having thought to himself 
 ' this is certainly a dog,' having abandoned the goat, having bathed, 
 he went to his own house.'" In all these cases we should use in 
 English the past tense with a conjunction ; thus, " When he had 
 heard this, he thought to himself that it must certainly be a dog. 
 He then abandoned the goat, and when he had bathed, went to his 
 own house." It is evident from this example that the indeclinable 
 participles often stand in the place of a pluperfect tense, a tense 
 which does not really exist in Sanscrit. 
 
 a. But although they always refer to something past, it should be observed that 
 they may frequently be rendered in English by the present participle, as in the 
 fifth sentence of the story at r. 220. 
 
 b. Another though less frequent use of them is as gerunds in do ; thus, i^^: 
 ^i l ^KW WvfhT* >tM% Mflldrii:, "men become wise % reading the Shastras"; 
 >n^ ^m Wofiiul^fi ^Sr^ H%<=M1, " a wife is to be supported even by doing 
 a hundred wrong things"; f^ ifl^^ ^[r^T ^, " what bravery is there in killing 
 a sleepmg man 1" 
 
 c. Prof. Bopp considers the termination of this participle (igj) to be the instru- 
 mental case of the same affix of which the infinitive termination (?««) is the accu- 
 sative. Whether this be so or not, there can be little doubt that the indeclinable 
 participle bears about it much of the character of an instrumental case. And the 
 proof ot this is, tliat it is constantly found in grammatical connexion with the agent 
 in this case; thus, ^r|f: Tl^rf>TT. f^rf^ngT "f^T^ f^TTt, "by all the beasts having 
 met together the lion was informed "; ^^ A\<^\ ^TT^ni ^gl^rii , " by all having 
 taken up the net let it be flown away." 
 
 Future Passive Participles. 
 215. The usual sense yielded by this participle is that of " fit- 
 ness " or " necessity ""; and the usual construction required is, 
 that the agent on whom the duty or necessity rests, be in the in- 
 strumental case, and the participle agree with the object ; as, i^Tn 
 HdP^^ -q- f^^TTT, " by you the attempt is not to be made." Some- 
 times, however, the agent is the genitive case. Cf. p. 196. note. 
 
 * As the Latin gerund is connected with the future participle in dus, so the 
 Sanscrit indeclinable ])articipk' in j/a is connected with the future passive participle 
 in j/a. This is noticed by Bopp. 
 
SYNTAX OV ADVERBS AND CONJUNCTIONS. 203 
 
 n. If the verb govern two accusatives, one may l)e retained after the jtarticiplc ; as, 
 W^HI^fc^c^ 'iT^J '^nOtT n^» "the tear of the eye is to be brought to assuagement 
 by thee. " 
 
 b. Occasionally the neuter of this participle is used impersonally, in which case 
 it does not agi-ee with the object, but may govern it in the manner of the verb ; thus, 
 jnn ^TR ^PtT^* "it is to be gone by me to the village," for JHTT '^T^1 T^tPfl. 
 So also T^TTT ^HF TTTS^, "V you it is to be entered into the assembly." 
 
 c. The neuter HfTfT^ (from vt) is thus impersonally used, and in accordance with 
 r. 190. requires the instrumental after it, as well as before; thus, ^tflfM «BTW^ 
 iff^Tf^, "by something it is to be become the cause," i.e. "there must be some 
 cause"; ^if^f^l ^H^ 31'^ III Hn^ri«<t, "a ruler ought to be possessed of discrimina- 
 tion"; IJHJ rR -H »H -"UAll >Tf^^, " I must become your companion." 
 
 (/. It is not uncommon to find this participle standing merely in the place of n 
 future tense, no propriety or obligation being implied; as, rf'^H ^HfJT ^3T%*T 
 JTTTTTrerfq^ TfT^, " i" all probability this hunter will go in quest of the deer"s 
 flesh"; where J|»Hcq is used impersonally, j^ g^T ^5^ fofif^ "^W^, "when 
 the people see you they will utter some exclamation." See also tlie eleventh 
 sentence of the story, r. 220. 
 
 e. It w^ould appear that the neuter of this participle is sometimes used infinitively, 
 as expressive merely of the indeterminate action of the verb, in the manner of a 
 future infinitive, without implying necessity or fitness. In such cases yfir is added ; 
 thus, <M'=drMri«l|H ^fw, "the being about to deceive"; Jrlr^lIT ^flT. "the being 
 about to die." 
 
 SYNTAX OF ADVERBS, CONJUNCTIONS, AND INTERJECTIONS. 
 
 216. The following examples illustrate the construction of the 
 adverbs enumerated at p. 156., or elsewhere in Chapter VIII. 
 •T ^^f ^ ^sn^: «fi^ m^^fJPT^:, "the restraint of crime cannot 
 be made without punishment''; ^ »piTrf^ iIT^, "for a hundred 
 births ''; ^qf-^cll. 'm^, " up to the serpent's hole "; ^;i!i ^, " along 
 with his son '; ^j "fV^TT, " without cause "; ^t^w^T fT«TT, "without 
 fault "; f^^TT^ ^fi^ f*r.^. " creeping out of the hole ''; •?rw^^toB*T^- 
 iDTfT H^ffir, " from the moment of seeing (him) "; fTiT: IwfiT, " from 
 that time forward "; ^m^ wi^, " for the sake of wealth " (cf. 
 r. 171. c); "rT^qr: ^, "for her sake." T«lft, with the genitive, 
 occurs rather fre<iuently, and with some latitude of meaning ; 
 thus, fvf^ Wf^ Tqfl^ 'nTTff, " the lion fell upon liim ": vm -^rfh 
 
204 SYNTAX OF ADVERBS AND CONJUNCTIONS. 
 
 n4<*irw:> "changed in his feelings towards me"; ir^ T'lfT. ^SHfTgH?!" 
 ^■^Tt^, "not behaving properly towards thee"; t^-^wi Tttft ^^:, 
 " angry with his son." T^FT ^snrernr, " beneath the tree "; ^j^; 
 ^Enfttt, " near the king "; ftrg: ^TofiT^^ ■qrp^ ^^TRJ^lfff, " he receives 
 money from his father"; T{m ^"jft^^ "ftrf^, "flesh thrown before 
 the dog"; ^^ WTEf, "in my presence"; ^Twra ttsTT^^, "after us." 
 ^IKjlTT may take an instrumental ; as, ^"^t ftiKjid, " before others." 
 in^ may govern an ablative ; as, in^ ■^tjqtRT^ ^ 'JTtwT^'fi;^, " before 
 investiture let him not utter the Veda ": or an accusative ; as, 
 TPT IT^^I^WT:, "before twelve years are over." 
 
 «• W^f "enough," is used with the instrumental, with the force of a prohibi- 
 tive particle; as, ^f^ '^|^>^|, "away with fear," "do not fear." 
 
 b- mr^, "even," " merely, ' when compounded with another word is declinable ; 
 as, TW^TTN' it ^^rfir, "he does not even give an answer"; "^ 51'^.Hl'slK >TW^, 
 "one ought not to be afraid of mere noise." 
 
 '• irm and TJ^, when used as correlatives, are equivalent to the English so that, 
 and the Latin ita ut ; thus, T^qT 4^Ih1 "STFlfw TT^T TTT «fi%^» " I must so act 
 that my master awake," i. e. " I must do something to make my master awake." 
 So also r# "JT ^TRTft? xnTT T^T^t «I!^JT, " do not you know that I keep watch 
 in the house ?" 
 
 d. tnr is also used for " that "; as, W^ «T(T«ft "^qTlft ^ ^nrfif ^r^T M^\m fWTit, 
 " this is a new doctrine, that having killed an enemy remorse should be felt." 
 
 e. fan , " why ?" may often be regarded as a note of interrogation wliich is not 
 to be translated, but affects only the tone of voice in which a sentence is uttered ; as, 
 'TrffnTT^'JI f^ oh'Og'ri MTijri; " is any one honoured for mere birth 1" 
 
 It sometimes has the force of "whether?" as, ^nTiTt f^RH inpT^ ^HIT^ cj^f) 
 T^lfrT ^THMilrfit '^. "let it be ascertained whether he is worthy to receive so 
 large a salary, or whether he is unworthy "; l^ ^i% f^; Jpi;^ TJITT ^ U, 
 " the minister knows whether the king is meritorious or not." 
 
 217. The conjunctions ^rf^ and ^TT, " if," are commonly used 
 with the indicative ; as, ^f^ nft^flT vr^jfm ^'ifir, " if he live he will 
 behold prosperity "; X[f^ mn WMiMH ^^ ^ftcT, " if there is need of 
 me"; irgrrr '^ "Tftjmn cRt ^fxj^,, "if avarice were abandoned who 
 would be poor?" 
 
 218. The interjections fin^ and ^ require the accusative ; as, 
 f>l^ ^^F. "woe to the wretch!" and the vocative interjections 
 the vocative case; as, vft: XTP'^. "O traveller!" 
 
THE PARTICLE ITI WITH THE RECTA ORATIO. 205 
 
 ON THE USE OF ^ffff WITH THE RKCTA oRATin. 
 
 219. All the languages of the East are averse to the use of the 
 obHqua oratio. In Sanscrit it is never admitted, and when any 
 one relates the words or describes the sentiments or tlioughts of 
 another, the relator invariably represents him as speaking the ac- 
 tual words in his own person. In such cases the particle ^ff 
 (properly meaning " so," " thus,'") is often placed after the words 
 quoted, and may be regarded as serving the purpose of inverted 
 commas ; thus, f^nm 35^. ^"[^ ^t^ ^. the pupils said, " we 
 have accomplished our object,' not according to the English or 
 Latin idiom, " the pupils said that theij had accomplished their ob- 
 ject." So also oh<j)^oMO ^TT ^^ ntr, your husband calls you " quar- 
 relsome,", where et)<ji^eHi} is in the nominative case, as being the 
 actual word supposed to be spoken by the husband himself in his 
 own person. So again ^nHTJT fV^BTRr^TO^ ^flT ^Erif ^^E^ »W ^^ 
 K4^<4 fil , all the birds praise you in my presence, saying, " he is an 
 object of confidence," where the particle '^ is equivalent to " say- 
 ing," and the word fcTHJ T M.* |»nT; is not in the accusative, to agree 
 with ^t*iM, as might be expected, but in the nominative, as being 
 the actual word supposed to be uttered by the birds in their own 
 persons. In some cases, however, the accusative is retained be- 
 fore ^fir ; as, in the following example from Manu : "^ "^Wi^ ^ 
 ^T?: , they call an ignorant man " child." But in the latter 
 part of the same line it passes into a nominative ; as, fwiq; ^^ "ff 
 JTt^, but (they call) a teacher of scripture " ftither." II. 153. 
 
 a. The use of ^ is by no means restricted to the quotation of 
 the words spoken by another. It often has reference merely to 
 what is passing in the mind either of another person or of one's 
 self. When so employed, it is usually joined with the indeclinable 
 participle, or of some other part of a verb, signifying, " to think," 
 " suppose," &c., and may be translated by the English conjunc- 
 tion that, to which, in fact, it may be regarded as ecjuivalent ; thus, 
 ^^f!Z\ ^nret MK^Ph ^ ^jft^rni, " having ascertained that it is a monkey 
 who rings the bell "; ^^r^ ^^T^.^f^t ^JRirfrm ^ »rf7R ^>fl, " his idea 
 was that an increase of wealth ought Mg.iin to be made ""; "ir^t^^ 
 T^m ^A\t\^ »Tr% ^ JRftr f^rtmr, " reflecting in his mind that I am 
 happy in possessing such a wife." The accusative is also retained 
 
206 THE PARTICLE ITI WITH THE RECTA ORATIO. 
 
 before 5^ in this sense ; as, JTiT^ ^frT JTi^, " thinking that he was 
 dead/' In all these examples the use of ^w indicates that a quo- 
 tation is made of the thoughts of the person at the time when the 
 event took place. 
 
 b. Not unfrequently the participle " thinking/' " supposing/' &c. 
 is omitted altogether, and ^fif itself involves the sense of such a 
 participle; as, ^T^-ftT Tf 'ST^JT^iN^ W^ ^ «fi?^:, "a king even 
 though a child is not to he despised, saying to ones self he is a 
 mortal "; ^i^i^i^ ^ f%^ ^ ^ ^T^ ^srg^^nir , " either through af- 
 fection or through compassion towards me, saying to yourself what 
 a wretched man he is/' 
 
 EXERCISES IN TRANSLATION AND PARSING, 
 
 220. The following two stories, taken from the 4tli Book of the 
 Hitopadesha, will conclude the chapter on Syntax. A literal 
 translation is given to both stories, and to the first a grammatical 
 analysis is subjoined. All the rules of combination are observed, 
 but the words are separated from each other, contrary to the usual 
 practice of the Hindus. In the two cases where such separation 
 is impossible, viz. where a final and initial vowel blend together 
 into one sound, and where crude words are joined with others to 
 form compounds, a dot placed underneath marks the division : 
 
 1. "^TftcT^^rmF? g^ ipfn^ ^^i^nm ^rw gfir;, "There is in the 
 
 sacred grove of the sage Gautama a holy-sage named Mahatapah 
 (Great-devotion)." 
 
 2. WTTTCRTTfw^ irf^^jr^TR^: ^rsirg^^ ^T2\, "By him, in the 
 neighbourhood of his hermitage, a young mouse, fallen from the 
 beak of a crow, was seen." 
 
 3. inft ^zrr^^ w^ nffTRfr ^^^RTF^: ^<4f|i(:, " Then by that sage, 
 touched with compassion, with grains of wild rice it was reared." 
 
 4. rifiHtll 'jf^ ^rf^WJT ^^VT=n^ f^TT^ 5f«T^ ?^l > " Soon after 
 this, a cat was observed by the sage running after the mouse to 
 devour it." 
 
 5. IT ^^ >?^f^T ^■Mlcjl'**^ Trq'.TWT^ FJT gfJTJTT ^^^\ T%ft Ui\t*i\ 
 ^3irT:, "Perceiving the mouse terrified, by that sage, through the 
 efiicacy of his devotion, the mouse was changed into a very 
 strong cat." 
 
EXERCISES IN TRANSLATION AND rARSING. 20", 
 
 6. V ik^^: *^u ' i f^irfjT i tht: -^i: fir. i f^r^r ^min^ jt^^ htt i 
 W dHill ^ ^mr: ^fit:. "The cat fears the doo;. Upon that it was 
 chani2:iHl into a doj^. Great is the dread of the dog for a tiger ; 
 then it was transformed into a tiger/' 
 
 7. ^3^1 ^mn=T ^srfcr f fwfrrft^ T^ntrfk ^f^:, "Now the sage re- 
 gards oven tlie tiger as not dillering at all from the mouse." 
 
 S. -^nr. ^ W^WT jHTTTT tt ^rm ?^T ^t^, "Then all the persons 
 residing in the neighbourhood, seeing the tiger, say." 
 
 9. -^RiT gf^TfTT gfTTSRt-"^ «4IHri l ^fhr., ' By this holy -sage this 
 mouse lias been brought to the condition of a tiger,' 
 
 10. ?TTT^^ ^i^ ^ ^mr: ^r^rzft-f'^^jnm , " The tiger overhearing this, 
 being uneasy, reflected." 
 
 11. TTT^^ 'SHH *jfH»il »{lf=JK<=M rTR^ ^ HT yJ!iMl^[»iH ■•ii<*lf%^^ *T 
 TJoJifTHI^. " As long as it shall be lived by this sage, so long this 
 disgraceful story of my original condition will not die away." 
 
 12. ^ ^nTTof^ar ^f^ f^ u<itlri:> "Thus reflecting he prepared 
 (was about) to kill the sage." 
 
 13. gfn^ iTW P^ckIPrtt ^rn^ "^tt^ ?f^ *^ ^^^ "^^ 5.^^°'' '^ f^* » 
 " The sage discovering his intention, saying, ' again become a 
 mouse,"" he was reduced to (his former state of) a mouse." 
 
 The student will observe in this story four peculiarities : 1st, the 
 simplicity of the style ; 2dly, the prevalence of compound words ; 
 3dly, the scarcity of verbs ; 4thly, the prevalence of participles in 
 lieu of verbs. 
 
 First sentence Asfi, " there is," 3d sing. pres. of the root as, 2d conj., p. 101. 
 
 Gautamasya, "of Gautama," noun of the first class, masc. gend. gen. case (p. 31.). 
 Mums, "of the sage," noun of the second class, masc. gend. gen. case (p. 33.). 
 Visargah changed to s by r. 25. a. p. 14. Tapovane, "in the sacred grove," or 
 " grove of penance," genitively dependent compound, p. 101., the first member of the 
 compound formed -by the crude noun tapas, "penance," as being changed to o by 
 r. 29. ; the last member, by the loc. case of vana, " grove," noun of the first class, 
 neut. (p. 32.). Mahdtapa, " great devotion," relative form of descriptive compound, 
 p. 168., the first member formed by the crude adjective mahd (substituted for 
 mahat), "great"; the last member, by the nom. case of tapas, "devotion," noun 
 of the seventh class, neut. (pp. 43. 44.), Visargah being dropped by r. 28. b. p. 14. 
 iVamo, " by name," an adverb, p. 151. a. Mi/nih, "a sage," noun of the second 
 class, masc, nom. case. Vis. remains bv r. 24. h. 
 
208 EXERCISES IN TRANSLATION AND PARSING. 
 
 Second sentence.— Te/za, "by him," instr. case of the pronoun tnt, p. 51. r. 77- 
 Ashramasannidhdne, " in the neighbourhood of his hermitage," genitively dependent 
 compound, p. 101., the first member formed by the crade noun dshrama^ " her- 
 mitage"; the last member by the loc. case of sannidhdna, "neighbourhood," noun 
 of the first class, neut. (p. 82.). The initial d of this word blends with the final of 
 tena into d, by r. 4. p. 7. Mushikashdvakah, " a young mouse," or " the young of 
 a mouse," genitively dependent compound, p. 161., the first member formed by the 
 crude noun mushika, "a mouse"; the last, by the nom. case of sMra/ca, " the 
 young of any animal," noun of the first class (p. 31.). Vis. remains by r. 24. a. 
 Kdkamukhdd, "from the beak (or mouth) of a crow," genitively dependent com- 
 pound, p. 161. ; the first member, formed by the crude noun kdka^ "a crow"; the 
 last, by the abl. case of mukha, " mouth," noun of the first class, neut. (p. 32.), 
 t being changed to d by r. 14. p. 11. Brashto, "fallen," nom. case, sing. masc. of 
 the pass, past part, of the root bhransh, p. 140. n. ; ah changed to o by r. 26. a. 
 Drishfah, "seen," nom. case, sing. masc. of the pass, past part, of the root drish 
 (¥51 )' P- 1'^^- '• ^^^^- remains by r. 24. b. 
 
 Third sentence. — Tafo, " then," adv. p. 152. a. ; as changed to o by r. 29. and 26. a. 
 Daydyuktena, " touched with compassion," instrumentally dependent compound, 
 p. 160. ; the first member formed by the crude noun dayd^ "compassion"; the last, 
 
 by the instr. case oi yukta, " endowed with," pass, past part, of the root yuj, p. 139. L 
 
 Tena, see second sentence. Munind, " by the sage," noun of the second class, masc. 
 
 gend. instr. case (p. 33.). Nlvdrakanaih, "with grains of wild rice," genitively 
 
 dependent compound, p= 161. ; the first member formed by the crude noun riivdra, 
 
 " wild rice"; the second, by the instr. plur. of kana^ noun of the first class, masc. 
 
 Vis. remains by r. 24. a. Sanvarddhitah, " reared," nom. case, sing, of the pass. 
 
 past piu-t. of the causal form of the root vridh, p. 141. Vis. remains by r. 24. b. 
 Fourth sentence. — Tadanantaram, "soon after this," compound adverb, the first 
 
 member formed with the pronoun tat, " this "; the second by the adverb aiiantaram, 
 
 "after." Mushikam, noun of the first class, masc. gend., ace. case (p. 31.). 
 
 Khddltum, "to eat," infinitive mood of the root khdd, p. 85. r. 106. and r. 200. 
 
 Anudhdvan, "pursuing after," "running after," nom. case, sing. masc. of the pres. 
 
 part, paras, of the root dhdv, "to run," with the preposition aim, "after,'' p. 136. b. 
 
 Fiddlo, "a cat," noun of the first class, masc. (p. 31.), nom. case; ah changed to o 
 
 by r. 26. a. Munind, see third sentence. Drishtah, see second sentence. 
 
 Fifth sentence. — Tarn, ace. case of the pronoun tat (p. 51.), used as a definite 
 
 article, p. 28. r. 46. Mushikam, see fourth sentence. Bhitam, " terrified," ace. 
 
 case, sing. masc. of the pass, past part, of the root hhl, p. l.'?8. b, Alokya, " per- 
 
EXERCISES IN TRANSLATION AND PARSING. 2()\) 
 
 ceiving," indeclinable part, of the root /ok\ with tlio prep, a, p. 14.5./. Tapahpra- 
 hhdvnt, " through the efficacy of his devotion " (p. 184. f. ), genitively dependent com- 
 pound, p. IGl. ; the firet member formed by the crude noun tapas, " devotion," .s being 
 changed to Visargali, by r. 29. and 24. a. ; the second, by the abl. case of prahhdra, 
 noun of the first class, masc. (p. 31.). Tma, sec second sentence. Mutiina^ sve 
 third sentence. Mushiko, nom. case, ah changed to o by r. 2fl. a. Bdlishtfio, " very 
 strong," nom. case, masc. of the superlative form of the adj. baltn, "strong" 
 (see p. 47.), all changed to o by r. 26. a. Vldrdali, see fourth sentence. Vis. 
 remains by r. 24. a. Kritah, "changed," " made." nom. case, sing, of the pass, past 
 pai-t. of the root kri, p. 138. h. Vis. remains by r. 24. l>. 
 
 Sixth sentence.— iSa, nom. ease of the pronoun faf (p. 51.), used as a definite 
 article, p. 28. r. 46. Vis. dropped, by note t, p. 14. Fidalah, see fourth sentence. 
 Kukkitrdd, "the dog," noun of the first class, masc. (p. 31.), abl. case after a verb of 
 fearing (p. 193. a.), t changed to c? by r. 14. JBibheti, "fears," 3d sing. pres. tense 
 of the root bhl, 3d conj. p. 119. Tatah, " upon that," adv. p. 152. o. y as changed 
 to ah, by r. 29. and 24. a. Kiikkiirah, " the dog," nom. case (p. 31 .). Vis. remains 
 by r. 24. a. Kritah, see fifth sentence. Kuhhurasya, " of the dog," gen. case (p. 31 . ). 
 Vydghrun, "for the tiger," noun of the first class, masc. (p. 31.), abl. case, after 
 a noun of "fear" (p. 184. g.), t changed to n by r. 15. Mahad, "great," noim adj. 
 of the fifth class, r. 63. nom. case, sing. neut. t changed to dhy r. 14. Bhayam, 
 "fear," noun of tlie first class, neut. (p. 32.), nom. case. Tadanantaravi, see fourth 
 sentence. Vydghrah, nom. case. Vis. remains by r. 24. a. Kritah, see fifth 
 sentence. 
 
 Seventh sentence. — Atha, " now," inceptive particle, p. 154. b. Vydghram^ ace. 
 case, ^/j?, " even," adv. MusMkanimshesham, "as not differing at all from the 
 mouse," compound adverb ; the first member formed by the crude noun mushika ; 
 the second by the neut. form of the substantive vishesha, " difference," w^ith nir 
 prefixed, see p. 177- b. Pashyati, 3d sing. pres. tense of the root drish, 1st conj. 
 p. 107. Munih, see first sentence. 
 
 Eighth sentence — J/a//, " then," adv. p. 152. a. A^a?t'<?, "all," pronomind adj. 
 nom. case, plur. masc. p. 54. r. 87. Tatrasthd, "residing in the neighbourhood," 
 anomalous compound, in its character resembling a locatively dependent ; the first 
 member being formed by the adverb tatra (p. 152. b.), " there," or "in that place"; 
 the second by the nom. plur. masc. of the participial noun of agency of the root sthd, 
 "to remain," p. 149. 1. Vis. dropped by r. 20. b. Jands, "persons," noun of the 
 first class, masc. gend. (p. 31.) noin. case, plur. Vis. changed to *■ by r. 25. a. Tain, 
 aec. case of the pronoun tat (p. 51 .), used as a definite article. Vydyhravi, " tiger," 
 noun of the first class, masc. gend. (p. 31.) ace. ease. Drishfwd, "having seen," 
 
 E E 
 
210 EXERCISES IX TRANSLATION AND PARSING. 
 
 indeclinable past participle of the root drhh (g^ ), p. 143. a. Fadanfl, " they say," 
 od plur. pros, of the root iv/f/, 1st conj. 
 
 Ninth sentence. — Anena, "by this," instr. case of the demonstrative pronoun 
 ayarn^ p. 52. Mimind, see third sentence. Mushiho, nom. case, ah changed to o by 
 r. 26. b. Aya7n, " this," nom. case of the demonstrative pron., p. 52. The initial a 
 cut off by r. 26. b. Vymjhratdm, " the condition of a tiger," fern, abstract noun of 
 the first class (p. 31.), ace. case, formed from the substantive vydghra^ "a tiger," by 
 the affix id, p. 24. xiv. Nltah, "brought," nom. case, sing. masc. of the pass. part, 
 of the root ni, p. 138. h. 
 
 Tenth sentence. — Etach, "this," ace. case, neut. of the demonstrative pron. etat^ 
 p. 52. r. 79., t being changed to ch by r. 17. Chhrutwd, " overhearing," indeclinable 
 participle of the root shru (y(), p. 143. a. TJT^gx becomes "^igTbyr. 17. Vydghrah, 
 nom. case. Vis. remains by r. 24. a. Saryatho, " uneasy," relative compound, 
 formed by prefixing the preposition saha to the fem. substantive vyathd, p. 169. 
 r. 161. See also p. 32. i , ah changed to o by r. 26. Zi. Achintayat," reflected" 
 Sd sing. 1st pret. of the root chmt, 10th conj. p. 87. e; the initial a cut off by 
 r. 26. b. 
 
 Eleventh Sentence. — Ydvad, " as long as," adv. p. 151. a., t changed to d by r. 14. 
 Anena, see nmth sentence. J'lvitavyam^ " to be lived," nom. case, neut. of the fut. 
 pass. part, of the root jlv, p. 146. a. See also r. 215. c. d. Tdi-af, " so long," adv. 
 correlative to ydvat, p. 151 . a. Idam, " this," nom. case, neut. of the demonstrative 
 pron. aya7u, p. 52. Mama, "of me," gen. case of the pronoun aham, "I," p. 50. 
 Swarupdkhydnam, "story of my original condition," genitively dependent compoimd, 
 p. 161. ; the first member formed by the crude noun swarupa, "natural form" (cf. 
 r. 83.) ; the second by the nom. case of dhhydna, noun of the first class, neuter, m 
 retained by r. 23. Akirtikaram, " disgi-aceful," accusatively dependent compound ; 
 the first member formed by the crude noun aklrii, "disgi-ace"; the second by the 
 nom. case, neut. of the participial noun of agency kara, p. 149. 1. A^a, " not," adv. 
 p. 153. a. Paldyishyate, " will die away," 3d sing. 2d fut. atm. of the compound 
 vevh pahly, formed by combining the root i with the prep, para, p. 174. 
 
 Twelfth Sentence. — Iti, "thus," adv. p. 153. e. See also r. 219. a. Samdlochya, 
 " reflecting," indeclinable part, of the comijound verb samdloch (p. 145./.), formed 
 by combining the root loch with the prepositions sa?n and a, pp. 174. 175. 
 
 Munim, ace. case. Hantum, "to kill," infinitive mood of the root han, pp. 85. 
 and 115. and r. 200. Samudyatah, "prepared," nom. case, sing. masc. of the pass, 
 past part, of the compound verb samudyam (p. 140. o.), formed by combining the 
 root yam with the prepositions sam and ut. 
 
 Thirteenth sentence. — Munis, nom. case. Vis. changed to * by r. 25. a. Taf^ya, 
 
EXERCISES IN TRANSLATION AND TARSING. 211 
 
 "of liini," gen. case of the pron. tut^ p. 51. ChihlrsltUant, " intention," aec. ciise, 
 ncut. of the pass, past part, of the desiderativc base of the root kri, " to do" (p. 141. 
 s.), used as a substantive. Gi/dfn^a, or Jnntwd, " discovering," indecl. part, of the 
 root Jna, p. 143, a. Pitnar, " again," adv. p. 153. e., r remains by r. 32. Mils/iilw, 
 nom. case, ah changed to o by r. 2(5. a. Bhara, " become," 2d sing, impcrat. of the 
 root hhu, p. 104. Ifi/ answers to inverted commas, see r. 219., tlie final i changed 
 to If by r. 7. Uktu-d^ "saying," indecl. part, of the root I'ach, p. 143. a. Muxhika, 
 nom. case. Vis. dropped by r. 28. o. Era, " indeed," adv. r. 134. 
 STORY OF THE BRAHMAN AND HIS WEASEL. 
 
 -i<i<^MH 'JSTFTff 1 ir^ -^^ -^j^m: ^r^i^'TTft^Tf ^rfWinr i ^ ^j^ ^^ 
 ji^iPh w^"'^"^: ofif^^ -^T^ xT^Hrfn- i f^ f^i^ftt^^^r? x^w, o^'^ftr ^rrfta" 
 
 oMcj^J^itq TT^rrfr? I inn ^r^T mr. i irw^^ tt^ ^^^ ^T^jV^nfhr "nw^ 
 
 "HHI^H ^bU I ,*<tn aiiq-lQffT: ^fwg I TTTft-'^ ■^ofl ^T^RTR 'SrRTnTJT 
 
 iTR^ ^HT^ "gy^i^ tr^xTfir tit^ =jic4*: ^^: ^ftrfw ^f w ^rryrf^Tm 
 
 1) p. 101. the final changed to ij l)y r. 7- -) loc. c. oiujjayinl, p. 31. ^) ah 
 
 changed to o by r. 26. a. •) p. 24. xv. ^) pass, past part, of the root *m, with 
 the preposition ^ra, p. 1.38. 6. e) p. 51. ') r. 154. ») p. 177. c. '■>) p. 145. L 
 1") r. 106. and r. 200. n) r. 125. p. 140. o. and p. 180. a. i'^) p. 156. e. ' ') p. 41 . 
 ")p. lCl.r.l47. 1^) p. 118. r. 200. i6) p. 11. r. 17- '') p. 143. '«) r. 154., 
 ddridra is an abstract noun, formed according to p. 23. viii. '•') 1st pret. of the 
 
 root chint, 10th conj. p. 126. 2u) r. 171. a. 21) p. io7. '--) or A^lrHl , r. 4. 
 
 23) r. 85. r. 17. -') p. 124. 2.^-) ggn. case of shishu, p. 35. 26) r. 05. -tj j.. 4. 
 28) p. 151. a. 2f.) p. 101. and r. 201. ^f) p. 112. -i) anomalous dependent 
 
 compound. According to r. 180. a. it may be regarded as accusatively dependent. 
 32) p. 52. :«) anomalous dependent compound. '■'■^) r. 171. c. 35) indecl. part, 
 of the causal form of the root sthd, yi'iih. the prepositions vi and ara, p. 145. t. 
 36) p. 143. a. 37) Visargah changed to s by r. 25. a. 38) p. 177. c. 39) pros, 
 part, of the root gam, p. 107. p. 136. with a prefixed, p. 174. '") r. 154. ^i) p. 141, 2. 
 root pad, with vi and d. ^'-) Vis. changed to sh by r. 25. a. '') The initial 
 
 a cut. off by r. 9. ''^j pres. part, of ijd, with d, r. 123. -i) p. 145. y'. 
 
212 EXERCISES IN TRANSLATION AND PARSING. 
 
 ''•^) complex relative compound (p. 171. &), the whole being the relative form of 
 descriptive, involving a dependent and an aggregative. ^') p. 145. g. root gam, 
 
 with prep, upa and a. ^s) loc. case, dual of charana, p. 81., see p. 195. c. 
 
 49) 2d pret. of root ^, p. 74. so) Vis. to s by r. 25. a. =i)r. 171.ft. 
 
 52)p. 143. a. 53)p,52. 54)p, 139. /t, 5s) r, 219. a. the final changed to ?/ 
 
 by r. 7. ^^) p. 145. L root char, with prep, vi and negative prefix a. »-) p. 142. 
 root pad, with vi and a. ss) r. 8. 59) p. 144. «, eo) p. 107. and p. 199. c. 
 
 61) p. 70. d. fi2) Vis. to s by r. 25. a. 63) p. 107. ^i) Vis. dropped by r. 28. a. 
 65) r. 143. 66) p. 145. /. root rup, with 7ii. 67) r, 159. a. 
 Translation. 
 There lives in Oujein,* a Brahman, named Madhava. His wife 
 bore him (a son). She having stationed the Brahman (her hus- 
 band) to take charge of the young child, went to perform ablution. 
 Meanwhile a message came from the king for the Brahman to 
 perform the Parvana Shraddha.^ On hearing which the Brahman, 
 from his natural neediness, thought to himself, "if I do not go 
 quickly some other Brahman will take the Shraddha. But there 
 is none here (that I may leave) as a guardian to the child, — what 
 then can I do ? Come, having stationed this long-cherished weasel, 
 dear to me as a son, in charge of the infant, I will go.'"" Having 
 so done, he went. Presently a black serpent silently approaching 
 the child was killed by the weasel and torn in pieces. By and 
 by the weasel seeing the Brahman returning, quickly running to 
 meet him, his mouth and feet smeared with blood, rolled himself 
 at the Brahman's feet. Then that Brahman seeing him in such 
 a condition, hastily concluding that he had eaten the child, killed 
 him. Afterwards no sooner did he come up than he beheld the 
 infant slumbering safely and the black serpent lying dead. Then 
 looking at his benefactor the weasel, and bitterly repenting (of his 
 precipitation), he experienced exceeding grief. 
 
 * The oldest city in India. 
 
 t The Shraddha is a funeral ceremony, consisting of oblations of water and fire 
 to the gods and manes, and gifts to the officiating Bralimans, performed at various 
 fixed periods, in behalf of a deceased parent or ancestor, to secure the happy condi- 
 tion of his soul. The Parvana is a particular form of Shraddha, in behalf of fAree 
 ancestors. 
 
SELECTIONS 
 
 IN PROSE AND VERSE. 
 
 Observe, that the greater number of the words in the following 
 Selections will be found in the Vocabulary to Professor Johnson's 
 edition of the Hitopadesha. And whenever a word does not occur 
 in that Vocabulary, it is given at the foot of the page. 
 
 The words of the text have been printed separately from each 
 other, as it is imagined that the permutation of final and initial 
 letters is of itself a difficulty, unknown in other languages, suffi- 
 cient to retard the progress of the beginner in his first effort at 
 translation. It seems, therefore, wholly unreasonable and unne- 
 cessary to increase this difficulty by an useless conformity to the 
 practice of the natives, in joining together all the words in a sen- 
 tence, until the student has attained a certain degree of proficiency. 
 When, however, a final and initial vowel blend into one sound, 
 and when crude nouns are associated to form compounds, separa- 
 tion is impossible, and in such cases a dot placed underneath 
 marks the division. 
 
 The substance of the following simple story of the Brahman 
 Vedagarbha and his pupils, is taken from a little book, printed in 
 Calcutta, called the Sanskritamala. 
 
^ MM.$'i<?ii ^T^ "^^ n^tiiT^H: ^trn^^TT!?? ^ran^rTii 
 
 ^HHIdi :ilcT^%^^?F^qT^rrGrriT ird,<^^rd,Hl*4IH ^ 
 
 267' -^^ Y.- 4j3 ♦ 28 T^ 29 -^4 30 ^ 31 / 
 
 
 wT ^fT^^^iK-^MMvjif?3id ^oipmn: II 
 
 1) p. 161. r. 14?!1P*^^) p. 151. a. •^) r. 157. p. 42. note t- ^) Vis. dropped by 
 r. 28. a. s) p. loi. 6) p. 14, note t- ') p. 167. b. p. 171. c. The Vedanta 
 is the theological part of the V^edas contaiaed in those chapters called Upanishads ; 
 the Vedangas are the sciences subordinate to the Vedas ; such as Grammar, Prosody,' 
 Astronomy, &c., see Manu II. 105. *) p. 54. r. 87- ^) lit. "seeing to the 
 
 opposite bank," i.e. "thoroughly acquainted with," r. 43. 1. i^') p. 152. a. Vis. 
 remains by r. 29. and 24. a. n) ace. case of m<i^||^|, "a school," lit. "a reading- 
 room," r. 147- '-) p- 143. a. 1^) p. 35. r. 54. 1*) ace. case pi. of f eRjrf^" rf , 
 "a seeker of knowledge," "student," p. 43. r. 147- '^^ ace. plur. neut. p. 32. 
 i changed to y by r. 7. "') P- 87. note*, and r. 192. a. ''') p. 154. b. 
 IS) p. 149. a. p. 171. b. '') p. 49. ^c) ^om. case pi. Vis. remains by r. 24. a. 
 21) p. 140. 0. root gatu with prep, a (p. 174.) and sam (175). --) p. 152. d. 
 23) p. 144. p. 174. •*) p. 51. -5) p. 163. a. ^o) ^p, " having asked," 
 p. 143. a. The final a of this word blends with the initial a of the next by r. 4. 
 -') ^TTTT, "arrival," irftinT. "cause," r. 147- ■") "he asked," p. 142. a. 
 2') Vis. to s by r. 25. a. •>") p. 76. rf. p. 175. "i) p. 54. r. 84. 3-) " a teacher 
 of the Vedas," r. 147. See Manu II. 140. 141. for the difference between an dcharya 
 sai an upddhydya. ^'^) p. 171- b. Vis. dropped by r. 28. a. '•^*) r. 219. 
 '') mft^W, "learning" (p. 23. vii.), T^qrfff, "fame" (p. 24. ii.) r. 147- »")p.50. 
 37) p. 153. a. 151. d. ^') p. 143. a. ' ) "from another school," affix fas, p. 152. a. 
 Vis. dropped by r. 28. a. "") p. 153. g., the final a blends with the initial a of 
 dydtdh. ^') p. 138. 6. p. 174. 
 
II %^;3rirxn^m^ ii 
 
 1 / v/ ^• 
 
 d^Mftdm^ II .V r^^-^ 
 
 #ZT ^^: ittct: Wi^ ^cTT% ^: ^ ^rr^T^: ^nr^: 
 // ^ ^/<?. ^ /i f^ * ts~ 4-70 2^ 3 
 MI<iV!!^f ^flKHMP^T* II rR[r "5%^ HTngrTT: ^ ^t^: 
 
 XTOSTT^TTT '^Fmr* II mT ^TF^^^TOR ^R^rT n > 
 
 %qt ft? ^rran ^Ttzi^^ ? II %N(T ITrq^: I ^rwT^ 
 
 ^: II W^ ^: I ^ cRt'Fr ^{^^rmt ii ^tt^t- 
 
 ^-) for 1^ ^Miufi ii ^, r. 4. r. 5. r. 199. «) p. 138. ft. 44) ^ 174^ 
 
 "•;) p. 123. «) 2d future, p. 88. 4') p. 144. c. «) ^TT^^PT. " sitting down," 
 p. 177. c. «) ace. pi. neut. p. 32. ^'') " He gave," p. 142. a. s') locative 
 
 absolute, r. 189. ^2) p. 151. a. 53) p. 139. i, p. 174. m) p. 53. r. 83. «) jgt 
 lu-et. of root vad. 56) p. 51, ^7) r. 79. ^s) p. 177. <.. 59) « to each one," r. 171 . b. 
 ^'OTT, "a cell or student's apartment." «') p. 144. c. p. 126. ^-) p. 118. 
 
 63) gen. c. p. 35. Vis. changed to r by r. 27.c. <'^) "according to the order," 
 r. 171. 6. ''■■') " he performed," root sthd, with prep, anu (p. 173.), see also p. 142. a. 
 ««) ITTfR, "in the morning," r. 31. «-) ^rnf^cfi, " having performed his daUy 
 
 prayers, or religious observances," r. 169. '-) r. 161. s") " having arrived at," 
 
 root i, with sam and «, r. 166. p. 144. a. "") p. 139. e. ^i) ^^^ " a scholar." 
 
 72) r. 90. a. p. 111. '^)r. 186. a. -4) p. 113. p. 147. 'j- ^^) p. 54. r. 85. 
 
 76) r. 215. and p. 50. 77) » are to be read," nom. pi. m. root Tjy. ■^) noni. pi. of 
 mf^, " law," as delivered by Manu and other legislators, p. 34. 79) p. 14(5. «. 
 
 »") ace. pi. of wli, "logical treatise." ') 2d fut. atm. of /, with adhi, p. 79. e. 
 
 V 
 
8 H %^;^MIl5^IH » 
 
 J A, \ / 2. 
 
 /* 2 ^3 / '2.^''^ 
 
 3" 3 ^ / 1. 3 / 
 
 A<^ MMM ^TW^cT II cR'TOR ^ W? I "Scn^* 
 
 2. 3 * / 2 ^ (k S^ 
 
 -^6<5 4?L_?\_ ^ IT v/" 
 
 ^^q^: W^y\ W^m ^ ^ M^Mlrri I ^ff t^br^ 
 
 ^ ^ 354:" ^ sf ^/ rv "^^ -N 7 ^ ^ 
 
 ftRTT TT^ WTIT ^^H ^^ fwBw ^BPJT I W^ 
 cTFTfT #t^ II ^ ^5^m JFft- WtT^: Iwq WrMj^<H 
 
 -') p. 104. 3) p. 153. e. 4) See root 'S(, p. 114. note Z>. 5) "readers of the 
 
 Vedas," nom. pi. m. (p. 149. a.) «) p. 177. j. 7) -q^^ "a lesson," "lecture," 
 
 r. 192. o. '^)p.87. e. 9) r. 27. a. i")p. 153./. ") nom.pl. of^gn ^lP^H , 
 " a reader," p. 149. a. 12) p. 174. "^r. 20. 1 ') p. 142. a. ^■') p. 152. c. 
 
 1*^) ^TTW, " a student of ^prfif or law," p. 23. viii. i' ) p. 145. i. i«) p. 151. b. 
 
 19) "every day," iffiT is often prefixed in this sense, p. 177- b. 20) p. i(;7_ j. 
 
 21) p. 199. e. ") for ^nf Ijeht^ l, r. 6. See also p. 152. d. '-■-) p. 37. 24) 2d pret. 
 of the caubal of ^ , " to know," with prep, f^, p. 87. d. and r. 108. 2^) yoc. case, 
 p. 37. and r. 31. 26) gen. case, p. 31. and r. 28. b. 27) y. 25. a. 
 
 2-^) p. 48. •^■^UTt is the proper form (r. 157.), but efi may be redundantly added to 
 any word. 29) p. loi. so) j., 25. a. ^i) p. 49. S2) root ms, with prep, ni, 
 p. 107. S3) p, 152. a. r. 28. a. *i) loc. c. (r. 72.) of ekaika, " each single," eka 
 being doubled, r. 6. The doubling of a word in a distributive sense is very usual. 
 3->)p.48. 3f')p.l71.c. 3-)r.63. 3s)i..89. a. ■^^)^.l4:Q.a. ^^') r. 26. 6. 
 41) p. 150. b. ^'-) " any," p. 54. r. 85. -J^) " answer," ace. c. 
 
II %^H^XTnsErFf II M 
 
 ^ >r 7 / /o ^ e /z 
 
 ^fj ^HfM-M^I« T I ^NM H^TM^^ ''^/F ^"l^ 
 
 f^ m^ ^^ ^rc^ vroft "^^'^ w^tttt 
 
 «) " without giving," p. 143. a. r. 135. 'i^) r. 180. a. ^e) " lost in thought," nom. c. 
 «) p. 143. a. 1") p. 43. p. 182. d. ^o) p. 151. a. -") " having deliberated," root char 
 incaus. with prep, vi, p. 145. i. "'') inst. c. of ^f%, "mind." ■''2) " he fixed upon," 
 p. 142. S3) p. 1.51. c. -i)p. 70. d 5^)r.94. se) «« I will declare," 2d fut. 
 of^rtc/i (p. 80.), with prep. 11. ^v.m. -^) "built with stone," r. 144. 
 
 ■'9) ^151. b. *!) "of such like," gen. pi. ^^ is added to the crude pronouns ff. 
 PIT, ij, to express similarity, the final a being lengthened. ''^') "the building," 
 
 nom. c. n, ^'-) "to be eflFected by the outlay of much money," p. 171. b. ^^) r.61. 
 ") for ^ ^^*, r.5. 65) r. 1.37. •""O p. 156. c. 67) p. 152. c. «*) p. 104. 
 69) r. 147. ^")r. 85. ^i) i-. 1,57. 72) loc. case of ^-^j "acquisition," p. 185. c. 
 "») "is recommended," p. 140. 0. ''*) p. 107. ''^) ^ER, "tomorrow," r.20. a. 
 
 76) p. 172. g. 77) igt fut. of gam, " to go," p. 80. 7s) p. ,35. 7ii) p. 43. 
 
 8") p. .37. ''Or. 150. ^-)p.47. *>■ ) " "lUJiificent," r. 25. a. '^) ^TflH^, 
 
 proper nai^ "Hero-conqueror," r. 42., t changed to n by r. 15. (see p. 1(J7.). 
 85) p. 41. r. 1 *>6) 2d fut. p. 80. «") for ^^ f^pm^, r. 20. f- ***) P- 145. d. 
 S9) « to the ijllace of the king of Benares." "') p. 7G. a. p. 112. and r. lOl.fl. 
 
 F F 
 
^ ^ <^ «S1B ^ 19 / 20 ^ ^1 
 
 T y * -^26 . ^ 27 -^ ^ ,^. 4 «^ 
 
 rm^HR ^=RcT I cRTO cT^R TJ^/ ^TIl ^i^ cT^TT^ 
 
 ') " with conversations on various books of science," or " with various conversations 
 on literary topics." -) "belonging to mid-day," ace. case, fem. p. 23. viii. 
 
 :<)p. 102. '') ace. case of ^^IIJ, "a space of twenty -four minutes," r. 180. a. 
 
 ■') "having rested" (p. 146./.), from '^R, " to be weary," see the force of f%, p. 175. 
 6) p. 107. '^) The repetition of the word gives continuity to the action, " as they 
 
 kept on advancing." **) ace. case, plur. neut. p. 36. r. 7- ^) p. 172. g. i") xjrnfihT, 
 " regal" (p. 23. xi.) ; ^^5^, " supremacy" (p. 23. vii.), "signs of regal supremacy," 
 r. 154. 11) p. 107. r. 123. '-) r. 28. J. i:') "thronged with many people," 
 
 p. 171. h. ") r. 147. 1^) 3d plur. 2d pret. of ap (p. 120.) with U. i^) nom. 
 case, dual of ^^7ft35> "a porter." In forming a noun according to p. 23. ix., 
 when the initial is a double consonant, consisting of two letters of which the last is 
 V or y, this double consonant is resolved into a syllable by the insertion of u for y, 
 or i for y, and this u or i take the Vriddhi change required by the rule. i') ^^, 
 " a mace," " staff," r. 157. '«) 3d dual, 2d pret. of ^, " to bow" (p. 76. c), with 
 
 prep. U, see p. 175. i^) 3d dual, 2d pret. of u^, "to ask." According to Wilkins 
 and Bopp (whose authority was followed at p. 77./. and p. 111.) this should be 
 xm^arfft, hut the form im^eAffl is correct according to the Siddhanta KaumudI 142, 
 and on the same authority the base tJlT^ wiU be retained throughout this tense. 
 2o)r. 84. 2i)p. 152. ^,. 22^ p. 112. aaid r. 4. 23) see ^, note ft. p. 114. and p. 175. 
 21) " the king's presence," r. 147. 2^) p. 198. c. 26) 2d dual, imperat. of eft, 
 
 " to lead." 27) p. 51. 28) p. 151. 29) dat. case, p. 43. 
 
II ^^T^rt^ms^Ff II 
 
 K ^3 Jt 
 
 rTT^^ ^TRT^ WiUHm I d<M7 %^Ht WR ^iSf^cj,H 
 
 ^^^n:^TT^iR|?FrR^: ^Hi.Md.Miiwr: ii 
 ftTcT73r%J^T: ^thh: haH^i: ^T^c^rfe^: ii 
 ^<|'^HT: ^tiNKi: M^LMic?i<drM<i: li 
 ^TFTTTfftoTPl: %^t: ^.MN(f7T^:^^: li 
 
 / ^ / 2. ^ ^ ^ / 
 
 W^ I W^ Tn%?^ ^ #ffr^ I MIWhI 
 
 ■"') ->!{ I ^T ) "an order," p. 182. c. ^i) "with great respect," lit. "preceded by great 
 respect." ^-) 1st pret. of "qt with sam and a. ^^^ inf. mood of root '^^, " to eulo- 
 gize," 10 conj. 3') " began," root ^ with prep. 'grT, r- 126. See also p. 197. ^s) nom. 
 plur. (r. 28. h) p. 23. ix. See also r. 188. 'e) nom. plur. " of a generous disposition." 
 3") p. 171. h. ■*^) "devoted to the sincere (discharge of) religious observances." 
 39) ^7^, "beauty" (p. 23. vii.); ^, "site" (p. 34.). «) nom. plur. of 
 
 TnTTifafi; " the performer of frequent sacrifices." ^i) p_ ](;{) ^ 42^ ^^^ " passion "; 
 jVi, " current," " the current of whose passion is restrained." ^^) 4lHf , "hand- 
 some as the moon." *^) ^r^, "excellence"; ^[TfQ5«T, "possessing." ''^) ^H^, 
 " always"; "gXR. " exertion," r. 5. r. 161. «) ^n^, "good"; ^TT^R, " practice," 
 r. 14. r. l.ji). '") "devoted to the protection of your subjects." i**) " knowing 
 
 the peculiarities of various countries"; ^, "knowing," p. 149. 1. 'J) loc. case of 
 >Tnrr, "a dialect." ■*') TftTT, "a gifted person" (r. 20. last paragrapli) ; tttJ, 
 
 "a multitude." ^') "to be honoured," root scv, p. 147. c. "-) "possessing a 
 
 large accumulation of fame and riches," r. 171. h. ■••>) r. 140. ■•') p. 33. p. 22. vi. 
 
55) "than royalty," p. 152. a. p. 188./ ^g) r. 217. ^t) r. 187. a. ss) p. 107. 
 
 5s) p. 1G7. «. «") Pcir^l^ri l. " superiority," p. 24. xiv. p. 188./. ei) r. 28. a. 
 
 «-) r. 1 54. HTfiini^. " a living creature," p. 27. iv. es) « fi-o^ ^jg jjgjj^g ^j^^ TH^^ 
 
 (r. 150. Z>.) or protector," see r. 177. h. ^) p. 154. h. 65) root f^, " to con- 
 
 quer," with prep, f^ and frfT., p- 144. a. efi) ace. case, neut. p. 43. r. 28. a. 
 
 67) '• one by whom gifts are given," " liberal," p. 169. a. 6«) p. 149. 1. 69) loc. 
 case of f?^, "the earth," p. 34. ^n) p_ 1(^9 „. 7i) root ^, "to praise," 
 
 p. 145. e. '2) r, 194. 73) p 49, 74) « silver coins," ace. case, plur. fern, 
 
 (p. 31.), r. 28. b. 75) p. 118. 76) ace. case of ^STTr.tR, " the inner or private 
 
 apartments." 77) p. 153./ 78) p. 146. „. 7y) p. 197. so) causal of ^, 
 
 " to hear," p. 144. c. ') p. 203. h. 2) ijt. « the superintendant of affairs '' 
 
 (r. 147.), "the steward," r. 28. a. ") p. 145.^. ■)) Tft, "to lead," 
 
 r. li)2. b. 
 
II %^nA"lMiicTn^ II e 
 
 cT^prRT: ^Hr^lMN^UJ I TJUT ITw^lTT ^ THf^^ 
 
 iRtspf ^Mif^? I TT^ ^^ I iwli f^-n! Hftf^- 
 
 l<=I^K<MlfT r!W ^iW Hj'^d I rrWT?T rTfgllTgSEt 
 
 /^ s' ^ J ^ !, — — / 
 
 Ht rTR^^TWrl^ drj<lll^* ^t^ I ^ ^3W^35f<T: 
 
 / / Z 
 
 MpMkchR in? I ^sTTifNH 
 
 ^TOTR: I ^"^W MIMKchl^ITTf 
 
 ., ,5 / >- Z Xo 3 / 
 
 ■') %?. " to lick " (p. 147. h.) ; xn, " to drink " (c.) ; 'q^, " to chew " (g.) ; ^ , 
 "to suck" Qi.). This division of food into four kinds, lickables, drinkables, 
 chewablcs, and suckables, is not unusual in Indian writings. ») cans, of bhtij, 
 
 "to eat," r. 108. r. 193. a. '•) "having finished," cans, of root 'STR with ^m, 
 
 p. 14.5. i. ») ^WW T^lf^^ (r. 5.), "having arrived, sat dovm," 2d pret. of f^^, 
 9) JT^ , " to consult," 10th conj. p. 102. c. i") voc. case, p. 43. i>) p. 123. 
 
 '2) p. 114. ') voc. case of UH, "master," p. 35. ") p. 105. a. fcrgT*T is 
 
 here used as a substantive, "a learned man" (p. 44.). ^''') p. 162. d. 
 
 16) " causes to go," " passes," caus. oi yd, p. 87. d. '') r. 17G. a. '^) p. 188./, 
 
 see r. 188. ''J) p. 151. c. 20) ^^^m^^ " assistance "; ^nrnr«T, " effecting," " the 
 
 eflfecting some assistance in this matter." 21) " jg inferred," pass, of ma with 
 
 anu, r. 112. -) root da, " to give," p. 70. e. '^•') ace. case plur. of Xjft;^TTefi, 
 
 " an attendant." 2') ^oot /hcc (p. 107.) with prep. «. '-'5) p. 202. c. '')"on 
 an obeisance being made," r. 189. '■^') gen. case, fcm. of UT^^, " old." 
 
rTjf^ I %^i^ ^T^r^ I ^^li^ ^^ ^'^tTT f^pff ^i jcrr- 
 
 *N 8 ♦ fi3 I 4 ~. ♦ fi4_|_ 
 
 TO^ TTT^^n^Tra^UVT^ I ^RT^ I ^ 
 
 ^Tr%:iR i^f^TH I w^ ?;§5J5I^ ^TTf I 
 * ^^jh ^ ^ / ' — :f ^"i; — ^^ 3 
 
 2 / "Z 4 , so 3 lif , « 
 
 i^^fcT 1 ^: ^: W Wf ftr^ nnT^ II ^ 
 
 55) "than royalty," p. 152. a. p. 188./ 56) r. 217. 5-) r. 187. a. 58) p. 107. 
 59) p. 167. a. 60) r^f^iari l, " superiority," p. 24. xiv. p. 188./. ei) r. 28. a. 
 
 6-) r. 1 54. TITft!n|, " a living creature," p. 27. iv. 63) « from his being the m^^di 
 
 (r. 150. b.) or protector," see r. 177. b. 64) p. 154. f,^ 6.5) root fif, " to con- 
 
 quer," with prep, f^ and "ftrx., p. 144. a. ee) ace. case, neut. p. 43. r. 28. a. 
 
 67) "one by whom gifts are given," "liberal," p. 169. a. 6S) p_ 149^ j 69) \q(.^ 
 
 case of fiE^, "the earth," p. 34. '"") p. 169. a. vi) root ^, "to praise," 
 
 p. 145. e. "2) r. 194- ^s) p. 49. 74) « gjiyer coins," ace. case, plur. fem. 
 
 (p. 31.), r. 28. b. "5) p. 118. 76) ace. case of ^T»iniR, " the inner or private 
 
 apartments." '^')i\lo3.f. ^s) p. 14c. «,. '!*) p. 197. s"^) causal of ^, 
 
 " to hear," p. 144. c. 1) p. 203. b. 2) ijt. " the superintendant of affairs '' 
 
 (r. 147.), "the steward," r. 28. a. '■') p. 145. ^r. 4) -^^^ «to lead," 
 
 r. 192. b. 
 
II ^^^'Imi^^in^ II e 
 
 Hift^H ^MlfM? I H^ ^H I IWr ft^^^ ^^ftf^- 
 1T?7 I ^tr ^I|W1^IMH'4 ^RT^ ^M^fd I f^?ltPS^ 
 
 ^ fdxll^ll ^?1T ^^ I TR ^^^ ^ m^^Mc?5l 
 
 ^TWTR: I ^ "T^ MMK<=hR ITTf I ^aTpft5TW 
 
 .. 'J) / .,- Z Xo 3 / 
 
 ^n^^TrT I rirr: ^rR^^15)H[^ I rM ItoI^ ^ I THTT 
 
 cTT^ ^n^Txn^fcT I %^n^ «i41hni: mmvmi^i- 
 
 5) f^ra, "to lick" (p. 1-17. /(.); in, "to drink" (f.) ; '^, "to chew" (</.); ^^, 
 "to sack" (A.). This division of food into four kinds, Ikkables, dri?ikables, 
 chewables, and suckahles, is not unusual in Indian writings. «) caus. of bfiuj, 
 
 "to eat," r. 108. r. 193. a. ') "having finished," caus. of root ^rTT with ^HT, 
 
 p. 14.5. i. ^) TWW T^lf^^ (r- 5.), "having arrived, sat down," 2d prct. of f%^. 
 '0 T^, "to consult," 10th conj. p. 192. c. if) voc. case, p. 43. ") p. 123. 
 
 >2)p. 114. 1) voc. case of 1T>T, "master," p. 35. i')p. 105. a. fcj^M is 
 
 here used as a suhstantive, "a learned man" (p. 44.). ^•-') p. 162. (f. 
 
 '6) " causes to go," " passes," caus. of yd, p. 87. d. '') r. 17(5. «. ") p. 188./, 
 
 seer. 188. '») p. 151. c. -") ^tT^toi, "assistance "; ^nn\nT, "effecting," "the 
 
 effecting some assistance in this matter." ■=') "is inferred," pass, of /«« with 
 
 an«, r. 112. ") root Jm, "to give," p. 79. e. ^^) ace case plur. of T^ fi^i^n^eti , 
 
 " an attendant." -') root A?fe (p. 107.) with prep. rT. -■^) p. 202. <•. '^'') "on 
 an obeisance being made," r. 109. -') gen. case, fern, of 111"^^^, " old." 
 
^0 (I %^TT;£ftxni5!|Fr II 
 
 /P /^ /-J^. /? . / ^ ,^2 ^ ^ 
 
 ^^T^^rrf^lrftni^ ^ ^^ ^^ 
 
 ^nr Tf^ gif^^ %^^ ^^ 5bS tt%^ ^^hrt- 
 'Tw I ^': ;^^^ ^1 H^^ ^^^ "^^ W ' 
 
 ^Tfrf-fe: ^rf^R^: "RTtwrJ ^R^TT^Irm^g: i 
 
 2») loc. case, "pointed out." -'') " on all four sides," p. 165. c. ; "fejT, " a quarter," 
 loc. case plur. p. 45. •'") "cause to be built," caus. of Jfl (p. 87. d.) with prep. nir. 
 ^0 m^Hjr. "stone"; '^, "mortar," "lime," p. 103. fe. 32) fH*^H !J, "con- 
 
 struction." 33) " completed." ^O root f^ with prep, ■^j " to command," 
 
 p. 145./. 35) ace. case, "the superintendant of the oRtil or treasury," "the 
 
 treasurer." se) i3jf-^T«T> " summons," r. 177. b. 37) root 7m with sum, 2ipa, 
 
 and a, p. 145. g. 3s) p jqq « \q(. case. 39) y. 189. ■^o) ace. neut. (p. 48.) 
 
 41) ace. dual neut. ^2^ ace. plur. fem. p. 31. 43) p. us. 44) " for the pay 
 
 ment of wages," r. 171. c. 4,=.) p_ 171, (. jk) "according to need," r. 171. > 
 
 47) r. 207. a. 48) for ^j^ -gr^, " that which had been said by the kmg 
 
 49) caus. of T^, " to hear," r. 108. so) p 205. ^i) " of the same class or caste 
 
 (p. 23. xi.), the prep. ^ when compounded with iTlOr and tf^ has the force of 
 ^nTT*I, "same." "-)" of the same party." -^3) r_ js*) 54) " the instrument 
 
 of the accomplishment of great affairs. 
 
II ^^nHlMlls^M* II SS 
 
 / y ^'^ ^ / 3 ^ / 
 
 M i ^^!^ wrarnt nlrr: i f^^ ff f^rrW %f^ i ^ 
 
 fgTrTT ^: ^^.(fl^^ ? II ' ' ^ ^ 
 
 rTTHc^I^tUH^ftr^^WR^M'^yi^mmifTT^^^ 
 ^Fm% TTTT rT^FRT f^TTFT UiLMm I rT^ ^^^th: 
 Mht>.^*H^ h ' ^I I H ^^T^T^fllgf f(IH.^<.'»IM ^mRHI 
 TT^ ^.H^M* fl.f^QrJflH ^^^H.M^* HTTTTTR ^5^^ ^- 
 
 iR iT^ ^: I ^rzT %^T7Ht-'g%f^ I irr ht^ h^ 
 
 f^^JHTT "^rtHf f^^J^HK^I SC,m7h."'[^ HH^lfi^M^:! 
 <NH<fT I ^rmfiTTTrf ^^^rTT rRT H^ I rT^ ^ 
 
 5^) acc. case, p. 44. •^) p. 94. ^t) d^t. case of ftrf^ (p. 34.), 
 
 "why need we be anxious about the success of our affairs?" s') r. 39. 
 
 5S) r. 108. &■) r. 19. ei) "in a line." '2) p. 145. j- ^3) ^^JT^, 
 
 the Sama Veda is the third of the four Vedas, composed in metre, and therefore 
 always chaunted; 7TT*T, "a cliaunt," r. 147- f'») "deUghtfnl to be heard," 
 
 p. 147. d. ^5) " very charming." «e) p. 172. g, er) " being astonished," 
 
 ^STIT is a sound of surprise prefixed to a, '>-') "having the hair of his body 
 
 erect with delight," p. 169. a. ^) " his eyes shedding tears of (religious) sym- 
 
 pathy," p. 171. b. '") "his faith and devotion being excited." ^') 'TS^, 
 
 "indistinct," or "convulsive," from emotion. '-) voc. case, p. 41, 7') 2d sing, 
 imperat. of root Ji, p. IOC, a word used in acclamation. '*) p. 20.5. "'■) p. 111. 
 
 76) r. 140. 77) p. .35. f , -,) p. 109. a. 79) r 132. and p. .35. *') 3d sing. 
 2d pret. atm. of ^qr (p.76. a.) with u, p. 17-5. 
 
fiL f^Tn^ ^^^ vrrk^ i ^nwrift^^ xTftrrr: 
 
 ^ni %^^f ^ IlT^ TT^ ^^ ^'t^chrij^lHIH 
 ^ITTT^ 'TST^ XTTT5TTOT "^ ^PHMdl ^iofn: II 
 
 ') W3T to go with Wi{, p. 173. -) 2d pret. of 'giT , "to turn" 
 
 (p. 106.). with TTO", p. 174. ^) cUn^oFR, "the managing workman," 
 
 p. 1G7. b. ^) p. 156. e. and r. 16. '•) r. 212. e) jnst. case, plur. 
 
 of-^Tf%«fi, "a boat-man." ") ^r«fiT, "a boat." *) " was brought," 
 
 root fft, p. 188. b. 9) p. 174. '") XTR, "the opposite bank." ") 2d pret. 
 
 p. 120. '-) p. 167. b. 13) " hospitality," p. 23. vii. i*) "after he had per- 
 
 formed his morning exercises (of religion)," p. 169. a. is) r. 192^ 6. i«) gen. 
 
 case, fern, of TT^. "new." i") r. 28. b. i^) p. 177- c. w) p. 126. 
 
 20) acc. case, plur. masc. of ^jprfw. "an architect," "master-builder." -i) ace. 
 
 case, plur. masc. of irfinfi, " a hired labourer," sh inserted before ^ by r. 20. 
 22) p. 195. b. 23) cans, oiyuj with ni, r. 108. 24) p. 140. 0. 25) p. 202. c. 
 
 26) r. 194. 27) acc. case, Tf^, "a letter"; ^■^^, "a writer" (p. 150. b.). 
 
 2S) 2d sing. imp. p. 107. '^^) r. 20. f . s") p. 145. d. 
 
II %^"1mII$MIH II s? 
 
 Tj^r^r%R^ ^n^(T ii 
 
 ^r^T TllTT %^^nA^ ^TFTrf ?^ XTCFTTH I ?HM|aI|^ 
 
 ^ %^ mOshiRm ^ ^^ I Tnn ^tWTct i h^ M^ tn?- 
 
 ^^TT^ ^Rtt5f^ ^rrrTT HTH? ^^TT: #Rt ^TTcTT: ? I 
 t>^N i ^giin> I ^ % ^% HTT f^rfiHcTT: I ^^ '^ 
 MI<d^M^ ^f^rfrRrrprlri; l ^MidHt^ J cT? wrt: 
 H%%7ft^ H^cH I %^nH: W^J^ I ^^ JTrTT H«4.-»[^r 
 
 T3^T ^W^^ ^R^^ I HTfft^ WlpRH I (TcT^ t^ 
 ^TT|^ n%^ ^TTHr^ttf^: II 
 
 ^') p. 147. b. '-) " for his coming hither, " " containing an invitation for him to 
 come hither." 33) 7^^ "prose"; TRT, "verse," p. 171. r. 3i) r. 189. ^■-') W^. "■' 
 seal"; ^aP^'if , "stamped." •*•*) '• letter-carrier" root ^, p. 150. h. 37) 2d prct. 
 (r. 108.) of cans, of ^ with tj, p. 175. *s) p 48. .0) 3d pret. of .7am, "to go,' 
 with prep. «, p. 83. A. »f') p. 143. a. ■") r. 137. ^'^) " having recited," 
 
 p. 143. a. «) ace. case of dsliL^, p. 44. f. ") p. 118. «) r. 140. "■) voc. 
 case of wirfifjfiw, p. 44. ") nom. fem. of ofi^g^, "what kind?" "^) p. 54. ] . 
 
 «) p. 104. ■'") p. 35. f. '') " are to be made to enter " (p. 147. b.) caus. of root 
 f^ with u, see also r. 215. -) caus. of 3;, p. 140. a. ■'"") " tiic astrologer," 
 
 formed by p. 23. ix., from ^F^, "an hour." ^') 3d sing. imp. pass. p. 90./. 
 
 ■''■') JlUJflh, "an astrologer," from TfCT, "to calculate," p. 150. />. ■«) r. 5. 
 
 ^') iij\CA\M4„ "an astrologer," from T^ftfrTW, " a star." 
 
 G G 
 
ijsn: ^^ ^^^: ii 
 
 57) r. 176. 5.^) " is to be chosen," " fixed upon," root ■^tj with f^, '^■>) " auspicious 
 moment," " favourable season." 6>^) r. 108. 6i) " on the day before that (fixed upon 
 for the ceremony)." 62) p.203. b. ^■^) r. 86. w) p. 42. e^) r. 147. b. 
 
 «fi) "will arrange," root VI with prep, f^, p. 119. ^7) ace. case of ^TH^, " per- 
 mission to depart," r. 147. ^s) p. 143. a. ^y) loc. case of ^r^, "a day." 
 '")r. 126. i)p. 155. 6. 2) p. 175. 3) r. 7. "J) 3d plur. imp. of caus. of 
 ^^ with ^, "let them procure." ■') "let them decorate," p. 102. p. 174. 
 6) ace. case, p. 43. ") 1st pret. of f^, " to send," with prep. j(, 5th conj. r. 94. 
 !=) Tli^rf^. "tliefamil}'^ priest," "with the servants, the mmister, and the priest," 
 r. 151. 3) "at an auspicious moment," a vmhurta is two dandas or forty-eight 
 minutes. ^°) r. 193. b. 4\^t\ is applied to any thing which carries, p. 150. c. 
 ") "the minister and the others," r. 157. ^'^) injl, "a horse," r. 25. a. 
 1-!) 2d pret. of "^, " to go," r. 98. i') r. 193. a. "having caused the ceremony 
 to be performed by the Brahmans." i-) '^TCnTFTj "a ceremony or sacrifice 
 performed on entering a new habitation," r. 157. 
 
j|if<<* cfnrftn^ ^|.Mi^mi^ ^rt^ft »^ ^:jftrf73rr- 
 f^^ nfti^ ^nrfirj^ ^^^t^ ^ ^^ irr^%2Tc^ i 
 
 drH<r<% ^:iR lTf?T ftr^^ TTITR %^n^: xrftrfe- 
 MH^^M* I 
 
 fn^m^t f^cTi: ^T^T>Tf^: ^^ II 
 
 ^n27TTRf?TW II 
 
 "5) jm, "dancing"; Tftir, "singing"; ejrf^-:!, "musical instrument," r. 151. a. 
 1') r. 43. i. i-j 1st pret. r. 192. a. '») r. 104. and r. 157. '^"j ace. case, " a gratuity," 
 that which causes Xfftjft^ , " satisfaction " (p. 23. ix.). 21) gj pret. of da with prep. 
 pra, p. 83. i. 22) r. 182. 20) p. i69. a. 21) » together with his retinue," r. Ifll . 
 -'•) r. 209. 2fi) "the conqueror of your enemies," p. 149. 1. -7) "-the gtiardian." 
 ^-) " free from ^IHM or sickness,"p. 154. e. r. IGl. -y) " fi-pg fj-om all -iWA^ , ap- 
 prehension." *') "always devoted to," r. 161. ^2^ loc. case, "the Supreme Lord," 
 " the Deity," r. 184. a. «) " permitted to depart." ") " spread abroad," root 
 ap with vi, p. 120. ^^) p. 104. ^e) ace. case, plur. of ^T^^tIiT^, "a pupil," 
 
 p. 43. 37) pf^ give the sense of " every," r. 171. b. a») " at the three seasons," 
 i.e. "morning, noon, and evening." •'») p. 199. e. 
 
11 ^^^rTTFCTT: H 
 
 SELECTIONS FROM THE INSTITUTES OF MANU. 
 
 ORIGIN OF THE FOUR CLASSES, AND GENERAL VIEW OF THEIR DUTIES. 
 
 ^ TTf?rcjf %^ wr4IU!MI*t ^T^I^'T^cT II ^ II 
 
 ftR%^ ^^^i^Prh^ T^^k^^m wliwi' II 9 II 
 
 TT^J^rt T^ ^FPf^ ^^[yi^H^H, 'T^ "^ J 
 
 •qftlr^xnT ^t "^ t^^^ ^f^ ^^ ^ II 8 II 
 
 Ud^Tq^ xr^r -^^^ ^^MIH ^^l^W II M II 
 
 HrTFTT irrftn=r* wr: irrftprf "^f^i^ftf^: i 
 "^f^TTT^ ^TO* wr ^^ ^T^nor: ^rrr: ii % w 
 
 1) Gen. case, sing, of ^n, "creation." -') r. 171. c •') r. 159. 4) -g^^ 
 
 masc. " the thigh." ^) V[^, masc. " the foot," r. 16. This is a complex com- 
 
 pound, the whole being a dependent involving an aggregative, p. 171. b. e) r. 7. 
 
 ') 1st pret. of OT, " to enjoin," 10th conj. p. 87. e ^) ace. case of mTT. n. "the 
 performarice of a sacrifice." '■>) the lengthening of the a shows that this word is from 
 the causal, p. 87. e. i") ace. case of Tlfiw?, "acceptance." ") r. 196. 
 
 12) "summarily," p. 152. a. i^) ace. case of ^ftyohHiq, n. "traffic," lit. "way of 
 
 merchants." '^) ace. case of "SS^t^, n. "usury." '5) ace. case of ^T^WT, fem. 
 
 "service," lit. "desire to hear," p. 23. xiii. le) instr. case of ^fj^^||, fem. 
 
 '' absence of envy or grudge," p. 182. d. i') p. 188. d. i^) r. 144. a. 
 
 w) r. 42. ii. and p. 188. d. 
 
5||^^^ ^ f^WTOt f^Tfr^ cjj^.^^ii: I 
 ^cT^f^^ ^t: ^iW^ ^:%f^^: II S II 
 
 t^sTH^ ^M.MHd: ^J^^I^IH ^^ ^HRfT: II b ii 
 ^T^nji: ^rMt %[^^^ ^ fuTTrR: i 
 
 ^^ Uch.^irdH ^ ^ ^^Tjfe ^ ^'^^^ » ^ » 
 
 THE FIRST OR SACERDOTAL CLASS (OR BRAHMANs). 
 
 Duties of the Brahman in the first Order {^4shrama) or Quarter of 
 
 his Life, as a BrahinachUrl, or Student of Religion, subject to 
 
 his Guru or Preceptor. 
 
 fTW Ht ^ f^T^ f^V^TTinTrf^ II S«i II 
 
 n^Aj^f '^^ ^ WRTf ^^Mi "srrftr rrfivT i 
 
 rR f^ ^ ^rST^ ^ "^^^ ^^ II S^ II 
 
 '*')p. 44. '•') p. 37. -") "g^, "the divine spirit, from which all things 
 
 are supposed to emanate, and to which they return." '-') p. 1,52. a. 
 
 ") p. 23. viii. 2s) p. 48. 24) indec. part, of root i, "to go," with 
 
 prep, a, p. 144. a. -■') nom. case (r. 25. a.) of ^^fv, "a divine treasure." 
 
 1) r. 9. -) p. 101. •') dat. case of ^nnnii, "a detracter." ') r. 208. and 
 
 p. 83. /. ') nom. fern, of the superl. degree of "^^^mr, "possessed of vigour," 
 
 r. 42. i. r. 71. ^) r. 174. ") 2d sing. pot. of vid, " to know," p. 9.5. and r. 28. b. 
 ^) r. 194. ») p. 114. 1") dat. case of fVrf\ni, "the protector of a treasure"; 
 
 ■q, "a protector," from Jjj, "to protect," by r. 131. 1. ") ,iat. case of 
 
 ^njJnf^'JI. " not negligent," p. 43. '-) r. 152. a. i') nom. fern, of fut. pass, 
 
 part, of ((7/7, " to sow," p. 146. a. ") gSTR, n. 'a barren salt soil." 
 
wr^ ^ftr ff ^Tprf ^ r^ trt^ ^% ^c^ ii ^? ii 
 
 ^T^-ft f^ ^i;^^ fw ^^ v^^: II «i8 II 
 ^ %^ ^^ ^"^ ^^=ITOT '^f^ "ftsR: I 
 
 ^ t ^rq; ^mHfr^ rf ^■^tt: ^erfM. f^|: ii «im ii 
 
 ^zra f^Prt-^T^\%T^ ^^^ ^ ^7m f^Sfrt II ^^ II 
 
 ^%^ ^^% ^r^ ^n^^T^^ f?^^ ^ II ^b H 
 ^TRT^ fxTrTT % ^m?n ^HT ^ ^It^t: I 
 ^TI^T^ ^T^R^fT^ ^^^ ftr^^cT: II ^e II 
 
 '=) r. 6. "^^) p. 151. a. '-) "g^, "the Vedas"; tjlH^rl, " an expounder," p. 149. a. 
 18) p. 62. note. ^^) yftjET, n. " barren soil." '-") "^TSI , adj. " relating to Brahma," 
 "divine," p. 23. viii. -') r. 66. 22) g^^a. is here used generally (" own") and 
 
 not reflexively. '^■') nom. case, sing, niasc. of ^nftnT, p. 115. p. 149. 2. 
 
 24) p. 152. a. 25) T^^57f, adj. "gray " (as the hair). -') nom. case, sing, of the 
 
 pres. part. atm. of ^nft, " to read," p. 113. and r. 124. -'^) p. 95. note. 2s) p. 23. xii. 
 29) r. 135. ^") p. 117. 31) for ^%jt l^n^, r. 5. r. 20. : seveta is the 3d sing, 
 
 pot. atm. of sew, "to serve," "practise." •''-) See verse G2. ^^) i.e. ij^UHlv!, 
 
 com. "at his Guru's." ^^) indec. part, of y«m, " to restrain," with prep, smn 
 
 anini. ^-)y>.177.c. ^e) p. 102. ^') y>. 195. b. :*^) " born first," " elder." 
 39) p. 140. /. 4") r. 1.52. /;. ") 3d dual pies. atm. of «<^, " to bear." ^2) p. 37. f- 
 43) "acquittance," "discharge of a debt." ") p. 19B. a. ■^■-) i: 180. 
 
^ jr^ f^^ rr%^ cT^: ^ BTTTO^ II ^S II 
 ^ ^ ^W%^^T(Tt Vl^H ^Ri HTTT^cT II ^^ II 
 
 ^T^Tfl^rar^t^ ^TT^ ftrar ^ w ii ^? ii 
 
 rr^\ 'T^TTrTf f^^ ^^^ ^rfv^^^Tf^T II ^8 II 
 
 ^j^^irR: w f^raiH ^rr^rTpru^ ^rftr ii ^q ii 
 ^Sm %^ XT% v«Tt f^ ^^ ^^rftcf I 
 f^vrf^ ^ ftr^qrf^ H^f^^nf^ ^ct: ii ^^ ii 
 
 ^f^TTTf f^^fTT f^^^ ^M^iRm I 
 
 wm -^^^ ^Hifriy^ f^T^ w"^ ^ftr^ ii ^s ii 
 
 ^'') p. 90./. r. 190. *•) "unpermitted." This insertion of the nega- 
 
 tive prefix an (r. 135.) between the two prepositions is remarkable, and the 
 more so, as the metre would equally admit of ^f^ vuH ^I ff t- ^^) ^ fH<NI<^t{ , 
 
 "salutation." i') ^M^fclH , "one who serves or honours," p. 149. a. »') p. 48. 
 1) 3d plur. pres. atm. of the root "^yj, 1st conj. with prep. sa7n and pra. -) r. 7, 
 
 3) lit. "desirous to hear," r. 40. >) ^I^ITR, "possessing ^rff, behef," 
 
 r. 124. a. ) 3d sing. pot. atm. of rfa with prep. «, p. 174. '■) "purity," from 
 
 ^f^, '"pure," by p. 23. viii. -) nom. plur. n. of f^f^tT, "an art." ") "to be 
 
 collected," fut. part, of c?a (p. 147- c.) with prep, sain and a. '•') gen. plur. of 
 
 pres. part, of ^ (r. 123.) with prep, vi, p. 175. i") loc. plur. r. 7. i') ^HM^ i Ph , 
 "a seizer," from ^ (p. 149. a.) with prep. apu. '-) root sfhu with prep. «, "to 
 
 follow up," "apply"; Tjj^ >M|^| is a common phrase in Manu for "to make 
 effort." ' ) TfTin, nom. sing. masc. "a driver," from to, "to restrain" 
 
 (r.181.2.). 
 
^f^ <JtilHrijc| H% T5[^rTfiRt^ II ^t II 
 B^^"3n5T ^ cTT^ ix^ cTcT: ftf¥ PH^'i^rd II ^e II 
 
 ^ fMi^wsr^ ftrf^ T^f^ ^ifrf^ci; II ?o n 
 
 ^^ ^^ IT^ iw* TTRT^ ^[^t^ II ?^ II 
 
 ^ t #T!; ^i^TRtfcT ^^TTTtTFTrf W II ?? II 
 ^^*4M^ ^TWt f^TRTH ^ff^ f^^ ^ I 
 >^^d^,<=< ' ^ i ^ l t<: ^^^^M^ ^1^ H ?a II 
 
 i^) p. 153./. 1) p. 109. '6) oTOjr^rlr^, masc. "fire" (nom. 
 
 case -iIit). '') P- 153. d. i^) root -^ with prep. ^rfir. '«) 3d sing. pres. 
 
 of root ^, " to go to," " incur," r. 191. b. -") r. 171. b. 21) root TpT with fTT. 
 "to obtain"; com. Qjvrff. -2) "depraved," pass. part, of ^ (p. 139. i.) with 
 
 prep, vi andj9ra. ^3) j._ iqq 24) xm with prep. ■^HT. -') nom. case siag. 
 
 of the pres. part, of fTI|, "to harass," 5th conj. r. 123. r. 135. -'•) -^pi, "reli- 
 
 gious meditation," p. 152. a. -') TTT, fem. " the body." 2^) r. 136. b. 1: 7- 
 
 -») 3d sing. pres. of x^T., 1st conj. "to ooze out," "to disappear gradually." 
 •'") ifir, " a leather skin." 3i)r. 195. 32) j._ 152. a. JHT^* when compounded with 
 ^Tofi, becomes H*nT- Panini, 5. 4. 77. ^ )see p. ^. 7. '^) ;JMJ|ri, "obtained," lit. 
 " undergone." •>^) r. 195. a. ■''^) root f^lT , 6th conj. with T!T, " to feai-." ^7) ^qqi 
 oRT^ ^^'ith ^TT, "to be desirous of." '>^) gen. case of ^STSPfnT, n. " dishonour." 
 
II 'T^^tf^fmTR: II ^«l 
 
 ^ T^r^^^^^ ^55TT^ ^ %fi#r^ ^: II ?lf II 
 
 Duties of the Brahman in the seco7id Order, or Quarter of his Life, 
 as a Grihastha, or Householder. 
 
 ftdl^H^n^^T^i cjjH;<id '^ ^ci; ii ?s ii 
 ^ x^ ^ ^^ 1^^ ^ g ftqf?T: II ?eii 
 
 ^TnTt^^:^ ff ^ J^^:^ f^^T^: II 80 II 
 
 ■^3) p. 113. 40) r 9 ,. 19 11) r. 131. 2. «) p. 176. ^O ^. "not," 
 
 and fc^^if, "deviating." i') 3d sing. pres. of root, "3^*1) 4th conj. 
 
 (r. 89. a.\ "to be born," with prep. ^n. If fi'om this may be derived a noun 
 WRTftr, the phrase ^nn^ ^TTSTTlft: (p. 155. a.) might be explained, without 
 making ^TT govern the accusative. •) p. 44. f. '^) ace. case (r. 180. a.) of >TPT. 
 " part." P- 143. a. ") le. Jj<x^^, com. ) ^, "a wife," p. 169. a. 
 
 p. 32. t- ') ^. "■ not "' '5^' ni- " injury-" ') P- 103. *•) r. 152. a. r. 190. 
 9) p. 90. /. '") " restrained." ' 1) These two compounds well illustrate the 
 
 difference between a relative and absolute dependent compound ; the first is used 
 relatively, and as an epithet of ^T^, it must therefore be translated "has its root," 
 or "is founded in contentment "j the second is not used relatively to f^pT^nTt. or 
 it would be written ?:?<fM^: ; it must, therefore, be translated as an absolute 
 dependent, " the root of misery," see p. 167. «■ 
 
 H \\ 
 
^<ir<d ^ ^^ f^ f^^ WcT^t: 1 
 
 ^ ^^[ci^Ah^ ^#t^ HOTf^ ^f#rf?T II 8m k 
 ^^tt^^^.iith: ^^H^f^T^: ll8ffll 
 ^qi^^r^t-^^wRr^^^rszw^^: 118^11 
 
 1-) ^ofi, " own," p. 23. xu. 1') for ir? ff , r. 18. n) r. 123. ' >) p. 120. 
 
 1'') 3d sing. pot. pass, of ^T^ , " to adhere to," p. 90. d. '") p. 174. i^) ^TSIR, " in- 
 audible reading to one's self of scripture." ^^) ace. case plur. of f^^fftnT » " adverse to," 
 "inconsistent," from ^^, by p. 149. a. -'^) gen. case sing, of ^rf>T3nT> "family rank." 
 2>) also written %^, "dress." 22) « sameness of form," from H^^T, by p. 23. vii. 
 Cf. also p. «^o. note 61. 2S) r. 123. and p. 174. 21) root sad, p. 107. and r. 123. 
 r. 19. 2) p. 182. b. 2h) p. 153, g. 27) "committed," p. 139. h. 
 
 2^) p. 153./. -■>) nom. case (r. 27- a.) of go, " the earth," meaning also "a cow," 
 
 p. 39. t- ^^) P- 151. b. 31) lit. " rolling on," root ■^ with -gn, r. 124. 
 
 ^'-) p. 37. 33)p. 65. Z>. ^) loc. plur. of fTTT, " a grandson, p. 37. 3^) " without 
 If^, "fruit," p. 154. e. and p. 15. note. *«) cR^, " the most grievous," used as 
 
 a superlative. 3:) for ?q^nft (r- 7.) p. 27. iv. 3>) p. 155. (.. 39) ^ ^ indecl. 
 "heaven." *) p. 112. 
 
II *4^MT^dmK: II ^? 
 
 HlRti^* '^<,rH<l "^ <<4dMI ^ wm^ I 
 
 %^ ^ ^ Hm ^ ^ t^ ^ "^^(T II 8b II 
 
 ^RTRtfllT^ ^rr^ TTTt ^ rnH^<{l<^r( II 8<^ll 
 ^^^Tcrftrt f5T^^^T<T^Tf^^rfN I 
 ftni "^ HMd W^T^ "^ VT^: ^T^TRT^: II MO II 
 
 ^^^^ni»r^^^^fTc!;cTc!;%%cT^?f^: iimsii 
 inr^ fsrarm ^*4mH ^^^ij g^:^: ii m^ ii 
 
 TJ^^ ^^ f^Tf^ ^T^ %^ ^T^#nR I 
 ^ W^^ -mf^^ ^ MPdH^^^ ^ ^TI^: II M? H 
 
 ^r^ <jrich.r<4r^^ ?t^ht<t cTct Trftcr^cr ii ^i ii 
 
 41) "atheism," from «nf^, "there is not (a God)." «) "contempt." 
 
 «) from ?fh^> "sharp," "cruel," by p. 23. vii. «) ^r^^, "acrimonious," 
 
 "galling." ^^) This is a very anomalous compound. 4k) gj gjug 
 
 pot. of root ^ with prep, ut, "to utter." 4') r. 15. '•h) "perpetual." 
 
 *'<) T. 86. '"') T. 182. d. ^1) p. 152. a. •-) r. 152. </. •") "food," from 
 
 ^r5T, by p. 22. iii. ^') 3d sing. pot. of root •^, "to eat," 2d conj. r. 16. 
 
 '■<■-•) nom. case sing, of pres. part. (r. 123.) of root o|nW, 10th conj. "to contemn," 
 r. 135. ■"■) 3d sing. pot. of root sad (p. 107.) with pra, " to be calm," " contented." 
 »') 3d sing. pot. of »fV^ with nfilT, "to receive with pleasure and thankfulness." 
 U*5\m irraf^: ofi^PTrT I -^HfHI* ftrWH ^r^^ ^!T, com. ■'^) ^n^ not 
 
 ^TRtm, adj. "belonging to health," formed from -iil^ij, by p. 23. vii. ■<^') ^iT 
 
 not vM l jj tq, "belonging to life," p. 23. vii. •:'') ^ not ^p^, "belonging to 
 
 heaven," p. 23. vii. ') r. 135. a. 
 
^8 « 44T^^r^dmK : n 
 
 ^ %^ ^m i Aif^ wf^ f^j^ n MM II 
 
 qRd'^H ^n%^ ttM: ^^ ^f^: II M^ II 
 
 ^ ^^ ^^Ti%^ ^^^ «^4rd I 
 
 <T<t cTcT^^ ^^T^ Wl^fH WPdiiPid: II Mb II 
 f^W^TRT^rfrT cT^t ^ "^ Mr<chl^HI4 II M^ll 
 
 ^r^ TTTxt wkm ^^ ^'t^^j^wf II ffO H 
 ^ irro^^ ^ #?r >iiirHjMiiich: n ^c| n 
 
 2) dat. case, p. 83. and r. 194. ■) 3d sing. pot. of ^ (p. 118.) 
 
 with 31. 4) r. 152. a. ^) lit. "preceded by rule"; Tjlfoli is vei-y 
 
 commonly added to a word in modem Sanscrit and Bengali, to express 
 the manner in which, or the state of mind with which, any thing is done. 
 6) p. 124. ^) p. 23. vii. s) i-. 147. ^IR, "the act of honouring." 
 
 9) r. 187. ^") "a fit object," properly " a vessel." •') root sad with a, "to 
 
 meet with." '2) yam (r. 88. c.) with pra, " to bestow." i3) " honoured in 
 
 return," p. 175. •') 8d sing. pot. atm. of smi, 1st conj. with vi, " to admire," 
 
 " feel pride in." ''•) r. 176. b. '«) root ^, 10th conj. irreg. with tlftj " to 
 
 proclaim." '') 'snT^^, "disguise." ''-) indec. part, of the root '^[5, 10th 
 
 conj. "to cover," with prep, u, p. 145. i. 'J) ^»T«T, "deceit." -") r. 123. 
 
 21) r. 197. ^'0 r. 42. r.71. '^O root 5, "to seize" (p. J50. A.), with 
 
 prep. apa. 
 
II HH^r^dWK: II ^M 
 
 ^mT^^^TcTf^^rflTTfr f5=nrm^%R^3nr^H#^ ii ^^ ii 
 vrft^: ^M^^K =i^<*H^ ^f^* ' 
 
 ^ ^'tjt ^ 51%^ ^TWR^ f?r^ %^T^: II If8 II 
 
 f^F^^ «<l'Mm ^tPtT V»^ fT^ ^T^T^rfrT II ^% H 
 cTWT^ VWi ^^HjS| ftRT Mf^H/^T^ ^: I 
 ^HT!T ff ^TfT^H fTTTR; cKfir 5^t II %S II 
 V^.ilMM* ^^ cHWr ^d.nif^^ I 
 xn:^t* rTO?( ^ITO HT^rf <<iA'<lTiiU II Ift II 
 
 21) The yamdh^ or " moral duties," according to the scholiast, are purity of thought, 
 cliastity, compassion, patience, truth, religious meditation, honesty, freedom from 
 malice, mildness, and self-restraint : the niyamdh^ or " ceremonial duties," arc 
 ablution, fasting, sacrificing, reading of scripture, and religious silence. -'■) r. 124. a. 
 2'^) root vn{, " to serve," " perform," r. 123. -') 3d sing. pot. of root chi (p. 96.) 
 
 with prep. sam. -'") nom. plur. of uPtI*!, "a kind of ant"; 0411)0^41^^^1:, 
 Com. According to Wilkins, these ant-hills are seen in Bengal eiglit or ten feet 
 high. 29) r. 171. c. ^o) non,. case sing, of the pres. part, of root ift?, 10th 
 
 conj. " to pain," r. 136. -^i) p. 152. h. 32) r. 153. a. 33) 3d sing. pres. atm. 
 of ^. 4th conj. " to perish." -i) 3d sing. pres. atm. of ^IT , 7th conj. " to eat," 
 r. 95. and see ^, p. 122. •">) p no., p. 145./. ") p. 112. »") r. 17. 
 
 •'*) r. 69. "J) ^ from ^, " to destroy," p. 140. o. ftjif^, n. " sin," p. 169. a. 
 ^') ace. case of JTr^TF. "luminous," formed from »TT?T, "light," l)y r. 42. i. 
 <i) ace. caseof ^^T^fttT, " having a celestial body," from ^."heaven," and ^T^- 
 "body," p. 27. iv. 
 
Duties of the Grihasthas Wife. 
 
 TTfrT^t^ ^'^rril ^RT^c!; f%f% ^rftrt II ff^ll 
 
 xriTT ^^ ^ ^ ^ iTfHr^ II ^0 n 
 ^T^ wt^T HT^ J[^.«hi^5 ^;;^^ I 
 
 ^.M^d]MH<^l ^ ^!*Jrh.^«^l II ^<^ II 
 ^ in Hl^^iPd *4H].ct|4^^^^^i|HI I 
 
 tt\/M\ ^Hf^^ ^rn^ MPd.^ch xrt:^ "^ II ^9^ n 
 
 ^ ^ HmiPM nj^hlTcT TT^ W^ 1TO2T g I 
 
 1) gen. case of mn!Ji4l^> "one who takes by the hand," "a hushand." 
 -) nom. fern, of ^TR, "virtuous," p. 40. •*) nom. fem. of pres. part. (p. 136. b.) 
 
 of desid. form of dp (p. 130. e.) with prep. abhi. ^) "to be served," 
 
 root char with prep, upa, p. 147. 5r. ') inst. case, r. 49. <■) p. 152./. 
 
 ') 3d sing. pres. of an irregular nominal verb ITJ^'XI, "to be exalted," "honoured," 
 formed from JT^, "great," com. iIt^h • ") inn. "by her (understood) 
 
 »TPi, it is to be (p. 147. d.) J7^g'£||, cheerful," see p. 203. c. ») inst. fem. 
 
 of ?^, " skilful." '*') p. 169. a. TT^SR, "an article of household furniture." 
 Com. oR^cfiTT^rf^, "pots," "pans," "crockery," &c. ") inst. fem. of ^rg^lifW. 
 lit. " whose hand is not free," p. 169. a. '-) ^T. with "^S^, "to transgress," "to 
 deal treacherously with." i ) ace. fem. of -^tiX, " chief." '4) p. 152. b. 
 
 1^) p. 35. 1- '*^) loc. case of ^, " deceased," root ^, "to go," N^-ith U, p. 138. b. 
 1') 3d sing. pot. atm. of root WW, 2d conj. "to remain." i^) ^, "until"; 
 
 SftitDTfT . abl. case " death," p. 155. a. '3) " patient," p. 141 . 
 
II HH^T^dmK: II ^^9 
 
 Duties of the Brohman iii the third Order, or Quarter of his Life, 
 as a Vutiaprasthn, or Heri/iiL 
 
 ^^ HT^t ftrft|«aT d<\im mm'^7{ II S^ II 
 
 ^ H^ ^2TTfT cT^ ^?n^ ^t ft^ ^ ^rficT: I 
 #4j^,4Kri.P^#f^ ^rl^^ ^rn^#pT(TF!; ii w n 
 
 tm\ #rsm ^Ri^Tcn ^Hrr]^#q^: ii .9^ ii 
 ^mm^h : ^^t% ^^n<^ f^^f^: i 
 iRir:^-7#r% <ij^^,4j^TH^'?T^: n ss ii 
 
 ^tcT^^NTH^ f^ «l^»^% ^Rfhr^ II ^91; II 
 
 Duties of the Brahman in the fourth Order, or Quarter of his Life, 
 as a Bhikshu, or religious Mendicant. 
 
 cr%i| ^ Ui^4 cTtN m^ ^TT^: i 
 
 "") ^^» " '"^ ^vrinkle." 21) r. 197. 22) p. 145./. 2:1) root f^, 1st conj. with stain 
 and d, "• to have recourse to." '-') p. 152. a. -■) ^"CT, " water," p. i5. '] ; n is 
 changed to w by the same rule that a final eK is changed to T before a nasal, r. 15. 
 26) r. 151. a. ••;•) r. 143. 2>) ^, "intent on." -') p. 141. 
 
 ^') "amicable," from iw^, "a friend," by p. 23. viii. !') "composed," from rt/id 
 
 with prep, sani and a, p. 139. c. -^2) p 37 3;i) ^j^ not ^TT^TfTT, " a receiver, 
 
 p. 174. ») from root ^RHT with prep. ^(p. 150. h.), lit. " trembling after," 
 
 "easily moved with commiseration." '^) 'VTI. "the ground"; ^pf, " wiio sleeps," 
 from :5ft, "to sleep," p. U9. 1. "•) " free from selfishness"; ^, "not," and JW. 
 "of me." ^■) f^fR, n. "a habitation," p. 32. t- '") ^^^, " severe," r. 71. 
 
 3!*) root ^, 10th conj. (p. 87. r.), "to dry up." '■ ) ^, "freed from," lit. 
 
 "gone," root ^ with prep, f^, p. 138. h. ') root ^ with f^, p. 175., p. 144. a. 
 
 2) root "Sit with Tfft., '' to wander about," especially as a mendicant. 
 
f^^ f^^ fM ^Tt?j5TT^, ^nJt?^^ 11 to H 
 ^riHM J ^ ^dMIH^cit^T^ ^i^^ II b^ll 
 r^^liliUlP ^ fiR^^ tk^irm fMt^?^ II tiW 
 
 '^\:^^MH\M ^i^dH*t ^rrgi: i 
 TiTWH ^rf^ ^ #Frr^ ^ r^cT II bM II 
 
 X) "having a TH^or dish," p. 27. iv. i) "having a ^^ or staff," p. 27. iv. 5) "having 
 a oRTT»T or water-pot," r. 42. i. ' ) 8d sing. pot. atm. of root ^, 1st conj. with 
 
 ■qfjf, "to expect." ') "wages," vrfir. com. ^) "a hired labourer." s) inst. 
 case of flTTlV, "restraint." i") dat. case of 4<HriH , "immortality," p. 22. vi. 
 
 r. 194. ") 3d sing. pres. atm. of oKtf, 1st conj. (p. 64. a.), "to be fit for." 
 
 !•■;) ace. case plur. (r. 20.) of wfTT^, "opprobrious language." i^) p. 129. 
 
 r. 119. >4) p. 175. 1') root "g^ with ^T, "to curse," p. 189. i. '6) lit. 
 
 "welfare." '') 'gT ^qi^K . "eating." '^) i^, adv. "in private." i^) r. 153. 
 20) nom. plur. neut. of the pres. part, of the jiassive of ^, r. 124. -') caus. of 
 
 root '^ with f^, "to cause to cease." '-^) root fV^T with iRl? and W[, "to 
 
 enter," "occupy," p. 139. i. -) "possessed of T»rR, or the quality of passion," 
 
 p. 23. xii. -4) ^, "element"; i!INI^> "habitation," i.e. ^ xrPq'anf^gTrf'T- 
 
 fv^, "a body formed of the five elements, earth, fire, water, air, and 
 aether." 
 
II ^^BfffTT^i: II ^e 
 
 ^R^ frftrFH #ltH^ r^W ^Tl^T^ ^' ^: I 
 ^'-MWHIM^KIH: ITT^tf?r VJT^ nf?f II tif II ' 
 
 ^^4^ ^rfir %T^ "Rtrt^ ^^^firf^ fit: i 
 <^«.<^^^^ V^^: %ftrrM: XRrfTrT: II bS H 
 
 vt| f^ln ^r^H ^^tvt ^^^ v^^^^T!! II bb II 
 
 THE SECOND OR ."VFILITARY CLASS (OR KSIIATRIYAS'. 
 
 The Khig. 
 
 ^ra iTT^ ^FT^it ^f^^ wr:f^fv i 
 ^Tf^rn^T ^t^t:^tr ^t^ "^Tj^^ II bo. II 
 
 ^^ ^ ^ w^'^, ^ '^T^ "^^ II (10 II 
 ^Knf^ ff ^t%^ftTT^ ^(Tt f^^^ ^Tz?Tfi; I 
 t:^t^ ^t^ ^t^r iNMH ^w%(T w: n e^ ii 
 
 2*) p. 182. d. ■^) r. 20. '^■) root ^m with ^?nT and fff, "to give up all 
 
 worldly aftections." -'^) root '5r*T with ^XJ, "to expel," p. 145. g. -^) ace. neut. 
 of THTTT, "sin," r. 69. r. 6. '<') for ^ -^ ^:, r. 6. r. 27- «• ^') inst. plur. 
 
 of^^rPirf^, " belongmg to an order," p. 27. iv. 3?) ^m^ , "a sign," "cha- 
 
 racteristic" p. 2.'3. xii. 3') com. flSffT^. <i) ^, "not," and ^TJ, "theft." 
 
 3") com. ^llfplin^ri^^M) "knowledge of the principles of the shastras. ^c) com. 
 ^nW5rr»t. " knowledge of self." '") r. 171. b. *s) no^ case neut. of ^TcnsPT. 
 " having no Brahman," " without the Bralunanical class." ■'''■>) nom. case luut. 
 
 " the military body." "") '^ra, 5th conj. "to prosper," r. 04. ") root VT^ 
 
 with ;fflT, " to unite," p. 139. ?. ■'-) ^TTnT«li, " Iiaving no king. " ^'^) \>.\11, <■. 
 
 «) p. 1 10. 
 
 I I 
 
?0 II TT^effcTT^T: M 
 
 5^^TFTt f^tr^ ^T^ ^ Trt "^ ^^ II '^^ II 
 
 <HjiLI|< ^T^,«=[^Rt chiidchMT ^ ^V^f^. » 
 
 ^^TO^ f^^ ^Tf% xnrrtn^H.drMii: ii e^ ii 
 
 r^n T.^ ^ ?jt f^T^ "^ irfitf^T^: II ^M II 
 fT^ IT#^^ TTt ^=aT^ ^ xrftft^^ II (^!f II 
 rT^ fT^ tI^ f^ ft-^*IR ^^^ ^: II Q^S II 
 f^'v%^ "^^T f^Wt^ ^^^ ^ II Q^b II 
 
 «) p. 206. b. «) p. 182. (J. 4^) p. 195. l>. 46) r. 177. «. 
 
 ■*') nom. plur. of *T^, "h king," lit. "the chief of men." 4S) "paradise," 
 
 the place where the three great gods sport. ^s) root "^ with TrT, P- 174. 
 
 5°) nom. case masc. of frj^lH, "a reaper," root «^, "to cut," with fijt, see p. 110. c. 
 p. 149. 2. 1) ofi^, m. "grass," "weeds." '-) p. 115. ^) ace. case plur. of 
 
 mP^mPv-VIH , lit. "one who attacks on the ifftllT or road.'" *) ^, "not," and 
 
 I^TT^. "punishing" (r. 20.) nom. case of pres. part, of ^jnT (p. 115.). Properly 
 tills should he -.ii^imrf , see p. 136. c, but such violations of Grammar are not 
 uncommon in metrical composition. ^) root T^, 4th conj. atm. " to be shaken," 
 with n. 6) p. 154. e. •) r. 203. a. ^) 'srrfw* "depending on," "resting on," 
 root f^, p. 138. 6. 9) pres. part, of the pass, ofiii^, "to irrigate," r. 124. 
 
 10) inst. plur. of "arnT, "an act of policy." n) p. 124. '-') f^j^fViT, "prevention." 
 
II TT^^^effrTT^T: II 9<^ 
 
 ^^ ^fwn^ T5rR%^ ^^FT ^^<4^ii: II ee II 
 
 -^T^ ^ TT ;^Tci; ^^f^^ fWrT ^llWrR: H ^oo II 
 
 7TT%T^ ^RUl^ ^ rTFTT^ ^^2?^ ^%% I 
 ^m^ ^fjq^ ?ft VTH^ ^ f^PH^T^d: II ^0^ II 
 
 ftf^^ f? ^tjitirr ^% ^rcrf^Trf xnn: ii ^©^ n 
 
 Adminiiit ration of Just ice. 
 
 ^ri|1<iir| ^^ ^iTO TRT ^pi; ^TFT "^1^: I 
 ^ -g mPMdH ^^ ^i^ ^^ «h^^H II ^o8 II 
 
 ^rT d^M*4MH VTH^ ?Txrf?T: ^^ II ^oq II 
 
 ■•'') 3d sing. pot. of root 7ft with jj, "to intiict," p. 175. ") ^?j5{, "dcsei-vinp 
 punishment," root ^5|3, "to punish," p. 147.,'/- '') ^Tc5. "• "<'" '™" P'" ''i' «P't " 
 I' ) r. 210. IT) 3d sing. pot. of^, 2d conj. "to cat." '^) ace. case niasc. of 
 
 H^jj l ^l . " an oblation of clarified butter mixed with cakes of barley meal." ''') root 
 f^, 2d conj. " to lick." •^") ff^, n. "clarified butter," r. 18. =') r. 203. b. 
 ■-) 3d plur. pot. of the pass, of fi?^, "to break," p. 99. ") r. 194. -') p. lai. r. 
 2'') loc. of jft^m, "liberation." 2fi) j-oot im with f^ and f^, p. G4. c. p. 130. 
 
 Com. xpiJTjrn^ 55^ ^ff!, "inflicting punishment in a legal manner." -^) r. 1.53. 
 '-■^) p. 87. d. -'■) rootTj^ in cans, with -gn^, "to excite." "') root IJ^, "to 
 
 devour," "seize upon"; but the scholia.st explains it by T^r^iT. " should neglect.' 
 •"') root ^ (p.(;4. rt.) here, "to track." -') XTTiT, "a falling," "dropping." 
 
 ■"<) "a lumter. ' 
 
wet ^T ^ H%t^ "SJ^^ "^ BTT%^ I 
 ^7T Tj% ^^ \^^: ^^ -^i^ I 
 
 ^RT^lf^TT^ cR^ "^ f%f^^ ^^ ^%r(; I 
 
 ^: 11% f^rfR ^T?i; ire: ^^ iri^iOra^ ii ^^i^ n 
 
 cTt^ g '^■^: iTx|^"pTr ^^-sTTTffk^r^: ii ^^^ ii 
 TT^-f^ ^^Tft^ Wii^Tff ^ct; '^ <*^i^ ^=r^ I 
 i^FET ftzicf^ ^ f^ ^^ ^i!?r:^^(TT nf^: (I S«l9 ii 
 
 24) root ^T9, "to pierce," p. 140. 7i. ^s) sd sing. pres. atm. of ^^n with -gTr 
 (p. 107.), "to approach." •'') ^T^, "i- "• "a dart." ^7) root efTT, r. 90. &., for 
 
 ■gTEpiT, "to extract," Com. "^IgrfnT. '^) ^KT^, "one of an assembly"; ^^T, 
 
 " an assembly "; ^, "to sit," p. 25. r. 42. 39) p. 203. b. 4") ipT^^, 
 
 neuter, "truth." ») nom. case masc. of fofif^f^rT, "possessing fofif^^, 
 
 sin," p. 27. iv. ^2) p. 99. 1;;) p. 124. 44) " the state of being f^ofi^, 
 
 mutilated, defective," p. 23. vii. 4^) p. 178./. 4g) ace. plur. of -s^pT, p. 42. "j". 
 47) nom. case masc. " having the head dov^'nwards." ^sj i^^ ^j^gg ^^ ^rrg " blind,' 
 here "total." 's) r. 199. a. ^f) f^, "not," and jjxj, "true," p. 154. e. 
 
 1) p. 39. 2) r. 20. "0 ^Vffltr^i?, lit. " the inner man," "the internal spirit." 
 
 p. 205. a. -) p. 139. c. , <■) loc. case of ^, r. fiO. -) nom. case ma.sc. of 
 
 ■|fl^, "an inspector," p. 149. 2. ^) ^fff, " a holy sage," here it refers to " the 
 soul," "the intelligent spirit." 
 
II H^FtfffTTHK: II ^^ 
 
 ^rT%r ^ ^TTr»7^: m^ if^t^ ^TTrrn fT^J^^: I 
 
 ^jf%: H^i^ -g VT#g ^[CWT* f4l.<r^HI II ^^M II 
 
 Tin: TlllKl) OK COMMr.Kt I \L CLASS (OK VAlSlIYAs). 
 
 ^tiRt fHrM.^^: ^Tfi; WTf ^^ T^ II ^^If II 
 W^IMrrl4, ff ^^[^^TR ^T%T Tcrft<^ XT^ I 
 wraTTTR ^ ?!% ^ ^: xrft^^ iptt: ii ^^s ii 
 
 ^RFRTt^ HKi^MI ^^srPTT ^ JRMJRIR II ^^t II 
 
 n^^TFTt ^ <4HMi ^ f^RTT^ ^T%#^T^^ II ^«i^ II 
 ^fJTMT ^ ^rf ftrar^ ^TRT^ f¥^VT ^ I 
 i^i^t ^M.-tft^t^ *A|,r^*^^ I^ ^ II «i^o II 
 
 ^lITir Hl:Hrn^?TTTi^ ^T^ IT^r W^Hd: II ^^^ II 
 
 ^) ^ir, " that to wliich one goes for refuge." '") 2(1 sing, of 3d prct. of JT7T 
 
 with ^r^, " to contemn," p. 82. e., the augment being dropped by r. 208. 'i) r. 1,51. 
 I-) nom. dual of ^r?an. "twilight." i-*) ^R, "wife," -qftirf , "taking." ") loc. 
 c. of ^rrtr, "agriculture and trade." i-) a name of Brahma, "tlie lord of all 
 
 beings." "') root WS[ , p. 14.3. a. '■) 2d pret. atm. of ^ (p. 1 lii.) with Trft. 
 
 '") Tfw, " sowing," f^, " to know," r. 42. r. 16. '") r. l.>3. b. -") Tr^j:^, 
 
 " coral," r. 1.51 . a. 21) ^TT^fT?. n. " woven cloth." -'-) lit. " the price strong and 
 weak " (r. lo.3. /;.), i. c. " dear and cheap." '-') zftT is sometimes joined to another 
 word, without much obvious meaning. -') loc. c. r. 8. - ) r. 19G. 
 
?8 II HH-Ml^dWK: (I 
 
 THE FOURTH OR SERVILE CLASS (OR SHUDRAS). 
 
 W^t^ fT ^25^ v»i^ %^w* -qr: II ^^^ II 
 
 WT^Rm?T^^ f^TRP^ ^^rf^ ^TTfciH ^^ H "i^? II 
 ^f?^ ^THTJ^ ^M^ ^llf ?f^?^rf^T^ I 
 
 im ^FnfMi ^TH ^thItS-w^^ t?^: II s^8 II 
 
 2fi) " possessed ofTT^pff fame," p. 27. v. 27) formed from f»T:^Tm, "final bea- 
 titude, by p. 23. viii. '^^) r. 45. -if) ^-^^ "not," and ^ ^ ?.ri, " proud "; lit. 
 " making- mucb of self." ^'^) loc. c. '*tlie four classes" collectively, from ^H'lp^r, 
 by p. 23. vii. 
 
TRANSLATION OF THE FOREGOING SELECTIONS FROM 
 THE INSTITUTES OF MANU. 
 
 Tntroductori/ Feniarks, 
 Jlhe precise time at wliich the Institutes of Manu were comj^iled 
 is uncertain. Sir William Jones places tlie date about tvvelv(» 
 hundred years before Christ, and Mr. Elphinstone about nine 
 hundred, or about the age of Homer. It will be observed, by a 
 reference to the translation (verses 69 — 73.), that the burning of 
 the Sati, or Indian widow, is not even hinted at, which, of itself, 
 fixes the time of the compilation of the laws far anterior to the 
 era of Alexander the Great, the Macedonians having found this 
 cruel and revolting custom prevalent at the period of their 
 invasion. But wliatever may be the date of this code, the matter 
 it contains cannot fail to strike the most superficial observer as 
 full of interest and importance. No one, it is presumed, will 
 read the subjoined translation without admiring the lofty and 
 almost Christian tone of morality that pervades it : and when it 
 is remembered that we are entirely without historical account 
 of the Hindus at these early ages, every one must admit the 
 importance of a work, which, presenting us with a complete 
 picture of their laws, religion, and social habits, may serve as a 
 guide to many points in their political history. 
 
 Let not, however, the reader suppose that the translation we 
 have here given of the most striking passages in these Institutes 
 is intended to serve as a sample of the whole, or he will derive 
 from its perusal a very exalted and a very false notion of the 
 state of Hindu morality at this early epoch. The original work 
 is polluted by numerous rules and prohibitions, having reference 
 to practices which could only have prevailed in a corrupt and 
 degraded state of moral feeling. It should, moreover, be borne 
 in mind, that the compiler of this code, who was proljably some 
 learned Brahman of the day, collected from the literature of 
 his country, and the opinions of his own time, what ought to he 
 the laws which should regulate the community, rather than what 
 those laws actually were : and that he doubtless mixed up with 
 
3G SELECTIONS FROM MANU TRANSLATED. 
 
 the existing state of things many of his own ideas upon questions 
 of religion, morality, and law. Nevertheless, however much the 
 minuter parts of the picture presented to us in this book are 
 to be attributed to the imagination of the legislator, and however 
 much it may be necessary to soften down the particular features 
 of the landscape, still, taken as a whole, it furnishes us with a 
 very valuable representation of the early condition of the Hindu 
 people. And its importance will be enhanced, when it is remem- 
 bered that the natives of India at the present day regard it not 
 only as the oldest, but as the most sacred text after the Vedas. 
 and that it still furnishes the basis of Hindu jurisprudence. 
 
 The original work is entirely wanting in arrangement, and the 
 preceding extracts have been selected from various parts so as to 
 give the cream of the whole with as much continuity and con- 
 nexion as the subject would admit. Tlie reader must understand 
 that the most remarkable feature in Hindu society, as depicted in 
 the Institutes, is the division of the people into four classes or 
 castes : 1st, The Sacerdotal ; 2d, Tlie Military ; 3d, Tlie Commer- 
 cial ; 4th, The Servile. Tlie first three classes, though by no 
 means equal, were admitted into one common pale, and called by 
 the common name of " twice-born." With reference to them 
 alone were these Institutes composed, the 4th class being in that 
 state of degradation which would seem to indicate that they were 
 the aborigines of the soil, subject to a conquering race. As to 
 the 1st, or Sacerdotal Class, the Brahmans who formed it were 
 held to be the chief of all human beings ; they were even superior 
 to the king, and their lives and property were protected by the 
 most stringent laws. They were to divide their lives into four 
 quarters (or orders), living for the first quarter as students with 
 their preceptors ; for the second, as householders with their 
 families ; for the third, as anchorites in the woods ; for the fourth, 
 as religious mendicants, wandering from house to house, and 
 emaciating their bodies by mortification and austerity. As to 
 the 2d, or Military Class, although much inferior in rank to the 
 Sacerdotal, they enjoyed great privileges, and, inasmuch as the 
 king and his ministers were taken from their body, must have 
 been practically the most powerful. As to the 3d. or Commercial. 
 
SELECTIONS EROM MANT TRANSLATED. 'M 
 
 they were not held in nnieh esteem, their duties being to keep 
 cattle, till the ground, and engage in trade. The 4th, or Servile 
 Class, were excluded from all political and religious privileges ; 
 and although it does not appear that they were the slaves of the 
 state like those of Europe, their only duties were made to consist 
 in serving the other three classes. 
 
 iNIr. El})liinstone notices two great peculiarities in the society 
 thus constituted : 1st, the little importance attached to the direc- 
 tion of public worship and religious ceremonies by the Brahmans ; 
 2dly, the strictness with which all the actions of the Brahmans 
 are regulated, as if living in a convent, and not scattered over a 
 vast tract of country, without head or council or ecclesiastical 
 government. 
 
 The annexed translation is partly founded upon that of Sir 
 William Jones ; but although, in some passages, the words of that 
 distinguished oriental scholar have been followed, it has been 
 thought desirable to introduce many alterations in the present 
 version. 
 
 TRANSLATION. 
 
 ORIGIN OF THE FOUR CLASSES, AND GENERAL VIEW OF THEIR DUTIES. 
 
 1. For the sake of the preservation of all this creation, the 
 Supreme in glory assigned separate duties to those who sprang 
 respectively from his mouth, his arm, his thigh, and his foot. 
 
 2. To Brahmoiis he assigned the duties of teaching, of reading, 
 of sacrificing, of assisting at sacrifices, of giving, and (if indigent) 
 of receiving. 
 
 3. The (duties) of a Kshatriya are, in brief, the defence of the 
 people, giving, sacrificing, reading, freedom from attachment to 
 sensual pleasures. 
 
 4. To the Vaishija (he assigned the duties of) keeping cattle, 
 giving, sacrificing, reading, trading, lending money at interest, 
 and agriculture. 
 
 5. To the Shudra, the Supreme Ruler appointed one single 
 duty, the service of these (other) classes ungrudgingly. 
 
 6. Of created things, the most excellent are those which are 
 animated ; of the animated, those endued with intellectual life ; 
 
 K K 
 
38 SELECTIONS FROM MANU TRANSLATED. 
 
 of the intelligent, mankind ; and of men, Brahmans (or the 
 sacerdotal class). 
 
 7. Of Brahmans, those who are learned (in the ritual) ; of 
 the learned, those whose minds are acquainted with their duty ; 
 of those who are acquainted with their duty, such as perform it ; 
 of such as perform it, those who have acquaintance with the 
 Supreme Spirit 
 
 8. The seniority of Brahmans (or priests) is from sacred 
 learning ; of Kshatriyas (or soldiers) from valour ; of Vaishyas 
 (or merchants and husbandmen) from (abundance of) grain and 
 money ; of Shudras (or slaves) from priority of birth alone. 
 
 9. The Brahman, the Kshatriya, and the Vaishya are the 
 three twice-born classes (their sacred birth taking place at their 
 investiture with the sacred thread) ; but the fourth class, or 
 Shvidra, is once-born (as being excluded from investiture with the 
 thread); there is no fifth class (except those which are mixed and 
 impure). 
 
 THE FIRST, OR SACERDOTAL CLASS (oR BRAHMANs). 
 
 Duties of the Brahman in the first Order {Ashrama) or Quarter of 
 
 his Life, as a Brahmacharl, or Student of Religion, subject to his 
 
 Guru or Preceptor. 
 
 10. Learning, having approached a Brahman, said to him, 
 " I am thy divine treasure, preserve me, deliver me not to a 
 scorner ; so (preserved) I shall become supremely strong. 
 
 11. But communicate me to that student who will be a careful 
 guardian of the treasure, and whom thou shalt know to be pure, 
 self-governed, and a Brahmachari." 
 
 12. Where virtue and worldly means (sufficient to secure it) 
 are not found, or diligent attention proportioned (to the holiness 
 of the subject), in that soil divine knowledge must not be sown, 
 like good seed on barren land. 
 
 13. A teacher of the Veda should be willing to die with his 
 learning rather than sow it in sterile soil, even though he be in 
 grievous distress. 
 
 14. A Brahman who is the causer of spiritual birth, the teacher 
 of proper duties, even though a child, becomes by right the father 
 of an old man. 
 
SELECTIONS FROM MANU TRANSLATED. 39 
 
 15. A man is not therefore aged because his liead is gray ; 
 him surely the gotls consider as aged, who, tliough young, is well 
 read in Scripture. 
 
 16. As an elephant made of wood, as an antelope made of 
 leather, so is an unread Brahman ; these three (merely) bear the 
 name. 
 
 17. These (following) rules nnist a Brahmachari observe, whilst 
 dwelling with his preceptor, keeping all his passions under con- 
 troul, for the sake of increasing his habitual devotion. 
 
 18. When commanded by his preceptor, and even when he has 
 received no command, let him always be diligent in reading and 
 in friendly offices toward his teacher. 
 
 19. A teacher, a ftither, a mother, and an elder brother, are not 
 to be treated with disrespect, especially by a Brahman, even 
 though he be much irritated. 
 
 20. That trouble which a mother and father undergo in rearing 
 their children is a debt which cannot be repaid even in hundreds 
 of years. 
 
 21. Let a man constantly do what may please these (his 
 parents), and on all occasions what may please his preceptor ; 
 when these three are satisfied, his whole course of devotion is 
 accomplished. 
 
 22. Obedience to these three is called the highest devotion, 
 and without their approbation he must perform no other duty. 
 
 23. Of (the youth) who habitually greets and constantly reveres 
 the aged, four things obtain increase — life, knowledge, fame, 
 strength. 
 
 24. As a man who digs deep with a spade comes to a S})ring 
 of water, so he who is diligent in serving (his preceptor) attjiins 
 the knowledge which lies in his teacher's mind. 
 
 25. Even from poison nectar may be taken, even from a child 
 gentleness of speech : a believer in Scripture may receive a good 
 lesson even from a man of the lowest class. 
 
 26. Tlierefore the highest virtue, learning, purity, gentleness of 
 speech, and various liberal arts should ])e collected by him from 
 all tpiarters. 
 
 27. In the restraint of the orsjaiis wjiich run wild among 
 
40 SELECTIONS FROM MANU TRANSLATED. 
 
 ravishing objects of sense, a wise man should apply diligent care, 
 like a charioteer in managing (restive) steeds. 
 
 28. Desire is never satisfied with the enjoyment of desired 
 objects, as the fire (is not appeased) by clarified butter, it only 
 blazes more vehemently. 
 
 29. By addiction to his sensual organs a man undoubtedly in- 
 curs guilt ; but having kept them in subjection, he thence attains 
 heavenly bliss. 
 
 30. Neither the Vedas, nor almsgiving, nor sacrifices, nor strict 
 observances, nor pious austerities, ever lead that man to heavenly 
 felicity who is inwardly depraved. 
 
 31. Having kept all liis organs of sense under controul, 
 and obtained command over his heart also, he will accomplish 
 every object, even though he reduce not his body by religious 
 austerities. 
 
 32. But when one among all his organs gives way, by that 
 single defect his knowledge of diWne truth passes away, as water 
 leaks through (a single crack in) a leathern vessel. 
 
 33. He whose discourse and heart are pure and ever perfectly 
 guarded, attains all the fruit acquired by a complete course of 
 studying the Veda. 
 
 34. Let a Brahman constantly shrink from worldly honour as 
 he would poison, and rather always earnestly desire disrespect as 
 he would nectar. 
 
 35. For though scorned he may sleep wuth pleasure ; with 
 pleasure may he awake ; with pleasure may he pass through this 
 life ; but the scorner utterly perishes. 
 
 36. The Brahman who thus without deviation passes the time 
 of his studentship, ascends (after death) to the most exalted regions, 
 and is not again subject to birth in this lower world. 
 
 Duties of the Brahman in the second order or quarter of his life, as 
 a Grihastha, or Householder. 
 
 37. Let a Brahman, having dwelt with a preceptor for the first 
 quarter of his life, pass the second quarter of life in his own house, 
 as a married man. 
 
 38. With no injury to animated beings, or with as little injury 
 
SELECTIONS FllO-M MANU TRANSLATED. 41 
 
 as possible, and Nvitliout toil to his own body, let him aeeuniulate 
 rielies. 
 
 39. The chief temporal good is by some declared to be virtue 
 and wealth ; (by some) pleasure and wealth ; and (by some) vii-tue 
 alone ; (by others) wealth alone ; but the chief good here below is 
 an assemblage of all three : this is a sure decision.* 
 
 40. If he seek happiness, let him be moderate (in the acquisi- 
 tion of riches), pursuing perfect contentment : for happiness lias 
 its root in content, and discontent is the root of misery. 
 
 41. Let him daily, without sloth, perform his peculiar duty 
 prescribed by the Veda ; for performing that duty to the best of 
 his ability he obtains supreme bliss. 
 
 42. Let him not from carnal desire be too strongly attached to 
 all objects of sense : let him wholly abandon all pursuits that are 
 incompatible with the study of Scripture. 
 
 43. Let him pass through this world, bringing his apparel, his 
 discourse, and his intellectual acquirements into conformity with 
 his age, his occupations, his means, his divine knowledge, and his 
 stJition in life. 
 
 44. Tliough sinking ( into penury) in consequence of his righteous 
 dealings, let him never apply his mind to unrighteousness, observ- 
 ing the speedy overthrow of iniquitous and sinful men. 
 
 45. Iniquity practised in this world, like the earth, does not 
 bear fruit at the moment : but advancing little by little it eradi- 
 cates the author of it. 
 
 46. Yes ; iniquity, once committed, fails not of producing fruit 
 to him who wrought it ; if not in his person, yet in his sons ; or 
 if not in his sons, yet in his grandsons. 
 
 47. Of death and of vice, vice is pronounced tlu^ more dreadful ; 
 since after death a vicious man sinks to the lowest depths of hell, 
 while a man, free from vice, reaches heaven. 
 
 48. Let him, therefore, shun atheism, disbelief of Scripture, con- 
 tempt of the deities, malice, hypocrisy, pride, anger, and cruelty. 
 
 * Tliis passage will call to the mind uf the classical scholar the .Oth and <Uli 
 chapters of the 1st book of Aristotle's Ethics. 
 
42 SELECTIONS FROM MANU TRANSLATED. 
 
 49. Let him not wound the feelings of others, even though irri- 
 tated ; let him not injure another in thought or deed ; let him 
 not even utter a word by which his fellow-creature may suffer 
 uneasiness. 
 
 50. Let him say what is true, let him say what is pleasing ; let 
 liim speak no disagreeable truth, nor let him speak agreeable 
 falsehood: this is a perpetual law. 
 
 51. Whatever act depends (for its accomplishment) on another, 
 that act let him carefully shun ; but whatever depends on himself, 
 to that let him diligently attend. 
 
 52. Every thing which depends (for its attainment) on the 
 favour of another causes unhappiness, but every thing which de- 
 pends on one's own individual exertions causes happiness : let him 
 know this to be in a few words the definition of pleasure and pain. 
 
 53. Let him always honour his food, and eat it without con- 
 tempt ; when he sees it, let him rejoice, and be content, and ever 
 return thanks for it (praying that he may always obtain it). 
 
 54. Excessive eating is prejudicial to health, to life, and to the 
 prospect of attaining heaven ; it is destructive to merit, and odious 
 amongst men ; therefore, he should by all means avoid it. 
 
 55. To a guest who has arrived at his house let him offer a 
 seat and water and food, such as may be in his power, treating 
 him with hospitality, according to prescribed rule. 
 
 56. Let him never eat any thing himself which he has not first 
 set before his guest : reverence of a guest is conducive to wealth, 
 to fame, to life, and to a heavenly reward. 
 
 57. When asked, he should give something, though it be a 
 mere trifle, ungrudgingly, with a cheerful heart, and to the best 
 of his means, having met with a worthy object of charity. 
 
 58. With whatever spirit a man bestows any gift, with the very 
 same spirit, being honoured in return, he shall receive a similar 
 I'ecompense. 
 
 59. Let not a man pride himself on his religious observances ; 
 having made a donation let him never proclaim it : by pride, the 
 merit of devotion is lost, and the merit of almsgiving by ostenta- 
 tiously proclaiming it. 
 
 60. Let him not having committed sin perform a penance 
 
SELECTIONS VROM MANU TUAXSLATKD. 43 
 
 under the pretext of religion, disguising his crinu^ under mere 
 bodily austerity, and deeeiving (only) women and the lowest class 
 of men. 
 
 61. He who being of one eharaeter descrilies himself to the 
 good as of another is the most sinful wretch in the world, the 
 worst of thieves, a stealer of men's minds. 
 
 62. A wise man should constantly discharge all the moral 
 duties,* though he perform not constantly the ceremonies of reli- 
 gion ; since he falls low, if, performing ceremonial acts only, he 
 discharges not his moral duties. 
 
 63. Giving pain to no creature, let him, for the sake of obtjiin- 
 ing a companion to the next world, accumulate virtue by degrees, 
 as the white ants (collect the soil into) a hillock. 
 
 64. For neither father, nor mother, nor wife, nor son, nor kins- 
 man, will remain as his companion in his passage to the next 
 world ; his virtue alone will adhere to him. 
 
 63. Single is every living being born, single he passes away, 
 single he eats the fruit of his good deeds, and single the fruit of 
 his evil deeds. 
 
 66. WHien he leaves his dead body, like a log or a lump of clay, 
 on the ground, his kindred retire with averted faces, but his virtue 
 accompanies his soul. 
 
 67. Continually, therefore, and by degrees, let him accumulate 
 virtue, for the sake of securing an inseparable associate ; since 
 with virtue as his companion he will traverse a gloom, hard 
 indeed to be traversed. 
 
 68. The man who is eminent in piety, and whose offences 
 have been expiated by devotion, such a man does his virtue in- 
 stantly convey after death to another world with a radiant form 
 and a body of celestial substance. 
 
 Duties of the Grihasthas IFife. 
 
 69. A faithful wife, wishing to attain in heaven the mansion of 
 her husband, must do nothing unkind to that husband, be he living 
 or dead. 
 
 70. A husband nuist constantly be starved as a god by a vir- 
 
 * See p. ^M. note 24. 
 
44 SELECTIONS FROM MANU TRANSLATED. 
 
 tuoiis wife. As far only as she is obedient to her lord, so far is 
 she exalted in heaven. 
 
 71. She must always be cheerful, skilful in her management of 
 the affairs of the house, careful in cleaning the household furni- 
 ture, and not too lavish in her expenditure. 
 
 72. She who commits no offence against her lord, but is devoted 
 to him in mind, speech, and body, acquires high reno\Mi in this 
 world, and in the next the same abode with her husband. 
 
 73. And when her husband is dead, let her not even pronounce 
 the name of another man, but let her continue till her own death, 
 forgiving all injuries, performing austerities, and avoiding every 
 sensual pleasure. 
 
 Duties of the Brahman in the third order or quarter of his life, as a 
 Vanaprasfha, or Hermit. 
 
 74. Wlien the householder perceives wrinkles on his body, and 
 his hair gray, consigning his wife to the care of his sons, let him 
 then have recourse to the forest. 
 
 75. From such food as himself may eat, let him to the best of 
 his ability make offerings and give alms, and with water, roots, 
 fruit, and other presents let him honour all who visit his hermitage. 
 
 76. Let him be constantly engaged in the study of Scripture, 
 patient of extremities, benevolent, composed in mind, a constant 
 giver but no receiver of gifts, tenderly affectionate towards all 
 animated bodies. 
 
 77. Not solicitous for the means of gratification, his organs pro- 
 perly kept in subjection, sleeping on the bare ground, without one 
 selfish affection, dwelling at the roots of trees. 
 
 78. Let him emaciate his bodily frame, enduring harsher and 
 harsher mortifications. A Brahman who has banished sorrow and 
 fear becomes exalted in the di^^ne world. 
 
 Duties of the Brahman in the fourth order or quarter of his life, as a 
 Bhikshn, or Beligious Mendicant. 
 
 79. Having thus passed his time in the forests during the 
 third portion of his life, let him for the fourth portion of it 
 become a Parivrajaka (or religious mendicant), abandoning all 
 sensual connexions. 
 
SELECTIONS FROM MANU TRANSLATED. 45 
 
 50. His liair. nails, and heard l)eini; clipped, hearinii; witii liini 
 a dish, a staff", and a wator-pot, intent on religious meditation, 
 let him wander about continually without causing pain to any 
 creature. 
 
 51. Let him not long for death, let him not long for life, l(?t 
 him expect his appointed time as a hired servant his wages. 
 
 82. By the restraint of his sensual organs, by tlie gradual 
 extinction of affection and hatred, and by abstinence from injury 
 to sentient beings, he becomes fit for immortality. 
 
 83. Let him bear opprobrious speech with patience, let him 
 not treat any one with contempt, with an angry man let him not 
 in his turn be angry, when cursed let him utter a blessing. 
 
 84. By eating little food, and by standing and sitting in soli- 
 tary places, let him sup})ress those organs that are hurried away 
 by sensual objects. 
 
 85. A mansion infested by decrepitude and sorrow, the seat 
 of malady, harassed by pains, haunted with the darkness of 
 passion, transient and formed of earth, such a mansion let him 
 cheerfully quit. 
 
 86. In this manner having by little and little abandoned all 
 earthly attachments, and having by devotion of himself to God 
 effaced sin, he then attains the supreme path of glory. 
 
 87. By Brahmans, placed in these four orders, a (system of) 
 duty having ten characteristics must be sedulously practised. 
 
 88. Contentment, returning good for evil, self-command, honesty, 
 purification, coercion of the organs, knowledge of science, wisdom, 
 veracity, and freedom from anger, form their tenfold system of duty. 
 
 THE SECOND, OR MILITARY CLASS (oR KSIIATRIYAs). 
 
 The King. 
 
 89. By a Kshatriya (or man of the military class), who has re- 
 ceived in due form the investiture prescribed by the Vedas, the pro- 
 tection of all these (his dominions) is to be made according to rule. 
 
 90. The military class does not flourish without the sacerdotal, 
 nor does the sacerdotal prosper without the military ; the sacer- 
 dotal and military classes, wlien associated together, obtain increase 
 ill this world and the next. 
 
 L L 
 
4G SELECTIONS FROM MANU TRANSLATED. 
 
 91. For if the world were without a king it would be agitated 
 by fear, therefore the Supreme Ruler created a king for the sake 
 of the protection of all this (universe). 
 
 92. A king, even though a child, must not be treated with 
 contempt from an idea that he is a mere mortal ; for he is a 
 mighty divinity that appears in human shape. 
 
 93. A king should apply all his efforts to the suppression of 
 robbers ; for by the suppression of such wicked men his fame and 
 territory obtain increase. 
 
 94. By the protection of the virtuous and the extirpation of 
 evil doers, monarchs who devote themselves to the care of their 
 subjects attain paradise. 
 
 9:i. As a husbandman plucks up weeds and preserves his corn, 
 thus let a king destroy the iniquitous and protect his country. 
 
 96. But that monarch who takes a revenue without restraining 
 the wicked, of such an one the dominions become troubled, and 
 he himself is excluded from heaven. 
 
 97. But of him whose realm is supported by the strength of 
 his arm and free from terror, the dominions continually flourish 
 like a tree duly watered. 
 
 98. Let him diligently suppress the unrighteous by three 
 methods — by coercion, by confinement, and by various kinds of 
 capital punishment. 
 
 99. If the king were not with the greatest activity to inflict 
 punishment on the guilty, the stronger would roast the weak like 
 fish on a spit. 
 
 100. The crow would peck the consecrated offering, and the 
 dog would lick the clarified butter ; ownership would remain with 
 nobody, all barriers would be broken down. 
 
 101. The whole human race is kept under controul by punish- 
 ment, for an innocent man is difficult to be found : through fear 
 of punishment the whole universe is fitted for the enjoyment of 
 its blessings. 
 
 102. Injustice is considered to attach to a king as much in 
 releasing the man who deserves punishment, as in punishing the 
 man who deserves it not ; but justice to one who inflicts it with 
 proper discrimination. 
 
SELECTIONS FUOM MANU TRANSLATED. 47 
 
 103. Day and niijht must he exert every elFort to jj^ain the 
 vietory over his passions, sinee that king alone wliose passions 
 are sub(hied ean keep his subjects also in suhjeetion. 
 
 Ad in in ist ration of Justice. 
 
 104. Neither the king himself nor the king's officer ought ever 
 to promote litigation, or to neglect a law-suit when brought 
 before him by another. 
 
 105. As a hunter tracks the lurking-place of the (wounded) 
 deer by the drops of blood, so must a king investigate the direc- 
 tion in which justice lies by deliberate arguments. 
 
 106. Where justice, being wounded by iniquity, approaches tlie 
 court, and the judges extract not the dart, there those judges also 
 shall be wounded by it. 
 
 107. Either the court must not be entered, or truth must be 
 declared : that man is criminal who either remains silent or says 
 what is false. 
 
 lOS. By truth is a witness purified from sin ; bj- truth is 
 justice advanced : truth must, therefore, be spoken by witnesses of 
 every class. 
 
 109. The man who, being arrived in a court of justice, gives an 
 imperfect account of a transaction, the truth of which he has not 
 clearly ascertained, shall resemble a blind man who eats fish along 
 with the bones. 
 
 110. The merit of every virtuous act which thou hast done, 
 O good man, since thy birth, shall depart from thee to the dogs, 
 if thou speak falsely. 
 
 HI. Headlong in utter darkness shall the guilty wretch tumble 
 into hell, who, being asked a question in judicial incjuiry, answers 
 falsely. 
 
 112. The sinful say in their hearts, "None sees us.'' Yes; the 
 gods distinctly see them, and so does the spirit within their breasts. 
 
 113. Though thou thinkest to thyself, O good friend, "I am 
 alone," there resides in thy bosom an Onniiscient being, the 
 inspector of thy goodness or of thy wickedness. 
 
 114. The soul itself is its own witness: the soul itself is its 
 own refuge : offend not thy own soul, the supreme intci-nal 
 witness of men. 
 
48 SELECTIONS FROM MANU TRANSLATED. 
 
 115. The firmament, the earth, tlie waters, the human heart, 
 the moon, the sun, the fire, the Judge of departed souls, the 
 wind, the night, the two twilights, and justice, are acquainted with 
 the conduct of all corporeal beings. 
 
 THE THIRD OR COMMERCIAL CLASS (OR VAISHYAS). 
 
 116. Let the Vaishya, having received investiture with the 
 sacrificial thread, and having married a wife, be always attentive 
 to his business of agriculture and trade, and the tending of cattle. 
 
 117. Since the Lord of the world, having created cattle, in- 
 trusted them to the care of the Vaishya, while he intrusted the 
 w^hole human species to the Brahman and Kshatriya. 
 
 118. Let him be acquainted with the proper seasons for sowing 
 seeds, and with the bad or good qualities of land, the excellence or 
 defects of commodities, the advantages and disadvantages of diffe- 
 rent regions. 
 
 1 19. Of gems, pearls, and coral ; of metals, woven cloths, per- 
 fumes, and condiments, let him know the prices both high and low . 
 
 120. Let him know the just wages of servants, and the various 
 dialects of men, the best mode of keeping goods, and every thing 
 connected w^ith purchase and sale. 
 
 121. Let him exert his utmost efforts to augment his property 
 by all righteous means ; and let him, to the best of his power, 
 contribute toward the support and nourishment, of all creatures. 
 
 THE FOURTH OR SERVILE CLASS (OR SHUDRAS). 
 
 122. Attendance on illustrious Brahmans, who are householders 
 and learned in the Vedas, is of itself the highest duty of a Shudra, 
 and conducive to his heav^enly reward. 
 
 123. Pure (in body and mind), serving the three higher classes, 
 mild in speech, never arrogant, ever firm in his dependence on 
 the sacerdotal class, he may obtain the highest class in another 
 transmigration. 
 
 124. Avoidance of injury to animated beings, veracity, honesty, 
 cleanliness, and command over the organs of sense, form the com- 
 pendious system of duties which Manu has ordained for all the 
 four classes. 
 
SCHEME OF THE SHLOKA, OR ANUSHTUBH METRE. 
 
 The Institutes of Maim are written in the shloko, or anusjituhh 
 metre. This is the commonest of all the infinite variety of 
 Sanscrit metres, and is that which chiefly prevails in the great 
 epic poems of the East. It consists of two lines of sixteen 
 syllables each, but the rules which re«i^ulate one line apply equally 
 to the other. The scheme is as follows : — 
 
 12 3 4 1 5 G 7 8 Ij '.I 10 11 12 I XW 14 15 IG 
 
 ....|w — ~.||..-.|w — w. 
 
 The 1st, 2d, 3d, 4th, 9th, 10th, Uth, and 12th syllables may be 
 either long or short. The 16th, as ending the line, is also com- 
 mon. But the line may be considered as divided into two parts 
 at the Sth syllable, since it is an almost universal rule that this 
 syllable must end a word, whether simple or compound. Hence it 
 follows that the usual privilege of a final syllable is conceded 
 to the Sth also. 
 
 The 5tli syllable ought always to be short. The 6th may be 
 either long or short, but if long then the 7th ought to be long 
 also, and if short then the 7th ought to be short also. But oc- 
 casional variations from these last rules occur. 
 
 The last four syllables form two iambics, the 13th being always 
 short, the 14th always long, and the 15th always short. 
 
 Every shloka, or couplet of two lines, must form a com- 
 plete sentence in itself, and contain both subject and predicate. 
 Not unfrequently, however, in the Ramayaiia and Mahabharatii, 
 three lines are united to form a triplet. 
 
CORRECTIONS. 
 
 P. 77. line b.forr siege read seize. 
 
 P. 78. note,/or r. 88. a. read r. 88. h. 
 
 P. 7!>. line \.for kshcptwti re^wZ kshiptwu. 
 
 P. 107. note s. for ^I^^, ^^TTE^ '>md 'gj^^, ^^^^. 
 
 In some few cases the long marks over the vowels and the dots which di.stinguish 
 the cerebral letters have broken off in the printing of part of tlie impression. 
 Thus, in p. 24. line 1, read jiva. In p. 42. note t, read Vcdagarbhanama. In 
 p. 79. line 4 from the bottom, read data, line 3, jetii. Some few other cases may bi- 
 found. 
 
AVItXIAM WATTS, CROWN COURT, TEMPLE BAR. 
 
 A. 
 
RETURN CIRCULATION DEPARTMENT 
 
 TO mm^ 202 Main Library 
 
 LOAN PERIOD 1 
 HOME USE 
 
 ALL BOOKS MAY BE RECALLtD AFTER 7 DAYS 
 
 V-month loans may be renewed by calling 642-3405 
 6-month loans may be recharged by bringing books to C.rculatio^^^^ 
 Renewals and recharges may be made 4 days prior to due dote 
 
 DUE AS STAMPED BE 
 
 LOW 
 
 
 -^^^-^ 1 :07i 
 
 f^AY 2 7 1979 
 
 m\ V 
 
 gAOli <^^ 
 
 jl£i 
 
 EECCIR. 0ECO3'82 
 
 nr 
 
 1^ 
 
 i^498& 
 
 
 nci .Q^4aai. 
 
 'OV 20 ]■ 
 
 R i:cciPDCC15l9B4 j 
 
 FVZWW^ 
 
 .Sia ^- * -i 
 
 FORM NO. DD 6, 
 
 UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA, BERKELEY 
 BERKELEY, CA 94720 ^ 
 
GENERAL LIBRARY - U.C. BERKELEY 
 
 BDDDfl77272